Перевод: со всех языков на английский

с английского на все языки

iii 357

Толкование Перевод

1 характерная точка после взлёта

характерная точка после взлёта

Точка в пределах этапа взлёта и начального набора высоты, до достижения которой способность вертолёта продолжать безопасный полёт с одним неработающим двигателем не обеспечивается и может потребоваться вынужденная посадка.

Примечание. Характерные точки применяются только в отношении вертолётов, выполняющих операции в соответствии с летно-техническими характеристиками класса 2.

defined point after take-off

The point, within the take-off and initial climb phase, before which the helicopter’s ability to continue the flight safely, with one engine inoperative, is not assured and a forced landing may be required.

Note.— Defined points apply to helicopters operating in performance Class 2 only.

Official definition modified by Amdt 12 to An 6/III (2007).

Русско-английский словарь международной организации гражданской авиации > характерная точка после взлёта
2 útan

adv.; see útan.

* * *

[Ulf. ûtana = ἔξωθεν], from without, from outside; gengu þeir útan brygginna, they went up by the pier (from the sea), Fms. ii. 281; ok er þeir sóttu út á fjörðinn, þá réru útan í móti þeim Rögnvaldr, then R. rowed towards them, coming from the outward, Eg. 386; skjóta útan báti, to put out a boat, Nj. 272; fyrir útan (with acc.), outside of a thing, opp. to fyrir innan, 271; útan at Hafslæk, Eg. 711; Strandmaðr útan, a man from the Out-Strand, Sturl. ii. 205; útan ór Þrándheimi, Fms. i. 36.

2. útan denoted the coming from without, of a voyage from Iceland to Norway, for to the Norse traders Iceland was an outlying country; also of a journey from Greenland to Iceland, Grág. i. 211; but the Icelanders also soon came to use it of going out of their own land; ferja e-n útan, fara útan, to go abroad, i. e. from Iceland, passim; fara útan, to go abroad, Grág. i. 99, 181, Nj. 94, Eg. 196, Ld. 230; spurði Þórarinn Glúm hvárt hann ætlaði útan sem hann var vanr, Th. asked G. if he intended to go abroad as he was wont, Nj. 22; meðan hann væri útan, whilst he was abroad, 4; þá var Valgarðr útan, faðir hans, 72, Ld. 254, passim (cp. út): then of other far countries, koma útan af Jórsalaheimi, Fms. vii. 74; útan af Africa, Ver. 51.

II. without motion, outside; útan á síðuna, Hkr. i. 239; útan ok sunnan undir eldhúsinu stóð dyngja, outside, towards the south, Gísl. 15; hón séri því um gammann bæði útan ok innan, both outside and inside, Fms. i. 9; jamt útan sem innan, Grág. i. 392, Greg. 19; þar útan um liggr inn djúpi sjár, Edda; lagðir í kring útan um, Eg. 486; jörðin er kringlótt útan, Edda; poki um útan, with a poke about it outside, wrapped in a poke, Ld. 188; skáli súðþaktr útan, Nj. 114.

III. conj. except, besides (Dan. uden); verðr fátt um kveðjur, útan þeir leggja skip saman, except that they …, Fms. x. 205; eigi skal hann, útan ( but) keypti, Gþl. 538; útan heldr, but rather, Stj. 10; útan eigi, 15; engi, útan synir Tosta, Hkr. iii. 170; engi hlutr útan sá einn, Fms. ii. 38: of whole sentences, útan þat skildi, at …, with that exception that, i. 21; fríðr at yfirlitum, útan eygðr var hann mjök, fine-looking, but that he had goggle eyes, Fas. iii. 298; fjögur ásauðarkúgildi, útan hann leysti þá þegar eitt í kosti, Dipl. v. 7; unless, kveðsk eigi við þeim vanbúinn, útan þeir sviki hann, Korm. 202, Fms. vi. 70.

2. without, with acc.; Scot. but, as in the motto of the Macphersons, ‘touch not the cat but the glove;’ útan alla prýði, Stj. 10; útan starf ok erviði, 38; útan frænda ráð, Hkr. i. 232; útan leyfi konungs, Gþl. 115; útan konungs rétt ok aðildar-manna, Orkn. 212; útan aðrar lögligar pínur, H. E. i. 478: gen., útan sætta, Nj. 250, 255; útan allrar saurganar, K. Á. 104; útan orlofs, Jb. 285.

3. outside of; útan kirkjugarðs, N. G. L. i. 352; útan Paradísar, K. Á. 104; útan arkarinnar, Stj.; útan borðs, héraðs, brautar, see B.

4. fyrir útan, outside, off, beyond, with acc.; fyrir útan boðan, Nj. 124; fyrir útan Mön, 271; fyrir útan Þjórsá, Landn. 299, Fms. x. 114; fyrir útan haf, Ver. 39; bar vápna-burð fyrir útan þat skip, Fms. vii. 232; fyrir útan rekkju hennar, Grág. i. 371; vera fyrir útan bardaga, Fms. vi. 137; fyrir útan silfr, gull, except, Grág. i. 397; Sks. 258, Fms. xi. 394, x. 403; fyrir útan leyfi, Sks. 548; fyrir útan allar flærðir, 358; fyrir smala-för útan, except, Grág. i. 147; fyrir þat útan, 139; þar fyrir útan (Dan. desforuden), Fms. iii. 44: as adverb, svá at af gengu nafarnar fyrir útan, Eb. 118; þá menn er land eigu fyrir útan, Grág. (Kb.) ii. 80.

B. In COMPDS, prefixed to gen.: útan-borðs, [Dan. udenbords], overboard, Sturl. i. 118, Fms. vii. 202, v. l. útan-borgar, out of town, Mar., Blas. 50, Fms. xi. 160. útan-bókar, without book; kunna, læra ú., by rote. útan-brautar, out of the way, left in the cold, Bs. i. 728, MS. 625. 189. útan-bæjar, outside the town, Arons S. (Bs. i. 517). útan-fjarðar, outside the firth, Vm. 165, N. G. L. i. 174. útan-fjórðungs, outside the quarter, Grág. i. 165: útanfjórðungs-maðr, m. a person living outside the quarter, Grág. i. 96. útan-fótar (opp. to innan-fótar), on the outside of the foot (leg), Nj. 97, Fas. iii. 357. útan-garða, outside the yard (house), Grág. ii. 222, 233, Fsm. 1. útan-garðs, outside the fence, Grág. i. 82, 448, ii. 263, N. G. L. i. 42: outside the farm, Ám. 6, 26. útan-gátta, out-of-doors, Stj. 436. útan-hafnarfat, an outer cloth. útan.-hafs, beyond the sea, Stj. 93. útan-héraðs, outside the district, Js. 92: útanhéraðs-maðr (- strákr), m. a man not belonging to the county, Ld. 228, 272, Bs. i. 627. útan-hrepps, outside the Rape, Grág. i. 293, 447: útanhrepps-maðr, m. an outsitter, Grág. i. 448, K. Þ. K. útan-lands and útan-lendis, abroad, Eg. 185, 195, 691, Hkr. ii. 114, Fms. iii. 118, vi. 233, vii. 121: útanlands-maðr, m. a foreigner, Grág. i. 224, ii. 405: útanlands-siðir, m. pl. outlandish, foreign manners, Fms. vii. 171. útan-lærs, outside the thigh, Eg. 298. útan-sóknar, out of the parish, N. G. L.: útansóknar-maðr, m. a man not of the parish, H. E. i. 483. útan-stafs, outside the border; eignir þær er ú. eru kallaðar ok í almenningum eru, N. G. L. i. 125. útan-steins, outside the stone, Fas. i. 514. útan-sveitar, out of the sveit: útansveitar-maðr, m. an alien to the sveit, Fs. útan-þinga, outside the parish, Pm. 47. útan-þings, outside the þing (the place), N. G. L. i. 63: útanþings-maðr, m. a man of another district, Grág. i. 85.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > útan
3 brún-ölvi

adj. a word spelt in different ways, found in about three passages. brúnölr, Bjarn. 62; brúnvolvi, Fb. i. 186; brúnvaulfi, iii. 357; brúnölvi, Fms. xi. 114; brúnölfr, Jómsv. S. 32 (Ed. 1824):—frowning, with a wolfish brow, look, [from brún and úlfr, a wolf.]

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > brún-ölvi
4 LERKA

(að), v. to lace tight (hosur lerkaðar at beini); fig., lerkaðr, bruised, contused (l. af höggum).

* * *

að, [Scot. lerk], to lace tight; var höttrinn lerkaðr um hálsinn, Landn. 147; lerka ermar at öxl … drambhostir lerkaðar at beini, Fms. vi. 440: metaph. to chastise [cp. North. E. to lace], lerkandi sína sál, Mar.; hann lerkaði sinn líkam með föstum, Thom.:—part. lerkaðr, bruised, contused; blár ok lerkaðr af stórum höggum, Fas. iii. 357: in mod. usage feeling as if sore all over the body.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > LERKA
5 ξεστίον

ξεστίον, τό,

A = ξέστης I, Ostr.Bodl. iii 357, Orib.Fr.28, Aët.6.28 : written ξεστίν Arch.Anz.38
/39.154 ([place name] Antioch).

II = ξέστης 11, Aët.1.138.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ξεστίον
6 FYRIR

for

* * *

prep.

I. with dat.

1) before, in front of (ok vóru fyrir honum borin merkin);

fyrir dyrum, before the door;

2) before one, in one’s presence;

hón nefndist fyrir þeim Gunnhildr, she told them that her name was G.;

3) for;

hann lét ryðja fyrir þeim búðina, he had the booth cleared for them, for their reception;

4) before one, in one’s way;

fjörðr varð fyrir þeim, they came to a fjord;

sitja fyrir e-m, to lie in wait for one;

5) naut. term. before, off;

liggja fyrir bryggjum, to lie off the piers;

fyrir Humru-mynni, off the Humber;

6) before, at the head of, over;

vera fyrir liði, to be over the troops;

vera fyrir máli, to lead the case;

sitja fyrir svörum, to undertake the defence;

7) of time, ago;

fyrir þrem nóttum, three nights ago;

fyrir stundu, a while ago;

fyrir löngu, long ago;

vera fyrir e-u, to forebode (of a dream);

8) before, above, superior to;

Hálfdan svarti var fyrir þeim brœðrum, H. was the foremost of the brothers;

9) denoting disadvantige, harm, suffering;

þú lætr Egil vefja öll mál fyrir þér, thou lettest E. thwart all thy affairs;

tók at eyðast fyrir herm lausa-fé, her money began to fail;

10) denoting obstacle, hindrance;

mikit gøri þer mér fyrir þessu máli, you make this case hard for me;

varð honum lítit fyrir því, it was a small matter for him;

Ásgrími þótti þungt fyrir, A. thought that things looked bad;

11) because of, for;

hon undi sér hvergri fyrir verkjum, she had no rest for pains;

fyrir hræðslu, for fear;

illa fœrt fyrir ísum, scarcely, passable for ice;

gáðu þeir eigi fyrir veiðum at fá heyjanna, because of fishing, they neglected to make hay;

fyrir því at, because, since, as;

12) against;

gæt þín vel fyrir konungi ok hans mönnum, guard thee well against the king and his men;

beiða griða Baldri fyrir alls konar háska, against all kinds of harm;

13) fyrir sér, of oneself;

mikill fyrir sér, strong, powerful;

minnstr fyrir sér, smallest, weakest;

14) denoting manner or quality, with;

hvítr fyrir hærum, while with hoary hair;

II. with acc.

1) before, in front of;

halda fyrir augu sér, to hold (one’s hands) before one’s eyes;

2) before, into the presence of;

stefna e-m fyrir dómstól, before a court;

3) over;

hlaupa fyrir björg, to leap over a precipice;

kasta fyrir borð, to throw overboard;

4) in one’s way, crossing one’s way;

ríða á leið fyrir þá, to ride in their way, so as to meet them;

5) round, off;

sigla fyrir nes, to weather a point;

6) along, all along;

fyrir endilangan Noreg, all along Norway, from one end to the other;

draga ör fyrir odd, to draw the arrow past the point;

7) of time, fyrir dag, before day;

fyrir e-s minni, before one’s memory;

8) for, on behalf of;

vil ek bjóða at fara fyrir þik, I will offer to go for thee, in thy stead;

lögvörn fyrir mál, a lawful defence for a case;

9) for, for the benefit of;

þeir skáru fyrir þá melinn, they cut the lyme-grass for them (the horses);

10) for, instead of, in place of, as;

11) for, because of (vilja Gunnar dauðan fyrir höggit);

fyrir þín orð, for thy words (intercession);

fyrir sína vinsæld, by reason of his popularity;

12) denoting value, price;

fyrir þrjár merkr, for three marks;

fyrir hvern mun, by all means, at any cost;

13) in spite of, against (giptast fyrir ráð e-s);

14) joined with adverbs ending in -an, governing acc. (fyrir austan, vestan, sunnan, norðan, útan innan, framan, handan, ofan, neðan);

fyrir austan, sunnan fjall, east, south of the fell;

fyrir neðan brú, below the bridge;

fyrir handan á, beyond the river;

fyrir innan garð, inside the fence;

III. as adverb or ellipt.

1) ahead, before, opp. to eptir;

þá var eigi hins verra eptir ván, er slíkt fór fyrir, when this came first, preceded;

2) first;

mun ek þar eptir gera sem þér gerit fyrir, I shall do to you according as you do first;

3) at hand, present, to the fore;

föng þau, er fyrir vóru, stores that were at hand;

þar var fyrir fjöldi boðsmanna, a host of guests was already present (before the bride and bridegroom came);

4) e-m verðr e-t fyrir, one takes a certain step, acts so and so;

Kolbeini varð ekki fyrir, K. was at a loss what to do;

e-t mælist vel (illa) fyrir, a thing is well (ill) spoken or reported of (kvæðit mæltist vel fyrir).

* * *

prep., in the Editions spelt differently; in MSS. this word is usually abbreviated either  (i. e. firir), or Ꝼ̆, fur͛, fvr͛ (i. e. fyrir); in some MSS. it is idiomatically spelt with i, fir͛, e. g. Arna-Magn. 382 (Bs. i. 263 sqq.); and even in the old Miracle-book Arna-Magn. 645 (Bs. i. 333 sqq.), just as ifir is written for yfir ( over); in a few MSS. it is written as a monosyllable fyr, e. g. D. I. i. 475, Mork. passim; in Kb. (Sæm.-Edda) occurs fyr telia, Vsp. I; fyr norðan, 36; fyr dyrum, Gm. 22; fyr vestan ver, Hkv. 2. 8; in other places as a dissyll. fyrir, e. g. Hm. 56, Gm. 54, Skm. 34, Ls. 15, Am. 64, Hkv. 2. 2, 19 (quoted from Bugge’s edition, see his preface, p. xvi); fyr and fyrir stand to one another in the same relation as ept to eptir, und to undir, of ( super) to yfir: this monosyllabic form is obsolete, save in the compds, where ‘for-’ is more common than ‘fyrir-;’ in some cases both forms are used, e. g. for-dæming and fyrir-dæming; in others only one, but without any fixed rule: again, the forms fyri, fyre, or fire, which are often used in Edd., are just as wrong, as if one were to say epti, undi, yfi; yet this spelling is found now and then in MSS., as, fyre, Ó. H. (facsimile); fire, Grág. Sb. ii. 288 (also facsimile): the particles í and á are sometimes added, í fur, Fms. iv. 137; í fyrir, passim; á fur, Haustl. 1. [Ulf. faur and faura; A. S. fore and for; Engl. for and fore-; Germ. für and vor; Dan. for; Swed. för; Gr. προ-; Lat. pro, prae.]

WITH DAT., chiefly without the notion of movement.

A. LOCAL:

I. before, in front of; fyrir dyrum, before the doors, at the doors, Nj. 14, Vsp. 53, Hm. 69, Edda 130; niðr f. smiðju-dyrum, Eg. 142:—ahead, úti fyrir búðinni, Nj. 181; kómusk sauðirnir upp á fjallit f. þeim, ahead of them, 27; vóru fyrir honum borin merkin, the banner was borne before him, 274; göra orð fyrir sér, to send word before one, Fms. vii. 207, Hkr. iii. 335 (Ó. H. 201, l. c., frá sér):—also denoting direction, niðri í eldinum f. sér, beneath in the fire before them, Nj. 204; þeir sá f. sér bæ mikinn, they saw before them a great building, i. e. they came to a great house, Eg. 546; öðrum f. sér ( in front) en öðrum á bak sér, Grág. i. 5.

2. before one, before one’s face, in one’s presence; úhelgaða ek Otkel f. búum, before the neighbours, Nj. 87; lýsi ek f. búum fimm, 218; lýsa e-u ( to proclaim) f. e-m, Ld. 8; hann hermdi boð öll f. Gizuri, Nj. 78; hón nefndisk f. þeim Gunnhildr, told them that her name was G., Fms. i. 8; kæra e-t f. e-m, Ó. H. 60; slíkar fortölur hafði hann f. þeim, Nj. 200; the saying, því læra börnin málið að það er f. þeim haft, bairns learn to speak because it is done before them, i. e. because they hear it; hafa gott (íllt) f. e-m, to give a good (bad) example, e. g. in the presence of children; lifa vel f. Guði, to live well before God, 623. 29; stór ábyrgðar-hluti f. Guði, Nj. 199; sem þeir sjá réttast f. Guði, Grág. i. (pref.); fyrir öllum þeim, Hom. 89; á laun f. öðrum mönnum, hidden from other men, unknown to them, Grág. i. 337, Jb. 378; nú skaltú vera vin minn mikill f. húsfreyju minni, i. e. when you talk to my wife, Nj. 265; fyrir Drottni, before the Lord, Merl. 2. 78.

3. denoting reception of guests, visitors; hann lét ryðja f. þeim búðina, he had the room cleared for them, for their reception, Nj. 228; Valhöll ryðja fyr vegnu fólki, i. e. to clear Valhalla for slain folk, Em. I; ryðja vígvöll f. vegundum, Nj. 212; ljúka upp f. e-m, to open the door for one, Fms. xi. 323, Stj. 5; rýma pallinn f. þeim, Eg. 304; hann lét göra eld f. þeim, he had a fire made for them, 204; þeir görðu eld. f. sér, Fms. xi. 63; … veizlur þar sem fyrir honum var búit, banquets that were ready for him, Eg. 45.

II. before one, in one’s way; þar er díki varð f. þeim, Eg. 530; á (fjörðr) varð f. þeim, a river, fjord, was before them, i. e. they came to it, 133, 161; at verða eigi f. liði yðru, 51; maðr sá varð f. Vindum, that man was overtaken by the V., Hkr. iii. 363; þeirra manna er f. honum urðu, Eg. 92.

2. sitja f. e-m, to lie in wait for one, Ld. 218, Nj. 107; lá f. henni í skóginum, Edda (pref.); sitja f. rekum, to sit watching for wrecks, Eg. 136 (fyrir-sát).

3. ellipt., menn urðu at gæta sín er f. urðu, Nj. 100; Egill var þar f. í runninum, E. was before (them), lay in ambush, Eg. 378; hafði sá bana er f. varð, who was before (the arrow), i. e. he was hit, Nj. 8.

4. verða f. e-u, to be hit, taken, suffer from a thing; ef hann verðr f. drepi, if he be struck, Grág. ii. 19; verða f. áverka, to be wounded, suffer injury, Ld. 140; verða f. reiði konungs, to fall into disgrace with the king, Eg. 226; verða f. ósköpum, to become the victim of a spell, spell-bound, Fas. i. 130; sitja f. hvers manns ámæli, to be the object of all men’s blame, Nj. 71; vera eigi f. sönnu hafðr, to be unjustly charged with a thing, to be innocent.

III. a naut. term, before, off; liggja f. bryggjum, to lie off the pier, Ld. 166; skip fljóta f. strengjum, Sks. 116; þeir lágu f. bænum, they lay off the town, Bs. i. 18; liggja úti f. Jótlands-síðu, off Jutland, Eg. 261; hann druknaði f. Jaðri, off the J., Fms. i. II; þeir kómu at honum f. Sjólandi, off Zealand, x. 394; hafa úti leiðangr f. landi, Hkr. i. 301; f. Humru-minni, off the Humber, Orkn. 338, cp. Km. 3, 8, 9, 13, 19, 21; fyrir Nesjum, off the Ness, Vellekla; fyrir Tungum, Sighvat; fyrir Spáni, off Spain, Orkn. 356.

IV. before, at the head of, denoting leadership; smalamaðr f. búi föður síns, Ver. 26 (of king David); vera f. liði, to be over the troops, Eg. 292, Nj. 7; vera f. máli, to lead the case, Band. 8; vera forstjóri f. búi, to be steward over the household, Eg. 52; ráða f. landi, ríki, etc., to rule, govern, Ó H. 33, Nj. 5; hverr f. eldinum réði, who was the ringleader of the fire, Eg. 239; ráða f. e-u, to rule, manage a thing, passim: the phrase, sitja f. svörum, to respond on one’s behalf, Ölk. 36, Band. 12; hafa svör f. e-m, to be the chief spokesman, Fms. x. 101, Dipl. v. 26.

V. special usages; friða f. e-m, to make peace for one, Fms. vii. 16, Bs. i. 65; bæta f. e-m, to make things good for one, Hom. 109; túlka, vera túlkr, flytja (etc.) f. e-m, to plead for one, Fms. iii. 33, Nj. 128,—also spilla f. e-m, to disparage one, Eg. 255; haga, ætla f. e-u, to manage, arrange for one, Ld. 208, Sturl. i. 14, Boll. 356; rífka ráð f. e-m, to better one’s condition, Nj. 21; ráða heiman-fylgju ok tilgjöf f. frændkonu sinni, Js. 58; standa f. manni, to stand before, shield a man, stand between him and his enemy, Eg. 357, Grág. ii. 13; vera skjöldr f. e-m, 655 xxxii. 4; hafa kostnað f. e-u, to have the expences for a thing, Ld. 14; vinna f. e-m, to support one by one’s work, Sks. 251; starfa f. fé sínu, to manage one’s money, Ld. 166; hyggja f. e-u, to take heed for a thing, Nj. 109; hyggja f. sér, Fs. 5; hafa forsjá f. e-m, to provide for one, Ld. 186; sjá f. e-u, to see after, Eg. 118, Landn, 152; sjá þú nokkut ráð f. mér, Nj. 20: ironic. to put at rest, Háv. 40: ellipt., sjá vel f., to provide well for, Nj. 102.

B. TEMP. ago; fyrir þrem nóttum, three nights ago; fyrir stundu, a while ago, Nj. 80; fyrir litlu, a little while ago, Fms. i. 76, Ld. 134; fyrir skömmu, a sbort while ago; fyrir löngu, a long while ago, Nj. 260, Fms. i. 50; fyrir öndverðu, from the beginning, Grág. i. 80, ii. 323, 394, Finnb. 342; fyrir þeim, before they were born, Fms. i. 57.

2. the phrase, vera f. e-u, to forebode; vera f. stórfundum, Nj. 107, 277; þat hygg ek vera munu f. siða-skipti, Fms. xi. 12; þessi draumr mun vera f. kvámu nökkurs manns, vii. 163; dreyma draum f. e-u, 8; fyrir tiðendum, ii. 65:—spá f. e-m, to ‘spae’ before, prophecy to one, Nj. 171.

C. METAPH.:

I. before, above; þóttu þeir þar f. öllum ungum mönnum, Dropl. 7; þykkisk hann mjök f. öðrum mönnum, Ld. 38; ver f. hirðmönnum, be first among my herdsmen, Eg. 65; Hálfdan svarti var f. þeim bræðrum, H. was the foremost of the brothers, Fms. i. 4; þorgrímr var f. sonum Önundar, Grett. 87; var Haraldr mest f. þeim at virðingu, Fms. i. 47.

II. denoting help, assistance; haun skal rétta vættið f. þeim, Grág. i. 45 (vide above A. IV and V).

2. the following seem to be Latinisms, láta lífit f. heilagri Kristni, to give up one’s life for holy Christianity, = Lat. pro, Fms. vii. 172; ganga undir píslir fyrir Guðs nafni, Blas. 38; gjalda önd mína f. önd þinni, Johann. 17; gefa gjöf f. sál sinni ( pro animâ suâ), H. E. i. 466; fyrir mér ok minni sál, Dipl. iv. 8; færa Guði fórnir f. e-m, 656 A; heita f. e-m, biðja f. e-m, to make a vow, pray for one (orare pro), Fms. iii. 48, Bs. i. 70; biðja f. mönnum, to intercede for, 19, Fms. xi. 287: even with a double construction, biðja f. stað sinn (acc., which is vernacular) ok heilagri kirkju (dat., which is a Latinism), x. 127.

III. denoting disadvantage, harm, suffering; þú lætr Egil vefja öll mál fyrir þér, thou lettest Egil thwart all thy affairs, Eg. 249; únýtir hann þá málit fyrir sér, then he ruins his own case, Grág. i. 36, Dropl. 14, 16; Manverjar rufu safnaðinn f. Þorkatli, the Manxmen broke up the assembly, i. e. forsook Thorkel, Fms. ix. 422; kom upp grátr f. henni, she burst into tears, 477; taka fé f. öðrum, to take another’s money, N. G. L. i. 20; knörr þann er konungr lét taka fyrir Þórólfi, Landn. 56; ef hross verðr tekit f. honum, if a horse of his be taken, Grág. i. 436; hann tók upp fé fyrir öllum, he seized property for them all, Ó. H. 60; e-t ferr ílla f. e-m, a thing turns out ill for one; svá fór f. Ólófu, so it came to pass for O., Vígl. 18; loka dyrr f. e-m, to lock the door in one’s face, Edda 21: þeir hafa eigi þessa menn f. yðr drepit, heldr f. yðrar sakir þessi víg vegit, i. e. they have not harmed you, but rather done you a service in slaying those men, Fbr. 33; tók at eyðask f. henni lausa-fé, her money began to fail, Nj. 29; rak á f. þeim storma ok stríðviðri, they were overtaken by gales and bad weather, Vígl. 27; Víglundr rak út knöttinn f. Jökli, V. drove the ball for J., i. e. so that he had to run after it, 24; sá er skar tygil f. Þóri, he who cut Thor’s line, Bragi; sverð brast f. mér, my sword broke, Korm. 98 (in a verse); brjóta e-t f. e-m, to break a thing for one, Bs. i. 15 (in a verse); Valgarðr braut krossa fyrir Merði ok öll heilög tákn, Nj. 167; árin brotnaði f. honum, his oar broke; allar kýrnar drápust fyrir honum, all his cows died.

2. denoting difficulty, hindrance; sitja f. sæmd e-s, to sit between oneself and one’s honour, i. e. to hinder one’s doing well, Sturl. 87; mikit göri þér mér f. þessu máli, you make this case sore for me, Eb. 124; þér er mikit f. máli, thy case stands ill, Fms. v. 325; ekki er Guði f. því, it is easy for God to do, 656 B. 9; varð honum lítið f. því, it was a small matter for him, he did it easily, Grett. III; mér er minna f. því, it is easier for me, Am. 60; þykkja mikit f. e-u, to be much grieved for a thing, do it unwillingly, Nj. 77; Icel. also say, þykja fyrir (ellipt.), to feel hurt, be displeased:—ellipt., er þeim lítið fyrir at villa járnburð þenna, it is a small matter for them to spoil this ordeal, Ó. H. 140; sem sér muni lítið f. at veiða Gunnar, Nj. 113; fast mun f. vera, it will be fast-fixed before (one), hard to move, Ld. 154; Ásgrími þótti þungt f., A. thought that things looked sad (heavy), Nj. 185; hann var lengi f., he was long about it, Fms. x. 205; hann var lengi f. ok kvað eigi nei við, he was cross and said not downright no, Þorf. Karl. 388.

IV. in a causal sense, for, because of, Lat. per, pro; sofa ek né mákat fugls jarmi fyrir, I cannot sleep for the shrill cry of birds, Edda 16 (in a verse); hon undi sér hvergi f. verkjum, she had no rest for pains, Bjarn. 69; fyrir gráti, tárum, = Lat. prae lacrymis; fyrir harmi, for sorrow; f. hlátri, for laughter, as in Engl.; þeir æddust f. einni konu, they went mad for the sake of one woman, Sól. 11; ílla fært f. ísum, scarce passable for ice, Fms. xi. 360; hætt var at sitja útar f. Miðgarðs-ormi, Edda 35; hann var lítt gengr f. sárinu, he could hardly walk for the wound, Fbr. 178; fyrir hræðslu, for fear, Hbl. 26; heptisk vegrinn f. þeim meinvættum sem …, Fs. 4; gáðu þeir eigi f. veiðum at fá heyjanna, because of fishing they took no care to make hay, Landn. 30; fyrir riki konungs, for the king’s power, Eg. 67, 117; fyrir ofríki manna, Grág. i. 68; fyrir hví, for why? Eluc. 4; fyrir hví þeir væri þar, Eg. 375; fyrir því, at …, for that, because, Edda 35, Fms. i. 22, vii. 330, Ld. 104; en fyrir því nú at, now since, Skálda 171; nú fyrir því at, id., 169: the phrase, fyrir sökum, for the sake of, because of, passim; vide sök.

V. by, by the force of; öxlin gékk ór liði fyrir högginu, the shoulder was disjointed by the force of the stroke, Háv. 52.

2. denoting contest; falla f. e-m, to fall before one, i. e. fighting against one, Fms. i. 7, iv. 9, x. 196; verða halloki f. e-m, to be overcome in fighting one, Ld. 146; látask f. e-m, to perish by one, Eb. 34; hafa bana f. e-m, to be slain by one, Nj. 43; þeir kváðu fá fúnað hafa f. honum, 263; mæddisk hann f. þeim, he lost his breath in fighting them, Eg. 192; láta ríki f. e-m, to lose the kingdom before another, i. e. so that the latter gains it, 264; láta lausar eignir mínar f. þér, 505; láta hlut sinn f. e-m, Fs. 47; standask f. e-m, to stand one’s ground before one, Edda (pref.); hugðisk hann falla mundu f. sjóninni einni saman, that he would sink before his glance, 28, Hým. 12; halda hlut f. e-m, Ld. 54; halda frið ok frelsi f. várum óvinum, Fms. viii. 219; fara mun ek sem ek hefi áðr ætlað f. þínum draum ( thy dream notwithstanding), Ld. 216; þér farit hvárt er þér vilit f. mér, you go wherever you like for me, so far as I am concerted, Fær. 37; halda vöku f. sér, to keep oneself awake, Fms. i. 216.

β. with verbs, flýja, hlaupa, renna, stökkva f. e-m, to fly, leap, run before one, i. e. to be pursued, Bs. i. 774, Grág. ii. 359; at hann rynni f. þrælum hans, Ld. 64; fyrir þessum úfriði stökk Þangbrandr til Noregs, 180; skyldi hann ganga ór á f. Hofsmönnum, Landn. 178; ganga f. e-u, to give way before, yield to a thing, Fms. i. 305, x. 292; vægja f. e-m, to yield to one, give way, Eg. 21, 187, Nj. 57, Ld. 234.

VI. against; verja land f. e-m, Eg. 32; verja landit f. Dönum ok öðrum víkingum, Fms. i. 23; til landvarnar f. víkingum, Eg. 260; landvarnar-maðr f. Norðmönnum, Fms. vi. 295; gæta brúarinnar f. bergrisum, Edda 17; gæt þín vel f. konungi ok hans mönnum, guard thee well against the king and his men, Eg. 113; góð aðstoð f. tröllum ok dvergum, Bárð. 163; beiða Baldri griða f. allskonar háska, Edda 36; auðskæðr f. höggum, Eg. 770.

VII. in the sense of being driven before; fyrir straumi, veðri, vindi, before the stream, wind, weather (forstreymis, forvindis), Grág. ii. 384, Fms. vii. 262; halda f. veðri, to stand before the wind, Róm. 211.

2. rýrt mun verða f. honum smá-mennit, he will have an easy game with the small people, Nj. 94: ellipt., hafði sá bana er f. varð, 8; sprakk f., 16, 91.

VIII. fyrir sér, of oneself, esp. of physical power; mikill f. sér, strong, powerful; lítill f. sér, weak, feeble, Nj. 20, Ísl. ii. 368, Eg. 192; þér munuð kalla mik lítinn mann f. mér, Edda 33; minnstr f. sér, smallest, weakest, Eg. 123; gildr maðr f. sér, Ísl. ii. 322, Fms. ii. 145; herðimaðr mikiil f. sér, a hardy man, Nj. 270; hvat ert þú f. þér, what kind of fellow art thou? Clem. 33; vera einn f. sér, to be a strange fellow, Grett. 79 new Ed.; Icel. also say, göra mikið (lítið) f. sér, to make oneself big ( little).

β. sjóða e-t f. sér, to hesitate, saunter, Nj. 154; mæla f. munni, to talk between one’s teeth, to mutter, Orkn. 248, Nj. 249.

IX. denoting manner or quality; hvítr f. hærum, white with hoary hairs, Fms. vi. 95, Fas. ii. 540; gráir fyrir járnum, grey with steel, of a host in armour, Mag. 5; hjölt hvít f. silfri, a hilt white with silver = richly silvered, Eb. 226.

X. as adverb or ellipt.,

1. ahead, in front, = á undan, Lat. prae, opp. to eptir; þá var eigi hins verra eptir ván, er slíkt fór fyrir, as this came first, preceded, Nj. 34; at einhverr mundi fara heim fyrir, that some one would go home first (to spy), Eg. 580; Egill fór f., E. went in before, id.; at vér ríðim þegar f. í nótt, 283.

β. first; hann stefndi f. málinu, en hann mælti eptir, one pronounced the words first, but the other repeated after him, Nj. 35; mun ek þar eptir göra sem þér gerit f., I shall do to you according as you do first, 90:—temp., sjau nóttum f., seven nights before, Grág. ii. 217.

2. to the fore, at hand, present; þar var fyrir fjöldi boðsmanna, a host of guests was already to the fore, i. e. before the bride and bridegroom came, Nj. 11; úvíst er at vita hvar úvinir sitja á fleti fyrir, Hm. 1; skal þá lögmaðr þar f. vera, he shall be there present, Js. 3; heima í túni fyrir, Fær. 50; þar vóru fyrir Hildiríðar-synir, Eg. 98; var honum allt kunnigt fyrir, he knew all about the localities, 583; þeim ómögum, sem f. eru, who are there already, i. e. in his charge, Grág. i. 286: of things, föng þau er f. vóru, stores that were to the fore, at hand, Eg. 134.

3. fore, opp. to ‘back,’ of clothes; slæður settar f. allt gullknöppum, Eg. 516; bak ok fyrir, back and front, = bak ok brjóst, Mar.

XI. in the phrase, e-m verðr e-t fyrir, a thing is before one, i. e. one takes that and that step, acts so and so in an emergency; nú verðr öðrum þeirra þat f., at hann kveðr, now if the other part alleges, that …, Grág. i. 362; Kolbeini varð ekki f., K. had no resource, i. e. lost his head, Sturl. iii. 285:—the phrase, e-t mælisk vel (ílla) fyrir, a thing is well ( ill) reported of; víg Gunnars spurðisk ok mæltisk ílla fyrir um allar sveitir, Nj. 117, Sturl. ii. 151; mun þat vel f. mælask, people will like it well, Nj. 29, Þórð. 55 new Ed.; ílla mun þat f. mælask at ganga á sættir við frændr sína, Ld. 238; ok er lokit var, mæltisk kvæðit vel f., the people praised the poem, Fms. vii. 113.

XII. in special senses, either as prep. or adv. (vide A. V. above); segja leið f. skipi, to pilot a ship, Eg. 359; segja f. skipi, to say a prayer for a new ship or for any ship going to sea, Bs. i. 774, Fms. x. 480; mæla f. e-u, to dictate, Grág. ii. 266; mæla f. minni, to bring out a toast, vide minni; mæla f. sætt, i. 90; skipa, koma e-u f., to arrange, put right; ætla f. e-u, to make allowance for; trúa e-m f. e-u, to entrust one with; það fer mikið f. e-u (impers.), it is of great compass, bulky; hafa f. e-u, to have trouble with a thing; leita f. sér, to enquire; biðjask f., to say one’s prayers, vide biðja; mæla fyrir, segja f., etc., to order, Nj. 103, Js. 3: of a spell or solemn speaking, hann mælti svá f., at …, Landn. 34; spyrjask f., to enquire, Hkr. ii. 333; búask f., to prepare, make arrangement, Landn. 35, Sks. 551; skipask f., to draw up, Nj. 197; leggjask f., to lie down in despair, Bs. i. 194; spá fyrir, to ‘spae’ before, foretell; þeir menn er spá f. úorðna hluti, Fms. i. 96; segja f., to foretell, 76, Bb. 332; Njáll hefir ok sagt f. um æfi hans, Nj. 102; vita e-t f., to ‘wit’ beforehand, know the future, 98; sjá e-t f., to foresee, 162; ef þat er ætlat f., fore-ordained, id.

WITH ACC., mostly with the notion of movement.

A. LOCAL:

I. before, in front of; fyrir dyrrin, Nj. 198; láta síga brýnn f. brár, Hkv. Hjörv. 19; halda f. augu sér, to hold (one’s hands) before one’s eyes, Nj. 132; leggja sverði fyrir brjóst e-m, to thrust a sword into his breast, 162, Fs. 39.

2. before one, before a court; stefna e-m f. dómstól, Fms. xi. 444; ganga, koma f. e-n, to go, come before one, Fms. i. 15, Eg. 426, Nj. 6, 129, passim; fyrir augu e-s, before one’s eyes, Stj. 611.

3. before, so as to shield; hann kom skildinum f. sik, he put the shield before him, Nj. 97, 115; halda skildi f. e-n, a duelling term, since the seconder had to hold one’s shield, Ísl. ii. 257.

4. joined to adverbs such as fram, aptr, út, inn, ofan, niðr, austr, vestr, suðr, norðr, all denoting direction; fram f., forward; aptr f., backward, etc.; hann reiddi öxina fram f. sik, a stroke forward with the axe, Fms. vii. 91; hann hljóp eigi skemra aptr en fram fyrir sik, Nj. 29; þótti honum hann skjóta brandinum austr til fjallanna f. sik, 195; komask út f. dyrr, to go outside the door, Eg. 206:—draga ofan f. brekku, to drag over the hill, Ld. 220; hrinda f. mel ofan, to thrust one over the gravel bank, Eg. 748; hlaupa f. björg, to leap over a precipice, Eb. 62, Landn. 36; elta e-n f. björg, Grág. ii. 34; hlaupa (kasta) f. borð, to leap ( throw) overboard, Fms. i. 178, Hkr. iii. 391, Ld. 226; síga ( to be hauled) niðr f. borgar-vegg, 656 C. 13, Fms. ix. 3; hlaupa niðr f. stafn, Eg. 142; niðr f. skaflinn, Dropl. 25; fyrir brekku, Orkn. 450, Glúm. 395 (in a verse).

II. in one’s way, crossing one’s way; þeir stefndu f. þá, Fms. ix. 475; ríða á leið f. þá, to ride in their way, so as to meet them, Boll. 348; hlaupa ofan f. þá, Nj. 153; vóru allt komin f. hann bréf, letters were come before him, in his way, Fms. vii. 207; þeir felldu brota f. hann, viz. they felled trees before him, so as to stop him, viii. 60, ix. 357; leggja bann f. skip, to lay an embargo on a ship, Ld. 166.

III. round, off a point; fyrir nesit, Nj. 44; út f. Holm, out past the Holm, Fms. vii. 356: esp. as a naut. term, off a point on the shore, sigla f. England, Norðyrnbraland, Þrasnes, Spán, to sail by the coast of, stand off England, Northumberland, … Spain, Orkn. 338, 340, 342, 354; fyrir Yrjar, Fms. vii. (in a verse); fyrir Siggju, Aumar, Lista, Edda 91 (in a verse); er hann kom f. Elfina, when be came off the Gotha, Eg. 80; leggja land f. skut, to lay the land clear of the stern, i. e. to pass it, Edda l. c.; göra frið f. land sitt, to pacify the land from one end to another, Ld. 28; fyrir uppsprettu árinnar, to come to ( round) the sources of the river, Fms. iii. 183; fyrir garðs-enda, Grág. ii. 263; girða f. nes, to make a wall across the ness, block it up, cp. Lat. praesepire, praemunire, etc., Grág. ii. 263; so also binda f. op, poka, Lat. praeligare, praestringere; hlaða f. gat, holu, to stop a hole, opening; greri f. stúfinn, the stump (of the arm or leg) was healed, closed, Nj. 275; skjóta slagbrandi f. dyrr, to shoot a bolt before the door, to bar it, Dropl. 29; láta loku (lás) f. hurð, to lock a door, Gísl. 28; setja innsigli f. bréf, to set a seal to a letter, Dipl. i. 3: ellipt., setr hón þar lás fyrir, Ld. 42, Bs. i. 512.

2. along, all along; f. endilanga Danmörk, f. endilangan Noreg, all along Denmark, Norway, from one end to the other, Fms. iv. 319, xi. 91, Grett. 97:—öx álnar f. munn, an axe with an ell-long edge, Ld. 276; draga ör f. ödd, to draw the arrow past the point, an archer’s term, Fms. ii. 321.

IV. with verbs, fyrir ván komit, one is come past hope, all hope is gone, Sturl. i. 44, Hrafn. 13, Fms. ii. 131; taka f. munn e-m, to stop one’s mouth; taka f. háls, kverkar, e-m, to seize one by the throat, etc.; taka mál f. munn e-m, ‘verba alicujus praeripere,’ to take the word out of one’s mouth, xi. 12; taka f. hendr e-m, to seize one’s hands, stop one in doing a thing, Eb. 124; mod., taka fram f. hendrnar á e-m.

B. TEMP.: fyrir dag, before day, Eg. 80; f. miðjan dag, Ld. 14; f. sól, before sunrise, 268; f. sólar-lag, before sunset; f. miðjan aptan, Nj. 192; f. náttmál, 197; f. óttu, Sighvat; f. þinglausnir, Ölk. 37; f. Jól, Nj. 269; f. fardaga, Grág. ii. 341; viku f. sumar, 244; f. mitt sumar, Nj. 138; litlu f. vetr, Eg. 159; f. vetrnætr, Grág. ii. 217; f. e-s minni, before one’s memory, Íb. 16.

C. METAPH.:

I. above, before; hann hafdi mest fyrir aðra konunga hraustleikinn, Fms. x. 372.

II. for, on behalf of; vil ek bjóða at fara f. þik, I will go for thee, in thy stead, Nj. 77; ganga í skuld f. e-n, Grág. i. 283; Egill drakk … ok svá f. Ölvi, Eg. 210; kaupa e-t f. e-n, Nj. 157; gjalda gjöld f. e-n, Grág. i. 173; verja, sækja, sakir f. e-n, Eg. 504; hvárr f. sik, each for oneself, Dipl. v. 26; sættisk á öll mál f. Björn, Nj. 266; tók sættir f. Björn, Eg. 168; svara f. e-t, Fms. xi. 444; hafa til varnir f. sik, láta lýrit, lög-vörn koma f.; færa vörn f. sik, etc.; verja, sækja sakir f. sik, and many similar law phrases, Grág. passim; biðja konu f. e-n, to woo a lady for another, Fms. x. 44; fyrir mik, on my behalf, for my part, Gs. 16; lögvörn f. mál, a lawful defence for a case, Nj. 111; hafa til varnar f. sök, to defend a case, Grág. i. 61; halda skiladómi f. e-t, Dipl. iv. 8; festa lög f. e-t, vide festa.

III. in a distributive sense; penning f. mann, a penny per man, K. Þ. K. 88; fyrir nef hvert, per nose = per head, Lv. 89, Fms. i. 153, Ó. H. 141; hve f. marga menn, for how many men, Grág. i. 296; fyrir hverja stiku, for each yard, 497.

IV. for, for the benefit of; brjóta brauð f. hungraða, Hom. 75; þeir skáru f. þá melinn, they cut the straw for them (the horses), Nj. 265; leggja kostnað f. e-n, to defray one’s costs, Grág. i. 341.

V. for, instead of; hann setti sik f. Guð, Edda (pref.); hafa e-n f. Guð (Lat. pro Deo), Stj. 73, Barl. 131; geta, fá, kveðja mann f. sik, to get a man as one’s delegate or substitute, Grág. i. 48 passim; þeir höfðu vargstakka f. brynjur, Fs. 17; manna-höfuð vóru f. kljána, Nj. 275; gagl f. gás ok grís f. gamalt svín, Ó. H. 86; rif stór f. hlunna, Háv. 48; buðkr er f. húslker er hafðr, Vm. 171; auga f. auga, tönn f. tönn, Exod. xxi. 24; skell f. skillinga, Þkv. 32.

VI. because of, for; vilja Gunnar dauðan fyrir höggit, Nj. 92, Fms. v. 162; eigi f. sakleysi, not without ground, i. 302; fyrir hvat (why, for what) stefndi Gunnarr þeim til úhelgi? Nj. 101; ok urðu f. þat sekir, Landn. 323; hafa ámæli f. e-t, Nj. 65, passim.

2. in a good sense, for one’s sake, for one; fyrir þín orð, for thy words, intercession, Ísl. ii. 217; vil ek göra f. þín orð, Ld. 158, Nj. 88; fyrir sína vinsæld, by his popularity, Fms. i. 259: the phrase, fyrir e-s sök, for one’s sake, vide sök: in swearing, a Latinism, fyrir trú mína, by my faith! (so in Old Engl. ‘fore God), Karl. 241; fyrir þitt líf, Stj. 514; ek særi þik f. alla krapta Krists ok manndóm þinn, Nj. 176. VII. for, at, denoting value, price; fyrir þrjár merkr, for three marks, Eg. 714; er sik leysti út f. þrjú hundruð marka, Fms. ix. 421; ganga f. hundrað, to pass or go for a hundred, D. I. i. 316:—also of the thing bought, þú skalt reiða f. hana þrjár merkr, thou shall pay for her three marks, Ld. 30; fyrir þik skulu koma mannhefndir, Nj. 57; bætr f. víg, Ísl. ii. 274; bætr f. mann, Eg. 259, passim; fyrir áverka Þorgeirs kom legorðs-sökin, Nj. 101:—so in the phrase, fyrir hvern mun, by all means, at any cost; fyrir öngan mun, by no means, Fms. i. 9, 157, Gþl. 531:—hafði hverr þeirra mann f. sik, eða tvá …, each slew a man or more for himself, i. e. they sold their lives dearly, Ó. H. 217.

2. ellipt., í staðinn f., instead of, Grág. i. 61; hér vil ek bjóða f. góð boð, Nj. 77; taka umbun f., Fms. vii. 161; svara slíku f. sem …, Boll. 350; þér skulut öngu f. týna nema lífinu, you shall lose nothing less than your head, Nj. 7.

VIII. by means of, by, through; fyrir þat sama orð, Stj.; fyrir sína náttúru, Fms. v. 162; fyrir messu-serkinn, iii. 168; fyrir þinn krapt ok frelsis-hönd, Pass. 19. 12; svikin f. orminn, by the serpent, Al. 63,—this use of fyrir seems to be a Latinism, but is very freq. in eccl. writings, esp. after the Reformation, N. T., Pass., Vídal.; fyrir munn Davíðs, through the mouth of David, etc.:—in good old historical writings such instances are few; þeir hlutuðu f. kast ( by dice), Sturl. ii. 159.

IX. in spite of, against; fyrir vilja sinn, N. G. L. i. 151; fyrir vitorð eðr vilja e-s, against one’s will or knowledge, Grág. ii. 348; kvángask (giptask) f. ráð e-s, i. 177, 178, Þiðr. 190; nú fara menn f. bann ( in spite of an embargo) landa á milli, Gþl. 517; hann gaf henni líf f. framkvæmd farar, i. e. although she had not fulfilled her journey ( her vow), Fms. v. 223; fyrir várt lof, vi. 220; fyrir allt þat, in spite of all that, Grett. 80 new Ed.; fyrir ráð fram, heedlessly; fyrir lög fram, vide fram.

X. denoting capacity, in the same sense as ‘at,’ C. II, p. 27, col. 1; scarcely found in old writers (who use ‘at’), but freq. in mod. usage, thus, eigi e-n f. vin, to have one for a friend, in old writers ‘at vin;’ hafa e-n f. fífl, fól, to make sport of one.

2. in old writers some phrases come near to this, e. g. vita f. vist, to know for certain, Dipl. i. 3; vita f. full sannindi, id., ii. 16; hafa f. satt, to take for sooth, believe, Nj. 135; koma f. eitt, to come ( turn) all to one, Lv. 11, Nj. 91, Fms. i. 208; koma f. ekki, to come to naught, be of no avail, Ísl. ii. 215; fyrir hitt mun ganga, it will turn the other way, Nj. 93; fyrir hann er einskis örvænt orðs né verks, from him everything may be expected, Ísl. ii. 326; hafa e-s víti f. varnað, to have another’s faults for warning, Sól. 19.

XI. joined with adverbs ending in -an, fyrir austan, vestan, sunnan, norðan, útan, innan, framan, handan, ofan, neðan, either with a following acc. denoting. direction, thus, fyrir austan, sunnan … fjall, east, south of the fell, i. e. on the eastern, southern side; fyrir neðan brú, below the bridge; fyrir útan fjall = Lat. ultra; fyrir innan fjall = Lat. infra; fyrir handan á, beyond the river; fyrir innan garð, inside the yard; fyrir ofan garð, above, beyond the yard, etc.; vide these adverbs:—used adverb., fyrir sunnan, in the south; fyrir vestan, in the west; fyrir norðan, in the north; fyrir austan, in the east,—current phrases in Icel. to mark the quarters of the country, cp. the ditty in Esp. Árb. year 1530; but not freq. in old writers, who simply say, norðr, suðr …, cp. Kristni S. ch. 1: absol. and adverb., fyrir ofan, uppermost; fyrir handan, on the other side:—fyrir útan e-t, except, save, Anal. 98, Vkv. 8; fyrir fram, vide fram.

☞ For- and fyrir- as prefixes, vide pp. 163–167 and below:

I. fore-, for-, meaning before, above, in the widest sense, local, temp., and metaph. furthering or the like, for-dyri, for-nes, for-ellri, for-beini, etc.

β. before, down, for-brekkis, -bergis, -streymis, -vindis, -viðris, etc.

2. in an intens. sense = before others, very, but not freq.; for-dyld, -góðr, -hagr, -hraustr, -kostuligr, -kuðr, -lítill, -ljótr, -prís, -ríkr, -snjallr.

II. (cp. fyrir, acc., C. IX), in a neg. or priv. sense; a few words occur even in the earliest poems, laws, and writers, e. g. for-að, -átta, -dæða, -nám, -næmi, -sending, -sköp, -verk, -veðja, -viða, -vitni, -ynja, -yrtir; those words at least seem to be original and vernacular: at a later time more words of the same kind crept in:

1. as early as writers of the 13th and 14th centuries, e. g. for-boð, -bænir, -djarfa, -dæma (fyrir-dæma), -taka (fyrir-taka), -þóttr; fyrir-bjóða, -fara, -göra, -koma, -kunna, -líta, -muna, -mæla, -vega, -verða.

2. introduced in some words at the time of the Reformation through Luther’s Bible and German hymns, and still later in many more through Danish, e. g. for-brjóta, -drífa, -láta, -líkast, -merkja, -nema, -sorga, -sóma, -standa, -svara, -þénusta, and several others; many of these, however, are not truly naturalised, being chiefly used in eccl. writings:—it is curious that if the pronoun be placed after the verb (which is the vernacular use in Icel.) the sense is in many cases reversed; thus, fyrir-koma, to destroy, but koma e-u fyrir can only mean to arrange; so also fyrir-mæla, to curse, and mæla fyrir, to speak for; for-bænir, but biðja fyrir e-m, etc.; in the latter case the sense is good and positive, in the former bad and negative; this seems to prove clearly that these compds are due to foreign influence.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > FYRIR
7 σῴζω

σῴζω, with ι wherever ζ follows ω, as σῴζω, EM741.27, and so (written σωιζ-) in Inscrr. and Papyri down to iii B.C., e.g. IG12.625.4, 22.687.35, 1611.378, Isyll.75 (lapis), PCair.Zen.482.17, 532.23 (iii B.C.), Test.Epict. 1.6 (iii/ii B.C.), ([etym.] ἀνα-) IG22.492.13, also in cod. Laur. of S.El. 993, al., but otherwise without it, e.g.

A ἔσωσε IG9(2).257.11
(Thess., v B.C.); but Didym. (and many Hellenistic and later Inscrr. and Papyri) rejected the ι everywhere, v. EMl.c., and on the other hand Inscrr. show σῳς- (always written σωις- ) from v B.C., ἔσῳσεν IG12.1085.5
, 22.1236.6, συνδιασῴσαντες GDI1612.9
(Dyme, iii B.C.), σῴσαι ([ per.] 3sg. opt.) IG5(2).357.152 (Stymphalus, iii B.C.), διέσῳσαν OGI56.18
(Canopus, iii B.C.), cf. PPetr.3p.72 (iii B.C.); σοζ[, i.e. σωζ[, occurs in IG12.590: [tense] fut. σώσω S.Ph. 1391
, Th.1.137, etc.; early [dialect] Att. σωῶ IG12.188.30
: [tense] pf. σέσωκα, also σέσῳκα, v. ἀνασῴζω:— [voice] Med., [tense] fut. σώσομαι E.Ba. 793
, ([etym.] ἐκ-) A.Pers. 360, ([etym.] δια-) X.Cyr.4.2.28: [tense] aor. ἐσωσάμην Ar.Ec. 402
:—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut. σωθήσομαι Th.5.111
, Ar.Nu.77, Hp.Prog.1, etc.: [tense] aor. ἐσώθην Th.1.110
, al., SIG167.37 (Mylasa, iv B.C. ) ( ἐσώσθην only in Hsch.): [tense] pf. σέσωσμαι A.Th.
[ 821 ( 820) ], σέσωσται E.IT 607
, D.56.33, σεσώσμεθα S.Tr.83
, etc.; but σέσωται Pl.Criti. 109d
, cf. 110a, σεσωμένος PCair.Zen.331.8
(iii B.C.); said to be [dialect] Att. by Phot.; διασεσῳμένους is found in IG22.435.11 (after 336 B.C.) and διασεσῳμένοι in PCair.Zen.240.11 (iii B.C.); later σέσῳσται IG12(7).386.25
(Amorgos, iii B.C.).--The foll. forms are found in Hom. and dialects,

1 [tense] pres. part. σώζων Od.5.490
; [ per.] 3sg. ind. or opt. σώζει ([etym.] - οι) Hes.Op. 376 (v.l. for εἴη): [tense] pres. part. [voice] Pass. σωζόμενοι ([etym.] - ομένοισι) Thgn.68, 235 (s.v.l.).

2 from [full] σᾰόω, [ per.] 3sg. σαοῖ Thgn. 868
, Call.Del.22, etc.; [ per.] 3pl. σαοῦσι Tyrt.11.13
; [ per.] 2sg. imper. σάου h.Hom.13.3
, Call.Epigr.35 (as v.l.), etc.: [tense] fut. σαώσω Il.10.44
: [tense] aor. ἐσάωσα 21.611
, Pi.Fr. 231: [tense] aor. inf. [voice] Pass. σαωθῆναι Il.15.503
, Od.10.473; imper. σαωθήτω Il.17.228
; [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 3pl. ἐσάωθεν Od.3.185
: [tense] fut. [voice] Med. σαώσομαι 21.309
.

3 from [full] σάωμι, [dialect] Aeol. [ per.] 2sg. σάως Alc.73
(fort. σάῳς); [ per.] 2sg. imper. σάω Od.13.230
, 17.595, Call. l.c., etc.: σάω as [ per.] 3sg.[tense] impf., Il.16.363, 21.238.

4 from [full] σώω, part. σώοντες Od.9.430
; [dialect] Ion. [tense] impf. σώεσκον Il.8.363
; σώετε, σώεσθαι, A.R.4.197, 2.610.

5 from [full] σόω, subj. σόῃς, -ῃ, -ωσι, Il.9.681, 424, 393 vulg., where Tyrannio ap.Hdn.Gr.2.66 reads σοῷς, σοῷ, σοῶσι; in 9.681 Aristarch. read both σαῷς and σοῷς; the forms σοῷς, σοῷ perh. arise from σαόω, by contraction and 'distraction': but σόωσι from σώωσι acc. to Hdn.Gr.l.c.; Hsch. cites also σόεις, σοῦται as = σώζεις, σώζεται.

6 [dialect] Lacon. [full] σωάδδει· παρατηρεῖ, Hsch.: but also [suff] σχολι-σοΐδδω, [tense] aor. ἀπέσοιξεν· ἀπέσωσεν, Λάκωνες, Id.

7 σωννύω, Dinol.5:—save, keep,

1 of persons, save from death, keep alive, σώοντες ἑταίρους Od.9.430
; ζωοὺς σάω Il.21.238
; ὄτ' ἄσφ' ἀπολλυμένοις σάως Alc.73
, cf. Th.1.91, X.An.3.1.38; πόδες καὶ γοῦνα σ. τινά Il.21.611
; νὺξ στρατὸν ς. 9.78; spare, Od.22.357:—[voice] Pass., to be saved, kept alive, preserved, opp. ἀπολέσθαι, Il.15.503, Od.3.185, etc.; ἀγαπητῶς σεσωσμένους Lys.16.16
; keep a whole skin, escape destruction, οἱ σωθησόμενοι Pl.Tht. 176d
; so in [tense] pres. σωζόμενος, Thgn.68, 235 (s.v.l.); to be healed, recover from sickness, Hp.Coac. 136, Is.1.10 (dub. l.); ὑγιαίνοντες καὶ σωζόμενοι IG22.1028.89
(i B.C.); σώζεο, as a wish, God bless you, farewell, Call.Del. 150, AP5.240 (Paul. Sil.), 9.372; σώζοισθε ib.171 (Pall.); also, save oneself, escape, σώθητι Pl.Cri. 44b
; μόγις or μόλις σῴζεσθαι escape with difficulty, Id.Ep. 332c, D.S.2.48, etc.; χαλεπῶς ς. Thgn.675.

b esp. in NT, of God or Christ, 1 Ep.Cor.1.21, etc.; σ. τὸ ἀπολωλός Ev.Luc.19.10
; σ. τὸν κόσμον Ev.Jo.12.47
:—freq. in [voice] Pass., to be saved or in a state of salvation, Ev.Matt.19.25, etc.; οἱ σῳζόμενοι Ev.Luc.13.23
, Act.Ap.2.47.

2 of things, keep safe, preserve, rare in Hom., σάω μὲν ταῦτα, σάω δ' ἐμέ Od.13.230
; σπέρμα πυρὸς σώζων 5.490
; πόλιν καὶ ἄστυ ς. Il.17.144; σαώσει Ἀργείους καὶ νῆας 10.44
, cf. 9.230: freq. in Trag. and [dialect] Att., σ. φάρμακον S.Tr. 686
; τὰ τόξα Id.Ph. 766
; τὰ σκεύη, παῖδας οἶκον χρήματα, καρπούς, Ar. Pax 730 (anap.), Av. 380 (troch.), 1062 (lyr.); τὰ πατρῷα, τὰ ὑπάρχοντα, Id.Th. 820 (lyr.), Th.1.70; σ. πόλιν preserve the city or the state, Hdt.8.34, A. Th. 749 (lyr.), S.Ant. 1058, Pl.R. 417a, cf. Grg. 512b, etc.; τὰ πράγματα Th.1.74
; τὴν Ἑλλάδα Ar.Lys. 525
(lyr.); τὰς πολιτείας, τὴν δημοκρατίαν, etc., Arist.Pol. 1309b15,36; τόνδε γὰρ [λόγον] σῴζων keeping it secret, A.Pr. 524, cf. S.OC 1530; σ. καιρόν save or recover an opportunity, D.19.6, cf. 23.4:—[voice] Med., keep or preserve for oneself, τὴν εὐλάβειαν S.El. 993
, cf. E.Alc. 146, etc.; αὐτὸς αὑτῷ σ. τι Ar.Ec. 402
, cf.Eq. 1017 (hex.):—[voice] Pass., τὸ ἄπραγμον οὐ σῴζεται is not secure, Th.2.63; ἡ.. πόλις οὐκ ἂν ἐσῴζετο; Ar.Ec. 219; to be preserved or extant, of books, Longin. ap. Porph.Plot.20, Gal.15.705, D.C.70.2.

3 keep, observe, maintain laws, etc., σ. ἐφετμάς A.Eu. 241
; τὸν παρόντα νοῦν Id.Pr. 394
; τοὺς καθεστῶτας νόμους S.Ant. 1114
, cf. Arist.VV 1250b17; τοὺς σοὺς λόγους E.Hel. 1552
; τὸ μόρσιμον ib. 613; τὰ πρὸς τοὺς κατοίκους δίκαια BGU562.19
(ii A.D.); confirm, τὸ τοῦ ποιήσαντος Arist.Mu. 400b24
, cf. Antig.Mir.45 ([voice] Pass.); πρὸς τὸ τὰ φαινόμενα σῴζειν to retain the observed facts, Procl.Hyp.5.10; κατὰ ποσὸν σῴζει τὴν πρὸς τὸ μῶλυ ἐμφέρειαν retains, i.e. does not lack, a certain resemblance to.., Dsc.3.46, cf. 98, Sor.Fasc.8:—[voice] Pass., to be maintained, τοῦ μήκους σῳζομένου Arist.Mete. 386a2
; ἐφ' ᾧ τοῖς θεοῖς τὰ ἱερὰ σωθήσεσθαι PHib.1.77.7
(iii B.C.).

4 keep in mind, remember, E.Hel. 266, Pl. R. 486c: more freq. in [voice] Med., παρῆκα θεσμῶν οὐδέν, ἀλλ' ἐσῳζόμην.. ὅπως δύσνιπτον ἐκ δέλτου γραφήν S.Tr. 682
, cf. El. 1257; μηδ' ἂ ἔμαθε σῴζοιτο Pl.R. 455b
; in full, μνήμην σῴζομαι στρατεύματος E.IA 302
(lyr.), cf. Pl.Grg. 501a, Tht. 163d.

II Constr.:

1 simply c. acc., v. supr.

2 with a sense of motion to a place, bring one safe to, τὸν δ' ἐσάωσεν ἐς ποταμοῦ προχοάς Od.5.452
; ἐς ὅμιλον Il.19.401
; πόλινδε 5.224
, etc.; ἐς οἴκους S.Ph. 311
; εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τὴν ἐπουράνιον 2 Ep.Ti.4.18
:—[voice] Pass., come safe to a place, σωθέντος ἐμεῦ ὀπίσω ἐς οἶκον Hdt.4.97
, cf. 9.104; πρὸς ἤπειρον σεσῶσθαι A.Pers. 737
; δεῦρο E.Ph. 725
; οἴκαδε X.HG1.6.7
; σῴζεσθαι ἐπὶ τὴν ὑμετέρην [χώρην] Hdt.5.98; ἐς δόμους σωθέντ' S.Tr. 611
; σωθῶμεν ἐπὶ θάλατταν X.An. 6.5.20
: c. dat. pers., μόλις ὔμμιν ἐσώθην Theoc.15.4
.

3 σ. τινὰ ἐκ φλοίσβοιο, ἐκ πολέμου, carry off safe, rescue from.., Il.5.469, 11.752; ἐκ ποταμοῖο 21.274
; ἐκ θανάτοιο Od.4.753
; ἐκ πολλῶν πόνων S.El. 1356
; ἀπὸ στρατείας A.Ag. 603
; διὰ δεινῶν πραγμάτων σεσωσμένοι X. An.5.5.8
: c. gen., σώσας ἐχθρῶν χθόνα having rescued it from them, S.Ant. 1162; σῶσαί τινα κακοῦ Id.Ph. 919
; σεαυτὸν νούσου Ath.Mitt. 56.124
([place name] Smyrna); σωθῆναι κακῶν E.Or. 779
.--Both constructions may be combined, σ. τινὰ ἐκ πολέμοιο νῆας ἔπι Il.17.452
; ἐκ π. μετὰ νῆας 12.123
; ἐξ Αἰγίνης δεῦρο Pl.Grg. 511d
.

4 c. acc. et dat. pers., save for another, υἷά τινι Od.4.765
; ἡμῖν τὸν βίον Pl.Prt. 356e
, etc.:— [voice] Pass., σῴζεταί τί τινι Ar. Pax 1022
, X.An.7.7.56.

5 c. inf., [σπονδαὶ] αἵ σε σῴζουσιν θανεῖν which save thee from dying, E.Ph. 600 (troch.).

6 c. part., σῴζεσθαι φεύγοντες by flight, X.Cyr.3.3.51.

7 abs., τὰ σώσοντα what is likely to save, D.6.5; ἡ σῴζουσα [ψῆφος] Luc.Harm.3.

b σώζων, ὁ, Saviour, of a god, JRS14.28 ([place name] Iconium); epith. of Apollo, CR19.368 ([place name] Sizma).

c σῴζουσα, ἡ, = ἀρτεμισία, Ps.-Dsc.3.113.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > σῴζω
8 τε

τε, enclitic Particle, with two main uses (v. infr. A, B).

A as a Conjunction,

I τε.. τε, both.. and, joining single words, phrases, clauses, or sentences, the first τε merely pointing forward to the second, ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Il.1.544
; ἀγαθῶν τε κακῶν τε Hes.Op. 669
; δίψῃ τε λιμῷ τε A.Pers. 491
, cf. S.Aj.34,35, Ar.Ach. 370, 375; τήν τε νῆσον τήν τε ἤπειρον Th.4.8
, cf. Antipho 2.3.3, Pl. R. 373b; λυσόμενός τε θύγατρα, φέρων τ' ἀπερείσι' ἄποινα Il.1.13
; παῖδά τε σοὶ ἀγέμεν Φοίβῳ θ' ἱερὴν ἑκατόμβην ῥέξαι ib. 443; the elements joined by τε.. τε are usu. short in Hom., longer in later Gr., e.g. ἐπειδὴ πρόξενοί τέ εἰσιν Ἀθηναίων καὶ εὐεργέται.., ἔν τε τῇ στήλῃ γέγραπται IG12.103.7
; ἥ τε γὰρ γῆ.. εὔυδρός ἐστι, ποταμοί τε δι' αὐτῆς ῥέουσι Hdt.4.47
; χρὴ.. τούς τε πρεσβυτέρους ὁμοιωθῆναι τοῖς πρὶν ἔργοις, τούς τε νεωτέρους.. μὴ αἰσχῦναι κτλ. Th.4.92, cf. Pl.R. 474c, X.Cyr.1.4.25, Is.1.50; τά τε γὰρ ληφθέντα πάντ' ἂν σῴζοιτο οἵ τ' ἀδικήσαντες κατ' ἀξίαν λάβοιεν τὰ ἐπιτίμια Aen. Tact.16.8, cf. Gp.2.49.1, 12.3.2-3; τούτου γὰρ γενομένου.. τά τε ἐχφόρια Χρυσέρμῳ δυνήσομαι ἀποδοῦναι, ἐγώ τε ἔσομαι παρὰ σοῦ φιλανθρωπίας τετευχώς PEnteux.60.11
(iii B.C.); κλείειν τε τὰ βλέφαρα δεομένων ἐλπιζόντων τε κοιμηθήσεσθαι Gal.16.494
, cf. 495,501; this use is common at all times in οὔτε.. οὔτε, μήτε.. μήτε, εἴτε.. εἴτε (qq.v.); τε may be used three or more times, ἔν τ' ἄρα οἱ φῦ χειρί, ἔπος τ' ἔφατ' ἔκ τ' ὀνόμαζεν Od.15.530
, cf. Il.1.177, 2.58, A.Pr. 89sq., B.17.19sq., Lys. 19.17, X.Cyr.3.3.36:— ἑνδεκάτη τε δυωδεκάτη τε prob. means the eleventh or twelfth, Od.2.374, 4.588:—sts. τε.. τε couples alternatives, ἀπόρως εἶχε δοῦναί τε μὴ δοῦναί τε E.IA56
, cf. Heracl. 153, El. 391; hence we find τε.. ἢ.., Pl.Tht. 143c, Ion 535d; on ἢ (or ἦ) .. τε in Il.2.289 and A.Eu. 524 (lyr.) v. ἦ 1.3.

2 the first clause may be negative, the second affirmative, as ἐκκλησίαν τε οὐκ ἐποίει.., τήν τε πόλιν ἐφύλασσε Th.2.22
; but οὔτε.. τε is more freq., as οὔτε ποσίν εἰμι ταχύς.., γιγνώσκω τε X.Cyr.2.3.6
(v. οὔτε 11.4
); we also find οὐ.. τε.. , as οὐχ ἡσύχαζον.., παρεκάλουν τε τοὺς ξυμμάχους Th.1.67
; and μὴ.. τε.. , as ἵνα μή τι διαφύγῃ ἡμᾶς, εἴ τέ τι βούλει κτλ. Pl.Phd. 95e.

3 τε ( both) sts. corresponds to a following δέ ( and), or τε ( and) to a preceding μέν, e.g.

a τε.. δὲ.. , as κόμισαί τέ με, δὸς δέ μοι ἵππους Il.5.359
, cf. 7.418, S.OC 367, Tr. 285, E.Ph. 1625; ἐσθὰς ἀμφότερόν νιν ἔχεν, ἅ τε.. ἐπιχώριος.., ἀμφὶ δὲ παρδαλέᾳ στέγετο Pi.P.4.80
; διήκουέ τε.., ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ ἐπῄνεσε X.Cyr.4.4.3
; so with ἅμα δὲ καὶ.., ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ.., Th.1.25, Pl.Smp. 186e:—so τε.., ἀτὰρ οὖν καὶ.., Id.Hp.Ma. 295e.

b μὲν.. τε.., ἄνδρα μὲν.., τρεῖς τε κασιγνήτους Il.19.291
-3, cf. Od.22.475-6, Pi.O.6.88, 7.88, A.Th. 924, Ch. 585 (lyr.), S.Ant. 963 (lyr.), E.Heracl. 337 codd., Cyc.41 (lyr.), Ar.Nu. 563(lyr.), Pl.Phdr. 266c, Lg. 927b: v. μέν A. 11.6c.

4 a single τε ( and) joins a word, phrase, or (esp. later) clause or sentence to what precedes, τελευτὴν κεφαλήν τε Pl.Ti. 69a
; θνητὰ ἀθάνατά τε ib.c; Ζεῦ ἄλλοι τε θεοί Il.6.476
; κύνεσσιν οἰωνοῖσί τε πᾶσι 1.5
; ῥίγησέν τ' ἂρ ἔπειτα ἄναξ ἀνδρῶν Ἀγαμέμνων v.l. for δ' ἂρ in 11.254; ἕν τε οὐδὲν κατέστη ἴαμα.., σῶμά τε αὔταρκες ὂν οὐδὲν διεφάνη.., Th.2.51; τά τε ἱερὰ.. νεκρῶν πλέα ἦν.. ib.52; νόμοι τε πάντες ξυνεταράχθησαν ibid.; δάκνει σ' ἀδελφὸς ὅ τε θανὼν ἴσως πατήρ E.El. 242
, cf. 253, 262, al.; εἴς τε τὰς ἄλλας.. ἀθροίζεσθαι Aen.Tact.3.5
; τῶν τε ἀρχόντων.. ib.6, cf. 10.8, al.; ὅ τε γραφεὶς κύκλος.. Archim.Spir.11
Def.7; πρός τε τούτοις φησὶν.. PEnteux.63.18
(iii B.C.); χωρίς τε τούτων Plb.2.56.13
, 61.1, 3.17.7; ταῦτά τ' ἐγίνετο.. Id.2.43.6
, cf. 3.70.4; ἀπαιτούμενός τε ὑπ' ἐμοῦ τὰ ἔρια οὐκ ἀποδίδωσί PEnteux.2.6
, cf. 8.4, al. (iii B.C.); γράψαι Ἀγαθοκλεῖ τῷ ἐπιστάτῃ διασαφῆσαί τε αὐτῷ ib.81.21 (iii B.C.); καθόλου τε.. Arr.Epict.1.19.13
, cf. 2.2.17; ἀταράχους τήν τε δύναμιν ἀκαθαιρέτους Sor.1.21
, cf. 24, al.; ὄξει βαφικῷ στυπτηρίᾳ τε PHolm. 1.4
, cf. Gem.16.6; χρὴ.. λαχάνων ἅπτεσθαι, κοιλίαν τε λύειν Gp.1.12.19
, cf. 2.2.2, al.; this τε may be used any number of times, Od.4.149- 150, 14.75, 158-9, Men.Pk.15,16,20, Hipparch.1.9.8, Act.Ap.2.43,46, 4.13, 14, al.

II τε.. καὶ.. , or τε καὶ.. , both.. and.., where τε points forward to καί, and usu. need not be translated, e.g. Ἀτρείδης τε ἄναξ ἀνδρῶν καὶ δῖος Ἀχιλλεύς Il.1.7
; εἰ δὴ ὁμοῦ πόλεμός τε δαμᾷ καὶ λοιμὸς Ἀχαιούς ib.61; δειλός τε καὶ οὐτιδανὸς καλεοίμην ib. 293; ζωόν τε καὶ ἀρτεμέα 7.308
, cf. 327, 338, al.; τῆς τε γῆς ἐούσης ἐπιτηδέης καὶ τῶν ποταμῶν ἐόντων σφι συμμάχων Hdt.4.47
; βούλεταί τε καὶ ἐπίσταται Th.2.35
; ὁ φύς τε καὶ τραφείς Pl.R. 396c
; βάσιν τε γὰρ πάλιν τὴν αὐτὴν ἔχουσι τὴν ΖΒ καὶ.. Euc.1.47
; sts. the elements joined by τε.. καὶ.. are joined in order to be compared or contrasted rather than simply joined, κάκιστος νῦν τε καὶ πάλαι δοκεῖ S.Ant. 181
; μεσαμβρίη τέ ἐστι καὶ τὸ κάρτα γίνεται ψυχρόν Hdt.4.181
; ἔτυχόν τε ὕσταται ἐξαναχθεῖσαι καί κως κατεῖδον Id.7.194
; ἐπαύσατό τε ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ τὸ κῦμα ἔστρωτο ib. 193; ταὐτὰ.. νῦν τε καὶ τότε Ar.Av. 24
; χωρὶς τό τ' εἰπεῖν πολλὰ καὶ τὰ καίρια S.OC 808
; ὅσον τό τ' ἄρχειν καὶ τὸ δουλεύειν δίχα A.Pr. 927
; sts. (like τε.. τε) even used of alternatives, διάνδιχα μερμήριξεν, ἵππους τε στρέψαι καὶ ἐναντίβιον μαχέσασθαι Il.8.168
; ἐν δίκᾳ τε καὶ παρὰ δίκαν Pi.O.2.16
; θεοῦ τε.. θέλοντος καὶ μὴ θέλοντος A.Th. 427
; πείσας τε.. καὶ μὴ τυχών Th.3.42
:—on οἵ τε ἄλλοι καὶ.. , e.g. τοῖς τε ἄλλοις ἅπασι καὶ Λακεδαιμονίοις Isoc.12.249
, and ἄλλως τε καὶ.. , v. ἄλλος 11.6, ἄλλως 1.3
.

2 in this sense τ' ἠδέ is only [dialect] Ep., σκῆπτρόν τ' ἠδὲ θέμιστας Il.9.99
, cf. 1.400, al.; also τε.., ἰδέ, χαλκόν τε ἰδὲ λόφον 6.469
, cf. 8.162.

3 καὶ.. τε, both.. and.., is occasionally found, as καὶ μητέρα πατέρα τ' E.Alc. 646.

b καὶ.. τε perh. means and.. also in καὶ ναυτικῷ τε ἅμα Th.1.9
; καὶ πρός τε τοὺς Ῥηγίνους Id.6.44
; καὶ αὐτός τε Id.8.68
; v. infr. c. 10.

4 τε.. τε or τε.. καὶ.. sts. join elements which are not syntactically parallel, esp. a part. and a finite verb, ἰοῖσίν τε τιτυσκόμενοι λάεσσί τ' ἔβαλλον (for βάλλοντες) Il.3.80; ἄλλα τε ἐπιφραζόμενος καὶ δὴ καὶ ἐπεπόμφεε Hdt.1.85
; ἀλλῳ τε τρόπῳ πειράζοντες καὶ μηχανὴν προσήγαγον Th.4.100
; τῆς τε ὥρας.. ταύτης οὔσης.., καὶ τὸ χωρίον.. χαλεπὸν ἦν Id.7.47
, cf. 4.85, 8.81, 95.

5 the copulative τε becomes rare in later Gr.; it is found about 340 times in LXX, mostly in the Pentateuch and 1-4 Ma., only 3 times in Ps.; in the NT it is found about 150 times in Act.Ap., 20 times in Ep.Hebr., and very rarely in the other books.

B In [dialect] Ep. (more rarely in other dactylic verse, v. infr. 11) τε stands in general or frequentative statements or in statements of what is well known; such statements are freq. made as justifications of a preceding particular statement or of a preceding exhortation to a particular person or persons; the sense of τε thus approaches that of τοι (cf. τοι and τε in Od.2.276-7, and cf. Il.13.115 with 15.203); although associated with numerous particles and other words of particular types (v. infr.) its meaning remains independent of these and applies to the whole sentence in which it stands: αἶψά τε φυλόπιδος πέλεται κόρος ἀνθρώποισιν Il.19.221
; οὐ γάρ τ' αἶψα θεῶν τρέπεται νόος αἰὲν ἐόντων Od.3.147
; θεοὶ δέ τε πάντα ἴσασιν 4.379
, cf. 5.79, 447, 10.306, 17.485, Il.9.497, 16.688, 17.176, 21.264; ξυνὸς Ἐνυάλιος καί τε κτανέοντα κατέκτα 18.309
, cf. Od.11.537, Il.24.526; ἤ τ' ἔβλητ' ἤ τ' ἔβαλ' ἄλλον 11.410
; οὐ μὲν γάρ τε κακὸν βασιλευέμεν Od.1.392
; οἳ φύλλοισιν ἐοικότες ἄλλοτε μέν τε ζαφλεγέες τελέθουσιν.. ἄλλοτε δὲ.. Il.21.464
; ἄλλος γάρ τ' ἄλλοισιν ἀνὴρ ἐπιτέρπεται ἔργοις Od.14.228
, cf. 8.169, 170, 15.400; τοῦ γάρ τε ξεῖνος μιμνήσκεται ἤματα πάντα, ἀνδρὸς ξεινοδόκου, ὅς κεν φιλότητα παράσχῃ ib.54, cf. 17.322; ῥεχθὲν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω Il.17.32
; παθὼν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω Hes.Op. 218
; αἰεὶ γάρ τε νεώτεροι ἀφραδέουσιν Od. 7.294
; δύσζηλοι γάρ τ' εἰμὲν ἐπὶ χθονὶ φῦλ' ἀνθρώπων ib. 307; τοῦ δέ τε πολλοὶ ἐπαυρίσκοντ' ἄνθρωποι, καί τε πολέας ἐσάωσε Il.13.733
-4; τοῦ μὲν γάρ τε κακοῦ τρέπεται χρὼς ἄλλυδις ἄλλῃ, ἐν δέ τέ οἱ κραδίη στέρνοισι πατάσσει.., πάταγος δέ τε γίγνετ' ὀδόντων ib. 279-83; ὀλίγη δέ τ' ἀνάπνευσις πολέμοιο 18.201
; νέῳ δέ τε πάντ' ἐπέοικεν.. κεῖσθαι 22.71
; κατέλεξεν ἅπαντα κήδε' ὅσ' ἀνθρώποισι πέλει, τῶν ἄστυ ἁλώῃ· ἄνδρας μὲν κτείνουσι, πόλιν δέ τε πῦρ ἀμαθύνει, τέκνα δέ τ' ἄλλοι ἄγουσι, βαθυζώνους τε γυναῖκας 9.592
-4, cf. 22.492, 495, 499; νεμεσσῶμαί γε μὲν οὐδέν· καὶ γάρ τίς τ' ἀλλοῖον ὀδύρεται ἄνδρ' ὀλέσασα.. ἢ Ὀδυσῆ' Od.19.265
; σχέτλιε, καὶ μέν τίς τε χερείονι πείθεθ' ἑταίρῳ.., αὐτὰρ ἐγὼ θεός εἰμι 20.45
, cf. 23.118, Il.2.292, 9.632; νῦν δὲ μνησώμεθα δόρπου· καὶ γάρ τ' ἠΰκομος Νιόβη ἐμνήσατο σίτου κτλ. 24.602 (where a general inference is implied); ὃν Βριάρεων καλέουσι θεοί, ἄνδρες δέ τε πάντες Αἰγαίων' 1.403
, cf. 2.814, 5.306, 10.258, 14.290; sts. of repeated action by particular persons, ἄλλοτε μέν τε γόῳ φρένα τέρπομαι Od.4.102
; οὐ μὰ γὰρ Ἀπόλλωνα Διὶ φίλον, ᾧ τε σύ, Κάλχαν, εὐχόμενος.. θεοπροπίας ἀναφαίνεις Il.1.86
; ἡ δὲ.. μ' αἰεὶ.. νεικεῖ, καί τέ μέ φησι μάχῃ Τρώεσσιν ἀρήγειν ib. 521; μήτηρ γάρ τέ μέ φησι θεά, Θέτις ἀργυρόπεζα, διχθαδίας κῆρας φερέμεν θανάτοιο τέλοσδε 9.410
.

2 in exhortations addressed to an individual, a subsidiary sentence or relative clause in which he is reminded of his special or characteristic sphere of activity is marked by τε, e.g. Ἑρμεία, σοὶ γάρ τε μάλιστά γε φίλτατόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ ἑταιρίσσαι καί τ' ἔκλυες ᾧ κ' ἐθέλῃσθα, βάσκ' ἴθι.. Il.24.334
; Ἀτρεΐδη, σοὶ γάρ τε μάλιστά γε λαὸς Ἀχαιῶν πείσονται μύθοισι.., νῦν δ' ἀπὸ πυρκαϊῆς σκέδασον.. 23.156
; δεῦρο δὴ ὄρσο, γρηῢ.., ἥ τε γυναικῶν δμῳάων σκοπός ἐσσι.., ἔρχεο Od. 22.395
, cf. Il.17.249.

3 similarly in general and frequentative statements consisting of two clauses (one of which may be a relative clause, freq. containing the subj. or opt.), in which the fulfilment of the condition stated in the subsidiary or subordinate clause is declared to be generally or always followed by the result stated in the principal clause, either or both clauses may contain τε:

a the principal clause alone contains τε, ὅς κε θεοῖς ἐπιπείθηται, μάλα τ' ἔκλυον αὐτοῦ Il.1.218
; ὃς δ' ἂν ἀμύμων αὐτὸς ἔῃ καὶ ἀμύμονα εἰδῇ, τοῦ μέν τε κλέος εὐρὺ διὰ ξεῖνοι φορέουσι πάντας ἐπ' ἀνθρώπους, πολλοί τέ μιν ἐσθλὸν ἔειπον Od.19.333
; εἴ περ γὰρ θυμῷ γε μενοινάᾳ πολεμίζειν, ἀλλά τε λάθρῃ γυῖα βαρύνεται.., βλάβεται δέ τε γούνατ' ἰόντι Il.19.165
-6; ᾧ μέν κ' ἀμμείξας δώῃ Ζεὺς τερπικέραυνος, ἄλλοτε μέν τε κακῷ ὅ γε κύρεται ἄλλοτε δ' ἐσθλῷ 24.530
.

b the subordinate clause alone contains τε, λάζετο δ' ἔγχος.. τῷ δάμνησι στίχας ἀνδρῶν ἡρώων οἷσίν τε κοτέσσεται ὀβριμοπάτρη 5.747
; ῥεῖα δ' ἀρίγνωτος γόνος ἀνέρος ᾧ τε Κρονίων ὄλβον ἐπικλώση Od.4.207
; ἀντί νυ πολλῶν λαῶν ἐστιν ἀνὴρ ὅν τε Ζεὺς κῆρι φιλήσῃ Il.9.117
, cf. 7.298, Od.6.287, 7.74, 8.547, 18.276; with opt., ἀλλὰ πολὺ πρώτιστος.. ἕλεσκον ἀνδρῶν δυσμενέων ὅ τέ μοι εἴξειε πόδεσσι 14.221
: it is prob. that τε has been replaced by κε in the text of Hom. in Il.1.218, 9.510 (cf. 508), and some other passages in which κε seems to be used, exceptionally, in general relative clauses.

c both clauses contain τε, ὃς μέν τ' αἰδέσεται κούρας Διὸς ἆσσον ἰούσας, τὸν δὲ μέγ' ὤνησαν καί τ' ἔκλυον εὐχομένοιο Il.9.508
-9; εἴ περ γάρ τε χόλον γε καὶ αὐτῆμαρ καταπέψῃ, ἀλλά τε καὶ μετόπισθεν ἔχει κότον 1.82
-3.

4 in the subordinate clause of a collective sentence, in which the principal clause states something to be true of all those (i.e. each individual) to whom the predicate of the subordinate clause applies, ὑπόσχωμαι.. κτήματα.. πάντα μάλ' ὅσσα τ' Ἀλέξανδρος.. ἠγάγετο Τροίηνδ'.. δωσέμεν Il.22.115
; πάντων ὅσσα τε γαῖαν ἔπι πνείει τε καὶ ἕρπει 17.447
, cf. Od.18.131, Il.19.105; βάλλειν ἄγρια πάντα τά τε τρέφει οὔρεσιν ὕλη 5.52
, cf. 18.485.

5 in relative clauses (and in parenthetic principal clauses) which indicate what is customary, ἐπεὶ οὐχ ἱερήϊον οὐδὲ βοείην ἀρνύσθην, ἅ τε ποσσὶν ἀέθλια γίγνεται ἀνδρῶν which are the usual prizes.., Il.22.160; ἔργ' ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε, τά τε κλείουσιν ἀοιδοί Od.1.338
, cf. 3.435, 4.85, 13.410, 14.226, 17.423, Il.5.332; κύματος ἐξαναδύς, τά τ' ἐρεύγεται ἤπειρόνδε Od.5.438
; μολπή τ' ὀρχηστύς τε, τὰ γάρ τ' ἀναθήματα δαιτός 1.152
: similarly in clauses with οἷά τε (πολλά), κῆτος ἐπισσεύῃ μέγα δαίμων ἐξ ἁλός, οἷά τε πολλὰ τρέφει.. Ἀμφιτρίτη 5.422
; οὐ γάρ σ' οὐδέ.. δαήμονι φωτὶ ἐΐσκω ἄθλων, οἷά τε πολλὰ μετ' ἀνθρώποισι πέλονται 8.160
, cf. 11.364, 14.63, 15.324, 379.

6 in relative clauses indicating what is true of all persons or things denoted by the same word, οὐ γάρ τις νήσων ἱππήλατος οὐδ' εὐλείμων αἵ θ' ἁλὶ κεκλίαται no one of the islands which lie in the sea (as all islands do, i.e. no island at all), Od.4.608; ἡμίονον.. ἥ τ' ἀλγίστη δαμάσασθαι Il.23.655
; ἐσθλὸς ἐὼν γαμβρὸς ἢ πενθερός, οἵ τε μάλιστα κήδιστοι τελέθουσι Od.8.582
; αἰετοῦ οἴματ' ἔχων.. ὅς θ' ἅμα κάρτιστός τε καὶ ὤκιστος πετεηνῶν Il.21.252
, cf. 24.294; οὐδέ μιν εἰσοιχνεῦσι κυνηγέται, οἵ τε καθ' ὕλην ἄλγεα πάσχουσιν Od.9.120
; δικασπόλοι, οἵ τε θέμιστας πρὸς Διὸς εἰρύαται Il.1.238
, cf. Od.5.67, 101, Il.1.279, 19.31, 24.415; οἶνός σε τρώει.., ὅς τε καὶ ἄλλους βλάπτει Od.21.293
, cf. 14.464; πάρφασις, ἥ τ' ἔκλεψε νόον πύκα περ φρονεόντων Il.14.217
; οἰκωφελίη, ἥ τε τρέφει ἀγλαὰ τέκνα Od.14.223
.

7 when the antecedent is a definite group of gods or men, the relative clause with τε indicates an essential characteristic of the antecedent, Ἐρινύες, αἵ θ' ὑπὸ γαῖαν ἀνθρώπους τείνυνται Il.19.259
; Σειρῆνας.., αἵ ῥά τε πάντας ἀνθρώπους θέλγουσιν Od.12.39
; Φαίηκές μ' ἄγαγον ναυσίκλυτοι, οἵ τε καὶ ἄλλους ἀνθρώπους πέμπουσιν 16.227
, cf. 20.187; νυμφάων αἵ τ' ἄλσεα καλὰ νέμονται καὶ πηγὰς ποταμῶν Il.20.8
; Λωτοφάγων, οἵ τ' ἄνθινον εἶδαρ ἔδουσι Od.9.84
: similarly when the antecedent is an individual person (incl. god) or thing, the relative clause with τε indicates one of his or its general or essential characteristics or aspects, οὐ μὰ Ζῆν' ὅς τίς τε θεῶν ὕπατος καὶ ἄριστος Il.23.43
, cf. 2.669, Od.5.4; Ἑρμείαο ἕκητι διακτόρου, ὅς ῥά τε πάντων ἀνθρώπων ἔργοισι χάριν καὶ κῦδος ὀπάζει 15.319
; Λάμπον καὶ Φαέθονθ', οἵ τ' Ἠῶ πῶλοι ἄγουσι 23.246
; Τειρεσίαο μάντιος ἀλαοῦ, τοῦ τε φρένες ἔμπεδοί εἰσι 10.493
; τεύχεα δύνεις ἀνδρὸς ἀριστῆος, τόν τε τρομέουσι καὶ ἄλλοι Il.17.203
, cf. 7.112; κεῖται ἀνὴρ ὅν τ' (v.l. ὃν) ἶσον ἐτίομεν Ἕκτορι δίῳ, Αἰνείας 5.467
; the relative clause sts. indicates what is customary, οὐδέ σε λήθω τιμῆς ἧς τέ μ' ἔοικε τετιμῆσθαι μετ' Ἀχαιοῖς 23.649
; ἔνθα δ' ἀνὴρ ἐνίαυε πελώριος, ὅς ῥά τε μῆλα οἶος ποιμαίνεσκε Od.9.187
; τῶν πάντων οὐ τόσσον ὀδύρομαι.. ὡς ἑνός, ὅς τέ μοι ὕπνον ἀπεχθαίρει καὶ ἐδωδὴν μνωομένῳ 4.105
; σῆς ἀλόχου.. ἥ τέ τοι αὔτως ἧσται ἐνὶ μεγάροισιν 13.336
; καὶ κήρυκα Μέδοντα σαώσομεν, ὅς τέ μευ αἰεὶ.. κηδέσκετο 22.357
, cf. 346.

8 τε is used in descriptions of particular places or things when attention is called to their peculiar or characteristic features, or their position, e.g. Λιβύην, ἵνα τ' ἄρνες ἄφαρ κεραοὶ τελέθουσι Od.4.85
; ἔνθα δέ τ' ὄρνιθες τανυσίπτεροι εὐνάζοντο 5.65
, cf. 9.124, 13.99, 100, 107, 109, 244; ἓξ δέ τέ οἱ (sc. Σκύλλῃ) δειραὶ περιμήκεες 12.90
, cf. 93,99, 105; ἐν δέ τε Γοργείη κεφαλή (in Athena's αἰγίς) Il.5.741; χαλεπὸν δέ τ' ὀρύσσειν ἀνδράσι γε θνητοῖσι (sc. μῶλυ) Od. 10.305; δοιαὶ γάρ τε πύλαι ἀμενηνῶν εἰσὶν ὀνείρων 19.562
; sts. τε draws attention to a well-known custom or permanent feature, ἀρξάμενοι τοῦ χώρου, ὅθεν τέ περ οἰνοχοεύει 21.142
; ἦ μένετε Τρῶας σχεδὸν ἐλθέμεν, ἔνθα τε νῆες εἰρύατ' εὔπρυμνοι Il.4.247
, cf. Od. 6.266; ἐν ποταμῷ, ὅθι τ' ἀρδμὸς ἔην πάντεσσι βοτοῖσιν Il.18.521
, cf. Od.14.353.

9 a part of the anatomy is defined by a clause (containing τε) which indicates a feature which universally belongs to it, κατ' ἰσχίον, ἔνθα τε μηρὸς ἰσχίῳ ἐνστρέφεται Il.5.305
, cf. 8.83, 13.547, 16.481, 20.478; similarly a point of time is defined, ὥρῃ ἐν εἰαρινῇ, ὅτε τ' ἤματα μακρὰ πέλονται Od.18.367
.

10 τε is used in relative clauses which define a measurement of a particular thing or action by reference to the measurement (in general) of some thing or action well known in daily life, γεφύρωσεν δὲ κέλευθον μακρὴν ἠδ' εὐρεῖαν, ὅσον τ' ἐπὶ δουρὸς ἐρωὴ γίγνεται Il.15.358
; τοῦ δ' ἤτοι κλέος ἔσται ὅσον τ' ἐπικίδναται ἠώς 7.451
; ὅτε τόσσον ἀπῆν ὅσσον τε γέγωνε βοήσας Od.9.473
, cf. 3.321, al.; more rarely the definition is by reference to the measurement of a particular thing or action, ἤσθιε.. ἕως ὅ τ' ἀοιδὸς ἐνὶ μεγάροισιν ἄειδεν (s.v.l.) 17.358; ἥ τις δὴ τέτληκε τόσα φρεσίν, ὅσσα τ' ἐγώ περ 19.347
.

11 the freq. use of τε B in similes is to be explained under one or other of the foregoing heads, e.g. when reference is made to generally known kinds of things or natural phenomena, to human experience in daily life, or to well-known phenomena of the animal world, Il.2.456, 459, 463, 468, 470, 471, 474, 481, 3.23-5,33, 11.415-7, al.; or when universal characteristics of gods, men, animals, etc., are indicated by relative clauses introduced by ὅς τε, ὅς ῥά τε, etc., 3.61, 151, 198, al.; or by ὥς τε, ἠΰτε, ὥς τίς τε, etc., e.g. 5.136, 17.133, Od.4.535, ὡς εἴ τε 9.314
, 14.254, etc.

II in post-Hom. Gr. this use of τε is more restricted; outside of [dialect] Ep. and other early dactylic verse (Hes.Op.30, 214, 233, al., Xenoph.13.3, Thgn.148, 359, etc.) it is not found except with relatives, and with these it has scarcely any discernible sense, so that ὅς τε in Lyr. and Trag. is for the most part only = ὅς, e.g. (possibly generalizing) Μοῖρ', ἅ τε πατρώϊον τῶνδ' ἔχει τὸν εὔφρονα πότμον Pi.O.2.35
, cf. 14.2, A.Eu. 1024, E.Hec. 445 (lyr.), etc. (v. ὅστε); without generalizing force, Pi.N.9.9, A.Pers. 297, Ch. 615, etc.; Hdt. has τά πέρ τε 1.74
, ὅκως τε 2.108
codd., ὅσον τε (without a verb, as in Od.9.325, al.) 1.126, 2.96, 3.5, al., οἷά τε 1.93
codd. (adverbially 2.175, 5.11): in [dialect] Att. Prose and Com. even these uses disappear and we find only a few phrases, as ἅτε, ὥστε, ἐφ' ᾧτε, οἷός τε; in later Gr. we find exceptionally ἔνθεν τε Hp.Ep.17
; ἀφ' οὗ τε UPZ62.8
(ii B.C.); ἀπ' οὗ τε PCair.Zen.291.3
(iii B.C.); οἵ τε GDI215.23
(Erythrae, ii B.C.); ἥ τ' PMag.Par.1.2962; ὅσον τε ὀκτὼ στάδια Paus.6.26.1
; καὶ ἔστιν ἔπη Μαντικὰ ὁπόσα τε (= which) ἐπελεξάμεθα καὶ ἡμεῖς Id.9.31.5
; οἷόν τε καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς κύων φωνῆς θεωροῦμεν S.E.M.11.28
.

C in Hom. τε is also (but less freq.) used in conjunction with other particles in contexts (mainly particular statements) such as the following:

1 in assurances, statements on oath, and threats, σχέτλιος, ἦ τ' ἐκέλευον ἀπωσάμενον δήϊον πῦρ ἂψ ἐπὶ νῆας ἴμεν Il.18.13
; ἐξ αὖ νῦν ἔφυγες θάνατον, κύον· ἦ τέ τοι ἄγχι ἦλθε κακόν 11.362
; ἦ τε is similarly used in 11.391, 17.171, 236, Od.24.28, 311, al.; ἦ τ' ἄν in Il.12.69, al.; γάρ τε (s. v.l.) in οὐ γάρ τ' οἶδα 6.367
, cf. Od.10.190; νύ τε in 1.60, 347 (but τ' more prob. = τοι, v. σύ) ; δέ τε in ἀγορῇ δέ τ' ἀμείνονές εἰσι καὶ ἄλλοι Il.18.106
; σὲ δέ τ' ἐνθάδε γῦπες ἔδονται 16.836
; μέν τε in σφὼ μέν τε σαώσετε λαὸν Ἀχαιῶν 13.47
, cf. 4.341; εἴ πέρ τε in οὔ τοι ἔτι δηρόν γε φίλης ἀπὸ πατρίδος αἴης ἔσσεται, οὐδ' εἴ πέρ τε σιδήρεα δέσματ' ἔχῃσιν Od.1.204
, cf. 188, Il.12.223, 245.

2 also in commands, warnings, and admonitions, σίγα, μή τίς τ' ἄλλος Ἀχαιῶν τοῦτον ἀκούσῃ μῦθον Il.14.90
, cf. Od.19.486; ὣς ἄγαγ' ὡς μήτ' ἄρ τις ἴδῃ μήτ' ἄρ τε νοήσῃ Il.24.337
; τούσδε τ' (v.l. δ') ἐᾶν 16.96
(nisi leg. τούσδ' ἔτ') ; δὸς δέ τέ μ' ἄνδρα ἑλεῖν 5.118
; μηδέ τ' ἐρώει (nisi leg. μηδ' ἔτ') 2.179, 22.185.

3 also in passionate utterances, in clauses which indicate the cause of the speaker's passion or a circumstance which might have caused others to behave more considerately towards him, ὤ μοι ἐγὼ δειλή.. ἥ τ'.. τὸν μὲν.. θρέψασα.. ἐπιπροέηκα Il.18.55
; σχέτλιοί ἐστε, θεοί, ζηλήμονες ἔξοχον ἄλλων, οἵ τε θεαῖς ἀγάασθε.. ἤν τίς τε.. Od.5.119
, 120, cf. 21.87, Il.15.468, 17.174; ἡμεῖς δ' αὖ μαχόμεσθ', οἵ πέρ τ' ἐπίκουροι ἔνειμεν and we, who ( mark you) are only allies (not γαμβροί and κασίγνητοι), are fighting, 5.477; τρεῖς γάρ τ' ἐκ Κρόνου εἰμὲν ἀδελφεοί for we, let me tell you, are three brothers, sons of Cronos (and Zeus has no prior title to power), 15.187; ποῖόν δε ἔπος φύγεν ἕρκος ὀδόντων δεινόν τ' ἀργαλέον τε· νεμεσσῶμαι δέ τ' ἀκούων Od.21.169
; οὐ μήν οἱ τό γε κάλλιον οὐδέ τ' ἄμεινον Il.24.52
.

4 in descriptions of particular events and things where there is no general reference, κνίση μὲν ἀνήνοθεν, ἐν δέ τε φόρμιγξ ἠπύει Od.17.270
; ὥς (= so) τέ μοι ὑβρίζοντες ὑπερφιάλως δοκέουσιν δαίνυσθαι κατὰ δῶμα 1.227
; τοὺς μέν τ' ἰητροὶ πολυφάρμακοι ἀμφιπένονται.. σὺ δ' ἀμήχανος ἔπλευ, Ἀχιλλεῦ Il.16.28
; πόλιν πέρι δινηθήτην καρπαλίμοισι πόδεσσι, θεοὶ δέ τε πάντες ὁρῶντο dub. l. in 22.166; εὗρε δ' ἐνὶ σπῆϊ γλαφυρῷ Θέτιν, ἀμφὶ δέ τ' ἄλλαι εἵαθ' ὁμηγερέες ἅλιαι θεαί 24.83
(s.v.l.); ἐν δέ τε φάρμακον ἧκε Od.10.317
; νῶϊ δέ τ' ἄψορροι κίομεν Il.21.456
; πολλὰς γὰρ δὴ νύκτας.. ἄεσα καί τ' ἀνέμεινα.. Ἠῶ Od.19.342
; δέελον δ' ἐπὶ σῆμά τ' ἔθηκε Il.10.466
; ἐν δέ τε οἶνον κρητῆρσιν κερόωντο Od.20.252
; so with οὐδέ τ' (nisi leg. οὐδ' ἔτ') , τὸν καὶ ὑπέδδεισαν μάκαρες θεοὶ οὐδέ τ' ἔδησαν Il.1.406
; οὐδέ τ' ἔληγε μέγας θεός, ὦρτο δ' ἐπ' αὐτόν 21.248
; οὐδέ τ' ἄειρε 23.730
; οὐδέ τ' ἔασεν 11.437
, 21.596, cf. 15.709.

5 ὅτε τε ( when) freq. introduces a temporal clause defining a point of time in the past by means of a well-known event which occurred then, ἦ οὐ μέμνῃ ὅτε τ' ἐκρέμω ὑψόθεν; Il.15.18; ὅτε τε Κρόνον.. Ζεὺς γαίης νέρθε καθεῖσε 14.203
; ἤματι τῷ ὅτε τ' ἦλθον Ἀμαζόνες 3.189
(but ἤματι τῷ ὅτε τε is general in 13.335; so also ὅτε πέρ τε.. κέρωνται in 4.259); ὅτε τ' ἤλυθε νόσφιν Ἀχαιῶν ἄγγελος ἐς Θήβας 5.803
, cf. 10.286, 22.102, Od.7.323, 18.257.

6 in ὅ τε ( that or because) the τε has no observable meaning, χωόμενος ὅ τ' ἄριστον Ἀχαιῶν οὐδὲν ἔτισας Il.1.244
, cf. 412, 4.32, 6.126, Od.5.357, al.

7 ἐπεί τε = ἐπεί ( when) is rare in Hom., ἐπεί τ' ἐνόησε Il.12.393
, cf. ἐπείτε.

8 where τ' ἄρ occurs in questions, e.g. πῇ τ' ἂρ μέμονας καταδῦναι ὅμιλον; Il.13.307, cf. 1.8, 18.188, al., ταρ (q.v.) should prob. be read, since ἄρ ([etym.] α) usu. precedes a τε which is not copulative; so perh. ταρα should be read for τ' ἄρα in Od.1.346.

9 in ἣ θέμις ἐστὶν.. ἤ τ' ἀνδρῶν ἤ τε γυναικῶν Il.9.276
, it is not clear whether τε is copulative (τε A) or generalizing (τε B) or neither (τε C); ἤ is prob. = ἦ (accented as in ἤτοι (; ἤ τ' ἀλκῆς ἤ τε φόβοιο is dub. l. in 17.42; ἤ τ' = or is found in 19.148, = than in Od.16.216.

10 Rarer and later uses;

a also, esp. with ἄλλος, Ἑρμεία, σὺ γὰρ αὖτε τά τ' ἄλλα περ ἄγγελός ἐσσι Od.5.29
, cf. 17.273, Il.23.483; ἐπεὶ τά τε ἄλλα πράττουσιν καλῶς, ἀναθεῖναι αὐτοὺς καὶ στήλην IG22.1298.9
, cf. Lycurg.100 (s.v.l.); ἐκομισάμην τὸ παρὰ σοῦ ἐπιστόλιον, ἐν ᾧ ὑπέγραψάς μοι τήν τε παρὰ Ζήνωνος πρὸς Ἰεδδοῦν γεγραμμένην PCair.Zen.18.1
(iii B.C.); εἰ οὖν περὶ τούτων ἐπιστροφὴν μὴ ποιήσει, οἵ τε λοιποί μοι τὰς χεῖρας προσοίσουσιν (- σωσιν Pap.) PPetr.2p.10 (iii B.C.); τῶν δὲ παρὰ ταῦτα ποιησόντων τά τε κτήνη ὑπὸ στέρεσιν ἀχθήσεσθαι πρὸς τὰ ἐκφόρια PTeb.27.74
(ii B.C.); v. supr. A. 11.3b.

b with ὅδε, adding a slight emphasis to the preceding word, εἰ δὴ τήνδε τε γαῖαν ἀνείρεαι Od.13.238
, cf. 15.484.

c τε γάρ rarely = καὶ γάρ or γάρ, Arist.APo. 75b41, de An. 405a4, PA 661b28, Pol. 1318b33, 1333a2; ἐάν τε γάρ for even if, 2 Ep.Cor.10.8; τήν τε γὰρ ἐπιθυμίαν οὐκ ᾔδειν for I had not known even lust. Ep.Rom.7.7.

D Position of τε:

1 in signf. A, as an enclitic, it stands second word in the sentence, clause, or phrase, regardless of the meaning: ἐγγύθι τε Πριάμοιο καὶ Ἕκτορος near both Priam and Hector, Il.6.317; ἡμέτεραί τ' ἄλοχοι καὶ νήπια τέκνα 2.136
, cf. 4.505, 7.295; αἰεί τε δὴ νηλὴς οὺ καὶ θράσους πλέως A.Pr.42
codd., cf. 291 (anap.); ἄνευ τε δόλου καὶ ἀπάτης Hdt.1.69
; ὑπέρ τε σοῦ καὶ τῆς ἀδελφῆς PEnteux.6.6
(iii B.C.); τοῖς τε πόνοις καὶ μαθήμασι Pl.R. 537a
, cf. Ti. 70b; hence in E.Or. 897 πόλεος must be taken with what precedes (Porson ad loc.): but article + noun, preposition + noun are freq. regarded as forming a unity indivisible by τε, τοῖς κτανοῦσί τε A.Ch.41
(lyr.); πρὸς βίαν τε Id.Pr. 210
; also the order is freq. determined by the meaning, τε being placed immediately after the word (or first word of a phrase or clause) which it joins to what precedes or to what follows, πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Il.1.544
; ἔξω δόμων τε καὶ πάτρας A.Pr. 665
; the copulative or preparatory τε precedes many other particles, e.g. τε γάρ, τ' ἄρα, τέ τις.

2 τε is enclitic in signfs. B, C also, and stands early in its sentence, clause, or phrase (v. supr.), but many particles which follow τε in signf. A precede it in signfs. B, C, e.g. in signfs. B, C we have δέ τε, μέν τε, γάρ τε, ἀλλά τε, δ' ἄρα τε, ὅς ῥά τε, οὔτ' ἄρ τε, καὶ γάρ τίς τε, ὅς τίς τε, καί τε.

E Etymology: signf. A is found also in Skt. ca, Lat. - que; for signfs. B and c cf. Skt. ca in yá[hudot ] káś ca 'whosoever (with following verb)', Lat. - que in quisque, ubique, plerique, usque, neque, nec (= non in necopinans, etc.), Goth. ni-h 'not' (also 'and not'), Lat. namque (= nam).

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > τε
9 διά

διά, poet. [full] διαί ([dialect] Aeol. [full] ζά, q.v.), Prep. governing gen. and acc.— Rad. sense,

A through; never anastroph. [Prop. δῐᾰ: but Hom. uses [pron. full] ῑ at the beginning of a line, Il.3.357, 4.135, al.: also ᾱ, metri gr., freq. in Hom., for which A. uses [full] διαί in lyr., Ag. 448, al.]

A WITH GEN.

I of Place or Space:

1 of motion in a line, from one end to the other, right through, in Hom. freq. of the effect of weapons, διὰ μὲν ἀσπίδος ἦλθε.. ἔγχος καὶ διὰ θώρηκος.. Il. 3.357
; δουρὶ βάλεν Δάμασον κυνέης διά 12.183
; δι' ὤμου.. ἔγχος ἦλθεν 4.481
; in Prose, τιτρώσκειν διὰ τοῦ θώρακος X.An.1.8.26
; διὰ τοῦ ὀρόφου ἐφαίνετο πῦρ ib.7.4.16: also of persons, διὰ Σκαιῶν πεδίονδ' ἔχον ὠκέας ἵππους out through the Scaean gate, Il.3.263; δι' ἠέρος αἰθέρ' ἵκανεν quite through the lower air even to the ether, Il.14.288, cf. 2.458; διὰ Τρώων πέτετο straight through them, 13.755; δι' ὄμματος.. λείβων δάκρυον S.OC 1250
, etc.: also in Compos. with πρό and ἐκ, v. διαπρό, διέκ: in adverbial phrases, διὰ πασῶν (sc. χορδῶν), v. διαπασῶν:
διὰ πάσης
throughout, Th.1.14
;
διὰ κενῆς
idly, Id.4.126
, etc. (cf.111.1.c).

2 of motion through a space, but not in a line, throughout, ouer, ἑπόμεσθα διὰ πεδίοιο Il.11.754
; δι' ὄρεσφι 10.185
, al.; ὀδύνη διὰ χροὸς ἦλθε through all his frame, 11.398; τεῦχε βοὴν διὰ ἄστεος Od.10.118
; δι' ὁμίλου Il.6.226
, etc.; θορύβου διὰ τῶν τάξεων ἰόντος X.An.1.8.16
, cf. 2.4.26, etc.; later, in quoting an authority,
ἱστορεῖ δ. τῆς δευτέρας
in the course of.., Ath.10.438b
.

3 in the midst of, Il.9.468; κεῖτο τανυσσάμενος δ. μήλων Od.9.298
; between, δ. τῶν πλευρέων ταμόντα Hp.Morb.2.61
: hence, of pre-eminence, ἔπρεπε καὶ δ. πάντων Il.12.104
; τετίμακε δι' ἀνθρώπων Pi.I.4(3).37
; εὐδοκιμέοντι δ. πάντων Hdt.6.63
, cf. 1.25, etc.

4 in Prose, sts. of extension, along, παρήκει δ. τῆσδε τῆς θαλάσσης ἡ ἀκτή Id.4.39
(but πέταται δ. θαλάσσας across the sea, Pi.N.6.48); λόφος, δι' οὗ τὸ σταύρωμα περιεβέβληντο X.HG7.4.22
.

5 in Prose, of Intervals of Space, δ. τριήκοντα δόμων at intervals of thirty layers, i. e. after every thirtieth layer, Hdt.1.179; δ. δέκα ἐπάλξεων at every tenth battlement, Th.3.21; cf. infr. 11.3: of a single interval, δ. πέντε σταδίων at a distance of five stades, Hdt.7.30, cf. 198; δ. τοσούτου μᾶλλον ἢ δ. πολλῶν ἡμερῶν ὁδοῦ at so short a distance, etc., Th.2.29; δ. πολλοῦ at a great distance apart, Id.3.94; δ. πλείστου Id.2.97
; δι' ἐλάσσονος Id.3.51
; ὕδατα δ. μακροῦ ἀλόμενα Hp.
Aër.9, etc.

II of Time,

1 of duration from one end of a period to the other, throughout, δ. παντὸς [τοῦ χρόνου] Hdt.9.13; δι' ὅλου τοῦ αἰῶνος Th.1.70
; δι' αἰῶνος S.El. 1024
; δι' ἡμέρας ὅλης Ar. Pax 27
; δι' ὅλης τῆς νυκτός X.An.4.2.4
, etc.: without an Adj., δι' ἡμέρης all day long, Hdt.1.97; δ. νυκτός Th.2.4
, X.An.4.6.22 (but δ. νυκτός in the course of the night, by night, Act.Ap.5.19, PRyl.138.15 (i A. D.), etc.); δ. νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας Pl.R. 343b
; δι' ἐνιαυτοῦ, δι' ἔτους, Ar.Fr.569.8, V. 1058; δ. βίου Pl.Smp. 183e
, etc.;
δ. τέλους
from beginning to end, A.Pr. 275
, Pl.R. 519c, etc.: with Adjs. alone,
δ. παντός
continually, A.Ch. 862
(lyr.), etc.; δι' ὀλίγου for a short time, Th.1.77; δ. μακροῦ E.Hec. 320
; ὁ δ. μέσου χρόνος Hdt. 8.27
.

2 of the interval which has passed between two points of Time, δ. χρόνου πολλοῦ or δ. πολλοῦ χρ. after a long time, Id.3.27, Ar.Pl. 1045; δ. μακρῶν χρόνων Pl.Ti. 22d
: without an Adj., δ. χρόνου after a time, S.Ph. 758, X.Cyr.1.4.28, etc.; δι' ἡμερῶν after several days, Ev.Marc.2.1; and with Adjs. alone, δι' ὀλίγου Th.5.14
; οὐ δ. μακροῦ Id.6.15
,91; δ. πολλοῦ Luc.Nigr.2
, etc.: with Numerals, δι' ἐτέων εἴκοσι Hdt.6.118
, cf. OGI56.38 (iii B. C.), etc.: but δ. τῆς ἑβδόμης till the seventh day, Luc.Hist.Conscr.21: also distributively, χρόνος δ. χρόνου προὔβαινε time after time, S.Ph. 285; ἄλλος δι' ἄλλου E.Andr. 1248
.

3 of successive Intervals, δ. τρίτης ἡμέρης every other day, Hdt.2.37; δ. τρίτου ἔτεος ib.4, etc.; δ. πεντετηρίδος every four years (with inclusive reckoning), Id.3.97; δι' ἔτους πέμπτου, of the Olympic games, Ar.Pl. 584 (but δι' ἑνδεκάτου ἔτεος in the course of the eleventh year, Hdt.1.62).

III causal, through, by,

a of the Agent, δι' ἀλλέλων or -ου ἐπικηρυκεύεσθαι, ποιεῖσθαι, by the mouth of.., Id.1.69,6.4, cf. 1.113; δι' ἑρμηνέως λέγειν X.An.2.3.17
, etc.; τὸ ῥηθὲν ὑπὸ Κυρίου δ. τοῦ προφήτου Ev.Matt.1.22
; δι' ἑκόντων ἀλλ' οὐ δ. βίας ποιεῖσθαι Pl.Phlb. 58b
; πεσόντ' ἀλλοτρίας διαὶ γυναικός by her doing, A.Ag. 448 (lyr.); ἐκ θεῶν γεγονὼς δ. βασιλέων πεφυκώς X.Cyr.7.2.24
; δι' ἑαυτοῦ ποιεῖν τι of oneself, not by another's agency, ib.1.1.4, etc.; but also, by oneself alone, unassisted, D.15.14, cf. 22.38.

b of the Instrument or Means, δ. χειρῶν by hand (prop. by holding between the hands), δι' ὁσίων χ. θιγών S. OC 470
; also δ. χερῶν λαβεῖν, δ. χειρὸς ἔχειν in the hand, Id.Ant. 916, 1258 (but τὰ τῶν ξυμμάχων δ. χειρὸς ἔχειν to keep a firm hand on, Th.2.13); δ. στέρνων ἔχειν S.Ant. 639
; ἡ ἀκούουσα πηγὴ δι' ὤτων Id.OT 1387
; δ. στόματος ἔχειν X.Cyr.1.4.25
; δ. μνήμης ἔχειν Luc.Cat.9
; αἱ δ. τοῦ σώματος ἡδοναί X.Mem.1.5.6
; δ. λόγων συγγίγνεσθαι to hold intercourse by word, Pl.Plt. 272b; δ. λόγου ἀπαγγέλλειν Act.Ap.15.27
; δι' ἐπιστολῶν 2 Ep.Cor.10.9
, POxy. 1070.15 (iii A. D.).

c of Manner (where διά with its Noun freq. serves as an Adv.), δ. μέθης ποιήσασθαι τὴν συνουσίαν Pl.Smp. 176e
; παίω δι' ὀργῆς through passion, in passion, S.OT 807; δ. τάχους, = ταχέως, Id.Aj. 822, Th.1.63 (but δ. ταχέων ib.80, al.); δ. σπουδῆς in haste, hastily, E.Ba. 212; δι' αἰδοῦς with reverence, respectfully, ib. 441; δ. ψευδῶν ἔπη lying words, Id.Hel. 309; αἱ δ. καρτερίας ἐπιμέλειαι long-continued exertions, X.Mem.2.1.20; δι' ἀκριβείας, δ. πάσης ἀκρ., Pl.Ti. 23d, Lg. 876c; δ. σιγῆς Id.Grg. 450c
; δ. ξυμφορῶν ἡ ξύμβασις ἐγένετο Th.6.10
; οὐ δι' αἰνιγμάτων, ἀλλ' ἐναργῶς γέγραπται Aeschin.3.121
; δι' αἵματος, οὐ δ. μέλανος τοὺς νόμους ὁ Δράκων ἔγραψεν Plu.Sol.17
: also with Adjs., δ. βραχέων, δ. μακρῶν τοὺς λόγους ποιεῖσθαι, Isoc.14.3, Pl.Grg. 449b; ἀποκρίνεσθαι δ. βραχυτάτων ibid. d; cf. infr. IV.

2 in later Prose, of Material out of which a thing is made, κατασκευάζειν εἴδωλα δι' ἐλέφαντος καὶ χρυσοῦ D.S.17.115
; θυσίαι δι' ἀλφίτου καὶ σπονδῆς πεποιημέναι Plu.Num.8
; βρώματα δ. μέλιτος καὶ γάλακτος γιγνόμενα Ath.14.646e
; οἶνος δ. βουνίου Dsc. 5.46
.

IV διά τινος ἔχειν, εἶναι, γίγνεσθαι, to express conditions or states, ἀγὼν διὰ πάσης ἀγωνίης ἔχων extending through every kind of contest, Hdt.2.91; δι' ἡσυχίης εἶναι Id.1.206
; δι' ὄχλου εἶναι to be troublesome, Ar.Ec. 888; δ. φόβου εἶναι Th.6.59
; δι' ἀπεχθείας γίγνεσθαι X.Hier.9.2
; ἡ ἐπιμέλεια δ. χάριτος γίγνεται ibid.; δ. μιᾶς γνώμης γίγνεσθαι Isoc.4.138
.

b with Verbs of motion, δ. μάχης ἐλεύσονται will engage in battle, Hdt.6.9; ἐλθεῖν Th.4.92
; δ. παντὸς πολέμου, δ. φιλίας ἰέναι τινί, X.An.3.2.8; δ. δίκης ἰέναι τινί go to law with.., S.Ant. 742, cf. Th.6.60; δ. τύχης ἰέναι S.OT 773
; δι' ὀργῆς ἥκειν Id.OC 905
; ἐμαυτῷ δ. λόγων ἀφικόμην I held converse with myself, E.Med. 872; δ. λόγων, δ. γλώσσης ἰέναι come to open speech, Id.Tr. 916, Supp. 112; δ. φιλημάτων ἰέναι come to kissing, Id.Andr. 416; δ. δικαιοσύνης ἰέναι καὶ σωφροσύνης Pl.Prt. 323a
, etc.; δ. πυρὸς ἰέναι (v. πῦρ): in pass. sense, δι' ἀπεχθείας ἐλθεῖν τινι to be hated by.., A.Pr. 121 (anap.).

c with trans. Verbs, δι' αἰτίας ἔχειν or ἄγειν τινά hold in fault, Th.2.60, Ael.VH9.32; δι' ὀργῆς ἔχειν τινά Th.2.37
, etc.; δ. φυλακῆς ἔχειν τι Id.7.8
; δι' οἴκτου ἔχειν τινά, δι' αἰσχύνης ἔχειν τι, E.Hec. 851, IT 683; δ. πένθους τὸ γῆρας διάγειν X.Cyr.4.6.6
; δι' οὐδενὸς ποιεῖσθαί τι S.OC 584
.

B WITH Acc.

I of Place, only Poet., in same sense as διά c. gen.:

1 through, ἓξ δὲ δ. πτύχας ἦλθε.. χαλκός Il.7.247
; ἤϊξε δ. δρυμὰ.. καὶ ὕλην 11.118
, cf. 23.122, etc.; δ. τάφρον ἐλαύνειν across it, 12.62; δ. δώματα ποιπνύοντα 1.600
; ἐπὶ χθόνα καὶ δ. πόντον βέβακεν Pi.I.4(3).41
; φεύγειν δ. κῦμ' ἅλιον A.Supp.14
(anap.).

2 through, among, in, οἴκεον δι' ἄκριας Od.9.400
; ἄραβος δὲ δ. στόμα γίγνετ' ὀδόντων Il.10.375
(but μῦθον, ὃν.. δ. στόμα.. ἄγοιτο through his mouth, 14.91; so δ. στόμα ὄσσαν ἱεῖσαι Hes.Th.65
; ἀεὶ γὰρ ἡ γυνή σ' ἔχει δ. στόμα Ar.Lys. 855
); δ. κρατερὰς ὑσμίνας Hes.Th. 631
; νόμοι δι' αἰθέρα τεκνωθέντες S.OT 867
(lyr.).

II of Time, also Poet., δ. νύκτα Il.2.57
, etc.; δ. γλυκὺν ὕπνον during sweet sleep, Mosch.4.91.

III causal:

1 of persons, thanks to, by aid of, νικῆσαι δ... Ἀθήνην Od.8.520
, cf. 13.121; δ. δμῳὰς.. εἷλον 19.154
; δ. σε by thy fault or service, S.OC 1129, Ar.Pl. 145, cf. 160, 170: in Prose, by reason of, on account of, δ' ἡμᾶς Th.1.41
, cf. X.An.7.6.33, D.18.249; οὐ δι' ἐμαυτόν And.1.144
; so εἰ μὴ διά τινα if it had not been for.., εἰ μὴ δι' ἄνδρας ἀγαθούς Lys.12.60
; Μιλτιάδην εἰς τὸ βάραθρον ἐμβαλεῖν ἐψηφίσαντο, καὶ εἰ μὴ δ. τὸν πρύτανιν ἐνέπεσεν ἄν Pl.Grg. 516e
, cf. D.19.74; εἰ μὴ δ. τὴν ἐκείνου μέλλησιν Th.2.18
, cf. Ar.V. 558; πλέον' ἔλπομαι λόγον Ὀδυσσέος ἢ πάθαν γενέσθαι δι' Ὅμηρον Pi.N.7.21
.

2 of things, to express the Cause, Occasion, or Purpose, δι' ἐμὴν ἰότητα because of my will, Il.15.41; Διὸς μεγάλου δ. βουλάς Od.8.82
; δι' ἀφραδίας for, through want of thought, 19.523; δι' ἀτασθαλίας 23.67
; δι' ἔνδειαν by reason of poverty, X. An.7.8.6; δ. καῦμα, δ. χειμῶνα, ib.1.7.6; δι' ἄγνοιαν καὶ ἀμαθίαν Pl. Prt. 360b
, etc.: freq. also with neut. Adjs., δ. τί; wherefore?; δ. τοῦτο, δ. ταῦτα on this account; δι' ὅ, δι' ἅ on which account; δ. πολλά for many reasons, etc.

3 = ἕνεκα, to express Purpose, δἰ ἀχθηδόνα for the sake of vexing, Th.4.40, cf. 5.53; δ. τὴν τούτου σαφήνειαν with a view to clearing this up, Pl.R. 524c, cf. Arist.EN 1172b21; αὐτή δι' αὑτήν for its own sake, Pl.R. 367b, etc.

C WITHOUT CASE as Adv. throughout, δ. πρό (v. supr. A.I.I); δ. δ' ἀμπερές Il.11.377
.

D IN COMPOS.:

I through, right through, of Space, διαβαίνω, διέχω, διιππεύω.

II in different directions, as in διαπέμπω, διαφορέω; of separation, asunder, διαιρέω, διαλύω; of difference or disagreement, at variance, διαφωνέω, διαφέρω; or simply mutual relation, one with another, διαγωνίζομαι, διάδω, διαθέω, διαπίνω, διαφιλοτιμέομαι.

III pre-eminence, διαπρέπω, διαφέρω.

IV completion, to the end, utterly, διεργάζομαι, διαμάχομαι, διαπράττω, διαφθείρω: of Time, διαβιόω.

V to add strength, thoroughly, out and out, διαγαληνίζω, etc.; cf. ζά.

VI of mixture, between, partly, esp. in Adj., as διάλευκος, διάχρυσος, διάχλωρος, etc.

VII of leaving an interval or breach, διαλείπω, διαναπαύω. (Cogn. with δύο, δίς.)

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > διά
10 σῶμα

σῶμα, ατος, τό (Arc. dat. pl.

A σωμάτεσι IG5(2).357.156
(Stymphalus, iii B.C.)), body of man or beast, but in Hom., as Aristarch. remarks (v. Apollon.Lex.), always dead body, corpse (whereas the living body is δέμας) , ὥς τε λέων ἐχάρη μεγάλῳ ἐπὶ σώματι κύρσας Il.3.23
, cf. 18.161; [full] ς. δὲ οἴκαδ' ἐμὸν δόμεναι πάλιν 7.79
; σ. κατελείπομεν ἄθαπτον Od.11.53
; ὦν.. σώματ' ἀκηδέα κεῖται 24.187
; so also in Hes.Sc. 426, Simon.119, Pi.O.9.34, Hdt.7.167, Posidon.14 J., Ev.Marc.15.43, etc.; τὸ σ. τοῦ τεθνεῶτος Pl.R. 469d
, cf. Grg. 524c, D.43.65; σ. νεκρόν POxy.51.7
(ii A.D.); νεκρὸν ς. Gal.18(2).93, cf. νεκρός 11.1
; μέγιστον σ... σποδου, = σ. μέγιστον ὃ νῦν σποδός ἐστι, S.El. 758; also later, Wilcken Chr. 499 (ii/iii A.D.).

2 the living body, Hes.Op. 540, Batr.44, Thgn.650, Pi.O.6.56, P.8.82, Hdt.1.139, etc.; δόμοι καὶ σώματα A.Th. 896
(lyr.); γενναῖος τῷ ς. S.Ph.51; εὔρωστος τὸ ς. X.HG6.1.6; τὸ σ. σῴζειν or - εσθαι save one's life, D.22.55, Th.1.136; διασῴζειν or - εσθαι Isoc.6.46
, X.An.5.5.13; περὶ πολλῶν σ. καὶ χρημάτων βουλεύειν Th.1.85
; περὶ τοῦ σ. ἀγωνίζεσθαι for one's life, Lys.5.1; ἔχειν τὸ σ. κακῶς, ὡς βέλτιστα, etc., to be in a bad, a good state of bodily health, X.Mem.3.12.1, 3.12.5.

3 body, opp. spirit ([etym.] εἴδωλον), Pi.Fr. 131; opp. soul ([etym.] ψυχή), Pl.Grg. 493a, Phd. 91d; τὰ τοῦ σ. ἔργα bodily labours, X.Mem. 2.8.2; αἱ τοῦ σ. ἡδοναί, αἱ κατὰ τὸ σ. ἡδ., ib.1.5.6, Pl.R. 328d; τὰ εἰς τὸ σ. τιμήματα bodily punishments, Aeschin.2.139; τὰ εἰς τὸ σ. ἀδικήματα PHal.1.193
(iii B.C.).

4 animal body, opp. plants, Pl.R. 564a (pl.); but of plants, 1 Ep.Cor.15.38.

5 civic rights (like Lat. caput), Lys.23.12; ἄτιμοι τὰ ς. And.1.74; μέρος ἠτιμῶσθαι τοῦ ς. D.51.12.

6 in NT, of the sacramental body of Christ, τοῦτό ἐστι τὸ σ. μου Ev.Matt.26.26
, cf. 1 Ep.Cor.10.16.

b of the body of Christ's church, οἱ πολλοὶ ἓν σ. ἐσμεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ep.Rom.12.5
; ἡ ἐκκλησία ἥτις ἐστὶ τὸ σ. [τοῦ Χριστοῦ] Ep.Eph.1.23.

II periphr., ἀνθρώπου σ. ἓν οὐδέν, = ἄνθρωπος οὐδὲ εἷς, Hdt.1.32; esp. in Trag., σῶμα θηρός, = θήρ, S.OC 1568 (lyr.); τεκέων σώματα, = τέκνα, E.Tr. 201 (lyr.); τὸ σὸν σ., = σύ, Id.Hec. 301; rarely in sg. of many persons, σῶμα τέκνων Id.Med. 1108
(anap.).

2 a person, human being, τὰ πολλὰ σ., = οἱ πολλοί, S.Ant. 676; λευκὰ γήρᾳ ς. E. HF 909 (lyr.); σ. ἄδικα Id.Supp. 223
, cf. Pl.Lg. 908a, PSI 4.359.9 366.7 (iii B.C.), etc.; ἑκάστου τοῦ σώματος, IG12.22.14;
κατὰ σῶμα
per person, PRev.Laws50.9
(iii B.C.); καταστήσαντες τὸ σ. ἀφείσθωσαν τῆς ἐγγύης PMich.Zen.70.12
(iii B.C.); ἐργαζομένη αὑτῇ τῷ ἰδίῳ ς. working for her self, earning her own living, PEnteux.26.7 (iii B.C.); τὰ φίλτατα ς., of children, Aeschin.3.78; freq. of slaves, αἰχμάλωτα ς. D.20.77, IG12(7).386.25 (Amorgos, iii B.C.), SIG588.64 (Milet., ii B.C.), etc.; οἰκετικὰ ς. Lexap.Aeschin.1.16, cf. SIG633.88 (Milet., ii B.C.); δοῦλα Poll.3.78
; ἐλεύθερα ς. X.HG2.1.19, Plb.2.6.6, etc.; later, σῶμα is used abs. for a slave, PHib.1.54.20 (iii B.C.), Plb.12.16.5, Apoc.18.13, etc.; σ. γυναικεῖον, ᾇ ὄνομα.. GDI2154.6
(Delph., ii B.C.); a usage censured by Poll.l.c. and Phryn.355; also of troops, τὴν τῶν σ. σύνταξιν Aen.Tact.1.1
; μηχανήμασιν ἢ σώμασιν ἐναντιοῦσθαι ὧδε Id.32.1
.

III generally, a body, i.e. any corporeal substance, δεῖ αὐτὸ (sc. τὸ ὄν) σ. μὴ ἔχειν Meliss.9
; ἢ μέγεθός ἐστιν ἢ σ. ἐστιν Gorg.3
; σ. ἄψυχον, ἔμψυχον, Pl.Phdr. 245e, cf. Plt. 288e, Arist.Ph. 265b29, al.; ὁ λίθος σ. ἐστι Luc.Vit.Auct.25
; φασὶν οἱ μὲν σ. εἶναι τὸν χρόνον, οἱ δὲ ἀσώματον S.E.M.10.215
; κυκλικὸν ς., of one of the spheres, Jul.Or.5.162b, al.; τὸ πέμπτον ς. the fifth element, Philol.12, Placit.1.3.22, Jul.Or.4.132c; metallic substance, Olymp. Alch.p.71 B.

2 Math., figure of three dimensions, solid, opp. a surface, etc., Arist.Top. 142b24, Metaph. 1020a14, al.

IV the body or whole of a thing, esp. of complete parts of the body, τὸ σ. τῶν νεφρῶν Id.HA 497a9
; τὰ σ. τῶν αἰσθητηρίων Id.GA 744b24
; τὸ σ. τῆς γαστρός, τῆς κοιλίας, Gal.15.667,806; σ. παιδοποιόν Ael.NA17.42
: generally, the whole body or frame of a thing, ὑπὸ σώματι γᾶς A.Th. 947
(lyr.); τὸ σ. τοῦ παντός, τοῦ κόσμου, Pl.Ti. 31b. 32c; ὕδωρ, ποταμοῦ ς. Chaerem.17; τὸ σ. τῆς πίστεως the body of the proof, i.e. arguments, Arist.Rh. 1354a15; τῆς λέξεως Longin.Rh.p.188
H.; of a body of writings, Cic.Att.2.1.4; text of a document, opp. ὑπογραφή, BGU187.12 (ii A.D.), cf. PFay.34.20 (ii A.D.); of a will, POxy.494.30 (ii A.D.).

2 ξύλα σώματα logs, opp. κλάδοι, POxy.1738.3 (iii A.D.); σ. μέγα περσέας CPHerm. 7 ii 27
, cf. iii 8 (iii A.D.).

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > σῶμα
11 φέρω

φέρω ([dialect] Locr. [full] φάρω [ᾰ], IG9(1).334.5 (Oeanthea, v. B.C.)), only [tense] pres. and [tense] impf. (late 1 [tense] aor. [ per.] 3pl.

A ἤφεραν IG3.1379
), Il.21.458, etc.: [dialect] Ep. forms, [ per.] 2pl. imper. φέρτε Il.9.171
; [ per.] 2sg. subj. φέρῃσθα Call.Dian. 144
; [ per.] 3sg. subj. φέρῃσι Il.18.308
, Od.5.164, al.; [dialect] Ep. inf. φερέμεν Il.9.411
, al.: [tense] impf. ἔφερον, [dialect] Ep. φέρον 3.245
; also φέρεσκε, φέρεσκον ([ per.] 3pl.), Od.9.429, 10.108.

II [tense] fut. οἴσω Il.7.82
, etc.; [dialect] Dor. οἰσῶ Theoc.3.11
; [ per.] 1pl. οἰσεῦμες Id.15.133
; [ per.] 3pl. ηοίσοντι Tab.Heracl.1.150: the foll. act. forms are not [tense] fut. in sense, imper. οἶσε Od.22.106
, 481, Ar.Ach. 1099, 1101, 1122, Ra. 482; οἰσέτω Il.19.173
, Od.8.255; [ per.] 3pl. οἰσόντων Antim.15
; inf. οἴσειν Pi.P.4.102
, [dialect] Ep. οἰσέμεν Od.3.429
, οἰσέμεναι Il.3.120
, Od.8.399, etc.: [tense] aor. 1 inf. οἶσαι Ph.1.611
codd. ( ἀν-οῖσαι is prob. in Hdt.1.157):—[voice] Med., [tense] fut. οἴσομαι Il.22.217
, S.El. 969, etc. (in pass. sense, E.Or. 440, X.Oec.18.6; so [dialect] Dor. οἰσεῖται Archim.Fluit.1.7
, al.): [tense] fut. [voice] Pass. οἰσθήσομαι D.44.45
, Arist. Ph. 205a13, Archim.Fluit.1.3, al., ([etym.] ἐξ-) E.Supp. 561:—[voice] Pass., [tense] pf. προοῖσται Luc.Par.2
; cf. οἰστέον, οἰστός ([etym.] ἀν-οιστός).

III from ἐνεγκ- (not found in Hom. or Hdt., exc. as v.l. in Il.19.194, but in Pi.O.13.66, I.8(7).21, ([etym.] προς-) Id.P.9.36, also B.16.62, and normal in [dialect] Att. and Trag., also in codd.Hp., Epid.1.1.2, al.) come [tense] aor. 1 ἤνεγκα, and [tense] aor. 2 ἤνεγκον:—Indic., [ per.] 1sg. ἤνεγκον S.OC 521
(lyr.), 964, Ar.Ra. 1299, Th. 742, Lys. 944, ([etym.] δι-) Isoc.18.59, but ἤνεγκα S.El. 13
, E. Ion38, Aeschin.2.4, and in compos. with Preps.; [ per.] 2sg. always ἤνεγκας Ar.Av. 540
(lyr.), ([etym.] ἐξ-) S.Tr. 741 (in Ar.Th. 742, δέκα μῆνας αὔτ' ἐγὼ ἤνεγκον is answd. by ἤνεγκας σύ;); [ per.] 3sg. ἤνεγκε, common to both forms; dual δι-ηνεγκάτην Pl.Lg. 723b
; pl. always ἠνέγκαμεν, -ατε, -αν ([ per.] 3pl. ἀπ-ήνενκαν IG22.1620.37
, al., once ἀπ-ήνεγκον ib. 1414.2; δι-ηνέγκομεν is f.l. in X.Oec.9.8): imper., [ per.] 2sg. ἔνεγκε E. Heracl. 699
, Ar.Eq. 110, X.Mem.3.6.9 ( ἔνεγκον cj. Pors. in Anaxipp. 8); [ per.] 3sg. ἐνεγκάτω Ar. Pax 1149
(troch.), Th. 238, Pl.Phd. 116d, ([etym.] προς-) X.Smp.5.2; but ἐξ-ενεγκέτω IG12.63.33
, 76.61; [dialect] Dor. [ per.] 3pl. ἐνεγκόντω ib.5 (1).26.16 (Amyclae, ii/i B. C.); [ per.] 2pl. ἐξ-ενέγκατε Ar.Ra. 847
: subj. ἐνέγκω common to both forms: opt., [ per.] 1sg. ἐνέγκαιμι E.Hipp. 393
, Pl.Cri. 43c: [ per.] 3sg. ἐνέγκαι (cod.A, but - κοι cod.Laur.) S.Tr. 774, but ἐνέγκοι Id.Fr.84
(anap.), Pl.R. 330a, ([etym.] ξυν-) Th.6.20, etc.; [ per.] 2pl. ἐνέγκαιτε ( ἐνέγκατε codd.) E.Heracl. 751 (lyr.): inf. ἐνεγκεῖν A.Supp. 766
, S.OC 1599, IG22.40.18, etc., ([etym.] προς-) Pi.P.9.36, Hp.VM15; Hellenistic ἐνέγκαι Arist.Oec. 1349a27
([etym.] εἰς-), PAmh.2.30.35 (ii B. C.), Ev.Marc. 2.4 ([etym.] προς-), etc., found also in codd.Hp., Aff.3 ([etym.] προς-), Nat.Mul.19 ([etym.] δι-): part. ἐνεγκών Pi.I.8(7).21
, S.El. 692, Th.6.56, etc., ἐνέγκας IG22.1361.21
([etym.] εἰς-), 333.4, D.49.51 (and later, Demetr.Com.Nov.1.10 ([etym.] εἰς-), Arist.Oec. 1351a14, etc.; in X. we find ἐξ-ενεγκόντες Mem.1.2.53
, and δι-ενεγκοῦσα, συν-ενεγκόντες, vv. ll. in ib.2.2.5, An.6.5.6):— [voice] Med., only ἠνεγκάμην, Ar.Ec.76 ([etym.] ἐξ-), etc. (exc. imper. ἐνεγκοῦ S.OC 470
); [ per.] 2sg. ἠνέγκω E.Supp. 583
, X.Oec.7.13; [ per.] 3sg. ἠνέγκατο S.Tr. 462
, Pl.R. 406b, etc.; [ per.] 1pl. ἠνεγκάμεθα Id. Ion 530b
, ([etym.] προ-) Phlb. 57a; inf. εἰς-ενέγκασθαι Isoc.15.188
: part. ἐνεγκάμενος Aeschin.1.131
, ([etym.] ἀπ-) X.Ages.6.2.

IV from ἐνεικ- comes [tense] aor. 1 ἤνεικα, found mostly in [dialect] Ion. (but not in codd. Hp.), [dialect] Ep. and Lyr., also at Cos (v. infr.) and implied elsewh. in pass. forms (v. infr. v):—the endings are those of [tense] aor. 1, exc. in imper. ἔνεικε Od.21.178
, inf. ἐνεικέμεν (v.l. ἐνεγκέμεν) Il.19.194, ἐνείκην (v. infr.), and part. μετ-ενεικών, ἐξενικοῦσι (v. infr.), cf. συνενείκομαι:—[ per.] 1sg. ἀν-ένεικα Od.11.625
; [ per.] 2sg. ἀπ-ένεικας Il.14.255
; [ per.] 3sg. ἤνεικε Od.18.300
, al., Hdt.2.146, [dialect] Ep. ἔνεικε Il.15.705
, al.; [ per.] 1pl. ἐνείκαμεν Od.24.43
; [ per.] 3pl. ἤνεικαν Hdt.3.30
, [dialect] Ep. ἔνεικαν Il.9.306
; imper. [ per.] 2sg. ἔνεικον Anacr.62.3
; [ per.] 2pl., ἐνείκατε Od. 8.393
; [ per.] 3pl. ἐνεικάντων Schwyzer 688
B 3 (Chios, v B. C.); inf. ἐνεῖκαι Il.18.334
, Pi.P.9.53, Hdt.1.32; ἐνεικέμεν (v. supr.); [dialect] Aeol. ἐνείκην Alc.Oxy.1788
Fr.15ii 20; part. ἐνείκας Il.17.39
, ([etym.] ἀν-) Hdt.2.23; μετ-ενεικών Abh.Berl.Akad.1928(6).22
(Cos, iii B. C.):—[voice] Med., [ per.] 3sg. ἀν-ενείκατο Il.19.314
; [ per.] 3pl. ἠνείκαντο 9.127
, Hdt.1.57, ([etym.] ἐς-) 7.152; part. ἐνεικάμενος Alc.35.4
.

2 [tense] aor. 1 ἤνῐκα is found in the foll. dialect forms: [ per.] 3sg. ἤνικε IG42(1).121.110
(Epid., iv B. C.); ἤνικεν SIG239
Bi11 (Delph., iv B. C.); ἀν-ήνικε IG4.757A12
, al. (Troezen, ii B. C.); ἀπ-ήνικε ib.42(1).103.16, al. (Epid., iv B. C.); but ἤνῑκε is prob. written for ἤνεικε in IG4.801.3 (Troezen, vi B. C.); [ per.] 1pl. ἀν-ηνίκαμες [ῐ] GDI 3591b21 ([place name] Calymna); [ per.] 3pl. ἤνικαν SIG239
Bi 17 (Delph., iv B. C.), IG 12(2).15.15 (Mytil., iii B. C.); [ per.] 3sg. subj. ἐνίκει Berl.Sitzb.1927.161
([place name] Cyrene); ἐς-ενίκη, and inf. ἐς-ένικαι, IG12(2).645b43,39 (Nesus, iv B. C.); part. (dat. pl.) ἐξ-ενικοῦσι IG4.823.49
(Troezen, iv B. C.); so in later Gr., εἰς-ήνικα Supp.Epigr.7.381
,382 (Dura-Europos, iii A. D.); ἤνιγκα ib.383 (ibid., iii A. D.):—[voice] Med., part. ἐξ-ε[νικ]άμενος IG12
(2).526a5 (Eresus, iv B. C.).

b [dialect] Boeot. [tense] aor. 1 in [ per.] 3pl. εἴνιξαν IG7.2418.24
(Thebes, iv B. C.); [ per.] 1sg. ἤνειγξα Hdn.Gr.2.374.

V other tenses: [tense] pf. ἐνήνοχα D.21.108
, 22.62, ([etym.] ἐξ-) Luc.Pr.Im.15,17, ([etym.] μετ-) Pl.Criti. 113a, ([etym.] συν-) v. l. in X.Mem.3.5.22:—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut. ἐνεχθήσομαι Arist.Ph. 205b12
, Archim.Fluit.2.2, al., ([etym.] ἐπ-) Th.7.56, ([etym.] κατ-) Isoc.13.19: [tense] aor. ἠνέχθην X.An.4.7.12
and freq. in compds.; [dialect] Ion. ἀπ-ηνείχθην Hdt.1.66
, etc.; ([etym.] περι-) ib.84; [ per.] 3pl. written ἠνείχτθησαν in Schwyzer 707B9 (Ephesus, vi B. C.); [dialect] Dor. part. ἐξ-ενειχθείς IG42(1).121.115
(Epid., iv B. C.); Hellenistic ἐνεγχθείς PCair.Zen.327.42
(iii B. C.), ([etym.] συμπερι-) IPE12.32A31,78, B70 (Olbia, iii B. C.); in dialects, [ per.] 3sg. indic. ἀπ-ηνίχθη IG42(1).103.111
(Epid., iv B. C.); [ per.] 3sg. subj. ἐξενιχθῇ ib.12(5).593 A23 (Ceos, v B. C.), Abh.Berl.Akad.1928(6).21 (Cos, iii B. C.); [dialect] Boeot. ἐν-ενιχθεῖ IG7.3172.150
(Thespiae, iii B. C.); part. (neut.) ἐπ-ενιχθέν Abh.Berl.Akad.1928(6).53
(Telos, iv B. C., ined.); [dialect] Att. [tense] pf. ἐνήνεγμαι, ἐνήνεκται Pl.R. 584d
, εἰς-ενήνεκται E. Ion 1340
; ἀν-ενήνεγκται IG12.91.4
; ἐπαν-ενήνειγκται ib.22.1607a7; [dialect] Ion. ἐξ-ενηνειγμένος Hdt.8.37
; [dialect] Att. [tense] plpf. προς-ενήνεκτο X.HG4.3.20
; part. κατ-, μετ-ενηνεγμένος Plb.10.30.2
, Str.13.1.12. (With φέρω cf. Lat.fero, OE. beran, Skt. bhárati 'bear'; οἴσω is of uncertain origin; ἐνεγκ- is prob. redupl. ἐγκ- ( ἐνεκ- in [voice] Pass. forms and in δουρηνεκής, etc.), cogn. with Skt. náśati 'attain,' Lat. nanciscor, Lith. nèšti 'carry, bear'; ἐνεικ- ([etym.] ἐνῐκ-) is of uncertain origin; the glosses ἐνέεικαν· ἤνεγκαν, and ἐνεείκω· ἐνέγκω (Hsch.) are not corroborated.)

A [voice] Act.,

I bear or carry a load, ἐν ταλάροισι φέρον μελιηδέα καρπόν Il.18.568
; μέγα ἔργον, ὃ οὐ δύο γ' ἄνδρε φέροιεν 5.303
; ἦγον μὲν μῆλα, φέρον δ' εὐήνορα οἶνον Od.4.622
; χοάς A.Ch.15
; φ. ἐπ' ὤμοις S.Tr. 564
; χερσὶν φ. Id.Ant. 429
; φ. ὅπλα βραχίονι E.Hec.14
; bear (as a device) on one's shield, A.Th. 559, etc.; γαστέρι κοῦρον φ., of a pregnant woman, Il.6.59; φ. ὑπὸ ζώνην or ζώνης ὕπο, A.Ch. 1000(992), E.Hec. 762: in Trag. stronger than ἔχω, ἁγνὰς αἵματος χεῖρας φ. to have hands clean from blood, E.Hipp. 316 (v.l. φορεῖς) ; ἀλαὸν ὄμμα φέρων Id.Ph. 1531
(lyr.); γλῶσσαν εὔφημον φ. A.Ch. 581
, cf. Supp. 994; καλὸν φ. στόμα S.Fr. 930
codd. (nisi leg. φορῇ) ; ἄψοφον βάσιν φ. Id.Tr. 967
(lyr.).

II bear, convey, with collat. notion of motion, freq. in Hom., πῇ δὴ.. τόξα φέρεις; Od.21.362
; πρόσω φ. ib. 369; εἴσω φέρω σ' ἐντεῦθεν Ar.V. 1444
, cf. Pl.Lg. 914b; πόδες φέρον Il.6.514
; πέδιλα τά μιν φέρον 24.341
, etc.; of horses, 2.838; ἵππω.. ἅρμα οἴσετον 5.232
, etc.; of ships, Od.16.323, cf. Il.9.306; τὰ σώματα τῶν ζῴων συνέστηκεν ἐκ τοῦ φέροντος καὶ τοῦ φερομένου Diocl. Fr.17
.

b of persons, bring to bear, μένος or μένος χειρῶν ἰθύς τινος φέρειν hurl one's strength right upon or against him, Il.16.602, 5.506; φ. τὴν ὀργήν, τὴν αἰτίαν ἐπί τινα, Plb.21.31.8, 33.11.2.

c lead, direct, τὴν πόλιν Plu.Luc.6
.

2 of wind, bear along, [πνοιὴ Ζεφύρου] φ. νῆάς τε καὶ αὐτούς Od.10.26
; [σχεδίην] ἄνεμοι φέρον ἔνθα καὶ ἔνθα 5.330
, cf. 4.516, Il.19.378, etc.; ἐπέλασσε φέρων ἄνεμος Od.3.300
, 7.277, cf. 5.111, etc.: abs., ὁ βορέας ἔξω τοῦ Πόντου εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα φέρει is fair for Greece, X.An.5.77: metaph., ὅπῃ ἂν ὁ λόγος ὥσπερ πνεῦμα φ. Pl.R. 394d
; φ. τινὰ φρένες δύσαρκτοι A.Ch. 1023
, cf. Th. 687 (lyr.):—[voice] Pass., v. infr. B.

III endure, suffer, λυγρά Od.18.135
; ἄτην Hdt.1.32
; χαλινόν, ζυγόν, A.Ag. 1066, 1226; πημονάς, τύχας, Id.Pers. 293, E.Or. 1024; ξυμφοράς Th.2.60
; τὰς οὐ προσηκούσας ἁμαρτίας Antipho 3.2.10
; also of food, ἐσθίουσι πλείω ἢ δύνανται φ. X.Cyr.8.2.21
; of strong wine, bear, admit, καὶ τὰ τρία φέρων καλῶς, i.e. three parts of water, instead of ἴσον ἴσῳ, Ar.Eq. 1188, cf. Ach. 354; so τὰς ἐπιδείξεις.. φέρουσιν αὐτοῦ (sc. Ἰσοκράτους) οἱ λόγοι, τοὺς δὲ ἐν ἐκκλησίαις.. ἀγῶνας οὐχ ὑπομένουσι D.H.Isoc.2
: metaph., ᾗ φέρειν πέφυκε Pl.Ti. 48a
.

2 freq. with modal words, πήματα κόσμῳ φ. Pi.P.3.82
; σιγῇ κακά E.Hec. 738
; ὀργῇ τὸν πόλεμον Th.1.31
; θυμῷ φ. Id.5.80
; χαρᾷ φ. τι J.AJ19.1.13
: esp. with an Adv., [ὕβριν] ῥηϊδίως φ. Hes.Op. 215
; δεινῶς, βαρέως, πικρῶς, χαλεπῶς φέρειν τι, bear a thing impatiently, take it ill or amiss, Hdt.2.121.γ, 5.19, E. Ion 610, Pl.R. 330a, etc.; δυσπετῶς, βαρυστόνως φ., A.Pr. 752, Eu. 794; προθύμως φέρειν τὸν πόλεμον to be zealous about the war, Hdt.9.18,40; προθύμως τὰ τοῦ πολέμου ἔφερον Th.8.36
; αἶσαν φέρειν ὡς ῥᾷστα A.Pr. 104
; συμφορὴν ὡς κουφότατα φ. Hdt.1.35
; ῥᾳδίως φ. Pl.Grg. 522d
, al.; εὐπετῶς φ. S.Fr. 585
, X.Mem.2.1.6; εὐπόρως ( εὐφόρως Brunck) ἐνεγκεῖν S.Ph. 873
; εὐμενῶς, εὐχερῶς φ., D.Ep. 3.45, Pl.R. 474e; these phrases are used mostly c. acc. rei; also c. part., βαρέως ἤνεικε ἰδών Hdt.3.155
, cf. Ar.Th. 385, etc.; φ. ἐλαφρῶς.. λαβόντα ζυγόν Pi.P.2.93
; ῥᾳδίως φέρεις ἡμᾶς ἀπολείπων Pl. Phd. 63a
: c. gen., τοῦ ἐνδεοῦς χαλεπώτερον φ. Th.1.77
, cf. 2.62; ἐπί τινι, χαλεπῶς φ. ἐπὶ τῇ πολιορκίᾳ X.HG7.4.21
, cf. Isoc.12.232; πράως ἐπὶ τοῖς γιγνομένοις φ. D.58.55
: c. dat. only, βαρέως φέρειν τοῖς παροῦσι, τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ, X.An.1.3.3, HG3.4.9, cf. 5.1.29; later, χαλεπῶς φ. διά τι, πρός τι, D.S.17.111, Jul.Or.1.17c codd.

IV bring, fetch, εἰ.. θεὸς αὐτὸν ἐνείκαι Od.21.196
; φ. ἄποινα Il.24.502
; ἄρνε 3
, 120, cf. Sapph.95; ὕδωρ, οἶνον, Anacr.62.1; ἔντεα Il.18.191
; τόξα Od.21.359
; κνημῖδας A.Th. 675
; δᾷδα Ar.Nu. 1490
, etc.; γῆν τε καὶ ὕδωρ Hdt.7.131
:—[voice] Med., carry or bring with one, or for one's own use, ποδάνιπτρα Od.19.504
; οἶνον Alc.35
, cf. Hdt.4.67, 7.50, X. Mem.3.14.1; φερνὰς δόμοις E.Andr. 1282
; fetch, Od.2.410; χοὰς ἐκ κρήνης S.OC 470
.

2 bring, offer, present, δῶρα Od.8.428
, etc.; μέλος Pi.P.2.3
; χοάς τινι A.Ch. 487
; φ. πέπλον δώρημά τινι S.Tr. 602
; πρός τινα δῶρα X.An.7.3.31
; χάριν τινὶ φ. grant any one a favour, do him a kindness, Il.5.211, Od.5.307, al.; ἐπὶ ἦρα φ. τινί Il.1.572
, Od.3.164, etc.; φ. τισὶ εὐνοίας, ὄνησιν ἀστοῖς, A.Supp. 489, S.OC 287; but after Hom., χάριν τινὶ φ. show gratitude to him, Pi.O.10(11).17; μῆνιν φ. τινί cherish wrath against.. A.Niob. in PSI11.1208.12.

b = ἄγω iv. 1, ἄχρι νῦν καθ' ὥραν ἔτους λέγονται πένθος ἐπὶ Μελεάγρῳ φέρειν Ant.Lib.2.7
; Ἰάλεμος· ὁ ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀπολωλόσιν ἀνίαν φέρων, Suid.:—[voice] Med., τοῦ γονέως ἐφ' ᾧ γε τὸ πένθος φέρεσθε Phalar.Ep.103.1
.

3 bring, produce, cause, [ἀστὴρ] φέρει πυρετὸν βροτοῖσιν Il.22.31
; ὄσσαν.. ἥ τε φ. κλέος ἀνθρώποισι Od.1.283
, cf. 3.204; φ. κακόν, πῆμα, ἄλγεα, etc., work one woe, Il.8.541, Od.12.231, 427, etc.; δηϊοτῆτα φ. bring war, 6.203; ἐπ' ἀλλήλοισι φ. Ἄρηα Il.3.132
, cf. 8.516; πόλεμον Hes.Sc. 150
; θάνατον φ. B.5.134
; τοῦτο εὐδοξίαν σοι οἴσει Pl.Ep. 312c
; τὸ σωθῆναι τὸ ψεῦδος φέρει S.Ph. 109
; τέχναι.. φόβον φέρουσιν μαθεῖν A.Ag. 1135
(lyr.); ὥσπερ τὸ δίκαιον ἔφερε as justice brought with it, brought about, i.e. as was just, no more than just, Hdt.5.58; ἀν' ὄ κα φέρῃ ὁ λόγος ὁ ταμία Φιλοκλέος IG42(1).77.13
(Epid., ii B. C.); of a calculation, yield a result, Vett.Val.349.27; produce, adduce, bring forward, παραδείγματα Isoc.7.6
, etc.; πάσας αἰτίας D.58.22
; ἁρμόττουσαν εἰκόνα Id.61.10
:—[voice] Pass., εἰς τὴν συνηγορίαν.. τοιαῦτά τινα φέρεται Sor.2.3
.

b bring or carry with one, involve, τὸ πᾶν ἡμῖν τοῦ πολέμου φέρουσιν αἱ νέες Hdt.8.62
; οὐ ξύλων ἀγὼν ὁ τὸ πᾶν φέρων ἐστὶ ἡμῖν, ἀλλ' ἀνδρῶν ib. 100.

4 μῦθον φ. τινί bring one word, Il.10.288, 15.202; ἀγγελίην φ. bring a message, ib. 175, Od.1.408; λόγον Pi.P.8.38
; ἐπιστολὰς φ. τινί S.Aj. 781
, cf. Tr. 493; ἐπιστολήν X.Ages.8.3
: hence, tell, announce, πευθώ, φάτιν, A.Th. 370, Ag.9; σαφές τι πρᾶγος Id.Pers. 248
(troch.), cf. Ag. 639, etc.; report, ἀγήν (breakages) PCair.Zen. 15r27 (iii B. C.); φ. κεχωνευκώς reports that he has.., ib.741.26, cf. 147.4, 268.24 (all iii B. C.); enter, book a payment made, PBaden47.12:—[voice] Med., λόγους φ. E.Supp. 583
; but also ἀγγελίας ἔπος οἴσῃ thou shalt have it brought thee, receive, Id.Ph. 1546 (lyr.); μαντήϊα.. φέρονται Hes.Fr.134.9
:—[voice] Pass., θάνατον ἀνάγκη φέρεσθαι τοῦ διαθεμένου the death of the testator must be announced, Ep.Heb.9.16.

5 pay something due or owing, φόρον τέσσαρα τάλαντα φ. pay as a tax or tribute, Th.4.57, cf. IG12.57.9, Pl.Plt. 298a, PCair.Zen.467.7 (iii B. C.); δασμόν X.An.5.5.10
; σύνοδον φ. subscribe to the expense of a meeting, IG22.1012.14, 1326.6; χρήματα πᾶσι τάξαντες φ. Th.1.19
; μισθὸν φ. X.Cyr.1.6.12
(but usu., receive, draw, pay, μισθὸν δύο δραχμὰς τῆς ἡμέρας Ar.Ach.66
; τέτταρας τῆς ἡμέρας ὀβολοὺς φέρων Men.357
; αἱ νῆες μισθὸν ἔφερον Th. 3.17
, cf. X.An.1.3.21, Oec.1.6); φ. ἐννέα ὀβολοὺς τῆς μνᾶς τόκους Lys.Fr.1.2
, cf. Lycurg.23; also of property, bring in, yield as rent, φ. μίσθωσιν τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ Is.5.35
.

6 apply, refer, τι ἐπί τι Pl. Ti. 37e
, Chrm. 163d, R. 478b, cf. Plb.3.36.7, al.; φ. τὰ πράγματα ἐπί τινα confer powers upon, Id.2.50.6.

7 ψῆφον φ. give one's vote, A.Eu. 674, 680, And.1.2, Is.11.18; ψῆφος καθ' ἡμῶν οἴσεται ([voice] Pass.) E.Or. 440; περὶ ταύτης ἡ ψῆφος οἰσθήσεται D.44.45
; ὑπὲρ ἀγῶνος Lycurg.7
, cf. 11: hence φ. τινά appoint or nominate to an office, φ. χορηγόν D.20.130
, 39.7, cf. Pl.Lg. 753d, Arist.Pol. 1266a10:—[voice] Pass., ibid.; ὅπως φέρηται ἐν τῷ στρατιωτικῷ UPZ15.10
(ii B. C.); τῶν φερομένων ἐν Κλεοπάτρᾳ κληρούχων PRein.10.13
, al. (ii B. C.); φερομένου μου ἐν τῇ συνοχῇ since I am enrolled in prison, i.e. am in prison, BGU1821.21 (i B. C.):—[voice] Med., choose, adopt, ταύταν φ. βιοτάν E.Andr. 785
(lyr.).

V bring forth, produce, whether of the earth or of trees, φ. ἄρουρα φάρμακα Od.4.229
; ἄμπελοι φ. οἶνον 9.110
; [νῆσος] φ. ὥρια πάντα ib. 131, cf. Hes.Op. 117; [οὐ] γῆ καρπὸν ἔφερε Hdt.6.139
; γύαι φ. βίοτον A.Fr.196.5
, cf. Pi.N.11.41, E.Hec. 593, etc.: abs., bear fruit, be fruitful, εὖτ' ἂν τάδε πάντα φέρῃσι h.Merc.91
; ἡ γῆ ἔφερε ( καρπόν add. codd. quidam) Hdt.5.82; αἱ ἄμπελοι φέρουσιν X.Oec.20.4
; also of living beings, τόπος ἄνδρας φ. Pl.Ti. 24c
; ἤνεγκεν αὐτὸν Λαοδίκεια Philostr. VS1.25.1
;
ἡ ἐνεγκοῦσα
one's country, Hld.2.29
, Lib.Or. 2.66, al., Chor.p.81 B., Lyd.Mag.3.26, dub. in Supp.Epigr.4.439 (Milet.) without Art. (also ἡ ἐνεγκαμένη Jul.Ep. 202
); or Mother Earth, M.Ant.4.48: generally, create, form, Πηνειὸς Τέμπη φ. Philostr.Im.1.25
; [τὰ βρέφη] ἄρχεται φέρειν τοὺς ὀδόντας Aët.4.9
; φ. τοὺς κυνόδοντας Gp.16.1.14
.

VI carry off or away, Κῆρες ἔβαν θανάτοιο φέρουσαι Il.2.302
; φ. τινὰ ἐκ πόνου 14.429
, 17.718, etc.; of winds, [ἔπος] φέροιεν ἀναρπάξασαι ἄελλαι may the winds sweep away the word, Od.8.409; of a river, Hdt.1.189:—[voice] Med., carry off with one, Od.15.19.

2 carry away as booty or prize, ἔναρα, τεύχεα, Il.6.480, 17.70; αἶγα λέοντε φ. 13.199
; δεῖπνον φ., of Harpies, A.Eu.51; ἐνέχυρα βίᾳ φ. Antipho 6.11
; in the phrase φέρειν καὶ ἄγειν (cf. ἄγω 1.3
), IG12.69.19; φέροντα ἢ ἄγοντα Lex ap.D.23.60; αἴ κα.. ἄγῃ ἢ φέρῃ Leg.Gort.5.37
; ἥρπαζον καὶ ἔφερον Lys.20.17
; κείρων ἢ φέρων IG12(9).90.10
(Tamynae, iv B. C.); αἴ τίς κα.. φέρει τι τῶν ἐν τᾷ ἱαρᾷ γᾷ Tab.Heracl.1.128
; of a divorced wife, αἰ δέ τι ἄλλο φέροι τῶ ἀνδρός, πέντε στατῆρανς καταστασεῖ κὤτι κα φέρῃ αὐτόν Leg.Gort.3.2
; φέρειν alone, rob, plunder, θεῶν ἱερά E.Hec. 804
; ἀλλήλους Th.1.7
; abs., SIG38.23 (Teos, v B. C.):—[voice] Pass., φερόμενοι Βακχῶν ὕπο E.Ba. 759
:—[voice] Med. in same sense, ἔναρα Il.22.245
; πελέκεας οἶκόνδε φ. 23.856
; ἀτερπέα δαῖτα Od.10.124
, cf. 15.378.

3 carry off, gain, esp. by toil or trouble, win, achieve, both [voice] Act. and [voice] Med., ἤ κε φέρῃσι μέγα κράτος ἦ κε φεροίμην Il.18.308
; φέρειν τρίποδα Hes.Op. 657
; τἀπινίκια S.El. 692
; τιμήν Ar. Av. 1278
; τἀριστεῖα, τὰ νικητήρια, Pl.R. 468c, Lg. 657e; πέρα.. οὐδὲν φ. S.OC 651
; ἐκ σοῦ πάντ' ἄνευ φόβου φ. Id.OT 590
; τίς.. πλέον τᾶς εὐδαιμονίας φέρει ἤ .. ; ib. 1190 (lyr.), cf. El. 1088 (lyr.); in bad sense, μείζω τὴν αἰσχύνην φ. Pl.Lg. 671e
: also, receive one's due, φ. χάριν S.OT 764
; ὡς τοῦτό γ' ἔρξας δύο φέρῃ δωρήματα Id.Ph. 117
; μισθὸν φέρειν (v. supr. iv.5); of a priest's perquisites, φέρει ὁ ἱαρεὺς γέρη σκέλη κτλ. BMus.Inscr.968
A 9 ([place name] Cos), cf. IG12.24.10, al., SIG56.35 (Argos, v B. C.):—[voice] Med. (v. ad init.), win for oneself, κῦδος οἴσεσθαι Il.22.217
; δέπας, τεύχεα, carry off as a prize, 23.663, 809, al.; ἀέθλια or ἄεθλον φ. carry off, win a prize, 9.127, 23.413; τὰ πρῶτα φέρεσθαι (sc. ἄεθλα) 23.275, 538; οὐ σμικρὸν ἆθλον τῆς ἐρωτικῆς μανίας φέρονται Pl.Phdr. 256d
; of perquisites, τὸ.. σκέλος τοὶ ἱαρομνάμονες φερόσθω (i. e. φερούσθω from Φερόνσθω) IG42(1).40.13 (Epid., v/iv B. C.): hence οὐ τὰ δεύτερα Hdt.8.104
; πλέον φέρεσθαι get more or a larger share for onself, gain the advantage over any one, τινος Hdt.7.211, cf. S.OT 500 (lyr.), E.Hec. 308; ταῦτα ἐπὶ σμικρόν τι ἐφέροντο τοῦ πολέμου this they received as a small help towards the war, Hdt.4.129; ἠνείκατο παρὰ Ἐγεσταίων τὰ οὐδεὶς ἄλλος 5.47
; ἴδια κέρδεα προσδεκόμενοι παρὰ τοῦ Πέρσεω οἴσεσθαι 6.100
; χάριν φέρεσθαι παρ' ὑμῶν And.2.9
; φ. τὴν ἀπέχθειαν αὐτῶν Antipho 3.4.2
; ὀνείδη Pl.Lg. 762a
; εὐσέβειαν ἐκ πατρὸς οἴσῃ S.El. 969
; δάκρυ πρὸς τῶν κλυόντων A.Pr. 638
; ἀπό τινος βοσκάν Id.Eu. 266
(lyr.); ἐξ ἀνανδρίας τοὔνομα Aeschin.1.131
: generally, get for one's own use and profit, take and carry away, esp. to one's own home, τοῦ.. πάμπρωτα παρ' ἀγλαὰ δῶρα φέροιο Il.4.97
: hence φέρειν or φέρεσθαι is often used pleon., v. infr. xi.

VII abs., of roads or ways, lead to a place, ὁδὸν φέρουσαν ἐς ἱρόν Hdt.2.122
, cf. 138; τὴν φέρουσαν ἄνω (sc. ὁδόν) Id.9.69; τῆς μὲν ἐς ἀριστερὴν ἐπὶ Καρίης φ., τῆς δὲ ἐς δεξιὴν ἐς Σάρδις Id.7.31
; ἐπὶ Σοῦσα X.An.3.5.15
; ἁπλῆ οἶμος εἰς Ἅιδου φέρει A.Fr. 239
; ἡ ἐς Θήβας φέρουσα ὁδός Th.3.24
(but ἡ ἐπ' Ἀθηνῶν φέρουσα ibid.); also ἡ θύρα ἡ εἰς τὸν κῆπον φ. the door leading to the garden, D.47.53; αἱ εἰς τὴν πόλιν φ. πύλαι, αἱ ἐπὶ τὸ τεῖχος φ. κλίμακες, X.HG7.2.7, cf. PMich.Zen.38.27 (iii B. C.), Plb.10.12.3.

2 of a district or tract of country, stretch, extend to or towards, φέρειν ἐπί or ἐς θάλασσαν Hdt.4.99
; ἐς τὴν μεσόγαιαν ib. 100; πρὸς νότον Id.7.201
; ἡ ἀπὸ δυσμῶν αὐτῆς (sc. τῆς Κιμβρικῆς) καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄλβιν φέρουσα Ptol.Geog.2.11.2
, cf. 3.

b of time, τῇ νυκτὶ τῇ φερούσῃ εἰς τὴν β τοῦ Παχών PPetr.3p
.x (iii B. C.), cf. PTeb.61 (b) 288 (ii B. C.), BGU1832.5 (i B. C.), etc.

3 metaph., lead to or towards, be conducive to, ἐς αἰσχύνην φέρει Hdt.1.10
; τὰ ἐς ἄκεσιν φέροντα Id.4.90
; ἐς βλάβην, ἐς φόβον φέρον, S.OT 517, 991; εἰς ὄκνον E.Supp. 295
: esp. in good sense, tend, conduce to one's interest, ἐπ' ἀμφότερά τοι φέρει (impers.) ταῦτα ποιέειν Hdt.3
. 134; so τὰ πρὸς τὸ ὑγιαίνειν φέροντα X.Mem.4.2.31
; τροφαὶ μέγα φ. εἰς ἀρετάν E.IA 562
(lyr.); μέγα τι οἰόμεθα φέρειν (sc. κοινωνίαν γυναικῶν τε καὶ παίδων) εἰς πολιτείαν Pl.R. 449d
; τὰ καλὰ ἐπιτηδεύματα εἰς ἀρετῆς κτῆσιν φ. ib. 444e, cf. X.Cyr.8.1.42; τοῦτο ἔφερεν αὐτῷ was for his good, M.Ant.5.8.

b point to, refer to a thing, ἐς τί ὑμῖν ταῦτα φαίνεται φέρειν; Hdt.1.120
; φωνὴ φέρουσα πρός τινα addressed to him, Id.1.159; ἐς ἀρηΐους ἀγῶνας φέρον τὸ μαντήϊον Id.9.33
, cf. 6.19; [ὄψις] φέρει ἐπὶ πᾶσαν γῆν refers to.., extends over.., Id.7.19; τὰ ἴχνη τῆς ὑποψίας εἰς τοῦτον φ. point to him, Antipho 2.3.10; πρός τινας Pl.R. 538c
; ταύτῃ <ὁ> νόος ἔφερε Hdt.9.120
; ἡ τοῦ δήμου φέρει γνώμη, ὡς .., the people's opinion inclines to this, that.., Id.4.11; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ αἱ γνῶμαι ἔφερον Th.1.79
: c. inf., τῶν ἡ γνώμη ἔφερε συμβάλλειν whose opinion inclined to giving battle, Hdt.6.110, cf. 5.118; πλέον ἔφερέ οἱ ἡ γνώμη κατεργάσεσθαι his opinion inclined rather to the view.., Hdt.8.100, cf. 3.77.

VIII carry or have in the mouth, i. e. speak of, πολύν τινα ἐν ταῖς διαβολαῖς φέρειν Aeschin.3.223
; use a word, οὐκ οἶδα καθ' ὁποτέρου τούτων οἱ παλαιοὶ τὸ τῆς ζειᾶς ἔφερον ὄνομα Gal.Vict.Att.6
, cf. 7.644, 15.753, 876; record an event, οἱ δευτέρῳ μετὰ τὴν ἔξοδον.. ἔτει φέροντες αὐτήν D.H.1.63
: more freq. in [voice] Pass., πονηρῶς, εὖ, φέρεσθαι, to be ill or well spoken of, X.HG1.5.17, 2.1.6; ἀτίμως ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων φ. Pl.Ep. 328e
; abs., φέρεται [the report] is carried about, i.e. it is said, c. acc. et inf., τοιόνδε φέρεται πρῆγμα γίνεσθαι Hdt.8.104
(v.l.); ἐν χρόνοις φέρεται μνημονευομένοις is recorded as occurring within historical times, Str.1.3.15; ὅτε καὶ Δημόκριτος φέρεται τελευτήσας Sor.Vit.Hippocr.11
; κρίνομεν.. τὰ γραφέντα ὑφ' ἡμῶν προστάγματα ἐν τοῖς ἱεροῖς νόμοις φέρεσθαι παρ' ὑμῖν OGI331.60
(Pergam., ii B. C.);
ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα φέρεται
are in use, Ptol.Geog.7.4.11
; of literary works, to be in circulation, ἐπιστόλιον αὐτοῦ τοιοῦτον φέρεται Plu.2.808a
, cf. 209e, 832d, 833c, al., Jul.Or.6.189b, Gp.2.35.8, Eun.VSp.456 B.; πρόλογοι διττοὶ φέρονται Arg.E.Rh.; ὁ στίχος οὗτος ἔν τισιν οὐ φέρεται Sch.E. Ph. 377, cf. Sch.Il.8.557.

2 of words, φέρεσθαι ἐπί τι to refer to something, A.D.Pron.61.5, Synt.21.14, al.

IX imper. φέρε like ἄγε, as Adv., come, now, well,

1 before another imper., φέρε γὰρ σήμαινε A.Pr. 296
(anap.); φέρ' εἰπὲ δή μοι S.Ant. 534
; φ. δή μοι τόδε εἰπέ Pl.Cra. 385b
; so φέρετε.. πειρᾶσθε Hdt.4.127
.

2 before [ per.] 1sg. or pl. of subj. used imperatively, φέρε ἀκούσω, φέρε στήσωμεν, Hdt.1.11,97; φ. δὲ νῦν.. φράσω Id.2.14
; φέρ' ἴδω, τί δ' ἥσθην; Ar.Ach.4
; φέρε δὴ κατίδω Id. Pax 361
, cf. 959; φ. δὴ ἴδωμεν, φ. δὴ σκεψώμεθα, Pl.Grg. 455a, Prt. 330b, cf. E.Or. 1281 (lyr.), Ph. 276, etc.: less freq. before 2 pers., φέρε.. μάθῃς S.Ph. 300
.

3 before a rhetorical question, φέρε.. τροπαῖα πῶς ἀναστήσεις; E.Ph. 571
; φ. δὴ νῦν.. τί γαμεῖθ' ἡμᾶς; Ar.Th. 788
(anap.), cf. Ach. 541, Pl.R. 348c; φ. μῶν οὐκ ἀνάγκη .. ; Id.Lg. 805d; φ. πρὸς θεῶν πῶς .. ; Id.Grg. 514d; freq. in phrase φέρε γάρ, φέρε τίς γὰρ οὗτος; Ar.Nu. 218
; φ. γὰρ πρὸς τίνας χρὴ πολεμεῖν; Isoc.4.183
, cf. Antipho 5.36; also φ. δή Pl.Grg. 455a
, al.: usu. first in a sentence, but τὴν ἀνδρείαν δὲ φ. τί θῶμεν; Id.Lg. 633c
, etc.

4 φέρε δή, ἐάν πῃ διαλλαχθῶμεν .. come let us see if we can.., Id.Cra. 430a.

5 φέρε c. inf., suppose, grant that.. φ. λέγειν τινά Plu.2.98b
; φ. εἰπεῖν let us say, D.Chr.31.93, 163, Porph.Abst.3.3; οἷον φ. εἰ. Iamb. in Nic.p.47
P., al. ( οἷον φέρε alone, Hierocl. in CA11p.439M.).

X part. neut. τὸ φέρον, as Subst., destiny, fate, τὸ φ. ἐκ θεοῦ [καλῶς] φέρειν [χρή] ye must bear nobly what heaven bears to you, awards you, S.OC 1693 (lyr., codd., sed secl. καλῶς, χρή) ; εἰ τὸ φερον σε φέρει, φέρε καὶ φέρου AP 10.73
(Pall.).

2 part. φέρων in all genders freq. joined with another Verb:

a to express a subsidiary action, φέρων ἔδωκε he brought and gave, Od.22.146; δὸς τῷ ξείνῳ ταῦτα φέρων take this and give it him, 17.345; ἔγχος ἔστησε φέρων brought the spear and placed it, 1.127; σῖτον παρέθηκε φέρουσα ib. 139, al., cf. S.Tr. 622; τοῦτο ἐλθὼν οἴκαδε φέρων τῷ πατρὶ ἔδωκα Pl.Hp.Ma. 282e
, cf. R. 345b; so ὁ μὲν Ἐπίχαρμον.. εἰς δέκα τόμους φέρων συνήγαγεν Porph.Plot. 24
; ἑκάστῃ ἐννεάδι τὰ οἰκεῖα φέρων συνεφόρησα ibid., etc.; sts. translatable by with, ᾤχοντο φέροντες τὰ γράμματα Th.7.8
.

b intr., in pass. sense, to denote unrestrained action, νῦν σε μάλ' οἴω.. φέροντα.. φιλητεύσειν h.Merc. 159
; φέρουσα ἐνέβαλε νηΐ φιλίῃ she went and rammed, rammed full tilt, Hdt.8.87; ὅταν ἐπὶ θάτερ' ὥσπερ εἰς τρυτάνην ἀργύριον προσενέγκῃς, οἴχεται φέρον down it sinks, D.5.12;
τὰ μὲν ἄλλα μέρη τοῦ πολέμου παρῆκαν, φέροντες δὲ παντὶ τῷ στρατεύματι πρὸς αὐτὸν Ἀκράγαντα προσήρεισαν
hurling themselves, Plb.1.17.8
; εἰς τοῦτο φέρων περιέστησε τὰ πράγματα Aeschin.3.82
; ὑπέβαλεν ἑαυτὸν φέρων Θηβαίοις ib.90, cf. 1.175, 3.143,146; in the foll. passages φέρων accompanies a Verb of throwing, giving, entrusting, or dedicating, and expresses wholehearted action, whether wise or unwise; there is always an accus., freq. of the reflex. Pron., governed by the principal Verb (or perh. by φέρων): ἐπεὶ ἐς τοὺς κρατῆρας ἐμαυτὸν φέρων ἐνέβαλον (sc. ὁ Ἐμπεδοκλῆς ) when I went (or took) and threw myself.., Luc.Icar.13, cf. Fug.1, Plu.Comp.Arist. Cat.1, Fab.6, Per.12, Paus.1.30.1, Ael.VH8.14, Frr.10,69, Philostr. VA3.4; τὴν κατασκευὴν.. φέρων ἐδωρήσατο τῇ μητρί D.S.31.27
, cf. Ach.Tat.1.7; σεαυτὸν.. φέρων ἀπημπόληκας Luc.Merc.Cond.24
; τί παθόντες.. τοῖς ἀτέκνοις τῶν γερόντων ἐσποιεῖτε φέροντες αὑτούς; Luc. DMort.6.3
, cf. Ind.19, Laps.22; ταύτῃ (sc. τῇ ὀργῇ) φέρων ὑπέθηκεν ἑαυτόν Plu.Them.24
, cf. Per.7; τούτῳ φέροντες ὑποβάλλουσι τοὺς υἱούς Id.2.4b
, cf. Luc.6, Pomp.27, Ael.VH6.1, Max.Tyr.1.2; προσέθετο φέρων ἑαυτὸν ἐκείνῳ Eun.VS p.456
B., cf.pp.461,465 B., Dam. ap. Suid. s.v. Σεβηριανός; ἀλλὰ σοὶ μὲν, ὦ θεῶν πάτερ, ἐμαυτὸν φέρων ἀναθήσω Jul.Or.7.231b.

3 ἔκκρισις.. ἐκ μικρῶν φέρουσα διαστημάτων occurring at short intervals, Sor.2.45.

XI φέρειν, φέρεσθαι are freq. added epexegetically to δίδωμι and similar Verbs, δῶκεν.. τρίποδα φέρειν Il.23.513
, cf. 16.665, 17.131; τεύχεα.. δότω φέρεσθαι 11.798
, cf. Od.21.349, E.Tr. 419, 454(troch.).

B [voice] Pass. is used in most of the above senses:—special cases:

I to be borne or carried involuntarily, esp. to be borne along by waves or winds, to be swept away, φέρεσθαι ἀνέμοισι, θυέλλῃ, Od.9.82, 10.54, cf. A.Pers. 276 (lyr.), etc.; πᾶν δ' ἦμαρ φερόμην, of Hephaestus falling from Olympus, Il.1.592; ἧκε φέρεσθαι he sent him flying, 21.120; ἧκα πόδας καὶ χεῖρε φέρεσθαι I let go my hands and feet, let them swing free [in the leap], Od.12.442, cf. 19.468; μέγα φέρεται πὰρ σέθεν, of a word uttered, comes with weight, Pi.P.1.87; βίᾳ φέρεται Pl.Phdr. 254a
; πνεῦμα φερόμενον Id.R. 496d
; τὸ πνεῦμα κατὰ τὰς ἀναπνοὰς εἴσω τε καὶ ἔξω φέρεται Gal.16.520
; ῥεῖν καὶ φέρεσθαι Pl.Cra. 411c
; φ. εἰς τὸν Τάρταρον Id.Phd. 114b
; simply, move, go, ποῖ γᾶς φέρομαι; S.OT 1309
(anap.); οὐκ οἶσθ' ὅποι γῆς οὐδ' ὅποι γνώμης φέρῃ Id.El. 922
, cf. E.Hec. 1076 (anap.), etc.; of the excreta, τὰ φερόμενα.. εἰ μὲν αὐτομάτως φέροιτο Philum.
ap. Aët.9.12; πρὸς κοιλίαν φερομένην Aët.4.19
: metaph., εἰς τὸ λοιδορεῖν φέρῃ E.Andr. 729
; πρὸς τὴν τοῦ κάλλους φύσιν Pl.Phdr. 254b
, cf. X.Mem.2.1.4; ἐπὶ ταὐτὸ φέρονται have the same tendency, Phld.Vit.p.42 J.; ἀπὸ δογμάτων καὶ ἀπὸ θεωρημάτων φ. Vett.Val.238.30
; of veins, to be conveyed, Gal.15.531; also ἡ φερομένη οὐσία (the doctrine of) universal motion, Pl.Tht. 177c; οἱ φερόμενοι θεοί the moving gods, i. e. the stars and planets, Plot.2.3.9.

2 freq. in part. with another Verb of motion, φερόμενοι ἐσέπιπτον ἐς τοὺς Αἰγινήτας they fell into their hands with a rush, at full speed, Hdt.8.91; ἀπὸ.. ἐλπίδος ᾠχόμην φερόμενος Pl.Phd. 98b
; ἧκε φερόμενος εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ φύσιν Aeschin.3.89
.

3 of voluntary and impulsive motion, ἰθὺς φέρεται μένει Il.20.172
; ὁμόσε τινὶ φέρεσθαι come to blows with him, X.Cyn.10.21; δρόμῳ φ. πρός τινα Id.HG4.8.37
; φυγῇ εἰς ἑαυτοὺς φ. Id.Cyr.1.4.23
; ἥξει ἐπ' ἐκεῖνον τὸν λόγον φερόμενος Lycurg.59
; φερόμενος ὑπ' ὀργῆς D.H.Comp.18
.

II metaph., καλῶς, κακῶς φέρεσθαι, of things, schemes, etc., turn out, prosper well or ill, succeed or fail, οὔτ' ἂν.. νόμοι καλῶς φέροιντ' ἄν S.Aj. 1074
; κακῶς φ. τὰ ἑαυτοῦ X.HG3.4.25
; εὖ φέρεται ἡ γεωργία Id.Oec.5.17
; ὀλιγώρως ἔχειν καὶ ἐᾶν ταῦτα φέρεσθαι to neglect things and let them take their course, D.8.67; less freq. of persons, fare well or ill, εὖ φερόμενος ἐν στρατηγίαις being generally successful.., Th.5.16, cf. 15; καλῶς φερόμενος τὸ καθ' ἑαυτόν Id.2.60
; φ. ἐν προτιμήσει παρά τινι D.S.33.5
; χεῖρον φερομένη παρὰ τἀδελφῷ J.AJ16.7.6
; of euphonious writing, σύνθεσις καλῶς φερομένη Phld.Po.5.26
.

2 behave, ὑποκριτικῶς, ἀστάτως, etc., Vett.Val.38.20, 197.8, al.

3 have an opinion, ὅπως ἠνέχθη περὶ τοῦ σφυγμοῦ what his opinion was about.., Marcellin.Puls. 233.

C [voice] Med.: for its chief usages, v. supr. A. VI. 3.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > φέρω
12 CULTURE, LITERATURE, AND LANGUAGE

   ■ Bell, Aubrey F. G. The Oxford Book of Portuguese Verse: XIIth Century-XXth Century. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1925, 1952 (2nd edition, B. Vi-digal, ed.).

   ■. Portuguese Literature. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1922, 1970 (2nd edition, B. Vidigal, ed.).

   ■ Bleiberg, German, Maureen Ihrie, and Janet Pérez, eds. Dictionary of the Literature of the Iberian Peninsula, 2 vols. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1993.

   ■ Castro, Francisco Lyon de, ed. História da literatura portuguesa, 7 vols. Lisbon: Alfa, 2001-02.

   ■ Cidade, Hernani. Lições de Cultura e Literatura Portuguesa, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1960-62.

   ■ Cook, Manuela. Portuguese: A Complete Course for Beginners. London: Hodder and Stoughton, 1996. Figueiredo, Fidelino. História literária de Portugal. Coimbra, 1944. Gentile, Georges Le. La Littérature Portugaise. Rev. ed. Paris, 1951. Kunoff, Hugo. Portuguese Literature from Its Origins to 1990: A Bibliography Based on the Collections at Indiana University. Metuchen, N.J.: Scarecrow Press, 1994.

   ■ Longland, Jean. Contemporary Portuguese Poetry. A Bilingual Selection. Irvington-on-Hudson: Harvey House, 1966. Prado Coelho, Jacinto do. Dicionário das Literaturas Portuguesas, Galega e Brasileira, 3rd ed. Oporto, 1978. Rossi, Giuseppe C. Storia della letteratura portoghesa. Florence, 1953.

   ■ Santos, João Camilo dos. "Portuguese Contemporary Literature." In Antônio Costa Pinto, ed., Modern Portugal, 218-42. Palo Alto, Calif.: SPOSS, 1998.

   ■ Saraiva, Antônio José. História da cultura em Portugal, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1950-60.

   ■. História da Literatura Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1990 ed.

   ■, and Oscar Lopes. História da Literatura Portuguesa. Oporto and Coimbra, 1992 ed.

   ■ Seguier, Jaime de, ed. Dicionário Prático Ilustrado. Oporto: Lello, 1961 and later eds.

   ■ Simões, João Gaspar. História da poesia portuguesa, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1955-56 and later eds.

   ■. História da poesia portuguesa do século XX. Lisbon, 1959 and later eds.

   ■ Stern, Irwin, ed.-in-chief. Dictionary of Brazilian Literature. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1988.

   ■ TRAVEL AND TOURIST GUIDES ON PORTUGAL

   ■ Adragão, José Victor. The Algarve: The Land, the Sea and Its People. Lisbon, 1988.

   ■ Ballard, Sam, and Jane Ballard. Pousadas of Portugal: Unique Lodgings in State-owned Castles, Palaces, Mansions and Hotels. Boston: Harvard Common, 1986.

   ■ Bridge, Ann, and Susan Lowndes Marques. The Selective Traveller in Portugal. London: Chatto & Windus, 1968.

   ■ Ellingham, Mark, et al. Portugal: The Rough Guide. London: Rough Guides, 2008 ed.

   ■ Hogg, Anthony. Travellers' Portugal. London: Solo Mio, 1983.

   ■ Kite, Cynthia, and Ralph Kite. Portuguese Country Inns & Pousadas. New York: Warner Books; Karen Brown's Country Inn Series, 1988.

   ■ Lowndes, Susan, ed. Fodor's Portugal 1991. New York: Fodor's, 1990.

   ■ Proença Raúl, and Sant'anna Dionísio, eds. Guía De Portugal. I. Generalidades. Lisboa E, Arredores. Lisbon: Fundação Calouste Gulbenkian, 1924; 1983.

   ■ Robertson, Ian. Portugal: Blue Guide. London: Benn; New York: Norton, 2000 and later eds.

   ■ Stoop, Anne de. Living in Portugal. Paris and New York: Flammarion, 1995. Wright, David, and Patrick Swift. Minho and North Portugal: A Portrait and Guide. New York: Scribners, 1968.

   ■. Lisbon: A Portrait and Guide. New York: Scribners, 1971.

   ■. Algarve: A Portrait and Guide. New York: Scribners, 1973.

   ■ HISTORY OF PORTUGAL Ancient and Medieval (2000 BCE-1415 CE)

   ■ Alarção, Jorge de. Roman Portugal. Volume I: Introduction. Warminster, U.K., 1988.

   ■ Almeida, Fortunato de. História de Portugal. Vol. I. Coimbra, 1922. Arnaut, Salvador Dias. A Crise Nacional dos fins do século XVI. Vol. 1. Coimbra, 1960.

   ■ Baião, Antônio, Hernani Cidade, and Manuel Múrias, eds. História de Expansão Portuguesa no Mundo, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1937-40. Caetano, Marcello. Lições de História do Direito Português. Coimbra, 1962. Cortesão, Jaime. Os Factores Democráticos no Formação de Portugal. Lisbon, 1960.

   ■ David, Pierre. Etudes Historiques sur la Galice et le Portugal du VI au XII siécle. Paris, 1947.

   ■ Dias, Eduardo Mayone. Portugal's Secret Jews: The End of an Era. Rumford, R.I.: Peregrinação Publications, 1999. Diffie, Bailey W. Prelude to Empire: Portugal Overseas before Henry the Navigator. Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 1960. Dutra, Francis A. "Portugal: To 1279." Dictionary of the Middle Ages. Vol. X: 35-48. New York: Scribners, 1987.

   ■. "Portugal: 1279-1481." Dictionary of the Middle Ages. Vol. X: 48-56. New York: Scribners, 1987. Gama Barros, Henrique de. História de Administração Pública em Portugal nos séculos XII à XV, 11 vols. Lisbon, 1945-51. Godinho, Vitorino Magalhães. A Economia dos Descobrimentos Henriquinos. Lisbon, 1962.

   ■ Gonzaga de Azevedo, Luís. História de Portugal, 6 vols. Lisbon, 1939-44.

   ■ Herculano, Alexandre. História de Portugal, 8 vols., 9th ed. Lisbon, 1940.

   ■ Kennedy, Hugh. Muslim Spain and Portugal: A Political History of al-Anda-lus. London: Longman, 1996.

   ■ Lencastre e Tavora, Luía Gonzaga. O Estudo da Sigilografia Medieval Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1990.

   ■ Livermore, H. V. The Origins of Spain and Portugal. London: Allen & Unwin, 1971.

   ■ Lopes, David. "Os Árabes nas obras de Alexandre Herculano." Boletim da Segunda Classe. Lisbon: Academia Real das Sciéncias, III (1909-10). MacKendrick, Paul. The Iberian Stones Speak. New York: Funk & Wagnalls, 1969.

   ■ Martinez, Pedro Soares. História Diplomática De Portugal [chapter I, 114315]. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■ Mattoso, José, ed. A Nobreza Medieval Portuguesa: A Família e o Poder. Lisbon: Estampa, 1981.

   ■. Religião e cultura na Idade Média Portuguesa. Lisbon: Imprensa Nacional, 1982.

   ■. Identificaçao de um país ( ensaio sobre as orígens de Portugal), 2 vols. Lisbon: Estampa, 1985.

   ■. Novos Ensaios de História Medieval Portuguesa. Lisbon: Edit. Presença, 1988.

   ■. Historia de Portugal. Vol. 2: A Monarquia Feudal ( 1096-1480). Lisbon: Estampa, 1993.

   ■ Oliveira Marques, A. H. de. Hansa e Portugal na Idade Média. Lisbon, 1959.

   ■. Introduçao à História da Agricultura em Portugal. Lisbon, 1968.

   ■. Daily Life in Portugal in the Middle Ages. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1971.

   ■. Ensaios de História Medieval Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1980.

   ■. "Introduçao à História da Cidade Medieval Portuguesa." Bracara Augusta XXV, 92-93 (January-December 1981): 367-87.

   ■. Guía do Estudante de História Medieval Portuguesa, 3rd ed. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■. Portugal Na Crise Dos Séculos XIV e XV-Vol. IV of Serrão and Oliveira Marques, Nova História de Portugal. Lisbon, 1987.

   ■ Peres, Damião de, ed. História de Portugal. Vols. I, II. Barcelos, 1928-29.

   ■ Rau, Virginia. Subsídios para o estudo das Feiras Medievais Portuguesas. Lisbon, 1943.

   ■. Sesma'rias Medievais Portuguesas. Lisbon, 1946.

   ■ Ribeiro, Orlando. "Portugal, formação de." Dicionário da História de Portugal. Vol. III, 432-51. Lisbon, 1966.

   ■ Rogers, Francis M. The Travels of the Infante Dom Pedro of Portugal. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1961.

   ■ Russell, P. E. The English Intervention in Spain and Portugal in the Time of Edward III and Richard II. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1955.

   ■ Savory, H. N. Spain and Portugal: The Prehistory of the Iberian Peninsula. New York: Thames and Hudson, 1968.

   ■ Silva, Armando Coelho Ferreira. A Cultura Castreja no Noroeste de Portugal. Pacos de Ferreira, 1986.

   ■ Varagnac, André. O Homem antes da Escrita ( Pre-história). Lisbon, 1963.

   ■ Imperial and Early Modern (1415-1822)

   ■ Azevedo, J. Lúcio de. História de António de Vieira, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1918-20.

   ■. Épocas de Portugal Económico. Lisbon, 1929.

   ■ Borges de Macedo, Jorge. Problemas de História de Indústria Portuguesa no Século X VIII. Lisbon, 1963.

   ■. "Pombal." Dicionário de História de Portugal. Vol. III, 415-23. Lisbon, 1968.

   ■ Bovill, Edward W. The Battle of the Alcazar: An Account of the Defeat of Dom Sebastian at El-Ksar el-Kebir. London, 1952.

   ■ Boxer, C. R. Four Centuries of Portuguese Expansion, 1415-1825: A Succinct Survey. Johannesburg, South Africa: Witwaterstrand University Press, 1961.

   ■. The Portuguese Seaborne Empire 1415-1825. London: Hutchinson, 1969.

   ■. João de Barros: Portuguese Humanist and Historian of Asia. New Delhi, India: Xavier Centre, 1981.

   ■ Cheke, Marcus. Dictator of Portugal: A Life of the Marquis of Pombal, 16991782. London: Sidgwick & Jackson, 1938.

   ■ Cunha, Luís da. Testamento Político. Lisbon, 1820.

   ■ Davidson, Lillias C. Catherine of Bragança. London: John Murray, 1908.

   ■ Dutra, Francis A. "Membership in the Order of Christ in the Seventeenth Century." The Americas 27 (1970): 3-25.

   ■ Eberlein, H. D., and R. W. Ramsdell. The Practical Book of Italian, Spanish and Portuguese Furniture. Philadelphia: Lippincott, 1927.

   ■ Ericeira, Luís de Meneses [Count of]. História de Portugal Restaurado, 4 vols. Oporto, 1945.

   ■ Fisher, H. E. S. "Anglo-Portuguese Trade, 1700-70." Economic History Review XVI, 2 (1963): 219-33.

   ■. The Portugal Trade: A Study of Anglo-Portuguese Commerce, 1700- 1770. London: Methuen, 1971.

   ■ Francis, A. D. The Methuens and Portugal: 1691-1708. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1966.

   ■. Portugal, 1715-1808. London: Tamesis, 1985.

   ■ Hanson, Carl A. Economy and Society in Baroque Portugal, 1668-1703. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1981.

   ■ Herculano, Alexandre. History of the Origin and Establishment of the Inquisition in Portugal. New York: AMS Press, 1968 reprint.

   ■ Kendrick, T. D. The Lisbon Earthquake. London: Methuen, 1956.

   ■ Livermore, H. V. "The Privileges of an Englishman in the Kingdom and Dominions of Portugal." Atlante 11 (1954): 57-77.

   ■ Macauley, Neil. Dom Pedro: The Struggle for Liberty in Brazil and Portugal, 1798-1834. Durham, N.C.: Duke University Press, 1986.

   ■ Macauley, Rose. They Went to Portugal. London: Jonathan Cape, 1946.

   ■. They Went to Portugal, Too. London: Carcanet, 1990.

   ■ Magalhães Godinho, Vitorino. Prix et Monnaies au Portugal. Paris, 1955.

   ■. "Portugal and Her Empire." In New Cambridge Modern History. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, Vol. V (1961): 384-97; Vol. VI (1961): 509-10.

   ■. A Economia dos descobrimentos henri-quinos. Lisbon, 1962.

   ■. Estructura da Antiga Sociedade Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■ Mauro, Frédéric. Le Portugal et l'Atlantique au XVII siécle ( 1570-1670). Paris: SEVPEN, 1960.

   ■ Maxwell, Kenneth. "Pombal and the Nationalization of the Luso-Brazilian Economy." Hispanic American Historical Review XLVIII (November 1968): 608-31.

   ■. Conflicts and Conspiracies: Brazil and Portugal, 1750-1808. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1973.

   ■ Norris, A. H., and R. W. Bremner. The Lines of Torres Vedras. Lisbon: British Historical Society of Portugal, 1980.

   ■ Oliveira, Antônio de. A Vida Económica e Social de Coimbra de 1537 à 1640, 2 vols. Coimbra, 1971-72.

   ■ Prestage, Edgar. The Royal Power and the Cortes in Portugal. Watford, U.K.: Voss & Michael, 1927.

   ■. Portuguese Pioneers. London: Black, 1933.

   ■. "The Mode of Government in Portugal during the Restoration [1640-68] Period." In Edgar Prestage, ed., Melange d'Etudes Portugaises Offerts a M. Georges Le Gentil, 265-70. Lisbon, 1949.

   ■ Rabassa, Gregory. "Padre Antônio Vieira: Portugal's Amazing Polymath." Camões Centre Quarterly 2, 3-4 (Autumn and Winter 1990): 27-32. Rau, Virginia. D. Catarina de Bragança: Rainha de Inglaterra. Lisbon, 1944. Ricard, Robert. "Prophecy and Messianism in the Works of Antônio Vieira." The Americas 37 (1960): 357-88.

   ■ Roche, T. W. E. Philippa: Dona Filipa of Portugal. London: Phillimore, 1971.

   ■ Rogers, Francis M. The Travels of the Infante Dom Pedro of Portugal. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1961.

   ■ Rooney, Peter T. "Hapsburg Fiscal Policies in Portugal, 1580-1640." Journal of European Economic History 23, 3 (1994): 545-62.

   ■ Roth, Cecil. "The Religion of the Marranos." Jewish Quarterly Review 22 (1931): 1-33.

   ■. A History of the Marranos. Philadelphia: Jewish Publication Society of America, 1932.

   ■ Saraiva, Antônio José. Inquisição e Cristãos-Novos. Oporto, 1969.

   ■. A Inquisição Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1969 and later eds.

   ■ Schneider, Susan. O Marquês De Pombal E O Vinho Do Porto: Dependência e subdesenvolvimento em Portugal no século XVIII. Lisbon, 1980.

   ■ Shaw, L. M. E. Trade, Inquisition and the English Nation in Portugal, 16401690. London: Carcancet, 1989.

   ■ Shillington, V. M., and A. B. W. Chapman. The Commercial Relations of England and Portugal. London: Routledge, 1907.

   ■ Sideri, Sandro. Trade and Power: Informal Colonialism in Anglo-Portuguese Relations. Rotterdam: Rotterdam University Press, 1970.

   ■ Smith, John Athelstone [Conde de Carnota]. Marquis of Pombal, 2nd ed. London, 1872.

   ■ Thomas, Gerturde Z. Richer Than Spices. New York: Knopf, 1965. Walford, A. R. The British Factory in Lisbon. Lisbon, 1940.

   ■ Constitutional Monarchy and Liberalism (1822-1910)

   ■ Baptista, Jacinto. O Cinco de Outubro. Lisbon, 1965. Brandão, Raúl. Memórias, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1969 ed.

   ■ Cabral, Manuel Villaverde. O desenvolvimento do capitalismo em Portugal no século XIX. Lisbon, 1981. Caetano, Marcello. História Breve das Constituções portuguesas. Lisbon, 1971 ed.

   ■ Carnota, Conde da. Memoirs of Marshal, the Duke of Saldanha, with Selections from His Correspondence, 2 vols. London: John Murray, 1880. Carvalho, Joaquim de. Estudos sobre a cultura portuguesa do século XIX. Coimbra, 1955.

   ■ Cheke, Marcus. Carlota Joaquina, Queen of Portugal. London: Sidgwick and Jackson, 1947.

   ■ França, José-Augusto. Zé Provinho na Obra de Rafael Bordalo Pinheiro. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■ Fuschini, Augusto. Liquidações políticas. Lisbon, 1896.

   ■ Godinho, Vitorino Magalhães. Estrutura da Antiga Sociedade Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1975 ed.

   ■ Hammond, Richard J. Portugal and Africa, 1815-1910: A Study in Uneconomic Imperialism. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1966.

   ■ Homem, Amadeu Carvalho. A Propaganda Republicana ( 1870-1910). Coimbra, 1990.

   ■ Livermore, H. V. Portugal: A Short History. Edinburgh, U.K.: Edinburgh University Press, 1973. Machado, Alvaro Manuel. A Geração de 70-uma revolução cultural e literária. Lisbon, 1986 ed.

   ■ Martins, Joaquim Pedro de Oliveira. Portugal Contemporâneo, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1953 ed.

   ■ Medina, João. Eça Político. Lisbon, 1974.

   ■ Mônica, Maria Filomena. Fontes Pereira de Melo. Oporto: Ed. Afrontamento, 1999.

   ■ Nobre, Eduardo. Paixoes Reais. Lisbon: Quimera, 2002.

   ■ Pereira, Miriam Halpern. Livre Câmbio e Desenvolvimento Económico: Portugal na segunda metade do século XIX. Lisbon, 1971.

   ■. Revolução, Finanças, Dependência Externa ( de 1820 à convenção de Gramido). Lisbon, 1979.

   ■ Peres, Damião, ed. História de Portugal. Volume III. Barcelos, 1935 ed.

   ■ Ramos, Rui. D.Carlos. 1863-1908. Lisbon: Circulo de Leitores, 2006.

   ■. Liberal Reformism in Portugal. Oliveira Martins, the Movement for New Life and the Politics of the Constitutional Monarchy ( 1885-1908). Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1998.

   ■ Rorick, David. Maria da Fonte: History and Myth. M.A. thesis, History Department, Sonoma State University, Sonoma, Calif., 1984.

   ■ Sá, Vítor de. Perspectivas do Século XIX. Lisbon, 1964.

   ■ Serrão, Joel. Sampaio Bruno: O homem e o pensamento. Lisbon, 1958.

   ■. Temas Oitocentistas, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1959-62.

   ■. "Liberalismo." In Joel Serrão, ed., Dicionário de História de Portugal. Vol. II, 732-41. Lisbon, 1965.

   ■. Do Sebastianismo ao Socialismo. Lisbon, 1975 ed.

   ■ Silbert, Albert. Do Portugal de Antiga Regime ao Portugal Oitocentista. Lisbon, 1972.

   ■ Teles, Basílio. Do Ultimatum ao 31 de Janeiro. Lisbon, 1968 ed.

   ■ Parliamentary, Republican Portugal (1910-26)

   ■ Antunes, José Freire. A Cadeira do Sidónio Pais. Lisbon, 1980. Arriaga, Manuel de. Na primeira presidência da República Portugueza: Um rápido relatório. Lisbon, 1916.

   ■ Bell, Aubrey, F. G. In Portugal. London, 1912.

   ■. Portugal of the Portuguese. London: Pitman, 1915.

   ■ Bragança-Cunha, V. de. Revolutionary Portugal, 1910-1936. London: Swift, 1937.

   ■ Brandão, Raúl. Memórias, 3 vols. In Brandão, Obras Completas. Lisbon, 1969.

   ■ Burity, Braz [Pseudonym of Joaquim Madureira]. A Forja da Lei. Coimbra, 1915.

   ■ Cabral, Manuel V. Portugal Na Alvorada Do Século XX. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■. 'The Aesthetics of Nationalism: Modernism and Authoritarianism in Early 20th-Century Portugal." Luso-Brazilian Review (Madison, Wisc.) 26, 1 (Summer 1989): 15-43. Campos, Ezequiel. Política. Oporto, 1924.

   ■ Cardia, Sottomayor, ed. Seara Nova: Antologia. Pela Reforma da República (1, 2) 1921-1926, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1971-72.

   ■ Carqueja, Bento. O Povo de Portugal. Oporto, 1916.

   ■. O Futuro de Portugal: Portugal Apos À Guerra. Oporto, 1920.

   ■ Chagas, João. Diário, 1914-1918, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1929-30.

   ■ Cortesão, Jaime. "Memórias da Grande Guerra." In Obras Completas de Jaime Cortesão. Lisbon, 1969.

   ■ Cunha Leal, Francisco. As Minhas Memórias, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1966-68.

   ■ Derou, Jean. Les Relations Franco-Portugaises ( 1910-1926). Paris: Publications de la Sorbonne, 1986.

   ■ Fazenda, Pedro. A Crise Política. Lisbon, 1926.

   ■ Ferrão, Carlos. História De la República. Lisbon, 1976.

   ■ Ferreira, David. "5 De Outubro de 1910." In Joel Serrão, ed., Dicionário de História De Portugal III (1968): 264-67. Ferreira Martins, Gen. Luís, ed. Portugal na Grande Guerra, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1945.

   ■ Gomes da Costa, Gen. Manuel. Memórias. Lisbon, 1930. História Política da Primeira República Portuguesa ( 1910-1915), 2 vols. Lisbon, 1973.

   ■ Lorenzo, Felix. Portugal ( cinco anos de republica). Madrid, 1915.

   ■ Machado, Bernardino. Depois de 21 de Maio. Lisbon, 1922.

   ■ Machado Santos, Antônio. 1907-1910: A revolução portugueza. Relatôrio.

   ■ Lisbon, 1911. Madureira, Arnaldo. 0 28 De Maio. Lisbon, 1982.

   ■ Magno, David. Livro da Guerra de Portugal na Flandres. Oporto, 1920.

   ■. A Situação Portuguesa. Oporto, 1926.

   ■ Marques Guedes, Armando. Cinco Meses no governo. Oporto, 1926.

   ■ Martins, Rocha. Memórias sobre Sidónio Pais. Lisbon, 1921.

   ■ Medeiros, Fernando. Nas Orígens Do A Sociedade E A Economia Portuguesas Salazarismo. Lisbon, 1978. Medina, João. "Oh! a República!...," Estudos sobre o Republicanismo e a Primeira República Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1990.

   ■, ed. História Contemporânea De Portugal: Primeira República, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■ Mônica, Maria Filomena. "Uma Aristocracia Operária: Os Chapeleiros (18701913)." Análise Social 60, 2nd series (1979). Montalvor, Luís de, ed. História de Regimen Republicano em Portugal, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1930-32.

   ■ Oliveira, César. O Operariado E A República Democrática, 1910-1914. Oporto, 1972.

   ■ Oliveira Marques, A. H. de. "The Portuguese 1920s: A General Survey." Iberian Studies 2 (1973): 32-40.

   ■. História De la República Portuguesa: As Estruturas De Base, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1973-74.

   ■. A Primeira República Portuguesa: Alguns aspectos estruturais. Lisbon, 1975 ed.

   ■. O Terceiro Governo Afonso Costa— 1917. Lisbon, 1977.

   ■. Pabôn, Jesus. La Revolución Portuguesa, 2 vols. Madrid, 1945-46; Portuguese edition: Lisbon, 1961. Paxeco, Oscar. Os Que Arrancaram Em 28 De Maio. Lisbon, 1937. Peres, Damião, ed. História De Portugal. Ediçao Monumental: Supplemento. Oporto, 1954.

   ■ Pessoa, Fernando. A Memória do Presidente— Rei Sidónio Pais. Lisbon, 1928.

   ■ Relvas, José. Memórias Políticas, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1977-78.

   ■ Schwartzman, Kathleen C. "Lucros, investimentos e coligações políticas na I República." Análise Social XVIII, 72-71 (1982): 741-58.

   ■. The Social Origins of Democratic Collapse: The First Portuguese Republic in the Global Economy. Lawrence: University of Kansas Press, 1989.

   ■ Serrão, Joel. Liberalismo, socialismo e republicanismo. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■ Silva, Antônio Maria da. O Meu Depoimento, 2 vols. Mem Martins, 1978-82.

   ■ Teixeira, Nuno Severiano. O Poder e a guerra, 1914-1918. Lisbon: Estampa, 1996.

   ■, and Antônio Costa Pinto, eds. A Primeira República Portuguesa: Entre O Liberalismo E O Autoritarismo. Lisbon: Ed. Colibri, 2000.

   ■ Telo, Antônio José. Decadência E Queda Da I República Portuguesa, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1980-84.

   ■ Torre (Gomez), Hipôlito dela, and J. Sanchez Cervello. Portugal En El Siglo XX. Madrid: Ediciones Istmo: Colecciôn La Historia en sus textos, 1992.

   ■ Valente, Vasco Pulido. "A República e as classes trabalhadores (Outubro 1910-Agosto 1911)." Análise Social IX, 31 (1972): 293-316.

   ■. O Poder e o Povo: A Revolução de 1910. Lisbon, 1974.

   ■ Veríssimo Serrao, Joaquim. História De Portugal. Volume XI: A Primeira República ( 1910-1926): História Política, Religiosa, Militar e Ultramarina. Lisbon, 1989.

   ■. História De Portugal Volume XII: História Diplomática, Social, Económica e Cultural. Lisbon, 1990.

   ■ Vincent-Smith, John. "Britain and Portugal, 1910-1916." Ph.D. dissertation, History, University of London, 1971.

   ■ Wheeler, Douglas L. "The Portuguese Revolution of 1910." Journal of Modern History 44 (June 1972): 172-94.

   ■. Republican Portugal: A Political History, 1910-1926. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1978.

   ■. "Nightmare Republic: Portugal, 1910-1926." History Today (London) 32 (September 1981): 5-10.

   ■ Young, George. Portugal Old and Young: An Historical Study. Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1917.

   ■ Authoritarian Portugal (1926-74)

   ■ Afonso, Rui. Injustiça: O Caso Sousa Mendes. Lisbon: Caminho, 1990.

   ■. Um Homem Bom: Aristides De Sousa Mendes, O " Wallenberg Portuguese' Lisbon: Caminho, 1995.

   ■ Antunes, José Freire. Os Americanos E Portugal. Vol. 1. Os anos de Ricard Nixon, 1969-1974. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■. Os Americanos e Portugal. 1961. Kennedy e Salazar: O Leão e a Raposa. Lisbon, 1991.

   ■. Salazar/Caetano. Cartas Secretas. 1932-1968. Lisbon: Círculo de Leitores, 1993.

   ■. Jorge Jardim: Agente Secreto. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1996.

   ■. Portugal na guerra do petróleo: Os Açores E As Vitórias de Israel 1973. Lisbon: Edeline, 2000. Aquino, Acácio Tómas de. O Segredo das Prisões Atlânticas. Lisbon, 1978. Araquistain, Luis. "Dictatorship in Portugal." Foreign Affairs 7 (October 1928): 41-53.

   ■ Assac, Jacques Ploncard. Salazar. Paris: La Table Ronde, 1967.

   ■ Baklanoff, Eric N. "The Political Economy of Portugal's Old Regime: Growth and Change Preceding the 1974 Revolution." World Development 7, 8-9 (August-September 1979): 799-812.

   ■ Barreno, Maria Isabel, Maria Teresa Horta, and Maria Velho da Costa. The Three Marias: New Portuguese Letters. New York: Doubleday, 1975.

   ■ Blume, Norman. "SEDES: An Example of Opposition in a Conservative Authoritarian State." Government and Opposition 12 (Summer 1977): 351-66.

   ■ Braga da Cruz, Manuel. A origem da democracia-cristã em Portugal e o Sala-zarismo. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■. "Notas para uma caracterização política do salazarismo." In Gabinete de Investigações Sociais. Análise Social: A Formação de Portugal Contemporâneo: 1900-1980. Vol. I, 72-74 (April-December 1981): 773-94.

   ■. "O Integralismo nas origens do Salazarismo." Análise Social XVIII (1982): 1409-19.

   ■. "A Oposição Eleitoral ao Salazarismo." Revista de História das Ideias V (1983).

   ■. Monárquicos e Republicanos no Estado Novo. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■ Cabral, Manuel V. "Sobre o fascismo e o seu avento em Portugal." Análise Social XII, 48 (1976), 873-915.

   ■ Caetano, Marcello. A Missão Dos Dirigentes. Lisbon, 1966, 4th ed.

   ■. Depoimento. São Paulo, 1974.

   ■. História Breve das Constituições Portugueses. Lisbon, 1974.

   ■. As Minhas Memórias de Salazar. Lisbon, 1977.

   ■ Campinos, Jorge. A Ditadura Militar, 1926-1933. Lisbon, 1975. Carrilho, Maria. Forças Armadas e Mudança Política em Portugal no Século XX. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■, et al. Portugal na Segunda Guerra Mundial Contributos para uma reavaliação. Lisbon, 1989.

   ■ Carvalho, Otelo Saraiva de. Alvorada em Abril. Lisbon, 1977.

   ■ Castanheira, Jose Pedro and Valdemar Cruz. A Filha Rebelde. Lisbon: Temas & Debates, 2003.

   ■ Costa Pinto, Antônio, et al. O Fascismo Em Portugal [Proceedings of Conference, Lisbon, March 1980]. Lisbon, 1982.

   ■. 'The Radical Right and the Military Dictatorship in Portugal: The National May 28 League (1928-1933)." Luso-Brazilian Review 23, 1 (Summer 1986): 1-15.

   ■. "O Salazarismo No Recente Investigação Sobre o Fascismo Europeu...." Análise Social XXV (1990): 695-713.

   ■. As camisas azuis: Ideologias, elites e movimentos fascistas em Portugal, 1914-1945. Lisbon: Estampa, 1994.

   ■. Salazar's Dictatorship and European Fascism: Problems of Interpretation. New York: Columbia University Press, 1995.

   ■. The Blue Shirts: Portuguese Fascists and the New State. New York: Columbia University Press, 2000.

   ■ Delgado, Humberto. The Memoirs of General Delgado. London: Cassell, 1964.

   ■. Memórias De Humberto Delgado. Iva Delgado and Antônio de Figueiredo, eds. Lisbon: Dom Quixote, 1991.

   ■ Duarte Silva, A. E., et al. Salazar E O Salazarismo. Lisbon, 1989.

   ■ Egerton, F. C. C. Salazar, Rebuilder of Portugal. London: Hodder & Stoughton, 1943.

   ■ Ferraz, Artur Ivens. A Asenção de Salazar: Memórias de Ivens Ferraz. Lisbon, 1988.

   ■ Ferro, Antônio. Salazar: O Homem E A Sua Obra. Lisbon, 1933. English edition: Salazar: Portugal and Her Leader. London: Faber & Faber, 1939, and editions in other languages.

   ■. Portugal: Breviário Da Pátria Para Os Ausentes. Lisbon, 1946.

   ■ Figueiredo, Antônio. Portugal and Its Empire: The Truth. London: Gollancz, 1961.

   ■. "The Case Against Portugal." In Philip Mason, ed., Angola: A Symposium. Views of a Revolt, 46-57. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1962.

   ■. Portugal. Fifty Years of Dictatorship. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1975.

   ■ Fox, Ralph. Portugal Now. London, 1937.

   ■ Freitas do Amaral, Diogo. O Antigo Regime E A Revolução. Memórias Políticas ( 1941-1975). Lisbon: Bertrand, 1995.

   ■ Fryer, Peter, and Patricia McGowan Pinheiro. Oldest Ally: A Portrait of Sala-zar's Portugal. London: Dobson, 1961.

   ■ Gallagher, Tom. "Controlled Repression in Salazar's Portugal." Journal of Contemporary History 14, 3 (July 1979): 385-403.

   ■. "The Mystery Train: Portugal's Military Dictatorship 1926-32." European Studies Review 11 (1981): 325-54.

   ■. "From Hegemony to Opposition: The Ultraright Before and After 1974." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 81-103. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.

   ■. Portugal: A Twentieth Century Interpretation. Manchester, U.K.: Manchester University Press, 1983.

   ■ Galvão, Henrique. Santa Maria: My Crusade for Portugal. London: Weiden-feld and Nicholson, 1961.

   ■. Carta Aberta ao Dr. Salazar. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■ Gamier, Christine. Vacances avec Salazar. Paris, 1952; American edition: Salazar in Portugal: An Intimate Portrait. New York, 1954. Georgel, Jacques. O Salazarismo. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■ Gouveia, Fernando. Memórias de um Inspector da PIDE. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■ Graham, Lawrence S. "Portugal: The Bureaucracy of Empire." LADAC Occasional Papers series 2, 9 (1973). Austin, Tex.: Institute of Latin American Studies.

   ■. Portugal: The Decline and Collapse of an Authoritarian Order. Beverly Hills, Calif.: Sage, 1975.

   ■. "The Military in Politics: The Politicization of the Portuguese Armed Forces." In L. S. Graham and H. M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal, 221-56. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.

   ■, and Harry M. Makler, eds. Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.

   ■, and Douglas L. Wheeler, eds. In Search of Modern Portugal: The Revolution and Its Consequences. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.

   ■ Guyomard, George. La Dictature Militaire au Portugal. Paris, 1927.

   ■ Janeiro, Helena Pinto. Salazar E Pétain. Relações Luso-Francesas Durante A II Guerra Mundial ( 1940-44). Lisbon: Cosmos, 1998.

   ■ Kay, Hugh. "A Catholic View." In Philip Mason, ed., Angola: A Symposium. Views of a Revolt, 80-103. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1962.

   ■. Salazar and Modern Portugal. New York: Hawthorne, 1970.

   ■ Leeds, Elizabeth. "Labor Export, Development and the State: The Political Economy of Portuguese Emigration." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Political Science, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1984.

   ■ Lewis, Paul H. "Salazar's Ministerial Elite, 1932-1968."Journal of Politics 40 (August 1987): 622-47.

   ■ Lins, Alvaro. Missão em Portugal. Lisbon, 1974.

   ■ Linz, Juan. "Foreword." In L. Graham and H. M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents, xii-xi. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.

   ■ Lucena, Manuel. A evolução do sistema corporativo português, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1976.

   ■. "The Evolution of Portuguese Corporatism under Salazar and Caetano." In L. Graham and H. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents, 47-88. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.

   ■ McCarthy, Mary. "Letter from Lisbon." The New Yorker XXX, 51 (February 5, 1955): 80-96.

   ■ Magalhães Godinho, Vitorino. O Socialismo e o Futuro da Peninsula. Lisbon, 1969.

   ■ Makler, Harry M. A " Elite" Industrial Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1969.

   ■. "The Portuguese Industrial Elite and Its Corporative Relations." Economic Development and Cultural Change 24, 3 (April 1976): 495-526.

   ■ Martins, Hermínio. "Opposition in Portugal." Government and Opposition 4 (Spring 1969): 250-63.

   ■. "Portugal." In S. J. Woolf, ed., European Fascism, 302-36. New York: Vintage, 1969.

   ■. "Introduction: Tristes durées." In R. Feijô, H. Martins and J. de Pina-Cabral, eds., Death in Portugal: Studies in Portuguese Anthropology and Modern History. Oxford: Journal of the Anthropological Society of Oxford, 1983.

   ■ Medina, João. Salazar em França. Lisbon, 1977.

   ■. Salazar E Os Fascistas: Salazarismo e Nacional-Sindicalismo: A história dum conflito 1932/1935. Lisbon, 1978.

   ■. Ditadura: O " Estado Novo," 2 vols., in his História Contemporânea De Portugal. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■ Ministério dos Negôcios Estrangeiros, ed. Dez Anos de Política Externa ( 1936-1947): A Nação Portuguesa e a Segunda Guerra Mundial, 12 vols., and in progress. Lisbon, 1964.

   ■ Mônica, Maria Filomena. Educação e Sociedade no Portugal de Salazar. Lisbon, 1978.

   ■ Nogueira, Alberto Franco. Salazar, 6 vols. Coimbra and Oporto, 1978-85.

   ■. História de Portugal, 1933-1974: II Supplemento. Oporto, 1981.

   ■. Um político confessa-se ( Diário: 1960-1968), 3rd ed. Oporto, 1987.

   ■ Oliveira, César. Portugal e a II República de Espanha, 1931-l 936. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■. Salazar E A Guerra Civil De Espanha, 2nd ed. Lisbon, 1988.

   ■. Os Anos Decisivos: Portugal 1962-1985. Um testemunho. Lisbon: Presença, 1993.

   ■ Oliveira Marques, A. H. de. A Maçonaria Portuguesa e o Estado Novo. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■. History of Portugal; 1 in 2 vols. New York: Columbia University Press, 1976 ed.

   ■. A Liga de Paris E A Ditadura Militar, 1927-1928. Lisbon, 1976.

   ■. História de Portugal, 2 vols. Lisbon: 1980 and later eds.

   ■, ed. A Literatura Clandestina Em Portugal, 1926-1932, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1990.

   ■ Patriarca, Fátima. A Questaão Social no Salazarismo. Vol. 1. Lisbon: INCM, 1995.

   ■. Sindicatos contra Salazar: A revolta do 18 de janeiro de 1934. Lisbon: Instituto de Ciências Sociais, 2000. Pattee, Richard. Portugal and the Portuguese World. Milwaukee, Wisc.: Bruce, 1957.

   ■ Payne, Stanley G. A History of Spain and Portugal. Volume 2. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1973.

   ■. "Salazarism: 'Fascism' or 'Bureaucratic Authoritarianism'?" In Estudos de história portuguesa: Homenagem à A. H. de Oliveira Marques. Lisbon, 1983.

   ■ Pereira, José Pacheco. Conflitos sociais nos campos do sul de Portugal. Mem Martins, 1978.

   ■. A Preparação Ideológica da Intervenção Militar de 28 de Maio de 1926. Oporto, 1978.

   ■. "Problemas da história do P. C. P." In A. Costa Pinto et al., eds., O Fascismo Em Portugal [Proceedings of Conference, University of Lisbon, March 1980], 269-85. Lisbon, 1982.

   ■ Pimentel, Irene Flunser. Judeus em Portugal durante a II Guerra Mundial. Em fuga de Hitler e do Holocausto. Lisbon: Esfera dos Livros, 2006.

   ■ Pires, José Cardoso. Dinossauro Excelentíssimo. Lisbon, 1972.

   ■ Porch, Douglas. The Portuguese Armed Forces and the Revolution. London: Croom Helm, 1977.

   ■ Presidência do Conselho de Ministros. Comissão do Livro Negro Sobre o Regime Fascista ["Black Book" series]. Eleições No Regime Fascista. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■. A Política De Informação No Regime Fascista, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1980.

   ■. Livros Proibidos No Regime Fascista. Lisbon, 1981.

   ■. Presos Políticos No Regime Fascista, 5 vols. Lisbon, 1981-87.

   ■. Relatórios Para Oliveira Salazar, 1931-1939. Lisbon, 1981.

   ■. Discriminação Política No Emprego No Regime Fascista. Lisbon, 1982.

   ■. Proibição Da " Time" No Regime Fascista [ Time magazine July 23, 1946, with Dr. Salazar on cover]. Lisbon, 1982.

   ■. Os Estudantes No Regime Fascista. Lisbon, 1983.

   ■. Trabalho, Sindicatos E Greves No Regime Fascista. Lisbon, 1984.

   ■. Correspondência Entre Mário De Figueiredo E Oliveira Salazar. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■. Repressão Política E Social No Regime Fascista. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■. Correspondência de Pedro Teotónio Pereira para Oliveira Salazar vol. 1 ( 1931-1939), 2 vols. Lisbon, 1987-89.

   ■ Queiroga, Captain Fernando. Portugal Oprimido. Lisbon, 1974.

   ■ Raby, David L. "Populism and the Portuguese Left: From Delgado to Otelo." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 61-80. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.

   ■. Fascism and Resistance in Portugal: Communists, Liberals and the Military Dissidents in the Opposition to Salazar, 1941-1974. Manchester, U.K.: Manchester University Press, 1988.

   ■ Raby, Dawn Linda. "The Portuguese Presidential Election of 1949: A Successful Government Maneuver?" Luso-Brazilian Review 27, 1 (Summer 1990): 63-77.

   ■ Rêgo, Raúl. Diário Político. Lisbon, 1969; 1974, 2nd ed.

   ■. Horizontes Fechados. Oporto, 1970.

   ■. Horizontes Fechados/ Páginas de Política, 3rd ed. Lisbon, 1974.

   ■ Ribeiro, Aquilino. Volfrâmio. Lisbon, 1944.

   ■. Quando os Lobos Uivam. Lisbon, 1958; English ed. Patricia McGowan

   ■ Pinheiro, trans. London: Cape, 1963.

   ■ Robinson, Richard A. H. Contemporary Portugal: A History. London and Boston: Allen & Unwin, 1979.

   ■ Rocha, José Antônio De Oliveira. The Portuguese Administrative State. Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Political Science, University of South Carolina, 1986.

   ■ Rosa, Frederico Delgado. Humberto Delgado. Biografia Do General Sem Medo. Lisbon: Esfera dos Livros, 2008. Rosas, Fernando. O Estado Novo Nos Anos Trinta: 1928-1938. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■. O Salazarismo E A Aliança Luso-Britânica. Lisbon, 1988.

   ■. Portugal Entre A Paz E A Guerra... 1939-1945. Lisbon, 1990.

   ■. O Estado Novo ( 1926-1974). Vol. VII of José Mattoso, ed. Historia De

   ■ Portugal. Lisbon: Edit. Estampa, 1994.

   ■. and Pedro Aires Oliveira (eds.). A Transicao Falhada. O Marcelismo e o Fim do Estado Novo ( 1968-1974). Lisbon: Edit. Noticias, 2004.

   ■ Rudel, Christian. Salazar. Paris: Mercure de France, 1969.

   ■ Sá Carneiro, Francisco. Uma Tentativa de Participação política. Lisbon, 1971.

   ■. A Liberalização bloqueada. Lisbon, 1972.

   ■. Vale a Pena ser Deputado? Fundão, 1973.

   ■ Salazar, Antônio de Oliveira. Discursos E Notas Políticas. [Speeches, Broadcasts, Notes and Statements, 1928-1966, 6 vols. Coimbra, 1935-1966]. Several editions.

   ■. Doctrine and Action: Internal and Foreign Policy of the New Portugal, I928-1939. Robert Edgar Broughton, trans. London: Faber & Faber, 1939.

   ■. "Realities and Trends of Portugal's Policies." International Affairs XXXIX, 2 (April 1963): 169-83.

   ■. The Road for the Future [Speeches, statements of policy made during 1928-62]. Lisbon, 1963.

   ■. Entrevistas: 1960-1966 [interviews]. Coimbra, 1967.

   ■. Salazar: Pensamento e doutrina política. Textos anthológicos. [Anthology of speeches, writings, interviews granted, 1914-68]. Mendo C. Henriques and Gonçalo de Sampaio e Melo, eds. Lisbon, 1989.

   ■ Santana, Emilio. Historia de um Atentado. O atentado contra Salazar. Lisbon, 1976.

   ■ Schmitter, Philippe C. Corporatism and Public Policy in Authoritarian Portugal. London: Sage, 1975.

   ■. "Liberation by Golpe: Retrospective Thoughts on the Demise of Authoritarian Rule in Portugal." Armed Forces and Society 2 (Nov. 1975): 5-33.

   ■. "The Impact and Meaning of Elections in Authoritarian Portugal, 1933-74." In G. Hermet et al., eds., Elections Without Choice. Basingstoke, U.K.: Macmillan, 1978.

   ■. "'The 'Regime d'exception' That Became the Rule: Forty-Eight Years of Authoritarian Domination in Portugal." In L. S. Graham and H. M. Mak-ler, eds., Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents, 3-46. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.

   ■, and Gerhard Lehmbruch, eds. Trends towards Corporatist Intermediation. Beverly Hills, Calif.: Sage, 1979.

   ■ Shelton, Richard L. "Development of the Communist Party of Portugal, 1921-1976." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of History, St. Louis University, 1984.

   ■ Silva, José. Memórias de um operário. Vol. 2. Oporto, 1971. Soares, Mário. Escritos Políticos. Lisbon, 1969.

   ■. Portugal Bailloné. Paris, 1972; Portuguese edition: Portugal Amordaçado, Lisbon, 1974; English edition: Portugal's Struggle for Liberty. Translated by Mary Gawsworth. London: Allen & Unwin, 1975.

   ■ Spínola, Antônio de. Portugal e o Futuro. Lisbon, 1974; English edition: Johannesburg: Perskor, 1974.

   ■ Teixeira, Luis [Sampaio]. Perfil de Salazar. Lisbon, 1938.

   ■ Teixeira, Nuno Severiano. "From Neutrality to Alignment: Portugal in the Foundation of the Atlantic Pact." EUI: Working Papers in History. Florence, Italy: European University Institute, 1991.

   ■ Telo, Antônio José. Portugal na Segunda Guerra. Lisbon, 1987.

   ■. A Neutralidade Portuguesa e o Ouro Nazi. Lisbon: Quetzal, 2000.

   ■ Teotônio Pereira, Pedro. Memórias, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1972-73.

   ■ Vasco, Nuno. Vigiados e perseguidos. Lisbon, 1977.

   ■ Veríssimo, Serrão. Marcelo Caetano: Confidencias No Exílio. Lisbon, 1985. Vintras, R. E. The Portuguese Connection: The Secret History of the Azores Base. London: Bachman & Turner, 1974. West, S. George. The New Corporative State of Portugal [Inaugural lecture, King's College, London, Feb. 1937]. London: New Temple Press, 1937. Wheeler, Douglas L. "Thaw in Portugal." Foreign Affairs 48, 4 (July 1970): 769-81.

   ■. "Days of Wine and Carnations: The Portuguese Revolution of [April 25] 1974." Bulletin. New Hampshire Council on World Affairs XX (July 1974): 1-10.

   ■. "Antônio de Oliveira Salazar (1889-1970)." In Jacques Frémontier, ed., Les Hommes d'Siecle XX: Les Dictateurs. Paris: Mazenod, 1978.

   ■. "The Military and the Portuguese Dictatorship, 1926- 1974." In S. Graham and H. M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents, 191-219. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.

   ■. "In the Service of Order: The Portuguese Dictatorship's Political Police (PVDE; PIDE) and the British, German and Spanish Intelligence [Services]." Journal of Contemporary History 24, 2 (January 1983): 1-25.

   ■. Republican Portugal: A Political History, 1910-1926. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1978. Portuguese edition: História Política de Portugal, 1910-l926. Mem Martins, 1985.

   ■. "The Price of Neutrality: Portugal, the Wolfram Question, and World War II." Luso-Brazilian Review [two part article] 12, 1-2 (Summer 1986; Winter 1986): 107-27.

   ■. A Ditadura Militar Portuguesa, 1926-1933. Mem Martins, 1988.

   ■. "The Third Pig: From Theory to Grubby Fact in Reassessing the Estado Novo." In B. F. Taggie and R. W. Clement, eds., Iberia & the Mediterranean, 145-68. Warrensburg: Central Missouri State Press, 1989.

   ■. "And Who Is My Neighbor? A World War II Hero of Conscience for Portugal." Luso-Brazilian Review 26, 1 (Summer 1989): 119-39.

   ■. "Antônio de Oliveira Salazar (1889-1970)." In Research Guide to European Historical Biography. Vol. 3. Washington, D.C.: Beacham, 1992.

   ■. "'Estado Presente de tranquilidade,' posto em causa: Portugal observado e analisado no contexto internacional de 1958-59." In Iva Delgado, Carlos Pacheco, and Telmo Faria, eds., Humberto Delgado: As eleições de 58, 448-71. Lisbon: Vega, 1998.

   ■, and René Pélissier. Angola. New York: Praeger and London: Pall Mall, 1971; reprinted: Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1977.

   ■ Wiarda, Howard J. "Toward a Framework for the Study of Political Change in Iberic-Latin Tradition: The Corporative Model." World Politics 25 (January 1973): 206-35.

   ■. Corporatism and Development: The Portuguese Experience. Amherst: University of Massachusetts Press, 1977.

   ■. "The Corporatist Tradition and the Corporative System in Portugal." In L. S. Graham and H. M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal. The Revolution and Its Antecedents, 89-122. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.

   ■ World War II and Portugal

   ■ Afonso, Rui. Um Homem Bom. Aristides De Sousa Mendes O " Wallenberg Portugues." Lisbon: Caminho, 1995.

   ■. Injustica-o Caso Sousa Mendes. Lisbon: Caminho, 1990.

   ■ Agudo, Manuel Ros. La Guerra Secreta de Franco ( 1939-1945). Barcelona, 2002.

   ■ Anon., Fugindo a Hitler e a Salazar e ao Holocausto-Refugiados em Portugal entre 1933-1945. Lisbon: Soc. Tipografica, 1994.

   ■ Barreiros, Jose Antonio. A Lusitania Dos Espioes. Lisbon: Hugin, 1995.

   ■. O Espiao Alemao Em Goa. Operacao Long Shanks, 1943. Lisbon, 2001.

   ■ Beevor, J. G. SOE. Recollections and Reflections 1940-45. London, 1981. Bloch, Michael. Operation Willi: The Plot to Kidnap the Duke of Windsor July 1940. London: Weidenfeld & Nicolson, 1984. Carrilho, Maria et. al., Portugal Na Segunda Guerra Mundial. Contributos para uma reavaliacao. Lisbon: Dom Quixote, 1989. Cole, Robert. Britain and the War of Words in Neutral Europe, 1939-45. New York: St. Martin's, 1990. Colvin, Ian. Flight 777. London: Evans, 1957. Dias, Mariana Tavares. Lisboa nos Anos 40. Lisbon: Quimera, 1997. Eizenstadt, Stuart E. Coord. U.S. and Allied Efforts to Recover and Restore Gold and Other Assets Stolen or Hidden by Germany during World War II. New York, 2001.

   ■ Fralon, Jose-Alain. A Good Man in Evil Times. The Story of Aristides De Sousa Mendes: The Man Who Saved the Lives of Countless Refugees in World War II. New York: Carroll & Graf, 2001.

   ■ Giraudoux, Jean. Portugal. Paris: Grasset, 1958.

   ■ Johns, Philip. Within Two Cloaks. Missions With SIS and SOE. London, 1979.

   ■ Koestler, Arthur. Arrival and Departure. London, 1943.

   ■ Leitz, Christian. Sympathy for the Devil: Neutral Portugal and Nazi Germany in World War II. New York, 2001.

   ■ Louca, Antonio. Hitler e Salazar. Comercio em tempos de Guerra 1940-1944. Lisbon, 2000.

   ■ Luca, Antonio. "Portugal's Double Game: Between the Nazis and the Allies." In Avi Beker, ed., The Plunder of Jewish Property during the Holocaust. Confronting European History. New York, 2001. MacIntyre, Ben. Agent Zigzag. New York: Harmony, 2007. Martins, Maria Joao. O Paraiso Triste. O Quotidiano em Lisboa durante a II Grande Guerra. Lisbon: Vega, 1994. Masterman, J.C. The Double-Cross System in the War of 1939 to 1945. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1972. Muggeridge, Malcolm. Chronicles of Wasted Time. Chronicle 2: The Infernal Grove. New York: William Morrow, 1974.

   ■ Nery, Julia. O Consul. Lisbon: Dom Quixote, 1991.

   ■ Pimentel, Irene Flunser. Judeus em Portugal na Segunda Guerra Mundial. Lisbon, 2006.

   ■ Popov, Dusko. Spy/ Counterspy. London, 1974.

   ■ Prokosch, Frederick. The Conspirators. New York, 1943.

   ■ Remarque, Erich Maria. The Night in Lisbon. New York, 1966.

   ■ Ribeiro, Aquilino. Volfarmio Romance. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1943.

   ■ Rosas, Fernando. Portugal entre a Paz e a Guerra. Lisbon: Estampa, 1990.

   ■ Saint-Exupery, Antoine. Wartime Writings, 1939-1944. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1986.

   ■ Teixeira, Nuno Severiano, ed. Portugal E A Guerra. Historia das Intervencoes militares portuguesas nos grandes conflitos mundiais seculos XIX e XX. Lisbon: Colibri, 1998.

   ■ Telo, Antonio Jose. Propagandal E Guerra Secreta Em Portugal 1939-45. Lisbon, 1990.

   ■. Portugal na Segunda Guerra ( 1941-1945), 2 vols. Lisbon, 1991.

   ■. Os Acores E O Controlo Do Atlantico ( 1898/ 1948). Lisbon: Ed. Asa, 1993.

   ■. A neutralidade portuguesa e o ouro nazi. Lisbon, 2000.

   ■ Vintras, R.E. The Portuguese Connection: The Secret History of the Azores Base. London: Bachman and Turner, 1974. Wheeler, Douglas L. "The Age Old Business of Espionage." 1987 World Book Year Book. Chicago, 1987.

   ■. "'In the Service of Order.' The Portuguese Political Police and the British, Germany and Spanish Intelligence [Services]." Journal of Contemporary History 36: no. 3 (Jan. 1983), 1-25.

   ■. "And Who is My Neighbor? A World War II Hero of Conscience for Portugal." Luso-Brazilian Review 23 (no. 2) (Summer 1989), 119-39.

   ■. "The Price of Neutrality: Portugal, the Wolfram Question, and World War II." Luso-Brazilian Review (Madison, WI), 23 (nos.1, 2) (Summer, 1986; Winter, 1986). 97-111; 108-127.

   ■. "Last of the Great Air Mysteries of the War [World War II]." Bridport and Lyme Regis Gazette (Dorset, U.K.), June 5, 2003, 24-25.

   ■. "Leslie Howard Helped Win World War II," St. Louis Post-Dispatch (St. Louis, Mo.), April 3, 5, 2005.

   ■ Wilson, Robert. A Small Death in Lisbon. London, 2000.

   ■. The Company Of Strangers. San Diego, 2002.

   ■ Wylie, Neville. "An Amateur Learns His Job? Special Operations Executive in Portugal, 1940-42." Journal of Contemporary History. 36: no. 3 (2001), 441-57.

   ■ The Military

   ■ Ferreira Martins, General. Historia do Exercito Portugues. Lisbon: Inquerito, 1945.

   ■ Kaulza de Arriaga, General. Guerra e Politica. Em nome da verdade. Os anos decisivos. Lisbon: Referendo, 1987.

   ■ Medeiros Ferreira, Jose. O Comportamento Politico dos Militares, Forcas Armadas e Regimes Politicos em Portugal no seculo XX. Lisbon: Estampa, 1992.

   ■ Pereira Marques, Fernando. Exercito e Sociedade em Portugal. No Declinio do Antigo Regime e advento do Liberalismo. Lisbon: Regra do Jogo, 1981.

   ■ Porch, Douglas. The Portuguese Armed Forces and the Revolution. London: Croom Helm, 1977.

   ■ Ribeiro Dos Santos, Antonio Pedro. O Estado E A Order Publica. As Institui-coes Militares Portuguesas. Lisbon: Instituto Superior De Ciencias Sociais E Politicas, 1999.

   ■ Saraiva de Carvalho, Otelo. Alvorada em Abril. Amadora (Portugal): Bertrand, 1977.

   ■ Selvagem, Carlos. Portugal Militar. Compendio de Historia Militar e Naval de Portugal. Lisbon: Imprensa Nacional, 1931.

   ■ Spinola, Antonio de. Portugal e o Futuro. Lisbon: Arcadia, 1974.

   ■. Pais Sem Rumo. Contributo para a historia de uma Revolucao. Lisbon: Scire, 1978.

   ■ Teixeira, Nuno Severiano. Portugal e a Guerra. Historia das intervencoes militares portuguesas nos grandes conflitos mundiais do seculo XX. Lisbon: Ed. Colibri, 1999.

   ■. Coord., Nova Historia Militar de Portugal, 5 vols. Lisbon: Circulo de Leitores, 2003-.

   ■ Valente, Vasco Pulido. O Poder e o Povo. A Revolucao de 1910. Lisbon: Moraes, 1976, 1982.

   ■ Wheeler, Douglas L. Republican Portugal: A Political History ( 1910-1926). Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1978, 1998.

   ■. A Ditadura Militar Portuguesa ( 1926-1933). Mem Martins: Europa- America, 1988.

   ■. "The Military and the Portuguese Dictatorship, 1926-1974: "The Honor of the Army." In Lawrence S. Graham and Harry M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents. 191-219. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.

   ■ Government and Politics since 1974

   ■ Aguiar, Joaquim. "Hidden Fluidity in an Ultra-Stable Party System." In E. de Sousa Ferreira and W. C. Opello, Jr., eds., Conflict and Change in Portugal, 1974-1984, 101-27. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■ Braga da Cruz, Manuel, ed. Sistema Eleitoral Portugües: Debate Político e Parlamentar. Lisbon: Imprensa Nacional/ Casa da Moeda, 1998.

   ■, ed. "Portugal Político 25 Anos Depois." In Análise Social XXXV, 154/155 (Summer, 2000): 1-404.

   ■ Bruneau, Thomas C., and Alex Macleod. Politics in Contemporary Portugal: Parties and the Consolidation of Democracy. Boulder, Colo.: Rienner, 1986.

   ■ Bruneau, Thomas C., ed. Political Parties and Democracy in Portugal. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1997. Carlucci, Frank. "Confiei no Povo Portugues." Visao (Lisbon), April 10, 1997, 46-47.

   ■. "The View from the U.S. Embassy." In Hans Binnendijk, ed., Authoritarian Regimes in Transition. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Dept. of State, Foreign Service Institute, Center for the Study of Foreign Affairs, 1987.

   ■ Coelho, Mário Baptista, ed. Portugal. O Sistema Política a Constitucional, 1974-87. Lisbon: Instituto de Ciências Sociais, UNL, 1989.

   ■ Costa Pinto, Antonio. "Settling Accounts with the Past in a Troubled Transition to Democracy: The Portuguese Case." In Alexandra Barahona De Brito, Carmen Gonzalez-Enriquez, and Paloma Aguilar, eds., The Politics of Memory: Transitional Justice in Democratizing Societies, 65-91. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2001.

   ■ Cruzeiro, Maria Manuela. Costa Gomes-o Ultimo Marechal. Lisbon: Edit. Noticias, 1998.

   ■ Domingos, Emídio Da Veiga. Portugal Político. Análise das Instituiçoes. Lisbon, 1989.

   ■ Goldey, David. "Elections and the Consolidation of Portuguese Democracy: 1974-1983." Electoral Studies 2, 3 (1983): 229-40.

   ■ Graham, Lawrence S. "Institutionalizing Democracy: Governance in Post-1974 Portugal." In Ali Farazmand, ed., Handbook of Comparative and Development Public Administration, 81-90. New York: Dekker, 1991.

   ■, and Douglas L. Wheeler, eds. In Search of Modern Portugal: The Revolution and Its Consequences. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.

   ■ Gunther, Richard. "Spain and Portugal." In G. A. Dorfman and P. J. Duignan, eds., Politics in Western Europe, 186-236. Stanford, Calif.: Hoover Institution Press, 1988.

   ■ Magone, José Maria. European Portugal: The Difficult Road to Sustainable Democracy. Basingstoke, U.K.: Macmillan, 1997.

   ■ Maxwell, Kenneth. The Making of Portuguese Democracy. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995.

   ■, ed. Portugal in the 1980s: Dilemmas of Democratic Consolidation. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.

   ■ Maxwell, Kenneth R., and Scott C. Monje, eds. Portugal: The Constitution and the Consolidation of Democracy, 1976-1989. New York: Camões Center, RIIC, Camões Center Special Report No. 2, Columbia University, 1991.

   ■ Opello, Walter C., Jr. "The New Parliament in Portugal." Legislative Studies Quarterly, 3 (May 1978): 309-334.

   ■. "Local Government and Political Culture in a Portuguese Rural County." Comparative Politics 13 (April 1981): 271-89.

   ■. "Portugal's Administrative Elite: Social Origins and Political Attitudes." West European Politics 6 (Jan. 1983): 63-74.

   ■. Portugal's Political Development: A Comparative Approach. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1985.

   ■ Pinto Balsemão, Francisco. "The Constitution and Politics: Options for the Future." In K. Maxwell, ed., Portugal in the 1980s, 197-232. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.

   ■ Sartori, Giovanni. "Portugal." In Sartori, G, ed., Parties and Party Systems. Vol. 1, 131-45. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1976. Secretary of State for Mass Communications. Constitution of the Portuguese Republic [1976]. Lisbon, 1977.

   ■ Contemporary Portugal since 1974

   ■ Aguiar, Joaquim. A Ilusão do poder: Analise do Sistema Partidário, 19761982. Lisbon, 1983. Almeida, Diniz de. Orígens e Evolução do Movimento dos Capitães. Lisbon, 1977.

   ■. Ascensao, Apogeu e Queda do MFA, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■ Alves, Márcio Moreira. Les Soldats Socialistes du Portugal. Paris: Gallimard, 1975.

   ■ Antunes, José Freire. Sá Carneiro: Um Meteoro Nos Anos Setenta. Lisbon, 1982.

   ■. O Segredo do 25 de Novembro. Mem Martins, 1983.

   ■ Arouca, Manuel. Os Filhos Da Costa Do Sol. Mem Martins, 1989. Audibert, Pierre, and Daniel Brignon. Portugal: Les nouveaux centurions. Paris, 1974.

   ■ Baptista, Jacinto. Caminhos para uma revolução. Lisbon, 1975. Barreto, Antônio. Memórias da Reforma Agrária. Mem Martins: Europa-Amé-rica, 1983.

   ■, and C. V. Preto, eds. A Situação Social em Portugal, 1960-1996. Lisbon: Instituto de Ciências Sociais, 1996.

   ■ Bermeo, Nancy Gina. "Worker Management in Industry: Reconciling Representative Government and Industrial Democracy in a Polarized Society." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 181-98. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.

   ■. The Revolution within the Revolution: Workers' Control in Rural Portugal. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1986.

   ■ Braeckman, Colette. Portugal: Revolution surveilée. Brussels: Rossei, 1975.

   ■ Braga da Cruz, Manuel. "O Presidente da República na génese e evolução do sistema de governor portugües." Análise social XXIX, 125-26 (1994): 237-65.

   ■, coord. "Portugal Político 25 Anos Depois." Análise Social XXXV, 154/155 (Summer 2000): 1-404. Bruneau, Thomas C. "Popular Support for Democracy in Post-revolutionary Portugal: Results from a Survey." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 21-42. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.

   ■. Politics and Nationhood: Post-Revolutionary Portugal. New York: Praeger, 1984.

   ■. "Portugal Fifteen Years after the April Revolution." Field Staff Reports ( 1989-90/ No. 1, Europe), 3-11. Indianapolis, Ind.: Universities Field Staff International, 1990.

   ■, and Alex Macleod. Politics in Contemporary Portugal: Parties and the Consolidation of Democracy. Boulder, Colo.: Rienner, 1986.

   ■ Carvalho, Ortelo Saraiva de. Cinco Meses Mudaram Portugal. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■. Alvorada em Abril. Lisbon, 1977.

   ■ Cid, Augusto. PREC-Processo Revolucionário Eventualmente Chocante. Viseu, 1977.

   ■ Costa Lobo, Marina, and Pedro C. Magalhaes. "From 'Third Wave' to 'Third Way': Europe and the Portuguese Socialists (1975-1999)," Journal of Southern Europe and the Balkans 3, no. 1 (2001), 25-35.

   ■ Costa Pinto, Antônio, ed. Modern Portugal. Palo Alto, Calif.: SPOSS, 1998.

   ■, and Nuno Severiano Teixeira, eds. Southern Europe and the Making of the European Union. New York: Columbia Univ. Press, 2002.

   ■ Cunhal, Alvaro. A Revolução Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■ Dias, Eduardo Mayone. Portugal's Secret Jews: The End of an Era. Rumford, R.I.: Peregrinação Publications, 1999.

   ■ Downs, Charles. "Comissões de Moradores and Urban Struggles in Revolutionary Portugal." International Journal of Urban and Regional Research 4 (1986): 267-94.

   ■. Revolution at the Grassroots: Community Organizations in the Portuguese Revolution. Albany: State University of New York Press, 1989.

   ■ Dufour, Jean-Marc. Prague sur Tage. Paris, 1975.

   ■ Durão Barroso, José. Le systémepolitiqueportugais face à l'intégration euro-péenne. Lisbon, 1983.

   ■ Eisfeid, Rainer. "Portugal: What Role/What Future?" In K. Maxwell, ed., Portugal Ten Years after the Revolution. New York: RIIC, Columbia University, 1984.

   ■. Sozialistischer Pluralismus in Europa: Ansãtze und Scheitern am Beispiel Portugal. Cologne: Verlag Wissenchaft ünd Politik, 1985.

   ■. "Portugal and Western Europe." In K. Maxwell, ed., Portugal in the 1980s, 29-62. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.

   ■ Farinha, Luis. "Regresso a Europa. Uma opcao feliz." Historia. XXIX; 95, III series (March 2007), 23-33.

   ■ Faye, Jean-Pierre, ed. Portugal: The Revolution in the Labyrinth. Nottingham, U.K.: Spokesman, 1976. Ferreira, Hugo Gil, and Michael W. Marshall. Portugal's Revolution: Ten Years On. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1986. Figueira, João Costa. Cavaco Silva: Homem de Estado. Lisbon, 1987. Filoche, Gérard. Printemps Portugais. Paris: Editions Action, 1984. Frémontier, Jacques. Os Pontos nos ii. Lisbon, 1976. Fundação Calouste Gulbenkian. 25 de Abril-10 anos depois. Lisbon, 1984. Futscher Pereira, Bernardo. "Portugal and Spain." In K. Maxwell, ed. Portugal in the 1980s, 63-87. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.

   ■ Gama, Jaime. Política Externa Portuguesa 1983-85: Ministério dos Negôcios Estrangeiros. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■. "Preface." In J. Calvet de Magalhães, A. de Vasconcelos, and J. Ramos Silva, eds., Portugal: An Atlantic Paradox, 9-11. Lisbon, 1990. Gaspar, Jorge, and Nuno Vitorino. As Eleições De 25 De Abril: Geografia E Imagem Dos Partidos. Lisbon, 1976.

   ■. "10 Anos de Democracia: Reflexos na geografia política." In E. de Sousa Ferreira and W. C. Opelio, Jr., eds., Conflict and Change in Portugal 1974-1984/ Conflitos e Mudanças em Portugal, 1974-1984, 135-55. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■, et al. As Eleições para assembleia da república, 1979-1983: Estudos de geografia eleitoral. Lisbon, 1984. Gaspar, Jorge, and Nuno Vitorino, eds. Portugal em mapas e em números. Lisbon, 1981.

   ■ Giaccone, Fausto. Una Storia Portoghese/ Uma História Portuguesa. Palermo: Randazzo Focus, 1987.

   ■ Gladdish, Ken. "Portugal: An Open Verdict." In Geoffrey Pridham, ed. Securing Democracy: Political Parties and Democratic Consolidation in Southern Europe, 104-25. London and New York: Routledge, 1990.

   ■ Graham, Lawrence S. The Decline and Collapse of an Authoritarian Order. Beverly Hills, Calif.: Sage, 1975.

   ■, and Harry M. Makler, eds. Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.

   ■, and Douglas L. Wheeler, eds. In Search of Modern Portugal: The Revolution and Its Consequences. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.

   ■ Grayson, George W. "Portugal and the Armed Forces Movement." Orbis XIX, 2 (Summer 1975): 335-78.

   ■ Green, Gil. Portugal's Revolution. New York: International, 1976.

   ■ Hammond, John L. Building Popular Power: Workers' and Neighborhood Movements in the Portuguese Revolution. New York: Monthly Review Press, 1988.

   ■ Harsgor, Michael. Naissance d'un Nouveau Portugal. Paris: Ed. du Seuil, 1975.

   ■. Portugal in Revolution. Washington, D.C.: CSIS and Sage, 1976.

   ■ Harvey, Robert. Portugal, Birth of a Democracy. London: Macmillan, 1978.

   ■ Herr, Richard, ed. Portugal: The Long Road to Democracy and Europe. Berkeley, Calif.: International and Area Studies, 1992.

   ■ Insight Team of the Sunday [London] Times. Insight on Portugal: The Year of the Captains. London: Deutsch, 1975.

   ■ Janitschek, Hans. Mario Soares: Portrait of a Hero. London: Weidenfeld & Nicolson, 1985.

   ■ Keefe, Eugene K., et al. Area Handbook for Portugal, 1st ed. Washington, D.C.: Foreign Area Studies of American University, 1977. Kramer, Jane. "A Reporter at Large: The Portuguese Revolution." The New Yorker (Dec. 15, 1975): 92-131.

   ■ Lauré, Jason, and Ettagal Lauré. Jovem Portugal: After the Revolution. New York: Straus, Farrar and Giroux, 1977.

   ■ Livermore, H. V. A New History of Portugal. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1976.

   ■ Lourenço, Eduardo. Os Militares e O Poder. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■. O Fascismo Nunca Existiu. Lisbon, 1976.

   ■. "Identidade e Memôria: o caso português." In E. de Sousa Ferreira and W. C. Opello, Jr., eds., Conflict and Change in Portugal, 1974-l 984, 17-22. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■ Lucena, Manuel. Evolução e Instituições: A Extinção dos Grémios da Lavoura Alentejanos. Mem Martins, 1984.

   ■. "A herança de duas revoluções." In M. Baptista Coelho, ed., Portugal: O Sistema Político e Constitucional, 1974-87, 505-55. Lisbon, 1989.

   ■ Macedo, Jorge Braga de, and S. Serfaty. Portugal since the Revolution: Economic and Political Perspectives. New York: Praeger, 1981.

   ■ Magone, José M. European Portugal: The Difficult Road to Sustainable Democracy. New York: St. Martin's, 1997. Mailer, Phil. Portugal: The Impossible Revolution. London: Solidarity, 1977. Manta, João Abel. Cartoons/ 1969-1975. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■ Manuel, Paul C. Uncertain Outcome: The Politics of Portugal's Transition to Democracy. Lanham, Md. and London: University Press of America, 1994.

   ■ Mateus, Rui. Contos Proibidos. Memorias de Um PS Desconhecido, 3rd ed. Lisbon: Dom Quixote, 1996.

   ■ Maxwell, Kenneth. "Portugal under Pressure." The New York Review of Books (May 2, 1974).

   ■. "The Hidden Revolution in Portugal." The New York Review of Books (April 17, 1975).

   ■. "The Thorns of the Portuguese Revolution." Foreign Affairs 54, 2 (Jan. 1976): 250-70.

   ■. "The Communists and the Portuguese Revolution." Dissent 27, 2 (Spring 1980): 194-206.

   ■. Portugal in the 1980s: Dilemmas of Democratic Consolidation. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.

   ■. The Making of Portuguese Democracy. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995.

   ■, ed. "Portugal: Toward the Twenty-First Century." Camoes Center Quarterly 5, 3-4 (Fall 1995): 6-55.

   ■, ed. The Press and the Rebirth of Iberian Democracy. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1983.

   ■. Portugal Ten Years after the Revolution: Reports of Three Columbia University-Gulbenkian Workshops. New York: Research Institute on International Change, Columbia University, 1984.

   ■ Maxwell, Kenneth, and Michael H. Haltzel, eds. Portugal: Ancient Country, Young Democracy. Washington, D.C.: Wilson Center Press, 1990.

   ■ Medeiros Ferreira, José. Ensaio Histórico sobre a revolução do 25 de Abril. Lisbon, 1983.

   ■ Medina, João, ed. Portugal De Abril: Do 25 Aos Nossos Dias. In Medina, ed., História Contemporãnea De Portugal. Lisbon, 1985. Merten, Peter. Anarchismus ünd Arbeiterkãmpf in Portugal. Hamburg: Libertare, 1981.

   ■ Miranda, Jorge. Constituição e Democracia. Lisbon, 1976.

   ■. A Constituição de 1976. Lisbon, 1978.

   ■ Morrison, Rodney J. Portugal: Revolutionary Change in an Open Economy. Boston: Auburn House, 1981.

   ■ Mujal-Leôn, Eusebio. "The PCP [Portuguese Communist Party] and the Portuguese Revolution." Problems of Communism 26 (Jan.- Feb. 1977): 21-41.

   ■ Neves, Mário. Missão em Moscovo. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■ Oliveira, César. M. F. A. e Revolução Socialista. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■. Os Anos Decisivos: Portugal 1962-1985. Um testemunho. Lisbon: Presença, 1993.

   ■ Opello, Waiter C., Jr. Portugal's Political Development: A Comparative Approach. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1985.

   ■. Portugal: From Monarchy to Pluralist Democracy. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1991.

   ■ Pell, Senator Claiborne H. Portugal ( Including the Azores and Spain) in Search of New Directions: Report to the Committee on Foreign Relations, U.S. Senate. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1976.

   ■ Pereira, J. Pacheco. "A Case of Orthodoxy: The Communist Party of Portugal." In Waller and Fenema, eds., Communist Parties in Western Europe: Adaptation or Decline? Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1988.

   ■ Pilmott, Ben. "Socialism in Portugal: Was It a Revolution?" Government and Opposition 7 (Summer 1977).

   ■. "Were the Soldiers Revolutionary? The Armed Forces Movement in Portugal, 1973-1976." Iberian Studies 7, 1 (1978): 13-21.

   ■, and Jean Seaton. "Political Power and the Portuguese Media." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 43-57. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.

   ■ Porch, Douglas. The Portuguese Armed Forces and the Revolution. London: Croom Helm and Stanford, Calif.: Hoover Institution Press, 1977.

   ■ Pouchin, Dominique. Portugal, quelle révolution? Paris, 1976.

   ■ Pulido Valente, Vasco. "E Viva Otelo." In Pulido Valente, V., ed., O País das Maravilhas, 451-54. Lisbon, 1979 [anthology of articles from weekly Lisbon paper, Expresso].

   ■. Estudos Sobre a Crise Nacional. Lisbon, 1980.

   ■ Rebelo de Sousa, Marcelo. O Sistema de Governo Português antes e depois da Revisão Constitucional, 3rd ed. Lisbon, 1981. Rêgo, Raúl. Militares, Clérigos e Paisanos. Lisbon, 1981. Robinson, Richard A. H. Contemporary Portugal: A History. London: Allen & Unwin, 1979.

   ■ Rodrigues, Avelino, Cesário Borga, and Mário Cardoso. O Movemento dos Capitães e o 25 de Abril. Lisbon, 1974.

   ■. Portugal Depois De Abril. Lisbon, 1976.

   ■ Ruas, H. B., ed. A Revolução das Flores. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■ Rudel, Christian. La Liberte couleur d'oeillet. Paris: Fayard, 1980.

   ■ Sa, Tiago Moreira de. Os Americanos na Revolucao Portuguesa ( 1974-1976). Lisbon: Edit. Noticias, 2004.

   ■ Sá Carneiro, Francisco. Por Uma Social-Democracia Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■ Sanches Osôrio, Helena. Um Só Rosto. Uma Só Fé. Conversas Com Adelino Da Palma Carlos. Lisbon, 1988. Sanches Osôrio, J. The Betrayal of the 25th of April in Portugal. Madrid: Sedmay, 1975.

   ■ Schmitter, Philippe C. "Liberation by Golpe: Retrospective Thoughts on the Demise of Authoritarian Rule in Portugal." Armed Forces and Society 2 (1974): 5-33.

   ■. "An Introduction to Southern European Transitions from Authoritarian Rule: Italy, Greece, Portugal, Spain and Turkey." In G. O'Donnell,

   ■ P. C. Schmitter, and L. Whitehead, eds., Transitions from Authoritarian Rule, 3-10. Baltimore, Md.: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1986.

   ■ Silva, Fernando Dioga da. "Uma Administração Envelhecido." Revista da Ad-ministraçao Pública 2 (Oct.-Dec. 1979).

   ■ Simões, Martinho, ed. Relatório Do 25 De Novembro: Texto Integral, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1976.

   ■ Soares, Isabel, ed. Mário Soares: O homem e o político. Lisbon, 1976. Soares, Mário. Democratização e Descolonização: Dez meses no Governo Provisório. Lisbon, 1975. Sobel, Lester A., ed. Portuguese Revolution, 1974-1976. New York: Facts on File, Inc., 1976.

   ■ Spínola, Antônio de. Portugal e o Futuro. Lisbon, 1974.

   ■. País Sem Rumo: Contributo para a História de uma Revolução. Lisbon, 1978.

   ■ Stock, Maria José. Os Partidos do Poder: Dez Anos Depois do " 25 De Abril." Evora, 1986.

   ■ Story, Jonathan. "Portugal's Revolution of Carnations: Patterns of Change and Continuity." International Affairs 52 (July 1976): 417-34. Sweezey, Paul. "Class Struggles in Portugal." Monthly Review 27, 4 (Sept. 1975): 1-26.

   ■ Szulc, Tad. "Lisbon and Washington: Behind Portugal's Revolution." Foreign Policy 21 (Winter 1975-76): 3-62. Tavares de Almeida, Antônio. Balsemão: O retrato. Lisbon, 1981. "Vasco." Desenhos Políticos. Lisbon, 1974.

   ■ Vasconcelos, Alvaro. "Portugal in Atlantic-Mediterranean Security." In Douglas T. Stuart, ed., Politics and Security in the Southern Region of the Atlantic Alliance, 117-36. London: Macmillan, 1988.

   ■ Wheeler, Douglas L. "Golpes militares e golpes literários. A literatura do golpe de 25 de Abril de 1974 em contexto histôrico." Penélope. Fazer E Desfazer A História, 19-20 (1998): 191-212.

   ■. "Tributo ao Historiador dos Historiadores. Memorias de A.H.de Oliveira Marques (1933-2007)," Historia XXIX, 95, III series (March 2007), 18-22.

   ■ Wiarda, Howard J. Transcending Corporatism? The Portuguese Corporative System and the Revolution of 1974. Columbia: Institute of International Studies, University of South Carolina, 1976.

   ■. The Transition to Democracy in Spain and Portugal. Washington, D.C.: American Enterprise Institute for Public Policy Research, 1989. Wise, Audrey. Eyewitness in Revolutionary Portugal. With a Preface by Judith Hart, MP. London: Spokesman, 1975.

   ■ PHYSICAL FEATURES: GEOGRAPHY, GEOLOGY, FAUNA, AND FLORA

   ■ Birot, Pierre. Le Portugal: Étude de géographie régionale. Paris, 1950.

   ■ Embleton, Clifford. Geomorphology of Europe. London: Macmillan, 1984.

   ■ Girão, Aristides de Amorim. Divisão regional, divisão agrícola e divisão administrativa. Coimbra, 1932.

   ■. Condições geográficos e históricas de autonomia política de Portugal. Coimbra, 1935.

   ■. Atlas de Portugal, 2nd ed. Coimbra, 1958.

   ■ Ribeiro, Orlando. Portugal, O Mediterrâneo e o Altântico. Coimbra, 1945 and later eds.

   ■. Portugal. Volume V of Geografia de Espana y Portugal. Barcelona, 1955.

   ■. Ensaios de Geografia Humana e regio nal. Lisbon, 1970.

   ■. A geografia e a divisão regional do país. Lisbon, 1970.

   ■ Stanislawski, Dan. The Individuality of Portugal. Austin: The University of Texas Press, 1959.

   ■. Portugal's Other Kingdom: The Algarve. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1963.

   ■ Taylor, Albert William. Wild Flowers of Spain and Portugal. London: Chatto & Windus, 1972.

   ■ Way, Ruth, and Margaret Simmons. A Geography of Spain and Portugal. London: Methuen, 1962.

   ■ ARCHAEOLOGY AND PREHISTORY

   ■ "Actas do Colóquio Inter-Universitário do Noroeste Peninsular (Porto-Baião, 1988), vol. II, Proto-História, romanização e Idade Média." In Trabalhos de antropologia e etnologia. 28, 3-4 (1988).

   ■ Alarcão, Jorge de, ed. "Do Paleolítico va arte visigótica." Vol. 1, História da

   ■ Arte em Portugal. Lisbon: Alfa, 1986.

   ■. Roman Portugal, 3 vols. Warminister, U.K.: Aris & Phillips, 1988.

   ■. Portugal Das Orígens A Romanização. Vol. I. In J. Serrão and A. H. de Oliveira Marques, eds. Nova História de Portugal. Lisbon: Presença, 1990. Anderson, James M., and M. S. Lea. Portugal 1001 Sights: An Archaeological and Historical Guide. Calgary, Alberta: University of Calgary and Robert Hale, 1994.

   ■ Balmuth, Miriam S., Antonio Gilman, and Lourdes Prados-Torreira, eds. Encounters and Transformations: The Archaeology of Iberia in Transition. Monographs in Mediterranean Archaeology, no. 7. Sheffield, U.K.: Sheffield Academic Press, 1997.

   ■ Beirão, C. M. M. Une civilization protohistorique du Sud au Portugal ( 1er Age du Fer). Paris: D. Boccard, 1986.

   ■ Cardoso, João Luís, Santinho A. Cunha, and Delberto Aguiar. O Homem Pre-Histórico no Concelho de Oeiras. Oeiras, Portugal: Estudos Arquelógicos de Oeiras, 1991.

   ■ Harrison, Richard J. The Bell Beaker Cultures of Spain and Portugal. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1977.

   ■ Mangas, Júlio, ed. Hispania epigraphica. Madrid, 1989.

   ■ Maloney, Stephanie J. "The Villa of Toerre de Palma, Portugal: Archaeology and Preservation." Portuguese Studies Review VIII, 1 (Fall-Winter, 1999-2000): 14-28.

   ■ Savory, H. N. Spain and Portugal: The Prehistory of the Iberian Peninsula. London, 1968.

   ■ Silva, A. C. F. A cultura castreja no Noroeste de Portugal. Paços de Ferreira:

   ■ Museu da Citânia de Sanfins, 1986. Straus, L. G. Iberia before the Iberians. Albuquerque, N.M., 1992.

   ■ FOREIGN TRAVELERS AND RESIDENTS' ACCOUNTS

   ■ Andersen, Hans Christian. A Visit to Portugal 1866. London: Peter Owen, 1972.

   ■ Beckford, William. Italy, with Sketches of Spain and Portugal. Paris: Baudry's European Library, 1834.

   ■. The Journal of William Beckford in Portugal and Spain 1787-1788.

   ■ Boyd Alexander, ed. London: Hart-Davies, 1954.

   ■. Recollections of an Excursion to the Monasteries of Alcoboca and Batalha. Fontwell, U.K.: Centaur Press, 1972.

   ■ Bell, Aubrey F. G. In Portugal. London: Bodley Head, 1912.

   ■ Borrow, George. The Bible in Spain, 2 vols. London: Constable, 1923 ed.

   ■ Chaves, Castelo Branco. Os livros de viagens em Portugal no século XVIII e a sua projecção europeia. Lisbon, 1977.

   ■ Costigan, Arthur William. Sketches of Society and Manners in Portugal. London: T. Vernon, 1787.

   ■ Crawfurd, Oswald. Portugal Old and New. London: Kegan, Paul, 1880.

   ■. Round the Calendar in Portugal. London: Chapman & Hall, 1890.

   ■ Darymple, William. Travels through Spain and Portugal in 1774. London: J. Almon, 1777.

   ■ Dumouriez, Charles Francois Duperrier. An Account of Portugal as It Appeared in 1766. London: C. Law, 1797.

   ■ Fielding, Henry. Jonathan Wild and the Journal of a Voyage to Lisbon. London: J. M. Dent, 1932.

   ■ Fullerton, Alice. To Portugal for Pleasure. London: Grafton, 1945.

   ■ Gibbons, John. I Gathered No Moss. London: Robert Hale, 1939.

   ■ Gordon, Jan, and Cora Gordon. Portuguese Somersault. London: Harrap, 1934.

   ■ Hewitt, Richard. A Cottage in Portugal. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1996.

   ■ Huggett, Frank. South of Lisbon: Winter Travels in Southern Portugal. London: Gollancz, 1960.

   ■ Hume, Martin. Through Portugal. London: Richards, 1907.

   ■ Hyland, Paul. Backwards Out of the Big World: A Voyage into Portugal. Hammersmith, U.K.: HarperCollins, 1996.

   ■ Jackson, Catherine Charlotte, Lady. Fair Lusitania. London: Bentley, 1874.

   ■ Kelly, Marie Node. This Delicious Land Portugal. London: Hutchinson, 1956.

   ■ Kempner, Mary Jean. Invitation to Portugal. New York: Athenaeum, 1969.

   ■ Kingston, William H. G. Lusitanian Sketches of the Pen and Pencil. 2 vol. London: Parker, 1845.

   ■ Landmann, George. Historical, Military and Picturesque Observations on Portugal. 2 vol. London: Cadell and Davies, 1818.

   ■ Latouche, John [Pseudonym of Oswald Crawfurd]. Travels in Portugal. London: Ward, Lock & Taylor, ca. 1874.

   ■ Link, Henry Frederick. Travels in Portugal and France and Spain. London: Longman & Rees, 1801.

   ■ Macauley, Rose. They Went to Portugal. London: Jonathan Cape, 1946.

   ■. They Went to Portugal, Too. Manchester: Carcanet Books, 1990.

   ■ Merle, Iris. Portuguese Panorama. London: Ouzel, 1958.

   ■ Murphy, J. C. Travels in Portugal. London: 1795.

   ■ Proper, Datus C. The Last Old Place: A Search through Portugal. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1992.

   ■ Quillinan, Dorothy [Wordsworth]. Journal of a Few Months in Portugal with Glimpses of the South of Spain. 2 vol. London: Moxon, 1847. Sitwell, Sacheverell. Portugal and Madeira. London: Batsford, 1954. Smith, Karine R. Until Tomorrow: Azores and Portugal. Snohomish, Wash.: Snohomish Publishing, 1978. Southey, Robert. Journals of a Residence in Portugal, 1800-1801 and a Visit to France, 1838. London and New York: Oxford Univ. Press, 1912. Thomas, Gordon Kent. Lord Byron's Iberian Pilgrimage. Provo, Utah: Brigham Young University Press, 1983. Twiss, Richard. Travels through Portugal and Spain in 1772-1773. London, 1775.

   ■ Watson, Gilbert. Sunshine and Sentiment in Portugal. London: Arnold, 1904. Wheeler, Douglas L. "A[n American] Fulbrighter in Lisbon, Portugal, 196162." Portuguese Studies Review 1 (1991): 9-16.

   ■ PORTUGUESE CARTOGRAPHY, DISCOVERIES, AND NAVIGATION

   ■ Albuquerque, Luís de. Curso de História de Naútica. Coimbra, 1972.

   ■. Introdução a história dos descobrimentos, 3rd ed. Mem Martins, 1983.

   ■. Os Descobrimentos Portugueses. Lisbon: Alfa, 1983.

   ■. Navegadores, viajantes e adventureiros portugueses: Séculos XV e XVI. Lisbon, 1984.

   ■. Portuguese Books on Nautical Science from Pedro Nunes to 1650. Lisbon, 1984.

   ■. Os Descobrimentos Portugueses. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■ Boorstin, Daniel. The Discoverers. New York: Random House, 1983. Boxer, C. R. The Portuguese Seaborne Empire, 1415-1825. London: Hutchinson, 1969.

   ■ Brazão, Eduardo. La découverte de Terre-Neuve. Montreal: Les Presses de l'Université, 1964.

   ■. "Les Corte-Real et le Nouveau Monde." Revue d'histoire d'Amérique Française 19, 1 (1965): 335-49. Cortesão, Armando, and Avelino Teixeira de Mota. Cartografia Portuguesa Antiga. Lisbon, 1960.

   ■. Portugalia Monumenta Cartográfica, 6 vols. Lisbon, 1960-62.

   ■. História da Cartografia Portuguesa, 2 vols. Coimbra, 1969-70.

   ■ Cortesão, Jaime. L'expansion des portugais dans l'historie de la civilisation. Brussels, 1930.

   ■. Os descobrimentos portugueses, 2 vols. V. Magalhães Godinho and Joel Serrão, eds. Lisbon, 1960.

   ■. A expansão dos Portugueses no período henriquinho. Lisbon, 1965.

   ■. Descobrimentos precolombanos dos portugueses. Lisbon, 1966.

   ■ Costa, Abel Fontoura da. A Marinharia dos Descobrimentos, 3rd ed. Lisbon, 1960.

   ■ Costa Brochado, Idalino F. Descobrimento do Atlântico. Lisbon, 1958. English ed., 1959-60.

   ■ Coutinho, Admiral Gago. A naútica dos descobrimentos, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1951-52.

   ■ Crone, G. R. Maps and Their Makers. New York: Capricorn Books, 1966.

   ■ Dias, José S. da Silva. Os descobrimentos e a problemática cultural do Século XVI, 2nd ed. Lisbon, 1982.

   ■ Disney, Anthony, and Emily Booth, eds. Vasco Da Gama and the Linking of Europe and Asia. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2000.

   ■ Godinho, Vitorino Magalhães, ed. Documentos sobre a expansão portuguesa [ to 1460], 3 vols. Lisbon, 1945-54.

   ■ Guedes, Max, and Gerald Lombardi, eds. Portugal. Brazil: The Age of Atlantic Discoveries. Lisbon: Bertrand; Milan: Ricci; Brazilian Culture Foundation, 1990. [Catalogue of New York Public Library Exhibit, Summer 1990]

   ■ Harley, J. B., and David Woodward. The History of Cartography. Volume 1: Cartography in Prehistoric, Ancient and Medieval Europe and Mediterranean. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1987.

   ■ Leite, Duarte. História dos Descobrimentos: Colectânea de esparsos, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1958-61.

   ■ Ley, Charles. Portuguese Voyages, 1498-1663. London: Dent, 1953.

   ■ Marques, J. Martins da Silva. Descobrimentos portugueses, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1944-71.

   ■ Martyn, John R. C., ed. Pedro Nunes ( 1502-1578): His Lost Algebra and Other Discoveries. John R. C. Martyn, trans. New York: Peter Lang, 1996.

   ■ Morison, Samuel Eliot. The European Discovery of America: The Northern Voyages, A. D. 500-1600. New York: Oxford University Press, 1971.

   ■. Portuguese Voyages to America in the Fifteenth Century. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1974.

   ■ Mota, Avelino Teixeira da. Mar, Além-Mar-Estudos e Ensaios de História e Geografia. Lisbon, 1972.

   ■ Nemésio, Vitorino. Vida e Obra do Infante D. Henrique. Lisbon, 1959.

   ■ Parry, J. H. The Discovery of the Sea. New York: Dial, 1974.

   ■ Penrose, Boies. Travel and Discovery in the Renaissance, 1420-1620. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1952.

   ■ Peres, Damião. História dos Descobrimentos Portugueses. Oporto, 1943.

   ■ Prestage, Edgar. The Portuguese Pioneers. London, 1933; New York: Barnes & Noble, 1967.

   ■ Rogers, Francis M. Precision Astrolabe: Portuguese Navigators and Transoceanic Aviation. Lisbon, 1971.

   ■ Seary, E. R. "The Portuguese Element in the Place Names of Newfoundland." In Luís Albuquerque, ed., Vice-Almirante A. Teixeira da Mota: In Memo-riam. Vol. II, 359-64. Lisbon: Academia da Marinha, 1989.

   ■ Subrahmanyam, Sanjay. The Career and Legend of Vasco Da Gama. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1997.

   ■ Velho, Alvaro. Roteiro ( Navigator's Route) da Primeira Viagem de Vasco da Gama ( 1497-1499). Lisbon, 1960.

   ■ Winius, George, ed. Portugal, the Pathfinder: Journeys from the Medieval toward the Modern World 1300-ca. 1600. Madison, Wisc.: Hispanic Seminary of Medieval Studies, 1995.

   ■ PORTUGAL AND HER OVERSEAS EMPIRES (1415-1975)

   ■ Abshire, David M., and Michael A. Samuels, eds. Portuguese Africa: A Handbook. New York: Praeger, 1969.

   ■ Afonso, Aniceto, and Carlos de Matos Gomes. Guerra Colonial. Lisbon: Noticias, 2001.

   ■ Albuquerque, J. Moushino de. Moçambique. Lisbon, 1898.

   ■ Alden, Dauril. The Making of an Enterprise: The Society of Jesus in Portugal, Its Empire & Beyond. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1995.

   ■ Alexandre, Valentim. Orígens do Colonialismo Português Moderno ( 18221891). Lisbon: Sá da Costa, 1979.

   ■. Velho Brasil, Novas Africas: Portugal e o Império ( 1808-1975). Oporto: Afrontamento, 2000.

   ■, and Jill Dias, eds. "O Império Africano 1825-1890. Volume X." In J.

   ■ Serrão and A. H. de Oliveira Marques, eds., Nova História Da Expansão Portuguesa. Lisbon: Estampa, 1998.

   ■ Ames, Glen J. "The Carreira da India, 1668-1682: Maritime Enterprise and the Quest for Stability in Portugal's Asian Empire." Journal of European Economic History 20, 1 (1991): 7-28.

   ■. Renascent Empire? The House of Braganza and the Quest for Stability in Portuguese Monsoon Asia, ca. 1640-1683. Amsterdam: Amsterdam Univ.Press, 2000.

   ■. Vasco da Gama. Renaissance Crusader. New York: Pearson/Longman, 2005.

   ■ Antunes, José Freire. O Império com Pés de Barro: Colonizaçao e Descolonização: As Ideologias em Portugal. Lisbon: D. Quixote, 1980.

   ■. O Factor Africano 1890-1990. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1990.

   ■. A Guerra De Africa 1961-1974, 2 vols. Lisbon: Círculo de Leitores, 1995-96.

   ■. Jorge Jardim: Agente Secreto 1919-1982. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1996.

   ■ Axelson, Eric A. South-East Africa, 1488-1530. London: Longmans, 1940.

   ■. "Prince Henry and the Discovery of the Sea Route to India." Geographical Journal (U.K.) 127, 2 (June 1961): 145-58.

   ■. Portugal and the Scramble for Africa, 1875-1891. Johannesburg: Witwaterstrand University Press, 1967.

   ■. Portuguese in South-East Africa, 1488-1699. Cape Town: Struik, 1973.

   ■. Congo to Cape: Early Portuguese Explorers. New York: Harper & Row, 1974.

   ■ Azevedo, Mário. Historical Dictionary of Mozambique, 2nd ed. Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press, 2003.

   ■ Baião, António, Hernãni Cidade, and Manuel Murias, eds. História da Expansão Portuguesa no Mundo, 4 vols. Lisbon, 1937-40.

   ■ Bender, Gerald J. "The Limits of Counterinsurgency [in the Angolan War, 1961-72]." Comparative Politics (1972): 331-60.

   ■. Angola under the Portuguese: The Myth Versus Reality. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1978.

   ■ Bhíla, H. H. K. Trade and Politics in a Shona Kingdom: The Manyika and Their Portuguese and African Neighbours, 1875-1902. Harlow, U.K.: Longman, 1990.

   ■ Birmingham, David. The Portuguese Conquest of Angola. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1965.

   ■. Trade and Conflict in Angola. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1966.

   ■. Frontline Nationalism in Angola & Mozambique. London: James Currey, 1992.

   ■. Portugal and Africa. New York: St. Martins, 1999.

   ■ Bottineau, Yves. Le Portugal Et Sa Vocation Maritime. Paris: Boccard, 1977. Boxer, C. R. Fidalgos in the Far East— Fact and Fancy in the History of Macau. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1948. ———. The Christian Century in Japan. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1951.

   ■ ———. Salvador de Sá and the Struggle for Brazil and Angola, 1602-1688. London, 1952.

   ■ ———. Four Centuries of Portuguese Expansion, 1415-1825: A Succinct Survey. Johannesburg: Witwaterstrand University Press, 1961.

   ■ ———. The Golden Age of Brazil, 1695-1750. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1962.

   ■ ———. Race Relations in the Portuguese Colonial Empire, 1415-1825. Oxford:

   ■ Clarendon Press, 1963. ———. Portuguese Society in the Tropics. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1965.

   ■ ———. The Portuguese Seaborne Empire 1415-1825. London: Hutchi nson, 1969.

   ■ ———, and Carlos de Azevedo, eds. Fort Jesus and the Portuguese in Mombasa. London: Hollis and Carter, 1960.

   ■ Broadhead, Susan H. Historical Dictionary of Angola, 2nd ed. Metuchen, N.J.: Scarecrow Press, 1992.

   ■ Burton, Richard. Goa and the Blue Mountains. London: Bentley, 1851.

   ■ Cabral, Luís. Crónica da Libertação. Lisbon, 1984.

   ■ Caetano, Marcello. Colonizing Traditions, Principles and Methods of the Portuguese. Lisbon, 1951.

   ■ ———. Portugal E A Internacionalização Dos Problemas Africanos, 3rd ed. Lisbon, 1965.

   ■ Cann, John P. Counterinsurgency in Africa: The Portuguese Way of War, 1961-1974. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1997. Castelo, Claudia. " O modo portugues de estar no mundo." O luso-tropicalismo e a ideologia colonial portuguesa ( 1931-1961). Oporto: Afrontamento, 1998. Castro, Armando. O Sistema Colonial Português em Africa ( meados do Século XX). Lisbon, 1978.

   ■ Chaliand, Gerard. "The Independence of Guinea-Bissau and the Heritage of [Amilcar] Cabral." In Revolution in the Third World. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1978.

   ■ Chilcote, Ronald H. Portuguese Africa. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1967.

   ■ Clarence-Smith, Gervase. Slaves, Peasants and Capitalists in Southern Angola 1840-1926. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1979.

   ■ ———. The Third Portuguese Empire 1825-1975: A Study in Economic Imperialism. Manchester, U.K.: Manchester University Press, 1985.

   ■ Coates, Timothy J. Convicts and Orphans: Forced and State-Sponsored Colonizers in the Portuguese Empire, 1550-1720. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 2001.

   ■ Davies, Shann. Macau. Singapore: Times Editions, 1986.

   ■ Dias, C. Malheiro, ed. História da colonização portuguesa no Brasil, 3 vols. Oporto, 1921-24.

   ■ Diffie, Bailey W., and George Winius. Foundations of the Portuguese Empire, 1415-1580. Minneapolis: Minnesota University Press, 1977.

   ■ Disney, Anthony R. Twilight of the Pepper Empire: Portuguese Trade in Southwest India in the Early Seventeenth Century. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1978.

   ■ ———, and Emily Booth, eds. Vasco Da Gama and the Linking of Europe and Asia. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2000.

   ■ Duffy, James. Shipwreck and Empire: Being an Account of Portuguese Maritime Disaster in a Century of Decline. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1955.

   ■ ———. Portuguese Africa. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1959. ———. Portugal in Africa. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1962.

   ■. "The Portuguese Territories." In Colin Legum, ed., Africa: A Handbook to the Continent. New York: Holmes & Meier, 1967. ———. A Question of Slavery. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1967. Felgas, Hélio. História do Congo Português. Carmona, Angola, 1958. ———. Guerra em Angola. Lisbon, 1961.

   ■ Galvão, Henrique, and Carlos Selvagam. O Império Ultramarino Português, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1953.

   ■ Gleijeses, Piero. Conflicting Missions: Havana, Washington and Africa, 19591976. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2002.

   ■ Godinho, Vitorino Magalhães. "Portugal and Her Empire." In The New Cambridge Modern History. Vol. V (1961): 384-97; Vol. VI (1963): 509-TO.

   ■ Grenfell, F. James. História da Igreja Baptista em Angola, 1879-1975. Queluz, Portugal: Núcleo, 1998.

   ■ Hammond, Richard J. "Economic Imperialism: Sidelights on a Stereotype." Journal of Economic History XXI, 4 (1961): 582-98.

   ■ ———. Portugal and Africa, 1815-1910: A Study in Uneconomic Imperialism. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1966.

   ■ Hanson, Carl. Portugal and the Wider World 1147-1497. New Orleans, La.: University Press of the South, 2001.

   ■ Harris, Marvin. Portugal's African Wards. New York: American Committee on Africa, 1957.

   ■ ———. "Portugal's Contribution to the Underdevelopment of Africa and Brazil." In Ronald H. Chilcote, ed., Protest & Resistance in Angola & Brazil: Comparative Studies, 209-23. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1972.

   ■ Henderson, Lawrence W. Angola: Five Centuries of Conflict. Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1979. ———. A Igreja Em Angola. Lisbon: Edit. Além-Mar, 1990. Heywood, Linda. Contested Power in Angola 1840s to the Present. Rochester, N.Y.: University of Rochester Press, 2000.

   ■ Hilton, Anne. The Kingdom of Kongo. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1985.

   ■ Hower, Alfred, and Richard Preto-Rodas, eds. Empire in Transition: The Portuguese World in the Time of Camões. Gainesville: University Presses of Florida, 1985.

   ■ Isaacman, Allen. "The Prazos da Coroa 1752-1830: A Functional Analysis of the Political System." STUDIA (Lisbon) 26 (1969): 149-78.

   ■. Mozambique: The Africanization of a European Institution: The Zambezi Prazos, 1750-1902. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1972.

   ■ ———. The Tradition of Resistance in Mozambique: Anti-Colonial Activity in the Zambesi Valley 1850-1921. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1976.

   ■ James, Martin. Historical Dictionary of Angola, 3rd ed. Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press, 2004.

   ■ Jardim, Jorge. Sanctions Double-Cross: Oil to Rhodesia. Lisbon, 1978. Johnson, Harold, and Maria Beatriz Nizza da Silva. O Império Luso-Brasileiro 1500-1620. Volume VI. In J. Serrão and A. H. de Oliveira Marques, eds. Nova História Da Expansão Portuguesa. Lisbon: Estampa, 1992. Joliffe, Jill. East Timor: Nationalism & Colonialism. University of Queensland Press, 1978.

   ■ Kea, Ray A. Settlements, Trade and Politics in the Seventeenth Century Gold Coast. Baltimore, Md.: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1982.

   ■ Kohen, Arnold. From the Place of the Dead. The Epic Struggles of Bishop Belo of East Timor. New York: St Martins, 1999.

   ■ Livingstone, Charles, and David Livingstone. Narrative of an Expedition to the Zambezi and Its Tributaries. New York: 1866.

   ■ Livingstone, David. Missionary Travels and Researches in South Africa. London, 1857.

   ■ Lobban, Richard, and Joshua Forrest. Historical Dictionary of the Republic of Guinea-Bissau, 3rd ed. Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press, 1996. Lobban, Richard, and Marilyn Halter. Historical Dictionary of Cape Verde, 3rd ed. Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press, 1993. Martino, Antonio M. Joao de Azevedo Coutinho. Marinheiro e soldado de Portugal. Lisbon: Colibri, 2002. Martins, Rocha. História das Colónias Portuguesas. Lisbon, 1933. Marvaud, Angel. Le Portugal et Ses Colonies. Paris, 1912. Mason, Philip, ed. Angola: A Symposium; Views of a Revolt. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1961. Melo, João de, ed. Os Anos Da Guerra 1961-1975: Os Portugueses em Africa, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1988. Miller, Joseph C. Way of Death: Merchant Capitalism and the Angolan Slave Trade, 1730-1830. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1988.

   ■ Ministry of Foreign Affairs. Portugal. Vinte Anos de Defesa do Estado Português de India. Lisbon, 1967.

   ■. Portugal Replies in the United Nations. Lisbon, 1970.

   ■ Mondlane, Eduardo. The Struggle for Mozambique. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1969.

   ■ Moreira, Adriano. Política Ultramarina. Lisbon, 1956.

   ■. Portugal's Stand in Africa. New York: University Publishers, 1962.

   ■, and Jose Carlos Venancio. Eds. Luso-Tropicalismo. Uma Teoria Social em Questao. Lisbon: Vega, 2000.

   ■ Múrias, Manuel, ed. História da expansão portuguesa no mundo, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1937-42.

   ■. Short History of Portuguese Colonization. Lisbon, 1940.

   ■ Newitt, Malyn. Portuguese Settlement on the Zambesi: Exploration, Land Tenure and Colonial Rule in East Africa. New York: Holmes & Meier, 1973.

   ■. Portugal in Africa: The Last Hundred Years. London: Longmans, 1981.

   ■. A History of Mozambique. London: Hurst, 1995.

   ■. A History ofPortuguese Overseas Expansion, 1400-1668. London: Routledge, 2005.

   ■. Diálogos Interditos: A Política Externa Portuguesa E A Guerra De Africa, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■. História De Portugal. 1933-1974: II Suplemento. Oporto, 1981.

   ■. Um político confessa-se ( Diário: 1960-1968), 3rd ed. Oporto, 1987.

   ■. Salazar. Vol. V: A Resistência ( 1958-1964). Oporto, 1981.

   ■ Nowell, Charles E. "Portugal and the Partition of Africa." Journal of Modern History XIX, 1 (1947): 1-17.

   ■ Nunes, Antonio Lopes Pires. Angola 1961. Da Baixa do Cassange a Nambu-angongo. Lisbon: Prefacio, 2005.

   ■ Okuma, Thomas. Angola in Ferment: The Background and Prospects of Angolan Nationalism. Boston: Beacon, 1962.

   ■ Pattee, Richard. Portugal and the Portuguese World. Milwaukee, Wise.: Bruce, 1957.

   ■ Pélissier, René. Les Guerres Grises: Resistance Et Revoltes en Angola ( 18451941). Orgeval: Pélissier, 1977.

   ■. Naissance Du Mozambique: Tome 1, Tome 2, Resistance Et Revoltes Anticoloniales ( 1854-1981), 2 vols. Orgeval: Pélissier, 1984.

   ■. História de Moçambique. Vol. II. Lisbon, 1988.

   ■. Naissance de la Guinée: Portugais et Africains en Senegambie ( 1841-1936). Orgeval: Pélissier, 1989.

   ■. Timor En Guerre: Le Crocodile et les Portugais ( 1847-1913). Orgeval: Pélissier, 1996.

   ■ Pires, Adelino Serras, and Fiona Claire Capstick. The Winds of Havoc: A Memoir of Adventure and Destruction in Deepest Africa. New York: St. Martin's, 2001.

   ■ Prestage, Edgar. The Portuguese Pioneers. London: Black, 1933.

   ■ Ranger, T. [Terence] O. "Revolt in Portuguese East Africa: The Makombe Rising of 1917." St. Anthony's Papers. Carbondale: Southern Illinois University Press, 15 (1963).

   ■ Remy. Goa, Rome of the Orient. Trans. from the French by Lancelot Sheppard. London, 1957.

   ■ Ribeiro, General Goncalves. A Vertigem da Descolonizacao. Da Agonia do Exodo a Cidadania Plena. Lisbon: Inquerito, 2002. Ricard, Robert. Etudes sur l'Histoire des Portugais au Maroc. Coimbra, 1955.

   ■ Richards, J. M. Goa. London: Hurst, 1982.

   ■ Rodney, Walter. A History of the Upper Guinea Coast, 1545-1800. New York: Oxford University Press, 1970. Rodrigues, José Honório. Africa e Brasil: Outro Horizonte. Rio de Janeiro, 1961.

   ■ Rogers, Francis M. "Valentim Fernandes, Rodrigo de Santaella, and the Recognition of the Antilles as "Opposite India." Boletim da Sociedade de Geografia de Lisboa series 75 (July-September 1957): 279-309.

   ■. The Obedience of a King of Portugal. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1958.

   ■. The Quest for Eastern Christians: Travels and Rumors in the Age of Discovery. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1962.

   ■ Russell-Wood, A. J. Fidalgos and Philanthropists: The Santa Casa da Mi-sericordia of Bahia, 1550-1755. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1968.

   ■. "Colonial Brazil." In David W. Cohen and Jack Greene, eds., Neither Slave nor Free, 84-133. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1972.

   ■. "Local Government in Portuguese America: A Study in Cultural Divergence." Comparative Studies in Society and History 16 (1974): 187-231.

   ■. From Colony to Nation: Essays on the Independence of Brazil. Baltimore, Md.: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1975.

   ■. World on the Move: The Portuguese in Africa, Asia & America, 1415-1808. New York: St. Martins, 1993.

   ■ Salazar, António de Oliveira. Goa and the Indian Union. Lisbon, 1954.

   ■. "Portugal, Goa and the Indian Union." Foreign Affairs (New York) 34, 3 (April, 1956): 418-31.

   ■. "Realities and Trends of Portugal's Policies." International Affairs (London) XXXIX, 2 (April 1963): 169-83.

   ■ Saldanha, C. F. A Short History of Goa. Goa, 1957.

   ■ Sanceau, Elaine. Indies Adventure: The Amazing Career of Afonso de Albuquerque. London: Blackie, 1936.

   ■. Portugal in Quest of Prester John. London: Hutchinson, 1943.

   ■. The Land of Prester John. New York: Knopf, 1944.

   ■. Henry the Navigator. New York: Norton, 1947.

   ■. The Perfect Prince: Dom João II. Oporto, 1959.

   ■. Good Hope, the Voyage of Vasco da Gama. Lisbon, 1967.

   ■. The Reign of the Fortunate King ( Manuel I), 1495-1521. Hamden, Conn.: Archon, 1969.

   ■. Knight of the Renaissance: A Biography of Dom João de Castro. London: Hutchinson, n.d.

   ■ Schubert, Benedict. A Guerra e as Igrejas: Angola, 1961-1991. Basel, Switzerland: Schlettwein, 2000 [orig. ed. in German, Lucerne, Exodus Pub., 1997].

   ■ Schwartz, Stuart G. Sovereignty and Society in Colonial Brazil. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1973.

   ■ Serra, Carlos, ed. História de Moçambique, 2 vols. Maputo, Mozambique: Tempo, 1982-83.

   ■ Silva, Botelho da, ed. and comp. " Dossier" Goa. ( General Manuel) Vassalo e Silva. A Recusa do Sacrifício Inútil. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■ Silva, Maria Beatriz Nizza da, ed. O Império Luso-Brasileiro 1750-1822. Volume VIII. In J. Serrão and A. H. de Oliveira Marques, eds., Nova História Da Expansão Portuguesa. Lisbon: Estampa, 1986.

   ■ Silva Cunha J. M. da. Questões Ultramarinos e Internacionais. Lisbon, 1960.

   ■ Silva Rego, A. da. História das missões do padroado português do Oriente: India ( 1500-1542). 1 vol. Lisbon, 1949.

   ■. Portuguese Colonization in the Sixteenth Century: A Study of Royal Ordinances. Johannesburg: Witwaterstrand University Press, 1957.

   ■. O Ultramar Português No Século XIX ( 1834-1910). Lisbon, 1966.

   ■ Sousa Dias, Gastão. Os Portugueses em Angola. Lisbon, 1959.

   ■ Sykes, John. Portugal and Africa: The People and the War. London: Hutchinson, 1971.

   ■ Telo, António José. Lourenço Marques na Política Externa Portuguesa. Lisbon: Cosmos, 1991.

   ■. Economia E Império No Portugal Contemporânea. Lisbon: Cosmos, 1994.

   ■. Os Açores e o Controlo do Atlântico. Lisbon: Asa, 1993.

   ■ Vail, Leroy, and Landeg White. Capitalism and Colonialism in Mozambique: A Study of Quelimane District. Minneapolis: Minnesota University Press, 1980.

   ■ Veen, Ernst van. Defeat or Decay? An Inquiry into the Portuguese Decline in Asia 1580-1645. Leiden: University of Leiden, 2000.

   ■ Verlinden, Charles. "Italian Influence on Iberian Colonization." Hispanic American Historical Review 33 (1953): 99-211.

   ■. The Beginnings of Modern Colonization. Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1970.

   ■ Vogel, Charles. Le Portugal et Ses Colonies. Paris, 1860.

   ■ Vogt, John. Portuguese Rule on the Gold Coast 1469-1682. Athens: University of Georgia Press, 1979.

   ■ Wheeler, Douglas L. "The Portuguese in Angola. 1836-1891: A Study in Expansion and Administration." Ph.D. dissertation, Boston University, Department of History, 1963.

   ■. "Anti-Imperialism Traditions in Portugal, Yesterday and Today." Boston University Graduate Journal XII, 2 (Spring 1964): 125-37.

   ■. 'The Portuguese and Mozambique: The Past against the Future." In John A. Davis and James K. Baker, eds., Southern Africa in Transition. 180-96. New York: Praeger, 1966.

   ■. "Gungunhana." In Norman R. Bennett, ed., Leadership in Eastern Africa, Six Political Biographies, 165-220. Boston: Boston University Press, 1968.

   ■. "Gungunyane the Negotiator." Journal of African History IX, 4 (1968): 585-602.

   ■. "Nineteenth-Century African Protest in Angola: Prince Nicolas of Kongo (1830?-1860)." African Historical Studies (Boston) I (1968): 40-59.

   ■. "The Portuguese Army in Angola." Journal of Modern African Studies (Cambridge U.K.), 7, 3 (Oct. 1969): 425-39.

   ■. "Thaw in Portugal." Foreign Affairs 48, 4 (July 1970): 769-81.

   ■. "Portugal in Angola: A Living Colonialism?" In C. Potholm and R. Dale, eds., Southern Africa in Perspective, 172-82. New York: Free Press, 1972.

   ■. "The First Portuguese Colonial Movement, 1835-1875." Iberian Studies (Keele, U.K.) I, 1 (Spring 1975): 25-27.

   ■. "Rebels and Rebellions in Angola, 1672-1892." In Mark Karp, ed., African Dimensions: Essays in Honor of William O. Brown, 81-93. Boston: Boston University Press, 1975.

   ■. "African Elements in Portugal's Armies in Africa (1961-1974)." Armed Forces and Society (Chicago) 2, 2 (Feb. 1976): 233-50.

   ■. "Portuguese Colonial Governors in Africa, 1870-1974." In L. H. Gann and Peter Duignan, eds., African Proconsuls: European Governors in Africa, 415-26. New York: Free Press, 1978; and "J. Mousinho de Albuquerque (1855-1902)" and "J. Norton de Matos (1867-1955)": 427-44; 445-63.

   ■. "The Portuguese Withdrawal from Africa, 1974-1975; The Angolan Case." In John Seiler, ed., Southern Africa Since the Portuguese Coup, 3-21. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1980.

   ■. "The Portuguese Exploration Expeditions and Expansion in Angola, 1877-1883." In Academia de Marinha and Instituto de Investigação Científica Tropical, eds., Vice Almirante A. Teixeira Da Mota: In Memoriam. Volume I, 267-76. Lisbon, 1987.

   ■. "'Aqui é Portugal!': The Politics of the Colonial Idea during the Estado Novo, 1926-1974." In Pavilhão de Portugal, EXPO'98 and Instituto de História Contemporânea, eds., Portugal No Transição Do Milênio: Colóquio Internacional, 375-105. Lisbon: Fim de Século, 1998.

   ■. The Empire Time Forgot: Writing a History of the Portuguese Overseas Empire, 1808-1975. Oporto: Universidade Fernando Pessoa, 1998.

   ■. "Filho Do Porto, Filho Do Império: Antônio Francisco Da Silva Porto (1817-1890) and the Politics of Motivation in Portugal's First and Second Scrambles for Africa (1836-1861; 1875-1891)." Revista da UFP [Universidade Fernando Pessoa] 4 (Dec. 1999): 225-54.

   ■. "'Mais leis do que mosquitos': A Primeira República Portuguesa e o Império Ultramarino (1910-1926)." In Nuno Severiano Teixeira and Antó-nio Costa Pinto, eds., A Primeira República Portuguesa Entre O Liberalismo E O Autoritarismo, 133-68. Lisbon: University Nova de Lisboa, 2000.

   ■. "Spiritual Peoples at Odds: Portugal, India and the Goa Question, 1947-61." In Anthony Disney and Emily Booth, eds., Vasco Da Gama and the Linking of Europe and Asia, 452-70. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2000.

   ■. "Portugal, Africa and the future." In Stewart Lloyd-Jones and Antonio Costa Pinto, eds., The Last Empire: Thirty Years of Portuguese Decolonization, 113-25. Bristol, U.K.: Intellect, 2003.

   ■. "The Forced Labor 'System' in Angola, 1903-1947: Reassessing Origins and Persistence in the Context of Colonial Consolidation, Economic Growth and Reform Failures." In CEAUP, Centro de Estudos Africanos da Universidade do Porto, ed., Trabalho forcado africano-experiencias coloniais comparadas, 367-393. Oporto: CEAUP, 2006.

   ■. "As Raizes Do Nacionalismo Angolano: Publicacoes De Protesto Dos Assimilados, 1870-1940." In Nuno Vidal and Justino Pinto De Andrade, eds., O Processo De Transicao Para O Multipartidarismo Em Angola, 73-92. Lisbon: Ed. Firmamento, 2006.

   ■, and René Pélissier. Angola. London: Pall Mall and New York: Praeger, 1971; reprinted, Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1977; Portuguese lang. edition, Lisbon: Tinta-da-China, 2009. Whiteway, R. W. The Rise of the Portuguese Power in India, 1497-1550. London: Constable, 1899.

   ■ Winius, George D. The Fatal History of Portuguese Ceylon: Transition to Dutch Rule. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1971.

   ■. "The Portuguese Asian 'Decadência' Revisited." In Alfred Hower and Richard Preto-Rodas, eds., Empire in Transition, 106-17. Gainesville: University Presses of Florida, 1980.

   ■. The Black Legend of Portuguese India. New Delhi: New Concept, 1985.

   ■ Portuguese Migration and Communities Abroad

   ■ Alves, Marcial. Os Portugueses no Mundo. Lisbon, 1983.

   ■ Anderson, Grace M., and David Higgs, eds. A Future to Inherit: Portuguese Communities in Canada. Toronto: McClelland and Stewart, 1976. Arroteia, Jorge Carvalho. A emigração Portuguesa-suas origens e distribuição. Lisbon, 1983.

   ■ Brettell, Caroline B. "Nineteenth- and Twentieth-Century Portuguese Emigration: A Bibliography." Portuguese Studies Newsletter 3 (Fall-Winter, 1977-78).

   ■. "Emigrar Para Voltar: A Portuguese Ideology of Return Migration." Papers in Anthropology 20 (1979): 1-20.

   ■. We Have Already Cried Many Tears: The Stories of Three Portuguese Migrant Women. Cambridge, Mass.: Schenkman Publishing Co., 1982.

   ■. Men Who Migrate, Women Who Wait: Population and History in a Portuguese Parish. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1986.

   ■ Carvalho, Eduardo de. Os portugueses na Nova Inglaterra. Rio de Janeiro, 1931.

   ■ Caspari, Andrea. "The Return Orientation among Portuguese Migrants in France." In E. de Sousa Ferreira and W. C. Opello, Jr., eds., Conflict and Change in Portugal, 1974-1984, 193-203. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■ Dias, Eduardo Mayone, ed. Portugueses na América do Norte. Baden: Peregrinação, 1983.

   ■ Fagundes, Francisco Cota. Hard Knocks: An Azorean-American Odyssey.

   ■ [Memoir]. Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 2000. Felix, John Henry, and Peter F. Senecal. The Portuguese in Hawaii. Honolulu, Hawaii: Authors' edition, 1978. Fernandes, Ferreira. Os Primos da América. Lisbon: Relógio D'Agua, 1991. Ferreira, Eduardo de Sousa. As orígens e formas de emigração. Lisbon, 1976. Freitas, J. F. Portuguese-American Memories. Honolulu, Hawaii, 1930.

   ■ Giles, Wenona. "Motherhood and Wage Labour in London, England: Portuguese Migrant Women and the Politics of Gender." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Anthropology. University of Toronto, 1987.

   ■ Higgs, David, ed. Portuguese Migration in Global Perspective. Ontario: Multicultural Historical Society of Ontario, 1990.

   ■ Klimt, Andrea. "Portuguese Migrants in Germany: Class, Ethnicity and Gender." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Anthropology. Stanford University, 1987.

   ■ Lavigne, Gules. Les ethniques et la ville: L'aventure des immigrants portugais à Montreal. Montreal: Preamble, 1987.

   ■ Leder, Hans Howard. Cultural Persistence in a Portuguese-American Community. New York: Arno Press, 1980.

   ■ Lewis, J. R., and A. M. Williams. "Emigrants and Retornados: A Comparative Analysis of the Economic Impact of Return Migration in the Região Centro." In E. D. Sousa Ferreira and W. C. Opello, Jr., eds., Conflict and Change in Portugal, 1974-1984, 227-50. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■ McCabe, Marsha L., and Joseph D. Thomas, eds. Portuguese Spinner: An American Story; Stories of History, Culture and Life from Portuguese Americans in Southeastern New England. New Bedford, Mass.: Spinner, 1998.

   ■ Marques, D., and J. Medeiros. Portuguese Immigrants: 25 Years in Canada. Toronto: West End YMCA, 1989.

   ■ Martins, J. Oliveira. Fomento Rural e emigração Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1956.

   ■ Mira, Manuel. The Forgotten Portuguese: The Melungeons and Other Groups; The Portuguese Making of America. Franklin, N.C.: Portuguese-American Historical Research Foundation, 1998.

   ■ Nazareth, J. Manuel. "Familia e Emigração em Portugal." Economia e Sociedade (Lisbon) 23 (1977): 31-50.

   ■ Nunes, Maria Luisa. A Portuguese Colonial in America: Belmira Nunes Lopes; The Autobiography of a Cape Verdean-American. Pittsburgh, Penn.: Latin American Literary Review Press, 1982.

   ■ Oliver, Lawrence. Never Backward: The Autobiography of Lawrence Oliver; A Portuguese-American. San Diego, 1972.

   ■ Pap, Leo. The Portuguese-Americans. Boston: Twayne, 1981.

   ■ Pereira, Miriam Halpern. A Política Portuguesa de Emigraçao, 1850 a 1930. Lisbon: Regra do Jogo, 1981.

   ■ Pereira da Rosa, Victor M., and Salvato V. Trigo. "Elementos para uma Caracterização da Família Imigrante Portuguesa na Africa do Sul." Economia e Sociologia 41 (1986): 61-71.

   ■. Azorean Emigration: A Preliminary Overview. Oporto: Fernando Pessoa University, 1994.

   ■. Portugueses e Moçambicanos no Apartheid: Da Ficção à Realidade. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■ Purves, James. "Portuguese in Bermuda." Bermuda Historical Quarterly 3 (1946): 133-42.

   ■ Ribeiro, F. G. Cassola. Emigração Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■ Rocha-Trinidade, Maria Beatriz da. "La Sociologie des Migrations au Portugal." Current Sociology 32, 2 (Summer 1984): 175-98.

   ■. "Towards Reintegration of Emigrants." In E. de Sousa Ferreira and Guy Clausse, eds., Closing the Migratory Cycle: The Case of Portugal, 183-94. Saarbrücken: Breitenbach, 1985.

   ■. "Emigração." In Dicionario Illustrado Da História De Portugal ( 1985): 205-7.

   ■. A Emigração. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■. "Espaços de herança cultural portuguesa-gentes, factos, políticas." Analise Social (Lisbon) XXIV (1988): 313-51.

   ■ Rocha-Trinidade, Maria Beatriz da, and Jorge Arroteia. Bibliografia da Emigração Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1984.

   ■ Rogers, Francis M. Americans of Portuguese Descent: A Lesson in Differentiation. Beverly Hills, Calif.: Sage, 1974.

   ■. Testemunhos sobre a Emigração Portuguesa: Antologia. Lisbon, 1976.

   ■ Silva, F. Emídio da. A Emigração Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1917.

   ■ Silva, Manuela, et al. Retorno, Emigração e Desenvolvimento Regional em Portugal. Lisbon, 1984.

   ■ Simões, Mário Pinto. O Emigrante Português: Processos de Adaptação ( o exemplo da Suiça). Oporto, 1985.

   ■ Simões, Nuno. O Brasil e a Emigração Portuguesa. Coimbra, 1934.

   ■ Sousa Ferreira, Eduardo de, and Guy Clausse, eds. Closing the Migratory Cycle: The Case of Portugal. Saarbrucken: Verlag Breitenbach, 1986.

   ■ Teixeira, Carlos, and Victor M. Pereira da Rosa, eds. The Portuguese in Canada: From the Sea to the City. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 2000.

   ■ Vicente, António Luís. Os Portuguese Nos Estados Unidos Da América: Política De Comunidades E Comunidade Política. Lisbon: FLAD, 1998.

   ■ Viera, David, et al. Portuguese in the United States: A Bibliography ( Supplement to the 1976 Leo Pap Bibliography). Essay Number 6 in Essays in Portuguese Studies. Durham, N.H.: International Conference Group on Portugal, 1989.

   ■ Williams, Jerry. And Yet They Come: Portuguese Immigration from the Azores to the United States. New York: Center for Migration Studies, 1982.

   ■ Portugal's Atlantic Islands (Azores, Madeiras)

   ■ Biddle, Anthony J. Drexel. The Madeira Islands, 2 vols. London: Hurst and Blackett, 1900.

   ■ Bryans, Robin. Madeira, Pearl of the Atlantic. London: Robert Hale, 1959.

   ■. The Azores. London: Faber & Faber, 1963.

   ■ Cooke, Rupert Croft. Madeira. London: Putnam, 1961.

   ■ Cossart, Noel. Madeira— the Island Vineyard. London: Christie's, 1984.

   ■ Da Silva, Fernando Augusto, and Carlos Azevedo de Menezes. Elucidário Madeirense, 3 vols. Funchal, 1940.

   ■ Duncan, T. Bentley. Atlantic Islands in the Seventeenth Century: Madeira, the Azores and the Cape Verdes in Seventeenth-Century Commerce andNavigation. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1972.

   ■ Guill, James H. A History of the Azores Islands. Menlo Park, Calif.: Author's Edition, 1972.

   ■ Instituto Histórico Da Ilha Terceira [Azores]. Os Açores E O Atlântico ( Séculos XIV-XVII) [Proceedings of International Colloquium, August 1983]. Angra do Heroismo, Terceira Island, Azores, 1984.

   ■ Koebel, William Henry. Madeira Old and New. London: Griffiths, 1909.

   ■ Mee, Jules. Histoire de la découverte des Iles Açores. Ghent, 1901.

   ■ Peres, Damião. A Madeira sob os donatórios-Séculos XV e XVI. Funchal, 1914.

   ■ Rogers, Francis M. Atlantic Islanders of the Azores and Madeiras. North Quincy, Mass.: Christopher House, 1979.

   ■ Serpa, Caetano Valadão. A Gente Dos Açores. Identificaçao-Emigraçio E Religiosidade: Séculos XVI-XX. Lisbon: 1978.

   ■ Silva, J. Donald. "With Columbus in Madeira." Portuguese Studies Review (Durham, NH) I, 1 (Spring-Summer 1991).

   ■ Wheeler, Douglas L. "The Azores and the United States (1787-1987): Two Hundred Years of Shared History." Boletim do Instituto Histórico da Ilha Terceira XLV (1988): 55-71.

   ■ Anglo-Portuguese Alliance (1373-Present)

   ■ Almada, José de. A Aliança Inglesa, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1947.

   ■. Para a história da aliança luso-britânica. Lisbon, 1955.

   ■ Atkinson, William C. British Contributions to Portuguese and Brazilian Studies. London: British Council, 1974.

   ■ Bourne, Kenneth. The Foreign Policy of Victorian England 1830-1902. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1970.

   ■ British Broadcasting Corporation (BBC). 600 Years of Anglo-Portuguese Alliance. London: BBC, 1973.

   ■ British Community Council of London. Souvenir Brochure Commemorating the 600th Anniversary of the Anglo-Portuguese Treaty of Alliance and Friendship, 1373-1973. Lisbon, 1973.

   ■ Cabral, Manuel Villaverde. Portugal na Alvorada do Século XX. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■ Caetano, Marcello "Aliança Inglesa." Enciclopédia Luso-Brasileira da Cultura. Vol. 1 (1963): 1270-1271.

   ■. "L'alliance Anglo-Portuguese: Histoire et situation actuelle." Chronique de politique etrangére (Paris) XX, 6 (1967): 695-708.

   ■. Portugal e a Internacionalização dos Problemas Africanos. Lisbon, 1971.

   ■ Castro, Armando. A dominação inglesa em Portugal. Estudo seguido de Antologia Textos dos Sécs. XVIII e XIX. Oporto: Afrontamento, 1972.

   ■ Crollen, Luc. Portugal, the U.S. and NATO. Leuven, Belgium: Leuven University Press, 1973.

   ■. "Portugal." In O. De Raeymaeker et al. Small Powers in Alignment, 27-96. Leuven, Belgium: Leuven University Press, 1974.

   ■ Cunha Leal, Francisco. Portugal e Inglaterra. Corunna, 1932.

   ■ Davidson, Basil. "The Oldest Alliance Faces a Crisis." In Philip Masonm, ed., Angola: A Symposium. Views of a Revolt, 138-60. London: Oxford University Press, 1962.

   ■ Duff, Katherine. "The War and the Neutrals." In Arnold and Veronica Toyn-bee, eds., Survey of International Affairs. London: Chatham House, 1956.

   ■ Duffy, James. A Question of Slavery. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1967.

   ■ Epstein, John. "The Anglo-Portuguese Alliance, 1373-1973." World Survey (London) 54 (June 1973): p. 18.

   ■ Ferreira, José Medeiros. Estudos de Estratégia e Relações Internacionais. Lisbon, 1981.

   ■ Ferreira Martins, General L. O Poder Militar Da Gran-Bretanha E A Aliança Anglo-Lusa. Coimbra, 1939.

   ■. A Cooperaçio Anglo-Portuguesa na Grande Guerra de 1914-18. Lisbon, 1942.

   ■ Francis, A. D. The Methuens and Portugal 1691-1700. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1966.

   ■. Portugal 1715-1808. London: Tamesis, 1985.

   ■ Freitas, A. Barjona de. A Questão Ingleza. Lisbon, 1891.

   ■ Gonçalves, Caetano. A Aliança Luso-Britânica e o Domínio Colonial Português. Lisbon, 1917.

   ■ Guedes, Armando Marques. A Aliança Inglesa: Notas de História diplomática, 1383-1943. Lisbon, 1943. Halpern Pereira, Miriam. Revoluçio, finanças, dependência externa. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■ Howorth, A. H. D'Araujo Scott. A Aliança Luso-Britânica E A Segunda Guerra Mundial. Lisbon, 1956.

   ■ Kay, Hugh. Salazar and Modern Portugal. New York: Hawthorne, 1970.

   ■ Lawrence, L. Nehru Seizes Goa. New York: Pageant, 1963.

   ■ Livermore, H. V. "The Anglo-Portuguese Alliance: Historical Perspective." 600 Years of Anglo-Portuguese Alliance, 7-15. Lisbon: BBC, 1973.

   ■ Macedo, Jorge Borges de. História Diplomática Portuguesa-Constantes e Linhas de Força. Lisbon, 1987.

   ■ Manoel, J. de Câmara. Portugal e Inglatterra. Lisbon, 1909.

   ■ Martinez, Pedro S. História Diplomática de Portugal. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■ Medlicott, W. N. The Economic Blockade, Vol. II. London: His Majesty's Stationery Office, 1952.

   ■ Oliveira, Pedro Aires. Os Despojos Da Alianca. A Gra-Bretanha e a questao colonial portuguesa 1945-1975. Lisbon: Tinta-da-China, 2007. Ortigão, Ramalho. John Bull. Lisbon, 1887.

   ■ Prestage, Edgar. Diplomatic Relations of Portugal with France, England and Holland from 1646 to 1668. Watford, U.K.: Voss & Michael, 1925.

   ■. Chapters in Anglo-Portuguese Relations. London: Voss & Michael, 1935.

   ■ Russell, Peter E. The English Intervention in Spain and Portugal in the Time of Edward III and Richard II. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1955. Sarmento, J. E. Morães. The Anglo-Portuguese Alliance and Coast Defense. London, 1908.

   ■ Serrão, Joel. "O Ultimatum (January 1890)." Dicionário de História de Portugal. Vol. IV (1971): 219-24.

   ■ Shafaat, Ahmed Khan, ed. Anglo-Portuguese Negotiations Relating to Bombay, 1660-1667. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1922.

   ■ Sideri, Sandro. Trade and Power: Informal Colonialism in Anglo-Portuguese Relations. Rotterdam: Rotterdam University Press, 1970.

   ■ Sousa, Carlos Hermenegildo de. A Aliança Anglo-Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1943.

   ■ Stone, Glyn A. "The Official British Attitude to the Anglo-Portuguese Alliance, 1910-45." Journal of Contemporary History (London) 10, 4 (Oct. 1975): 729-46.

   ■. The Oldest Ally: Britain and the Portuguese Connection, 1936-1941. Woodbridge, U.K.: Royal Historical Society and Boydell Press, 1994. Teixeira, Nuno Severiano. O Ultimatum Inglês: Política Externa no Portugal do 1890. Lisbon, 1990.

   ■ Teles, Basilio. Do Ultimatum ao 30 de Janeiro. Oporto, 1905.

   ■ Vicente, António Pedro. "Um testemunho de 1796 sobre a Situação de Portugal face ao domínio inglês." In Arquivos do Centro Cultural Portugües, IV. Paris, 1972.

   ■ Vieira de Castro, Luís. D. Carlos I. ( Elementos de História Diplomática), 2nd ed. Lisbon, 1941.

   ■ Vincent-Smith, John. "Britain, Portugal and the First World War." European Studies Review 4, 3 (1974).

   ■. "The Portuguese Economy and the Anglo-Portuguese Commercial Treaty of 1916." Iberian Studies (Keele, U.K.) III, 2 (Autumn 1974): 49-54.

   ■. As Relações Políticas Luso-Britânicas 1910-1916. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■. "The Portuguese Republic and Britain, 1910-14." Journal of Contemporary History 10, 4 (Oct. 1975): 707-27.

   ■ Vintras, R. E. The Portuguese Connection: A Secret History of the Azores Base. London: Bachman & Turner, 1974. Viriato [Pseud]. A Aliança lnglesa. Lisbon, 1914.

   ■ Walford, A. R. The British Factory in Lisbon and Its Closing Stages Ensuring upon the Treaty of 1810. Lisbon, 1940.

   ■ Wheeler, Douglas L. "The Portuguese in Angola, 1836-1891: A Study in Expansion and Administration." Ph.D. dissertation, History Department, Boston University, 1963.

   ■. "19th Century: Anglo-Portuguese Alliance and the Scramble for Africa." In BBC, 600 Years of Anglo-Portuguese Alliance, 40-43. London: BBC, 1973.

   ■. "The Price of Neutrality: Portugal, the Wolfram Question and World War II." Luso-Brazilian Review (Madison, Wisc.) 34, 1, 2 (Summer 1986; Winter 1986): 107-27; 97-111.

   ■ Wordsworth, William. William Wordsworth's Convention of Cintra: A Facsimile of the 1809 Tract [Introduction by Gordon Kent Thomas]. Provo, Utah: Brigham Young University Press, 1983.

   ■ Young, George. Portugal Old and Young. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1917.

   ■ ANTHROPOLOGY, SOCIOLOGY, RURAL AND URBAN SOCIETY

   ■ Almeida, Miguel Vale de. The Hegemonic Male: Masculinity in a Portuguese Town. Oxford: Berghan, 1996.

   ■ Black, Richard. Crisis and Change in Rural Europe: Agricultural Development in the Portuguese Mountains. Aldershot, U.K.: Avebury and Ashgate, 1992.

   ■ Brettell, Caroline B. Men Who Migrate, Women Who Wait: Population and History in a Portuguese Parish. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1986.

   ■. "The Absence of Men." Natural History 96, 2 (Feb. 1987): 52-61.

   ■. "The Portuguese." In Encyclopedia of World Cultures. New Haven, Conn.: Human Relations Area Files, 1990.

   ■. "The Priest and His People: The Contractual Basis for Religious Practice in Rural Portugal." In Ellen Badone, ed., Religious Orthodoxy and Popular Faith in European Society, 55-75. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1990.

   ■ Brogger, Jan. Pre-bureaucratic Europeans: A Study of a Portuguese Fishing Community. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1989. Cabral, Manuel Villaverde. "Portuguese Perspectives." Sociologia Ruralis [Journal of European Rural Sociology] XXIV, 1 (1986); number devoted to rural Portugal today. Chaney, Rick. Regional Emigration and Remittances in Developing Countries: The Portuguese Experience. New York: Praeger, 1986. Cole, Sally. Women of the Praia: Work and Lives in a Portuguese Colonial Community. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1991. Cutileiro, José. A Portuguese Rural Society. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1971.

   ■ Deschamps, Paul. Portugal: La Vie Sociale Actuelle. Paris, 1935.

   ■. Histoire Sociale du Portugal. Paris, 1959.

   ■ Dias, Jorge. Rio do Onor-comunitarismo agropastoral. Oporto, 1953.

   ■. Ensaios Etnológicos. Lisbon, 1961.

   ■. The Portuguese Contribution to Cultural Anthropology. Johannesburg: Witwaterstrand University Press, 1964.

   ■. Vilarinho Da Furna: Uma Aldeia Comunitária. Rev. ed. Lisbon, 1981.

   ■ Downs, Charles. Os Moradores à Conquista da Cidade. Lisbon, 1978.

   ■. "Community Organization, Political Change and Urban Policy: Portugal. 1974-1976." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Sociology. University of California, 1980.

   ■. "Residents' Commissions and Urban Struggles in Revolutionary Portugal." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal: The Revolution and Its Consequences. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.

   ■ Dracklé, Dorlé. Macht und Ohnmacht: Der Kampf num die Agarreform im Alentejo ( Portugal). Gottingen, Germany: Edit. Re, 1991.

   ■ Espírito Santo, Moise. Communidade Rural ao Norte do Tejo. Lisbon, 1980.

   ■ Feijó, Rui, H. Martins, and João de Pina Cabral, eds. Death in Portugal. Oxford: Journal of the Anthropological Society of Oxford, 1983.

   ■ Feijó, Rui Graça. "State, Nation and Regional Diversity in Portugal: An Overview." In Richard Herr and John H. Polt, eds., Iberian Identity: Essays on the Nature of Identity in Portugal and Spain, 37-47. Berkeley: Institute of International Studies, University of California, 1989.

   ■ Feio, Mariano. Les Bas Alentejo et l'Algarve. Lisbon, 1949.

   ■ Ferreira de Almeida, João. Classes sociais nos campos. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■ Fonseca, Ramiro da. O Livro da Saúde e da Doença. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■ Gallop, Rodney. Portugal: A Book of Folk-Ways. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1936. Reprinted, 1961.

   ■ Hoefgen, Lynn. "The Integration of Returnees from the Colonies into Portugal's Social and Economic Life." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Anthropology, University of Florida, 1985.

   ■ Ingerson, Alice Elizabeth. "Corporatism and Class Consciousness in Northwestern Portugal." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Anthropology. Johns Hopkins University, 1984.

   ■ Jenkins, Robin. The Road to Alto. London: Pluto Press, 1979.

   ■ Lawrence, Denise. "Menstrual Politics: Women and Pigs in Rural Portugal." In T. Buckley and A. Gottlieb, eds., Blood Magic: The Anthropology of Menstruation, 117-36. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1988.

   ■. "Suburbanization of House Form and Gender Relations in a Rural Portuguese Agro-Town." Architecture and Behavior 4, 3 (1988): 197-212.

   ■ Martins, Hermínio. "Portugal." In Margaret S. Archer and Salvador Giner, eds., Contemporary Europe: Class, Status and Power. New York: St. Martins, 1971.

   ■ Mattoso, José. Identificação de um país. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■ Merten, Peter. Anarchismüs und Arbeiterkãmpf in Portugal. Hamburg: Libera-tare Association, 1981.

   ■ Monteiro, Paulo. Terra que ja foi terra: Análise Sociológica de nove lugares agro-pastorais da Serra da Lousã. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■ Nataf, Daniel. "Social Cleavages and Regime Formation in Contemporary Portugal." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Political Science, UCLA, 1987.

   ■ Nazareth, J. Manuel. "Familia e Emigração em Portugal: Ensaio Exploratório." Economia e Socialismo 23 (1977): 31-50.

   ■ O'Neill, Brian Juan. "Dying and Inheriting in Rural Tras-os-Montes." Journal of the Anthropological Society of Oxford 14 (1983): 44-74.

   ■. Social Inequality in a Portuguese Hamlet: Land, Late Marriage, and Inheritance, 1870-1978. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1987.

   ■ Pacheco, Helder. Tradições Populares de Portugal. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■ Pardoe, Julia. Traits and Traditions of Portugal, 2 vols. London, 1832.

   ■ Pereira Neto, João Baptista. "Social Evolution in Portugal since 1945." In Raymond S. Sayers, ed., Portugal and Brazil in Transition, 212-27. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1968.

   ■ Pina-Cabral, João de. Sons of Adam, Daughters of Eve: The Peasant World-View of the Alto Minho. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1986.

   ■. "Sociocultural Differentiation and Regional Identity in Portugal." In

   ■ R. Herr and J. H. Polt, eds., Iberian Identity, 3-18. Berkeley: Institute of International Studies, 1989.

   ■ Poinard, Michel. La Retour des Traveilleurs Portugais. Paris: La Documentation Francaise, 1979.

   ■ Reed, Robert Roy. "Managing the Revolution: Revolutionary Promise and Political Reality in Rural Portugal." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Anthropology, Indiana University, 1988.

   ■ Riegelhaupt, Joyce F. "In the Shadow of the City: Integration of a Portuguese Village" [São João das Lampas, nr, Cascais]. Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Anthropology, Columbia University, 1964.

   ■. "Saloio Women: An Analysis of Informal and Formal Political and Economic Roles of Portuguese Peasant Women." Anthropological Quarterly 40, 3 (July 1967): 109-26.

   ■. "Festas and Padres: The Organization of Religious Action in a Portuguese Parish." American Anthropologist 75 (1973): 835-52.

   ■. "Peasants and Politics in Salazar's Portugal: The Corporate State and Village 'Nonpolitics'" In L. S. Graham and H. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents, 167-90. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.

   ■ Rodrigues, Julieta E. S. de Almeida. "Continuity and Change in Urban Portuguese Women's Roles: Emerging New Household Structures." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Sociology, Columbia University, 1979.

   ■ Rowland, Robert. "Demographic Patterns and Rural Society in Portugal." So-ciologica Ruralis 26, 1 (1986): 36-47.

   ■ Sanchis, Pierre. Arraial. La Fête d'un Peuple: Les Pélerinages Populaires au Portugal. Paris, 1976.

   ■ Siegel, Bernard J. "Social Structure and Medical Practitioners in Rural Brazil and Portugal." Sociologia (São Paulo) 20, 4 (Oct. 1958): 463-76.

   ■. "Conflict, Parochialism and Social Differentiation in Portuguese Society." Journal of Conflict Resolution V, 1 (March 1961): 35-12.

   ■ Smith, T. Lynn. "The Social Relationships of Man to the Land in Portugal." Sociologia 25, 1 (Dec. 1963): 319-43.

   ■ Sousa Santos, Boaventura. "Estado e sociedade na semiperíferia do sistema mundiale: O caso português." Análise Social 87-89 (1985): 869-902.

   ■. "Social Crisis and the State." In Kenneth Maxwell, ed., Portugal in the 1980s: Dilemmas of Democratic Consolidation, 167-95. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.

   ■ Vasconcellos, Joaquim Leite de. Ethnograia Portuguesa, 8 vols. Lisbon, 1941-82.

   ■. Tradições Populares Portugueses. New ed. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■ Willems, Emilio. "On Portuguese Family Structure." International Journal of Comparative Society (Dharwar, India) 3, 1 (Sept. 1962): 65-79.

   ■ ARTS, ARCHITECTURE, URBAN PLANNING, MUSIC

   ■ Almeida, Rodrigo Vicente de. História da Arte em Portugal: ( Segundo Estudo) Documentos lnéditos. Oporto, 1883. Almeida D'Eca, Admiral Vicente M. Castles of Portugal. Lisbon, 1925. Amaral, Francisco K. Lisboa: Uma Cidade em Transformação. Lisbon, 1969. Azevedo, Carlos de, and Chester Brummel. Churches of Portugal. New York: Scala Books, 1985.

   ■ Barreira, João, ed. Arte Portuguesa: As Decorativas, 2 vols. Lisbon, n.d.

   ■ Barretto, Mascarenhas, and George Dykes. Fado: Lyrical Origins and Poetical Motivation. Lisbon, 1977.

   ■ Binney, Marcus. Country Manors of Portugal. London: Scala, 1987.

   ■ Branco, Luís de Freitas. A Música em Portugal. Lisbon, 1930.

   ■ Brito, Manuel Carlos de. Opera in Portugal in the Eighteenth Century. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1989.

   ■ Carvalho, Pinto de. História de Fado. Lisbon, 1903 and 1982 eds.

   ■ Castro d'Aire, Teresa. O Fado. Lisbon: Temas da Actualidade, 1996.

   ■ Chicó, Mário Tavares. A Architectura Gótica em Portugal. Lisbon, 1968.

   ■ França, José-Augusto. A Arte em Portugal No Século XIX. Lisbon, 1966.

   ■. Lisboa Pombalina e o Illuminismo, 2nd ed. Lisbon, 1977.

   ■. A Reconstrucão e a Arquitectura Pombalina. Lisbon, 1978.

   ■ Gallop, Rodney. "The Fado (The Portuguese Song of Fate)." Musical Quarterly XIX (1933): 199-213.

   ■. Eight Portuguese Folksongs. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1936.

   ■ Gil, Júlio. The Finest Churches in Portugal. Lisbon, 1988.

   ■. The Finest Castles in Portugal, 3rd ed. George F. W. Dykes, trans. Lisbon, 1996.

   ■ Gonçalves, Rui Mário. Pintura e escultura em Portugal. Lisbon: Instituto de Cultura, 1984.

   ■. 100 Pintores Portugueses do século XX. Lisbon: Alfa, 1986.

   ■ Kubler, George. Portuguese Plain Architecture: Between Spices and Diamonds, 1521-1706. Middletown, Conn.: Wesleyan University Press, 1972.

   ■. Studies in Ancient American and European Art: The Collected Essays of George Kubler. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1985.

   ■, and Martin Soria. Art and Architecture in Spain and Portugal. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1959.

   ■ Lacerda, Aarão de. História da Arte em Portugal, 2 vols. Oporto, 1942-48.

   ■ Leão, Joaquim de Sousa. "Decorative Art: The Azulejo." In H. V. Livermore, ed. Portugal and Brazil: An Introduction. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1953.

   ■ Lopes Graça, Fernando. A canção popular portuguesa. Lisbon, 1953.

   ■. A música portuguesa e os sus problemas: Ensaios. Lisbon, 1959.

   ■ Moita, Luís. O fado: canção de vencidos. Lisbon, 1936.

   ■ Neves, José Cassiano. The Palace and Gardens of Fronteira: Seventeenth and Eighteenth Century Portuguese Style. Lisbon: Quetzal and Scala, 1995. North, C.T. Guia dos castelos antigos de Portugal, 2 vols. Lisbon: Bertrand Ed., 2002.

   ■ Pacheco, Jose. Stuart Carvalhais. O desenho grafico e a imprensa. Lisbon: Biblioteca do Empresario, 2000. Pereira, Paulo, ed. Arte portuguesa. Lisbon: Círculo de Leitores, 1995. Picchio, Luciana Stegagno. Storia del Teatro Portoghese. Rome: Edizinio deli' Ateneo, 1964.

   ■ Queirós, José. Cerâmica Portuguesa, 2 vols. 2nd rev. ed. Lisbon, 1948.

   ■ Santos, Luís Reis. Monuments of Portugal. Lisbon, 1940.

   ■ Santos, Reinaldo dos. A Escultura em Portugal, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1948-50.

   ■. História da Arte em Portugal. Oporto, 1953.

   ■ Sasportes, José. História da Dança em Portugal. Lisbon, 1970. Simões, J. M. dos Santos. "Azulejos in a Land of Many Colours." Connoisseur (London) CXXXVII, 551 (1956): 15-21.

   ■. Azulejaria em Portugal no Século X VIII. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■ Smith, Robert C. A Talha em Portugal. Lisbon, 1963.

   ■. The Art of Portugal, 1500-1800. London, Weidenfeld and Nicolson, 1968.

   ■. "The Building of Mafra." Apollo 97, 134 (April 1973): 360-67.

   ■ Stoop, Anne de. Demeures portugaises dans les environs de Lisbonne. Paris: Weber, 1986.

   ■. Palais et manoirs: Le Minho. Paris: Ed. du Seuil, 1995.

   ■ Tannock, Michael. Portuguese 20th Century Artists: A Biographical Dictionary. Chichester, U.K.: Phillimore, 1978.

   ■ Taylor, René. "The Architecture of Port Wine." The Architectural Review CXXIX, 772 (1961): 368-99.

   ■ Terol, Marylene. Azulejos a Lisbonne. Paris: Hervas, 1992.

   ■ Veiga de Oliveira, Ernesto. Instrumentos musicais populares portugueses. Lisbon, 1982.

   ■ Watson, Walter Crum. Portuguese Architecture. London: Constable, 1908. Wohl, Hellmut. "Carlos Mardel and His Lisbon Architecture." Apollo 97, 134 (April 1973): 350-59.

   ■ Sculpture and Ceramics

   ■ Andrade, Sergio de. "Presepios." In Dicionario de Arte Barroca em Portugal. Lisbon: Presenca, 1989. Barreira, Joao. Arte Portuguesa, Arquitectura e Escultura. Lisbon: Excelsior, n.d.

   ■ Cardoso, Arnaldo Pinto. O Presepio Barroco Portugues. Lisbon: Bertrand, 2003.

   ■ Chaves, Luis. Os Barristas Portugueses. Coimbra, 1925.

   ■. Natal Portugues. Oporto: Liv. Classica Editora, 1942.

   ■ Gargano, Pietro. Il Presepio. Otto Secoli di Storia, Arte, Tradizione. Milan: Fenice, 1995.

   ■ Lima, Henrique de Campos F. Joaquim Machado de Castro, Escultor Conimbricense. Coimbra: Instituto de Historia de Arte, 1989. Macedo, Diogo de. Presepios Portugueses. Lisbon: Artis, 1951.

   ■. Machado de Castro. Lisbon: Artis, 1958.

   ■ Morais, Heitor. Natal do Meu Coracao. Braga: Ed. A.O., 1991.

   ■ Pais, Alexandre Nobre. Presepios Portugueses Monumentos do Seculo XVIII em Terracotta, 2 vols. Master's thesis in history of art, Universidade Nova de Lisboa, 1998.

   ■ Queiros, Jose. Ceramica Portuguesa. Lisbon: Presenca, 1998. Santos, Reinaldo dos. A Escultura em Portugal. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1951. Serrao, Vitor. Historia da Arte em Portugal IV-O Barroco. Lisbon: Presenca, 2003.

   ■ Smith, Robert C. The Art Of Portugal 1500-1800. New York: Meredith Press, 1968.

   ■ Sousa, Ernesto de. Presepios. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1998.

   ■ Cinema

   ■ Antunes, Joao and Jose de Matos-Cruz, Cinema Portugues 1896-1998. Lisbon: Lusomundo, 1997.

   ■ Bandeira, Jose Gomes. Porto: 100 anos de cinema portugues. Oporto: Camara Municipal do Porto, 1996. Duarte, Fernando. Primitivos do Cinema Portugues. Lisbon: Cinecultura, 1960.

   ■ Faria de Almeida, M., Resumo da Historia do Cinema. Lisbon: RTP, 1982. Nobre, Roberto. Singularidades do Cinema Portugues. Lisbon: Portugalia, n.d.

   ■ Pina, Luis de. Aventura do Cinema Portugues. Lisbon: Vega, 1977.

   ■. Documentarismo Portugues. Lisbon: IPC, 1977.

   ■. Panorama do Cinema Portugues. Lisbon: Terra Livre, 1978.

   ■. Historia do Cinema Portugues. Mem Martins: Europa-America, 1986.

   ■ Ribeiro, Felix. O Cinema Portugues antes do Sonoro. Esboco Historiconema Portugues. Lisbon: Terra Livre, 1978.

   ■. Panorama do Cinema Portugues. Lisbon: n.d.

   ■ Children's Literature

   ■ Andresen, Sofia de Melo Breyner. A Fada Oriana. 9th ed. Lisbon: Figueiri-nhas, 1985.

   ■ Araújo, Matilde Rosa. A estrada fascinante. Lisbon: Livros Horizonte, 1988. Barreto, Garcia. Literatura Para Crianças E Jovens Em Portugal. Oporto:

   ■ Campo Das Letras, 1998. Bastos, Glória. A escrita para crianças em Portugal no seculo XIX. Lisbon:

   ■ Caminho da Educaçao, 1997. Cadet, Maria Rita Chiappe. Os Contos da Mamã. Lisbon: Lallement Freres, 1883.

   ■ Castro, Fernanda. Mariazinha em Africa, 2nd ed. Lisbon: Portugália, 1947. Cross, Esther, and Wilbur Cross. Portugal. Chicago: Childrens Press, 1986. DeSkalon, Anna, and Christa Stadtler. We Live in Portugal. New York: Watts, 1987.

   ■ Gomes, Alice. A Nau Catrineta, 2nd ed. Lisbon: Portugália, 1973.

   ■. A literatura para a infância. Lisbon: Torres & Abreu, 1979.

   ■ Letria, José Jorge. Do sentimento mágico da vida. Lisbon: Escritor, 1994. Müller, Adolfo Simões. Historiazinha de Portugal, 6th ed. Oporto: Tavares Martins, 1983.

   ■ Osório, Ana de Castro. Para as crianças. Illustr. by Leal da Câmara. Setúbal: Liv. Crianças, 1908.

   ■ Pires, Maria Laura Bettencourt. História da literatura infantil portuguesa. Lisbon: Vega, 1981. Ribeiro, Aquilino. Arca de Noé-III Classe. Lisbon, 1989. Rocha, Natércia. Breve História da Literatura para Crianças em Portugal. Lisbon: Instituto de Cultura e Língua Portuguesa, 1984.

   ■. Bibliografia geral da literatura portuguesa para crianças. Lisbon: Edit. Comunicação, 1987.

   ■ Sá, Domingos Guimarães de. A literatura infantil em Portugal. Braga: Edit. Franciscana, 1981.

   ■ Selfridge. John. Portugal. New York: Chelsea House, 1990. Vaz de Carvalho, Maria Amália. Contos para os Nossos Filhos, 11th ed. Oporto: Barreira, 1947.

   ■ Viana, António Manuel Couto. Jõao de Deus e um século de literatura infantil em Portugal. Lisbon: Ed. do Templo, 1978.

   ■ Lisbon, Capital City, in History and Literature

   ■ Castelo-Branco, Fernando. Lisboa Seiscentista, 3rd ed. Lisbon: 1969.

   ■ Castilho, Júlio de. Lisboa Antiga, 7 vols. Lisbon, 1935-45.

   ■ Couto, Dejanirah. Histoire de Lisbonne. Paris: Fayard, 2000.

   ■ Crespo, Ángel. Lisboa Mítica e Literária. Lisbon: Liv. Horizonte, 1987.

   ■ Dias, Marina Tavares. Lisboa Desaparecida. Lisbon: Quimera, 1990.

   ■ Dionísio, Sant'anna, ed. Guia de Portugal. Vol. I: Lisboa e Arredores. Lisbon: Biblioteca Nacional de Lisboa, 1924, orig. ed; reprint, Gulbenkian Foundation, 1979.

   ■ França, José-Augusto. Lisboa Pombalina e o Iluminismo. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1977.

   ■ Moita, Irisalva, ed. O Livro de Lisboa. Lisbon: Liv. Horizonte, 1994.

   ■ Neves, Orlando. Lisboa em Crónica. Lisbon: Author's Ed., 1968.

   ■ Pavão, Luís, and Mário Pereira. Tabernas de Lisboa. Lisbon: Assírio & Alvim, 1981.

   ■ Pessoa, Fernando. Lisboa. O que o turista deve ver: What the Tourist Should See. Lisbon: Liv. Horizonte, 1997.

   ■ Queirós, José Maria Eça de. À Capital. Lisbon: Sá da Costa, 1960.

   ■ Santos, Piedade Braga, et al. Lisboa Setecentista vista por Estrangeiros. Lisbon: Liv. Horizonte, 1996.

   ■ Vieira, Alice. Esta Lisboa. Lisbon: Caminho, 1993.

   ■ Wright, David, and Patrick Swift. Lisbon: A Portrait and Guide. New York: Scribners, 1971.

   ■ The Inquisition in History

   ■ Azevedo, João Lúcio. Historia das Cristãos-Novos. Lisbon: Liv. Clássica, 1975.

   ■ Baião, António. A Inquisição em Portugal e no Brasil: Subsídios para a sua história. Lisbon: Arquivo Histórico Portugues, 1906. Bethencourt, Francisco. "Portugal: A Scrupulous Inquisition," In Bengt Ankarloo and Gustav Henningsen, eds., Early Modern Witchcraft: Centres and Peripheries, 403-22. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1990.

   ■. "Os equilíbrios sociais do Poder." In José Mattoso, ed., Historia De Portugal, Vol. 3, No Alvorecer Da Modernidade ( 1480-1620). Lisbon: Estampa, 1993.

   ■. História das Inquisições: Portugal, Espanha e Itália. Lisbon: Círculo de Leitores, 1994.

   ■ Braga, Maria Luísa. A Inquisição em Portugal na primeira metade do Séc. XVIII. Lisbon: Inst. Nacional de Investigação Científica, 1992.

   ■ Haliczer, Stephen, ed. Inquisition and Society in Early Modern Europe. London: Croom Helm, 1987.

   ■ Herculano, Alexandre. History of the Origin and Establishment of the Inquisition in Portugal. Reprint. New York: AMS Press, 1968.

   ■ Magalhães, Joaquim Romero. "Em Busca dos Tempos da Inquisição (15731615)." Revista de História das Ideias 9 (1987): 191-228.

   ■ Mea, Elvira Cunha Azevedo. A Inquisição de Coimbra no Século XVI. Oporto, 1989.

   ■ Mendonça, José Lourenço D. de, and António Joaquim Moreira. História da Inquisição em Portugal. Lisbon: Círculo de Leitores, 1980.

   ■ Novinsky, Anita, and Luísa M. Carneiro, eds. Inquisição: Ensaios sobre Mentalidade, Heresias e Arte. Rio de Janeiro: Expressão e Cultura, 1992.

   ■ Pereira, Isais da Rosa. Documentos para a história da Inquisição em Portugal. Lisbon, 1987.

   ■ Rego, Yvonne Cunha, ed. Feiticeiros, Profetas e Visionários: Textos Antigos Portugueses. Lisbon: Imprensa Nacional e Casa da Moeda, 1981.

   ■ Saraiva, António José. Inquisição e cristãos-novos. Lisbon: Estampa, 1985.

   ■ Walker, Timothy Dale. "Doctors, Folk Medicine and the Inquisition: The Repression of Popular Healing in Portugal during the Enlightenment Era." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of History, Boston University, 2001.

   ■ Literature in English Translation: Selection

   ■ Alcaforado, Mariana. The Letters of a Portuguese Nun ( Mariana Alcaforado). Edgar Prestage, trans. London: D. Nutt, 1893.

   ■ Andrade, Eugénio de. "White on White." Alexis Levitin, trans. Quarterly Review of Literature. Poetry Series VIII. Vol. 27. Princeton, N.J., 1987.

   ■. Another Name for Earth; O outro nome da terra. Alexis Levitin, trans. Ft. Bragg, Calif.: QED Press, 1997.

   ■ Andresen, Sophia de Mello Breyner. Marine Rose: Selected Poems. Ruth Fain-light, trans. Redding Ridge, Conn.: Swan Books, 1989.

   ■ Antunes, António Lobo. South of Nowhere. Elizabeth Lowe, trans. New York: Random House, 1983.

   ■. Fado Alexandrino. Gregory Rabassa, trans. New York: Grove Weidenfeld, 1990.

   ■. An Explanation of the Birds. Richard Zenith, trans. New York: Grove Weidenfeld, 1991.

   ■. Act of the Damned. New York: Grove Press, 1995.

   ■. The Natural Order of Things. New York: Grove Press, 2000.

   ■ Barreno, Maria Isabel, Maria Teresa Horta, and Maria Velho da Costa. The Three Marias: New Portuguese Letters. Helen R. Lane, trans. New York: Doubleday, 1975.

   ■ Bell, Aubrey F. G. Poems from the Portuguese ( with the Portuguese text). A.

   ■ Bell, trans. Oxford: Blackwell, 1913.

   ■ Camões, Luís de. The Lusiads of Luís de Camões. Leonard Bacon, trans. New York: Hispanic Society of America, 1950.

   ■. The Lusiads. William C. Atkinson, trans. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1952.

   ■. The Lusiads. Landeg White, trans. New York: Oxford University Press, 1997.

   ■ Castelo Branco, Camilo. Doomed Love ( A Family Memoir). Alice R. Clemente, trans Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 1995. Castro, José Maria Ferreira de. Emigrants. Dorothy Ball, trans. New York: Macmillan, 1962.

   ■. Jungle. Charles Duff, trans. New York: Viking, 1935.

   ■. The Mission. Ann Stevens, trans. London: Hamilton, 1963.

   ■ Dantas, Júlio. The Cardinals' Collation, 48th ed. A. Saintsbury, trans. London, 1962.

   ■ Dias de Melo. Dark Stones. Gregory McNab, trans. Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 1996.

   ■ Dinis, Júlio. The Fidalgos of Casa Mourisca. Rosanna Dabney, trans. Boston: D. Lothrop, 1891.

   ■ Garrett, Almeida. Brother Luiz de Sousa [play]. Edgar Prestage, trans. London: Elkin Mathess, 1909.

   ■. Travels in My Homeland. John M. Parker, trans. London: Peter Owen and UNESCO, 1987. Griffin, Jonathan. Camões: Some Poems Translated from the Portuguese by Jonathan Griffin. London: Menard Press, 1976. Jorge, Lídia. The Murmuring Coast. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1995.

   ■ Lisboa, Eugénio, ed. Portuguese Short Fiction. Manchester, U.K.: Carcanet, 1997.

   ■ Lopes, Fernão. The English in Portugal 1367-87: Extracts from the Chronicles of Dom Fernando and Dom João. Derek W. Lomax and R. J. Oakley, eds. and trans. Warminster, U.K.: Aris & Phillips, 1988.

   ■ Macedo, Helder, ed. Contemporary Portuguese Poetry: An Anthology in English. Helder Macedo, et al., trans. Manchester, U.K.: Carcanet New Press, 1978.

   ■ Martins, J. P. De Oliveira. A History of Iberian Civilization. Aubrey F. G. Bell, trans.; preface by Salvador de Madariaga. New York: Cooper Square, 1969.

   ■ Mendes Pinto, Fernão. The Travels of Mendes Pinto [Orig. title: Peregrinação].

   ■ Rebecca D. Catz, trans., with introduction and notes. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1989. Miguéis, José Rodrigues. A Man Smiles at Death with Half a Face. George

   ■ Monteiro, trans. Hanover, N.H.: University Press of New England, 1991.

   ■. Happy Easter. John Byrne, trans. Manchester, U.K.: Carcanet, 1995.

   ■. Steerage and Ten Other Stories. George Monteiro, ed. Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 1998. Monteiro, Luís De Sttau. The Rules of the Game. Ann Stevens, trans. London: Hamilton, 1965.

   ■ Mourão-Ferreira, David. Lucky in Love. Christine Robinson, trans. Manchester, U.K.: Carcanet, 1999. Namora, Fernando. Field of Fate. Dorothy Ball, trans. London: Macmillan, 1970.

   ■. Mountain Doctor. Dorothy Ball, trans. London: Macmillan, 1956.

   ■ Nemésio, Vitorino. Inclement Weather over the Channel. Francisco Cota Fagundes, trans. Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 1993.

   ■. Stormy Isles: An Azorean Tale. Francisco C. Fagundes, trans. Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 2000.

   ■ Paço D'Arcos, Joaquim. Memoirs of a Banknote. Robert Lyle, trans. London, 1968.

   ■ Pedroso, Consiglieri, comp. Portuguese Folk-Tales. Henriqueta Monteiro, trans. Reprint of orig. 1882 ed. New York: Benjamin Blom, 1969.

   ■ Pessoa, Fernando. Fernando Pessoa: Sixty Portuguese Poems. F. E. G. Quintanilha, ed. and trans. Cardiff: University of Wales Press, 1971.

   ■. Selected Poems: Fernando Pessoa. 2nd rev. ed. Jonathan Griffin, trans. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1982.

   ■. The Book of Disquiet. Alfred MacAdams, trans. New York: Pantheon, 1991.

   ■. Fernando Pessoa: Selected Poems. Peter Rickard, ed. and trans. Edinburgh, U.K.: Edinburgh University Press, 1991.

   ■. "The Mariner: A 'Static Drama' in One Act." In Translation: Portugal.

   ■ George Ritchie, et al., trans. The Journal of Literary Translation. Vol. XXV, 38-56. New York: Translation Center, Columbia University, 1991.

   ■. Message: Bilingual Edition. Jonathan Griffin, trans. London: Menard Press and King's College, 1992.

   ■ Pires, José Cardoso. Ballad of a Dog's Beach. Mary Fitton, trans. London: J. M. Dent, 1986.

   ■ Queirós, José Maria Eça de. Cousin Bazilio. Roy Campbell, trans. London: Max Reinhardt, 1953.

   ■. The Relic. Aubrey F. G. Bell, trans. London: Max Reinhardt, 1954.

   ■. The City and the Mountains. Roy Campbell, trans. London: Max Reinhardt, 1955.

   ■. The Sin of Father Amaro. Nan Flanagan, trans. London: Max Reinhardt, 1962.

   ■. The Maias. Patricia McGowan Pinheiro, trans. London: Bodley Head, 1965.

   ■. The Illustrious House of Ramires. Ann Stevens, trans. London: Bodley Head, 1968.

   ■. Letters from England. Ann Stevens, trans. London: Bodley Head, 1970.

   ■. To the Capital. John Vetch, trans. Manchester, U.K.: Carcanet, 1995.

   ■ Quental, Antero de. Sixty-four Sonnets. Edgar Prestage, trans. London: David Nutt, 1894.

   ■ Redol, Alves. The Man with Seven Names. L. L. Barrett, trans. New York: Knopf, 1964.

   ■ Resende, André de. André deResende's 'Poema Latina'/ 'Latinpoems.' J. C. R. Martyn, ed. and trans. Lewiston N.Y.: Lampeter and Edwin Mellen, 1998. Ribeiro, Aquilino. When the Wolves Howl. Patricia McGowan Pinheiro, trans. New York: Macmillan; London: Cape, 1963. Sá Carneiro, Mário de. The Great Shadow ( and Other Stories). Margaret Jull Costa, trans. Sawtry, U.K.: Dedalus, 1996. Santareno, Bernardo. The Promise. Nelson H. Vieira, trans. Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 1981.

   ■ Saramago, José. Baltasar and Blimunda. Giovanni Pontiero, trans. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1987.

   ■. The Stone Raft. Giovanni Pontiero, trans. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1991.

   ■. The Year of the Death of Ricardo Reis. Giovanni Pontiero, trans. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1991.

   ■. The History of the Siege of Lisbon. Giovanni Pontiero, trans. New York: Harcourt Brace, 1996.

   ■. Blindness. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1999.

   ■. Tale of the Unknown Island. New York: Harcourt Brace, 2000.

   ■. All the Names. Margaret Jull Costa, trans. New York: Harcourt, 2000.

   ■. Journey to Portugal. New York: Harcourt Brace, 2001.

   ■ Sena, Jorge de. The Poetry of Jorge de Sena: A Bilingual Selection. Frederick G. Williams et al., trans. Santa Barbara, Calif.: Mudborn Press, 1980.

   ■. By the Rivers of Babylon and Other Stories. New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 1989.

   ■ Vicente, Gil. Four Plays of Gil Vicente: Edited from the Editio Princeps ( 1562). Aubrey F. G. Bell, ed. and trans. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1920.

   ■. Lyrics of Gil Vicente. Aubrey F. G. Bell, trans. Oxford: Oxford University Press, Hispanic Notes and Monographs, Portuguese Series 1, 1921.

   ■. The Play of Rubena. Jack E. Tomlins, trans.; Rene P. Garay and José I. Suarez, eds. New York: National Hispanic Foundation for Humanities, 1993.

   ■. The Boat Plays. David Johnston, trans. and adaptation. London: Oberon, 1996.

   ■. Three Discovery Plays. Anthony Lappin, trans. Warminster, U.K.: Aris & Phillips, 1997.

   ■ Vieira, António. Dust Thou Art. Rev. W. Anderson, trans. London, 1882.

   ■ Portuguese and Portuguese-American Cooking: Cuisine

   ■ Anderson, Jean. Food of Portugal. New York: Hearst, 1994. Asselin, E. Donald. A Portuguese-American Cookbook. Rutland, Vt.: Charles E. Tuttle, 1966.

   ■ Bourne, Ursula. Portuguese Cookery. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1973. Crato, Maria Helena Tavares. Cozinha Portuguesa I, II. Lisbon: Editorial Presença, 1978.

   ■ Dienhart, Miriam, and Anne Emerson, ed. Cooking in Portugal. Cascais: American Women of Lisbon, 1978.

   ■ Feibleman, Peter S. The Cooking of Spain and Portugal. New York: Time-Life Books; Foods of the World, 1969.

   ■ Koehler, Margaret H. Recipes from the Portuguese of Provincetown. Riverside, Conn.: Chatham Press, 1973. Manjny, Maite. The Home Book of Portuguese Cookery. London: Faber & Faber, 1974.

   ■ Marques, Susan Lowndes. Good Food from Spain and Portugal. London: Muller, 1956.

   ■ Modesto, Maria de Lourdes. Cozinha Tradicional Portuguesa. Lisbon: Verbo, 1982.

   ■ Ortiz, Elisabeth Lambert. The Food of Spain and Portugal. The Complete Iberian Cuisine. New York: Atheneum, 1989. Pinto, Elvira. La Bonne Cuisine Portugaise. Paris: Edicions Garanciere, 1985.

   ■ Robertson, Carol. Portuguese Cooking: The Authentic and Robust Cuisine of Portugal. Berkeley Calif.: North Atlantic, 1993. Schmaeling, Tony. The Cooking of Spain and Portugal. Ware, U.K.: Omega, 1983.

   ■ Vieira, Édite. The Taste of Portugal. London: Robinson, 1989.

   ■ Von Treskow, Maria. Zü Gast in Portugal: Eine Kulnarische Reise in Garten Europas. Weingarten: Kunstverlag, 1989. Wright, Carol. Portuguese Food. London: Dent, 1969.

   ■. Self-catering in Portugal: Making the Most of Local Food and Drink. London: Croom Helm, 1986.

   ■ Gardens and Gardening of Portugal and Madeira

   ■ Afonso, Simonetta Luz, and Angela Delaforce. Palace of Queluz— The Gardens. Lisbon, 1989.

   ■ Araújo, Iluídio Alves de. Arte Paisagista e Arte das Jardins em Portugal. Lisbon, 1962.

   ■ Azeredo, Francisco de. Casas Senhoriais Portuguesas. Barcelos, 1986.

   ■ Binney, Marcus. Country Manors of Portugal. New York: Scala Books, 1987.

   ■ Bowe, Patrick, and Nicolas Sapieha. Gardens of Portugal. New York: Scala Books and Harper and Row, 1989.

   ■ Cane, Florence du. The Flowers and Gardens of Madeira. London, 1924.

   ■ Cardoso, Pedro Homem, and Helder Carita. Da Grandeza das Jardins em Portugal. Lisbon, 1987.

   ■ Carita, Helder, and Homem Cardoso. Portuguese Gardens. London: Antique Collector's Club, 1987.

   ■ Costa, António da, and Luís de O. Franquinho. Madeira: Plantas e Floras. Funchal, 1986.

   ■ Nichols, Rose Standish. Spanish and Portuguese Gardens. Boston, 1926.

   ■ Pereira, Arthur D. Sintra and Its Farm Manors. Sintra, 1983.

   ■ Sampaio, Gonçalo. Flora Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1946.

   ■ Sitwell, Sacheverell. Portugal and Madeira. London: Batsford, 1945.

   ■ Underwood, John, and Pat Underwood. Landscapes of Madeira. London, 1980.

   ■ Vieira, Rui. Flowers of Madeira. Funchal, 1973.

   ■ Viterbo, Francisco Marques de Sousa. A Jardinagem em Portugal, 2 vols. Coimbra, 1906-9.

   ■ Education, Science, Health, and Medical History

   ■ Albuquerque, Luís de. Estudos de História, 3 vols. Coimbra, 1973-81.

   ■. Ciência e experiência nos Descobrimentos portugueses. Lisbon, 1983.

   ■. Para a História de Ciência em Portugal. Lisbon, 1983.

   ■. As Navegaçoes E A Sua Projecção Na Ciência E Na Cultura. Lisbon, 1987.

   ■ Baião, Antônio. Episódios Dramáticos da Inquisição Portuguesa, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1936-55.

   ■ Cabreira, Antônio. Portugal nos mares e nas ciências. Lisbon, 1929. Carvalho, Rômulo de. A Astronomia em Portugal (séc. xviii). Lisbon, 1985. Fernandes, Barahona. Egas Moniz: Pioneiro de descobrimentos médicos. Lisbon, 1983.

   ■ Gaitonde, P. D. Portuguese Pioneers in India: Spotlight on Medicine. London: Sangam Books, 1983.

   ■ Hanson, Carl A. "Portuguese Cosmology in the Late Seventeenth Century." In Benjamin F. Taggie and Richard W. Clement, eds., Iberia & the Mediterranean, 75-85. Warrensburg: Central Missouri State University, 1989.

   ■ Higgins, Michael H., and Charles F. S. de Winton. Survey of Education in Portugal. London, 1942.

   ■ Hirsch, Elizabeth Feist. Damião de Góis: The Life and Thought of a Portuguese Humanist. The Hague, 1967.

   ■ Lemos, Maximiano. Arquivos de História da Medicina Portuguesa. Several vols. Lisbon, 1886-1923. Vol. I. História da Medicina em Portugal. Doutrina e Instituições. Lisbon, 1899.

   ■ Mira, Matias Ferreira de. História da Medicina Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1948.

   ■ Orta, Garcia de. Colóquios dos Simples e Drogas e Cousas Medicinais da India. Conde de Ficalho, ed., 2 vols. Lisbon, 1891-95.

   ■ Osório, J. Pereira. História e Desenvolvimento da Ciência em Portugal, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1986-89.

   ■ Pina, Luís de. "Uma prioridade portuguesa do século XVI. João de Barros e a Dactiloscópia Oriental." Arquivo da Repartição de Antropologia Criminal IV (1936).

   ■. "As Ciências na História do Império Colonial Português — Séculos XV a XIX." Anais de Faculdade de Ciências do Porto ( 1939-10).

   ■. "Os Portugueses Mestres de Ciência e Metras no Estrangeiro." Actas do Congresso do Mundo Português. Lisbon, 1940.

   ■. "A Ciência em Portugal (bosquejo Histórico)." In Secretariado Nacional da Informação, ed., Portugal: Breviário Da Pátria Para Os Portugueses Ausentes, 277-301. Lisbon, 1946.

   ■ Richards, Robert A. C., ed. Guide to World Science: Vol. 9: Spain and Portugal, 2nd ed. Guernsey, U.K.: F. H. Books, 1974.

   ■ Saraiva, António José. História da Cultura em Portugal, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1950-62.

   ■ ———. "João de Barros." In Serrao, ed., Dicionário de História de Portugal 1 (1963): 307-8.

   ■ Silvestre Ribeiro, José. História dos Establecimentos Scientíficos, Literários e Artísticos de Portugal nos Successivos Reinados da Monarchia, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1871-83.

   ■ Veiga-Pires, J. A., and Ronald G. Grainger, eds. Pioneers in Angiography: The Portuguese School ofAngiography. Lancaster, U.K.: MTP Press, 1982.

   ■ Walker, Timothy. "Doctors, Folk Medicine and the Inquisition: The Repression of Popular Healing in Portugal during the Enlightenment Era." Ph.D. dissertation, History Department, Boston University, 2001.

   ■ Feminism and Women's Studies

   ■ Barbosa, Madelena. "Women in Portugal." Women's Studies International Quarterly 4 (1981): 477-80.

   ■ Barreno, Maria Isabel, Maria Teresa Horta, and Maria Velho da Costa. Novas Cartas Portuguesas. Lisbon, 1972.

   ■ ———. The Three Marias. New Portuguese Letters. Helen R. Lane, trans. New York: Doubleday, 1975.

   ■ Brettell, Caroline B. We Have Already Cried Many Tears: The Stories of Three Portuguese Migrant Women. Cambridge, Mass.: Schenkman, 1982.

   ■ Ferreira, Virginia. "Engendering Portugal: Social Change, State Politics, and Women's Social Mobilization." In António Costa Pinto, ed., Modern Portugal, 162-88. Palo Alto, Calif.: SPOSS, 1998.

   ■ Goodwin, Mary. "Portuguese Feminism." Portuguese Studies Newsletter 17 (Spring-Summer 1987): 12-13.

   ■ Lamas, Maria. As Mulheres do Meu País. Lisbon, 1948.

   ■ "Mulheres Portuguesas e Feminismo." Análise Social [special number on Portuguese Women and Feminism] 22 (1986): 92-93.

   ■ Osório, Ana de Castro. As Mulheres Portuguesas. Lisbon, 1905.

   ■ Sadlier, Darlene J. The Question of How: Women Writers and New Portuguese Literature. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood; Contributions in Women's Studies, no. 109, 1989.

   ■ Silva, Manuela. The Employment of Women in Portugal. Luxembourg: Office for Official Publications, European Communities, 1984. Velho da Costa, Maria. Maina Mendes. Lisbon, 1974.

   ■ Vicente, Ana, and Maria Reynolds de Souza. Family Planning in Portugal. Lisbon, 1984.

   ■ Religion and Catholic Church

   ■ Almeida, Fortunato de. História da Igreja em Portugal. 6 vols. Coimbra, 1910-24, and Oporto, 1967-72. Alonso, Joaquim Maria. The Secret of Fátima: Fact and Legend. Cambridge, Mass.: Ravengate Press, 1979. Alves, José da Felicidade, ed. Católicos e política de Humberto Delgado à Marcelo Caetano. Lisbon, 1969. Araújo, Miguel de, ed. Dicionario político; 1; Os Bispos e a revoluçao de Abril. Lisbon, 1976. Bishko, Charles Julian. Spanish and Portuguese Monastic History 600-1300. London, Variorum Reprints, 1984.

   ■ Blanshard, Paul. Freedom and Catholic Power in Spain and Portugal. Boston: Beacon Press, 1962.

   ■ Boxer, C. R. The Church Militant and Iberian Expansion 1440-1770. Baltimore, Md.: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1978. Bruneau, Thomas C. "Church and State in Portugal: Crises of Cross and Sword." Journal of Church and State XVIII (1976): 463-90. Freire, José Geraldes. Resistência Católico ao Salazarismo-Marcelismo. Oporto, 1976.

   ■ Herculano, Alexandre. History of the Origin and Establishment of the Inquisition in Portugal. John C. Banner, trans. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1962.

   ■ IPOPE. Estudo sobre liberdade e religião em Portugal. Lisbon, 1973. Johnston, Francis. Fátima: The Great Sign. Chulmleigh, U.K.: Augustine Publications, 1980.

   ■ Kondor, Fr. Louis. Fátima in Lucia's Own Words: Sister Lucia's Memoirs. Fatima: Postulation Center, 1976. Lourenço, Joaquim Maria. Situação jurídica da Igreja em Portugal. Coimbra, 1943.

   ■ Mattoso, José. Religião e Cultura na Idade Média Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1982. Miller, Samuel J. Portugal and Rome c. 1748-1830: An Aspect of Catholic Enlightenment. Rome: Universita Gregoriana Editrice, 1978. O'Malley, John W. The First Jesuits. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1993.

   ■ Pattee, Richard. Portugal and the Portuguese World. Milwaukee, Wisc.: Bruce, 1957.

   ■ Prestage, Edgar. Portugal: A Pioneer of Christianity. Lisbon, 1945.

   ■ Richard, Robert. Etudes sur l'histoire morale et religieuse de Portugal. Paris: Centro Cultural de Gulbenkian, 1970.

   ■ Robinson, Richard A. H. "The Religious Question and Catholic Revival in Portugal, 1900-1930." Journal of Contemporary History XII (1977): 345-62.

   ■. Contemporary Portugal: A History. London: Allen & Unwin, 1979.

   ■ Rodrigues, R. P. Francisco. História da Companhia de Jesus na Assistência de Portugal, 7 vols. Lisbon, 1931-50.

   ■ Roth, Cecil. A History of the Marranos. Philadelphia: Jewish Publication Society of America, 1932.

   ■ Agriculture, Viticulture, and Fishing

   ■ Abreu-Ferreira, Darlene. "The Portuguese in Newfoundland: Documentary Evidence Examined." Portuguese Studies Review 4, 1 (1995-96): 11-33.

   ■ Allen, H. Warner. The Wines of Portugal. London: Michael Joseph, 1963.

   ■ Barros, Afonso de. A reforma agrária em Portugal. Oeiras, 1979.

   ■ Beamish, Huldine V. The Hills of Alentejo. London: Geoffrey Bles, 1958.

   ■ Bennett, Norman R. "The Golden Age of the Port Wine System, 1781-1807." The International History Review XII (1990): 221-18.

   ■ Black, Richard. "The Myth of Subsistence: Market Production in the Small Farm Sector of Northern Portugal." Iberian Studies 1, 8 (1989): 25-41.

   ■ Bravo, Pedro, and Duarte de Oliveira. Viticulture Moderna. Lisbon, 1974.

   ■. Vinhas e Vinhos De Portugal. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■ Cabral, Manuel V. "Agrarian Structures and Recent Movements in Portugal." Journal of Peasant Studies 4, 5 (July 1978): 411-45.

   ■ Cardoso, José Carvalho. A Agricultura Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1973.

   ■ Carvalho, Bento de. Guía Dos Vinhos Portugueses. Lisbon, 1982.

   ■ Clarke, Robert. Open Boat Whaling in the Azores: The History and Present Methods of a Relic Industry. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1954.

   ■ Cockburn, Ernest. Port Wine and Oporto. London: Wine & Spirit, 1949. Cole, S. C. "Cod, Cod Country and Family: The Portuguese Newfoundland Fishery." Mast 3, 1 (1990): 1-29.

   ■ Coull, James. The Fisheries of Europe. London: G. Bell & Sons, 1972.

   ■ Croft-Cooke, Rupert. Port. London: Putnam, 1957.

   ■. Madeira. London: Putnam, 1961.

   ■ Delaforce, John. The Factory House at Oporto. London: Christie's Wine Publications, 1979 and later eds.

   ■ Doel, Patricia A. Port O'Call: Memories of the Portuguese White Fleet in St. John's Newfoundland. St. John's, Newfoundland: ISER, 1992.

   ■ Fletcher, Wyndham. Port: An Introduction to Its History and Delights. London: Bernet, 1978.

   ■ Francis, A. D. The Wine Trade. London: Adam and Charles Black, 1972.

   ■ Freitas, Eduardo, João Ferreira de Almeida, and Manuel Villaverde Cabral. Modalidades de penetração do capitalismo na agricultura: estruturas agrárias em Portugal Continental, 1950-1970. Lisbon, 1976.

   ■ Gonçalves, Francisco Esteves. Portugal: A Wine Country. Lisbon, 1984.

   ■ Gulbenkian Foundation. Agrarian Reform. Lisbon, 1981.

   ■ Kurlansky, Mark. Cod: A Biography of the Fish That Changed the World. New York: Walker, 1997.

   ■ Malefakis, Edward. "Two Iberian Land Reforms Compared: Spain, 1931-1936 and Portugal, 1974—1978." In Gulbenkian Foundation, Agrarian Reform. Lisbon, 1981.

   ■ Moreira da Fonseca, A. Port Wine: Notes on Its History, Production and Technology. Oporto, 1981.

   ■ Moutinho, M. História da pesca do bacalhau. Lisbon: Imprensa Universitária, 1985.

   ■ Oliveira Marques, A. H. de. lntrodução a história da agricultura em Portugal.

   ■ Lisbon, 1968. Pato, Octávio. O Vinho. Lisbon, 1971.

   ■ Pearson, Scott R. Portuguese Agriculture in Transition. Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1987.

   ■ Postgate, Raymond. Portuguese Wine. London: Dent, 1969.

   ■ Read, Jan. The Wines of Portugal. London: Faber & Faber, 1982.

   ■ Robertson, George. Port. London: Faber & Faber, 1982 ed.

   ■ Rutledge, Ian. "Land Reform and the Portuguese Revolution." Journal of Peasant Studies 5, 1 (Oct. 1977): 79-97.

   ■ Sanceau, Elaine. The British Factory at Oporto. Oporto, 1970.

   ■ Simon, Andre L. Port. London: Constable, 1934.

   ■ Simões, J. Os grandes trabalhadores do Mar: Reportagens na Terra Nova e na Groenlândia. Lisbon: Gazeta dos Caminho de Ferro, 1942.

   ■ Smith, Diana. Portugal and the Challenge of 1992: Special Report. New York: Camões Center/RIIC, Columbia University, 1990.

   ■ Stanislawski, Dan. Landscapes of Bacchus: The Vine in Portugal. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1970.

   ■ Teixeira, Carlos, and Victor M. Pereira da Rosa, eds. The Portuguese in Canada: From the Seat to the City. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 2000.

   ■ Unwin, Tim. "Farmers' Perceptions of Agrarian Change in Northwest Portugal." Journal of Rural Studies 1, 4 (1985): 339-57.

   ■ Valadão do Valle, E. Bacalhau: tradições históricas e económicos. Lisbon, 1991.

   ■ Venables, Bernard. Baleia! The Whalers of Azores. London: Bodley Head, 1968.

   ■ Villiers, Alan. The Quest of the Schooner Argus: A Voyage to the Banks and Greenland. New York: Scribners, 1951. World Bank. Portugal: Agricultural Survey. Washington, D.C.: World Bank, 1978.

   ■ ECONOMY, INDUSTRY, AND DEVELOPMENT

   ■ Aiyer, Srivain, and Shahid A. Chandry. Portugal and the E.E.C.: Employment and Implications. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■ Baklanoff, Eric N. The Economic Transformation of Spain and Portugal. New York: Praeger, 1978.

   ■. "Changing Systems: The Portuguese Revolution and the Public Enterprise Sector." ACES ( Association of Comparative Economic Studies) Bulletin 26 (Summer-Fall 1984): 63-76.

   ■. "Portugal's Political Economy: Old and New." In K. Maxwell and M. Haltzel, eds., Portugal: Ancient Country, Young Democracy, 37-59. Washington, D.C.: Wilson Center Press, 1990.

   ■ Barbosa, Manuel P. Growth, Migration and the Balance of Payments in a Small, Open Economy. New York: Garland, 1984.

   ■ Braga de Macedo, Jorge, and Simon Serfaty, eds. Portugal since the Revolution: Economic and Political Perspectives. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1981.

   ■ Carvalho, Camilo, et al. Sabotagem Econômica: " Dossier" Banco Espírito Santo e Comercial de Lisboa. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■ Corkill, David. The Development of the Portuguese Economy: A Case of Euro-peanization. London: Routledge, 1999.

   ■ Cravinho, João. "The Portuguese Economy: Constraints and Opportunities." In K. Maxwell, ed., Portugal in the 1980s, 111-65. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.

   ■ Dornsbusch, Rudiger, Richard S. Eckhaus, and Lane Taylor. "Analysis and Projection of Macroeconomic Conditions in Portugal." In L. S. Graham and H. M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal, 299-330. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.

   ■ The Economist (London). "On the Edge of Europe: A Survey of Portugal." (June 30, 1981): 3-27.

   ■. "Coming Home: A Survey of Portugal." (May 28, 1988).

   ■. 'The New Iberia: Not Quite Kissing Cousins" [Spain and Portugal]. (May 5, 1990): 21-24.

   ■ Fundação Calouste Gulbenkian and German Marshall Fund of the U.S., eds. II Conferência Internacional sobre e Economia Portuguesa, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■ Hudson, Mark. Portugal to 1993: Investing in a European Future. London: The Economist Intelligence Unit/Special Report No. 11 57/EIU Economic Prospects Series, 1989.

   ■ International Labour Office (ILO). Employment and Basic Needs in Portugal. Geneva: ILO, 1979.

   ■ Kavalsky, Basil, and Surendra Agarwal. Portugal: Current and Prospective Economic Trends. Washington, D.C.: World Bank, 1978.

   ■ Krugman, Paul, and Jorge Braga de Macedo. "The Economic Consequences of the April 25th Revolution." Economia III (1979): 455-83.

   ■ Lewis, John R., and Alan M. Williams. "The Sines Project: Portugal's Growth Centre or White Elephant?" Town Planning Review 56, 3 (1985): 339-66.

   ■ Makler, Harry M. "The Consequences of the Survival and Revival of the Industrial Bourgeoisie." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 251-83. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.

   ■ Marques, A. La Politique Economique Portugaise dans la Période de la Dictature ( 1926-1974). Doctoral thesis, 3rd cycle, University of Grenoble, France, 1980.

   ■ Martins, B. Sociedades e grupos em Portugal. Lisbon, 1973.

   ■ Mata, Eugenia, and Nuno Valério. História Econômica De Portugal: Uma Perspectiva Global. Lisbon: Edit. Presença, 1994. Murteira, Mário. "The Present Economic Situation: Its Origins and Prospects." In L. S. Graham and H. M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal, 331-42. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979. OCED. Economic Survey: Portugal: 1988. Paris: OCED, 1988 [see also this series since 1978].

   ■ Pasquier, Albert. L'Economie du Portugal: Données et Problémes de Son Expansion. Paris: Librarie Generale de Droit, 1961. Pereira da Moura, Francisco. Para onde vai e economia portuguesa? Lisbon, 1973.

   ■ Pintado, V. Xavier. Structure and Growth of the Portuguese Economy. Geneva: EFTA, 1964.

   ■ Pitta e Cunha, Paulo. "Portugal and the European Economic Community." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 321-38. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.

   ■. "The Portuguese Economic System and Accession to the European Community." In E. Sousa Ferreira and W. C. Opello, Jr., eds., Conflict and Change in Portugal, 1974-1984, 281-300. Lisbon, 1985. Porto, Manuel. "Portugal: Twenty Years of Change." In Alan Williams, ed., Southern Europe Transformed, 84-112. London: Harper & Row, 1984. Quarterly Economic Review. London: The Economist Intelligence Unit, 1974-present.

   ■ Salgado de Matos, Luís. Investimentos Estrangeiros em Portugal. Lisbon, 1973 and later eds.

   ■ Schmitt, Hans O. Economic Stabilisation and Growth in Portugal. Washington, D.C.: International Monetary Fund, 1981.

   ■ Smith, Diana. Portugal and the Challenge of 1992. New York: Camões Center, RIIC, Columbia University, 1989.

   ■ Tillotson, John. The Portuguese Bank Note Case [ 1920s]: Legal, Economic and Financial Approaches to the Measure of Damages in Contract. Manchester, U.K.: Faculty of Law, University of Manchester, 1992.

   ■ Tovias, Alfred. Foreign Economic Relations of the Economic Community: The Impact of Spain and Portugal. Boulder, Colo.: Rienner, 1990.

   ■ Valério, Nuno. A moeda em Portugal, 1913-1947. Lisbon: Sá da Costa, 1984.

   ■. As Finanças Públicas Portuguesas Entre As Duas Guerras Mundiais. Lisbon: Cosmos, 1994.

   ■ World Bank. Portugal: Current and Prospective Economic Trends. Washington, D.C.: World Bank, 1978 and to the present.

   ■ PHOTOGRAPHY ON PORTUGAL

   ■ Alves, Afonso Manuel, Antônio Sacchetti, and Moura Machado. Lisboa. Lisbon, 1991.

   ■ Antunes, José. Lisboa do nosso olhar; A look on Lisbon. Lisbon: Câmara Municipal de Lisboa, 1991. Beaton, Cecil. Near East. London: Batsford, 1943.

   ■. Lisboa 1942: Cecil Beaton, Lisbon 1942. Lisbon: British Historical Society of Portugal/Fundação Calouste Gulbenkian, 1995.

   ■ Bottineau, Yves. Portugal. London: Thames & Hudson, 1957.

   ■ Câmara Municipal de Lisboa. 7 Olhares ( Seven Viewpoints). Lisbon: Câmara Municipal de Lisboa, 1998.

   ■ Capital, A. Lisboa: Imagens d'A Capital. Lisbon: Edit. Notícias, 1984.

   ■ Dias, Marina Tavares. Photographias de Lisboa, 1900 ( Photographs of Lisbon, 1900). Lisbon: Quimera, 1991.

   ■. Os melhores postais antigos de Lisboa ( The best old postcards of Lisbon). Lisbon: Químera, 1995.

   ■ Finlayson, Graham, and Frank Tuohy. Portugal. London: Thames & Hudson, 1970.

   ■ Glassner, Helga. Portugal. Berlin-Zurich: Atlantis-Verlag, 1942. Hopkinson, Amanda, ed. Reflections by Ten Portuguese photographers. Bark-way, U.K.: Frontline/Portugal 600, 1996.

   ■ Lima, Luís Leiria, and Isabel Salema. Lisboa de Pedra e Bronze. Lisbon, 1990.

   ■ Martins, Miguel Gomes. Lisboa ribeirinha ( Riverside Lisbon). Lisbon: Arquivo Municipal, Câmara Municipal de Lisboa, Livros Horizonte, 1994. Vieira, Alice. Esta Lisboa ( This Lisbon). Lisbon: Caminho, 1994. Wohl, Hellmut, and Alice Wohl. Portugal. London: Frederick Muller, 1983.

   ■ EQUESTRIANISM

   ■ Andrade, Manoel Carlos de, Luz da Liberal e Nobre Arte da Cavallaria. Lisbon, 1790.

   ■ Graciosa, Filipe. Escola Portuguesa de Arte Equestre. Lisbon, 2004.

   ■ Horsetalk Magazine. Published in New Zealand.

   ■ Oliveira, Nuno. Reflections on the Equestrian Art. London, 2000.

   ■ Russell, Eleanor, ed. The Truth in the Teaching of Nuno Oliveira. Stanhope,

   ■ Queensland, Australia, 2003. Vilaca, Luis V., and Pedro Yglesias d'Oliveira, eds. LUSITANO. Coudelarias De Portugal. O Cavalo ancestral do Sudoeste da Europa. Lisbon: ICONOM, 2005.

   ■ Websites of interest: www.equestrian.pt portugalweb.com

Historical dictionary of Portugal > CULTURE, LITERATURE, AND LANGUAGE
13 ὄμνυμι

ὄμνῡμι, Pi.P.4.166, etc. ; imper.

A ὄμνῠθι Il.23.585
, ὄμνῡ S.Tr. 1185
, E.Med. 746, cf. Orac. ap. Hdt.6.86. γ ; [ per.] 3sg. ὀμνύτω IG12.134.5
; [ per.] 3pl. ὀμνύντων. Foed. ap. Th.5.47, IG12.87.24: [tense] impf. ὤμνυν Ar.Av. 520
, Ec. 823, D.17.10, etc.: also (from [tense] pres. [full] ὀμνύω) [ per.] 3sg. imper. ὀμνῠέτω Il. 19.175
; part. ὀμνύουσα Hyp.Ath.2
: [tense] impf. ὤμνῠον Il.14.278
, Foed. ap.Th.5.19,24, IG22.236.14, etc. (for [tense] pres. ind. the Trag. and Ar. use only ὄμνυμι, Hdt. and [dialect] Att. Prose writers also ὀμνύω, which also occurs in Com., Pherecr.143.9, Amphis 42, Diph.101, Antiph.241.1, Alex.160 ; in Hdt.1.153 ὀμνύντες is restored for the dub. form ὀμοῦντες): [tense] fut. ὀμοῦμαι, εῖ, εῖται, Il.1.233,9.274, Hes.Op. 194, Ar.Nu. 246, Lys. 193, X.HG1.3.11, etc. ; [dialect] Dor. [ per.] 1pl. ὀμιώμεθα Ar.Lys. 183
; later [tense] fut. ὀμόσω AP12.201
(Strat.), Plu.Cic.23, etc.: [tense] aor. ὤμοσα Od. 4.253
, etc. ; [dialect] Ep. ὤμοσσα Il.20.313
; [dialect] Ep. also without augm. ὄμοσα, -οσσα, 19.113,10.328 : [tense] pf. ὀμώμοκα E.Hipp. 612
, Ar.Ra. 1471, etc.: [tense] plpf. ὠμωμόκειν X.HG5.1.35
, D.9.16, 19.318 :—[voice] Med., Paus.10.26.3, [tense] aor. part. ὀμοσάμενος SIG531.28
(Dyme, iii B. C.), IG5(2).357.11 ([place name] Stymphalus), also in compds. ἀντ-, ἀπ-, δι-, ὑπ- :—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut. ὀμοσθήσομαι And.3.34
: [tense] aor. ὠμόσθην X.HG7.4.10
, ([etym.] ὑπ-) Hyp.Fr. 202 ; but ὠμόθην Is.2.40
, ([etym.] ὑπ-) D.48.25 : [tense] pf. [ per.] 3sg. ὀμώμοται A.Ag. 1284
, ὀμώμοσται E.Rh. 816
, Arist.Rh. 1377a11 ; [ per.] 3pl. ὀμώμονται Lexap.And. 1.98 ; part. ὀμωμοσμένος D.7.10
, 22.4, Arist.Rh. 1377b7 ( ὠμοσμένος v. l. in App.Pun.83, etc.):—swear, c. acc. cogn., ὀμνυέτω δέ τοι ὅρκον Il.19.175
, al. ; ὅτις κ' ἐπίορκον ὀμόσσῃ 3.279
; ἑκὼν ἐπίορκον ὀμόσσας Hes.Op. 282
: c. dat. pers., νῦν μοι ὄμοσσον.. ὅρκον Il.19.108
, al. ; πρός τινα Od.14.331
, 19.288 :—[voice] Pass., ὀμώμοται γὰρ ὅοκος ἐκ θεῶν A.Ag. 1284
; ὅρκων ὀμωμος μένων D.7.10
; εἰ ὀμώμοσται οὗτος [ὁ ὅρκος] Arist. Rh. 1377a11
, cf. b7.

II swear to a thing, affirm or confirm by oath,

1 folld. by acc., ταῦτα δ' ἐγὼν ἐθέλω ὀμόσαι Il.19.187
, cf. S.OC 1145, X.Ages.1.11 ; ὄ. τὰς σπονδάς Foed. ap. Th.5.47 ; τὴν εἰρήνην D.18.32
, cf. 9.16 ; θεῶν πίστεις τινί Th.5.30
, etc.

2 folld. by [tense] fut. inf., swear that one will.., Il.21.373, etc., cf. S.Ph. 623, 941 ([tense] pres. inf., D.21.188 codd.): freq. with ἦ μέν, [dialect] Att. ἦ μήν, preceding the inf., καί μοι ὄμοσσον ἦ μέν μοι.. ἀρήξειν Il.1.76
, cf. 10.321, Lys.31.1, X.HG 5.3.26, etc.: also by [tense] aor. inf. and ἄν, Id.An.7.7.40 : by [tense] pres. inf., swear that one does.., S.Ph. 357 : by [tense] pf. inf., swear that one has.., D.21.119 ; ὤμνυς μὴ γεγονέναι Magn.6
: by [tense] aor. inf., swear that one did.., ὀμνύουσι μὴ 'κπιεῖν ἀλλ' ἢ μίαν Pherecr.143.9
, cf. Hdt.2.179 ([tense] aor. inf. is perh. used, without ἄν, in [tense] fut. sense, D.23.170 (s. v. l.)): sts. a clause follows in the ind., ὀμνύω.., ἦ μὴν ἐγὼ ἐθυόμην X.An. 6.1.31
; ὄμνυμί σοι.., οὐκ ἤθελον.. Theoc.Adon.22
.

3 abs., εἶπον ὀμόσας ἄν I would have given my word of honour, Pl.Smp. 215d.

III with acc. of the person or thing sworn by, swear by, νῦν μοι ὄμοσσον ἀάατον Στυγὸς ὕδωρ Il.14.271
; γαιήοχον ἐννοσίγαιον ὄμνυθι 23.585
, cf. 15.40, Hdt.5.7, A.Th. 529, S.Tr. 1185, etc. ; ὀμωμοκὼς τοὺς θεούς D.18.217
; ὄμνυμι θεοὺς καὶ θεάς folld. by inf., X.An.6.6.17, cf. 6.1.31 : rarely c. dat., τῷ γὰρ ὄμνυτ'; ἢ σιδαρέοισι; Ar.Nu. 248 : in Prose also with Preps., ὀ. καθ' ἱερῶν τελείων Lex ap.And.1.97, Th.5.47 ; κατ' ἐξωλείας D.21.119
; κατὰ τῆς Πολιάδος Luc.Symp.32
; εἰς τὸν Οὐιτέλλιον Plu.Oth.18
; ἐπὶ τῶν ἱερῶν Plb.38.20.5
; ἐν Κυρίῳ LXXJd.21.7
; ἐν τῷ ναῷ Ev.Matt.23.16
:—[voice] Pass., ὀμώμοσται Ζεύς Zeus has been sworn by, adjured, E.Rh. 816, cf. Ar.Nu. 1241.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὄμνυμι
14 HALDA

give

* * *

(held; hélt, héldum; haldinn), v.

I. with dat.

1) to hold fast (Gunnarr var kyrr svá at honum hélt einn maðr);

to keep back, restrain (Hrafn fekk eigi haldit henni heima);

2) to withhold (héldu bœndrgjaldinu);

3) to keep, retain (þú skalt jafhan þessu sæti halda);

to preserve (halda virðingu sinni, lífi ok limum);

halda vöku sinni, to keep oneself awake;

4) to hold, keep one’s stock;

also ellipt. (vetr var illr ok héldu menn illa);

5) phrases, halda njósnum, to keep watch, to spy (= halda njósnum til um e-t);

halda (hendi) fyrir auga, to hold (the hand) before the eyes, shade the eyes;

halda hendi yfir e-m, to protect one;

6) to hold, stand, steer, ellipt., þeir héldu aptr (held back again) um haustit;

þeir héldu út eptir fírði, they stood out the firth;

halda heim, to steer homewards;

7) to graze, put in the field (halda fé til haga);

8) impers. to continue, last (hélt því lengi um vetrinn);

II. with acc.

1) to hold in possession, a fief, land, estate (þeir héldu alla hina beztu staði með sjónum);

2) to hold, keep, observe, a feast, holiday (í hvers minning heldr þú þenna. dag?);

3) to keep (halda orð sín, eið, sættir, frið);

to observe (halda guðs lög ok landsins);

4) to uphold, maintain, support (halda vini sína, halda e-n til ríkis);

5) halda sik, to comport oneself (kunna halda sik með hófi);

halda sik ríkmannliga, to fare sumptuously;

halda sik aptr af e-u, to abstain from;

6) to hold, consider, deem (hón hélt engan hans jafningja);

7) to hold, keep up;

halda varnir, to keep up a defence;

halda vörð, to keep watch;

8) to hold, compel, bind (heldr mik þá ekki til útanferðar);

þó heldr þik várkunn til at leita á, thou hast some excuse for trying;

III. with preps.:

halda á e-u, to hold, wield in the hand (halda á sverði);

to hold to a thing, go on with it, be busy about (halda á drykkju, á ferð sinni, á sýslu);

halda e-t af e-m, to hold (land, office) from or of one (þeir er höfðu haldið land af Danakonungi);

halda mikit af e-m, to make much of one;

halda eptir e-m, to pursue one;

halda e-u eptir, to keep back;

halda sik frá e-u, to keep oneself back from, refrain from;

halda e-u fram, to uphold, support;

halda e-u fyrir e-u, to withhold from one;

to protect against (héldu engar grindr fénu fyrir birninum);

halda e-n fyrir e-t, to hold, consider one to be so and so (síðan hélt konungr Erling fyrir tryggvan vin);

halda í e-t, to hold fast, grasp (þú skalt halda í hurðarhringinn);

halda til e-s, to be the cause of, be conducive to;

heldr þar margt til þess, there are many reasons for this;

hélt til þess (conduced to it) góðgirni hans;

halda til e-s, to be bent on, fond of (halda mjök til skarts, til gleði);

halda til jafns við e-n, to bear up against one, to be a match for one;

halda um e-t, to grasp with the hand (= halda hendi um e-t);

halda barni undir skírn, to hold at baptism;

halda e-u upp, to hold aloft, lift (halda upp höndum);

halda upp árum, to hold up the oars, cease pulling;

to uphold, maintain, support (halda upp hofum, kristninni);

to keep going (halda upp bardaga);

to discharge (halda upp kostnaði, bótum);

halda upp bœnum fyrir e-m, to pray for one;

halda e-u við, to maintain a thing;

halda við e-m, to stand against (hvar sem harm kom fram, hélt ekki við honum);

impers. to be on the point of;

hélt þá við atgöngu (acc.), they were near coming to fight;

heldr nú við hót, it is little short of threats;

IV. refl., haldast.

* * *

pret. hélt (= Goth. haihald), 2nd pérs. hélt, mod. hélzt, pl. héldum; pres. held, pl. höldum; pret. subj. héldi; part. haldinn; imperat. hald and haltú: [Ulf. haldan = βόσκειν, ποιμαίνειν, whereas he renders to keep, hold by other words; Hel. haldan = alere, fovere, colere, which thus seems to be the primitive sense of the word, and to be akin to Lat. cŏlo; again, A. S. healdan, Engl. hold, O. H. G. haltan, Germ. halten, Swed. hålla, halda, Dan. holde, are all of them used in a more general sense]:—to hold.

A. WITH DAT. to hold to:

I. to hold fast by; with the notion of restraint or force, tók Gizurr förunaut Ögmundar ok hélt honum, Sturl. i. 150; Gunnarr var kyrr svá at honum hélt einn maðr, Nj. 92; ef maðr heldr manni …, varðar fjörbaugs-garð, Grág. ii. 110; h. e-m undir drep, 17; h. skipum ( to grapple the ships) með stafnljám, Fms. ii. 315: to keep back, Hrafn fékk eigi haldit henni heima þar, Ísl. ii. 249; ok halda þeim veðr í enni sömu höfn, Grág. i. 92; h. (sér) í e-t, to hold oneself fast by, grasp, þú skalt h. í hurðar-hringinn, Dropl. 29; heldr sér í faxit, Sd. 177.

β. so in the phrases, halda barni (manni) undir skírn, vatn, primsignan, biskups hönd, eccl. to hold a bairn ( man) at baptism, prima signatio, confirmation, Grág. i. 29; h. vatni (tárum), to hold one’s tears, 623. 56, Fms. viii. 232, vi. (in a verse); halda munni, to hold one’s tongue, be silent, vii. 227; halda tungu sinni, Þórð.

2. to withhold; þá megu þeir h. tíundum hans í móti, K. Þ. K. 62; h. vætti, Grág. i. 42; h. gögnum, 56; ef goði heldr tylftar-kvið, er hann heldr kviðnum, 58; halda matinum fyrir honum, 47; h. sköttum fyrir e-m, Nj. 8; h. skógar-manni fyrir e-m, Finnb. 334; um þat er hann hefir konunni haldit, Grág. i. 313; héldu bændr gjaldinu, Fms. vii. 302; hélt ek því (i. e. the money) fyrir honum, i. e. paid it not, Ísl. ii. 244.

II. to hold, of a rope or the like; sá maðr hugði h. mundu er festi, … ok h. mundu í slíku veðri, Grág. ii. 361; reip þau tíu er tveggja manna afli haldi hvert, id.; skal hann svá göra at haldi fyrir fyrnsku, 268.

β. to hold, hold out, last; optast halda þar íllviðri litla hríð, Sks. 212; sunnudags-helgi ríss upp á laugardegi, ok heldr ( lasts) til mánadags, N. G. L. i. 138.

III. to keep, retain, Germ. behalten; fá-ein skip héldu seglum sinum, Fms. x. 143; þú skalt jafnan þessu sæti h., Nj. 6; h. bústað sínum, Ld. 26; h. ríki sínu, Al. 58, Fms. i. 13; h. öllum Noregi, viii. 155; h. frelsi ok eignum, vi. 40; h. hlut sínum, to uphold one’s right, Eg. passim; halt sömum vinum sem ek hefi haft, Fas. i. 375; h. hreinleik sínum, Al. 58.

β. to hold, keep safe, preserve; h. hlut sínum, Ld. 54; h. heilsu, Grág. i. 145; h. virðingu sinni, Ld. 16; þá heldr hann kosti sínum, Grág. ii. 209; h. tíma ( honour) sínum, Al. 59; h. lífi ok limum, Eg. 89; h. lífinu, Nj. 111; h. trúnaði sínum, 109; vináttu sinni, Ld. 200; einorð sinni, Fb. ii. 265; h. sér réttum, to keep oneself right, Ld. 158; h. e-m heilum, Odd. 30; h. ríki fyrir e-m, Fms. v. 279; h. manna-forræði fyrir e-m, Hrafn. 19; h. réttu máli fyrir e-m, Fms. vii. 64.

2. to continue to keep, keep all along; h. teknum hætti, Fms. iv. 254; h. vöku, to keep oneself awake, Ld. 152; but h. vöku fyrir e-m, to keep another awake; halda sýslu sinni, Fs. 36; h. högum, to keep grazing, Eb. 104, Ld. 148.

3. to hold, keep one’s stock; ellipt., vetr var íllr ok héldu menn ílla, the winter was cold and it was ill to keep live stock, Sturl. ii. 143, (cp. fjár-höld); hann hélt vel svá at nær lifði hvat-vetna, Hrafn. 22: metaph., ílla hefir þinn faðir þá haldit, Fms. xi. 144; öld hefir ílla haldit, the people have had a sad loss, vi. (in a verse); h. fangi, and also ellipt. halda, of sheep and cattle, opp. to ‘to go back.’

4. phrases, halda njósnum, to keep watch, to spy, Fms. viii. 146, Nj. 113; hann hélt njósnum til Önundar, Landn. 287; hélt konungr njósnum til, ef …, Fms. vii. 128; hann skyldi h. njósnum til ok gera orð konungi, i. 54; h. njósnum til um e-t, iv. 119, Nj. 93; halda njósn (sing.) um skip þat, Eg. 74; þér haldit njósnum nær færi gefr á Arnkatli, Eb. 186; hann lét h. njósnum uppi á landi, Fms. vii. 316; hann hélt fréttum til, ef …, iv. 349.

β. halda (hendi) fyrir auga, to hold ( the hand) before the eyes, shade the eyes, Nj. 132, Fms. v. 196; h. fyrir munn e-m, to hold ( the hand) over one’s mouth; h. hendi yfir e-m, to hold the hand over one, protect one, Nj. 266, Fbr. 22, Korm.; h. hendi um háls e-m, to clasp the hands around one’s neck, Fms. i. 9; h. skildi fyrir e-n, to hold the shield for one as a second in a duel, Ísl. ii. 257, passim; h. e-m til náms, to hold one to the book, make one study, K. Þ. K. 56; h. e-m til virðingar, Ld. 98.

IV. ellipt. (liði, skipi, för, stefnu, etc. understood), to hold, stand in a certain direction, esp. as a naut. term; þeir héldu aptr ( stood back again) um haustið, Eg. 69; treystisk hann eigi á haf at halda, Eb. 6; héldu þeir vestr um haf, id.; stigu þeir á skip sín, ok héldu út ( stood out) eptir firði, Fms. i. 63; þeir héldu þat sama sumar til Íslands, Ld. 6; hann hélt upp eptir hinni eystri kvísl, Fms. vii. 55; h. heim, to hold one’s course, stand homewards, Odd. 30; h. á braut, Grág. i. 92; Hrútr hélt suðr til Eyrar-sunds, Nj. 8; h. eptir e-m, to pursue one, 7; h. undan, to fly, Fms. x. 396, Nj. 98 (on land); kom móti þeim sunnan-veðr með myrkri, ok urðu þeir fyrir at h., to lay one’s course for the wind, A. A. 271; h. útleið, to stand on the outer tack, Eg. 78; h. til, to turn against, attack (on sea), Fms. xi. 72; hélt hann liði sínu suðr á Mæri, i. 62; þeir héldu liði sínu norðr til Þrándheims, id.; Haraldr konungr hélt norðan liði sínu, Eg. 32; héldu þeir skipi því suðr með landi, 69; skipi því lét hann halda vestr til Englands, id.; Unnr hélt skipinu í Orkneyjar, eptir þat hélt Unnr skipi sínu til Færeyja, Ld. 8.

β. to graze, put in the field, of sheep, cattle; þykkir mér þat miklu skipta at þeim sé vel til haga haldit, Eg. 714; hvert Steinarr hafði látið nautum sínum halda, 715; ok bað hann h. nautunum annan veg, 716.

γ. phrases, halda kyrru fyrir, to hold still, remain quiet, Ld. 216, Þórð. 30 new Ed., Nj. 223, 258; Hallr heldr nú til fangs ( went fishing) sem áðr, Ld. 38.

V. with prep.; halda á e-u, to hold, wield in the hand, freq. in mod. usage, h. á bók, penna, fjöðr, hníf, skærum, nál, etc.; hafði hverr þat er hélt á, Nj. 279; h. á sverði, Fb. i. 33; hann tók við öxinni ok hélt (viz. á), ok sá á, Eg. 180: to hold fast, heldr nú maðr á manni, Fas. i. 12; eigi máttu helvítis byrgi h. á honum, 656 C. 6; ef hann heldr á fénu ( withholds it), Grág. i. 427.

β. [Germ. anhalten], to hold to a thing, go on with, be busy about; h. á sýslu, to be busy, Rm. 14; h. á keri, qs. halda á drykkju, to go on drinking, carousing, Hm. 18: h. á hinni sömu bæn, Stj. 417; h. á fyrirsátrum við e-n, Þórð. 51 new Ed.; h. á búnaði sínum, Ld. 164; hélt hann þá á búnaði sínum sem skjótligast, Fms. ix. 215, x. 119, Sturl. ii. 245; þogar á bak Jólum hélt Ólafr konungr á búningi, Fms. v. 41; hann heldr nú á málinu, Nj. 259; nú heldr Þórðr á málinu ok verðr Oddný honum gipt, Bjarn. 11, Konr. (Fr.); h. á tilkalli, Fms. i. 84; h. á þessum sið, xi. 41; h. á för, to go on with one’s journey, Sighvat; gengu síðan brott ok héldu á ferð sinni, and went on their journey, Sturl.;—whence the mod. phrase, halda áfram, to go on, which seems not to occur in old writers.

2. halda e-u fram, to hold up, make much of; bróðir minn mun mér mjök hafa fram haldit fyrir ástar sakir, Nj. 3.

β. to hold on doing, (hence fram-hald, continuation); halda fram upp-teknu efni, Fms. i. 263; slíku hélt hann fram meðan hann lifði, iv. 254; hélt hann (fram) teknum hætti um veizlurnar, id., Grett. 14.

3. halda saman, to hold together, Eluc. 6, Fms. vii. 140, Rb. 340.

4. halda e-u upp, to hold aloft, Yngvarr hélt upp vísu þeirri, Eg. 152; steinninn heldr upp annarr öðrum, Rb. 390; h. upp árum, to hold up the oars, cease pulling, Fas. ii. 517, N. G. L. i. 65.

β. to uphold, maintain, support; halda upp hofi, Landn. 64, Eb. 24; h. upp hofum ok efla blót, Fms. i. 91; h. upp kirkju, K. Þ. K. 52; h. upp Kristninni, Fms. i. 32: to keep going, h. upp bardaga, orrostu, xi. 66, 188, 340.

γ. to discharge; h. upp féráns-dómi, Grág. i. 120; h. upp lögskilum, 145; h. upp svörum, Ó. H. 174; h. upp kostnaði, Eg. 77; h. upp gjaldi, Grág. i. 384; gjöldum, Fms. i. 81; h. upp bót, Grág. ii. 182; bótum, Eb. 100, 162, N. G. L. i. 311; ef hann heldr upp yfirbót ( penance) þeirri, Hom. 70; h. upp bænum fyrir e-m, to pray for one, Fms. xi. 271; hélt hann því vel upp sem vera átti, discharged it well, x. 93.

δ. halda sér vel upp, to hold oneself well up, Sturl.

ε. metaph., skal-at hann lögvillr verða, svá at honum haldi þat uppi (i. e. went unpunished), Grág. i. 316; ok heldr honum þat uppi ( that will save him), ef hann er rétt-hafi at orðinn, ii. 242.

5. halda e-u við, to maintain a thing, Hkr. i. 195.

VI. impers.,

1. to continue, last; hélt því nokkura stund dags, Fms. x. 125: hélt því lengi um vetrinn, Ld. 288; regni hélt haustnótt gegnum, Fms. vi. 83.

2. with prep. við, to be on the brink of; hélt þá við atgöngu, they were within a hair’s breadth of coming to fight, Hkr. i. 143; hélt þá við vandræði, Fms. ix. 434; heldr við bardaga, vi. 8; heldr nú við hót, it is little short of a threat, i. 305; hélt við blót, x. 106; ok hélt við flótta, i. 174; hélt við meiðingar, Nj. 21, Sd. 143; henni hélt við, at hón mundi drepa hana, Nj. 118; þeim hélt við váða sjálfan, Ó. H. 168; konungi hélt við, hvárt hann mundi standask eðr eigi, Mag. 100; honum hélt við kafnan, Bs. i. 18; hélt þó við at þeir mundi berjask, Fs. 53.

B. WITH ACC. to hold:

I. to hold in possession, a fief, land, estate, office, or the like; þeir héldu alla hina beztu staði með sjónum, Fms. xi. 131; þeir er áðr höfðu haldit land af Dana-konungi, i. 232; Eirekr skyldi h. land af Aðalsteini konungi, 23; Vemundr hélt Firða-fylki, Eg. 12; hélt hann þat ríki undir Knút konungi, Ísl. ii. 242; í þeirri borg héldu þeir langfeðgar fimmtán konungdóma, Ver. 37; h. land sem leigu-land, Grág. ii. 278; konungrinn heldr af Guði nafnit, Sks. 599 B; prestar er kirkjur halda, H. E. i. 486; sá prestr er heldr Pétrs-kirkju, N. G. L. i. 312; presta þeirra er kirkju halda, 346; skal sá maðr ráða er kirkju heldr, K. Þ. K. 60; Ólafs kirkju þá er Væringjar halda (the parish church of W.), Hkr. iii. 408.

2. halda ábyrgju, ábyrgð á e-n, to have the responsibility of a thing, Grág. ii. 399, K. Þ. K. 66; h. grip, to be in the possession of, Grág. i. 438, ii. 190; h. skóla, to keep a school, Mar.; h. fylgð, to perform, Fms. ix. 279; eiga vandræði at h., to be in a strait, difficulty, Eb. 108.

II. to hold, keep, observe, a feast, holiday, or the like; halda kirkju-dag, K. Þ. K. 42; í hvers minning heldr þú þenna dag? Nj. 157; h. helgan þvátt-dag hvern, Pr. 437; h. helga daga, Sl.; h. Jóla-dag, Páska, Hvíta-sunnu, Rb. 134; minnstú að h. helgan hvíldar-daginn Drottins Guðs þíns (the Fourth Commandment in the Icel. version); h. heilagt, to keep holiday, Dipl. ii. 14; í dag þá hátíð höldum vér til himna sté vor Herra, Hólabók 54; er Júdar héldu hátíðligt, Stj. 110; (hence forn-haldinn, time-honoured): of the day-marks (vide dagr, p. 95), er þaðan haldinn miðr-morgin, Hrafn. 9.

2. to keep; halda orð sín, to keep one’s word, Fms. x. 95; höldum öll einka-mál vár, vii. 305; h. sættir, Nj. 57; gerðú svá vel, félagi, at þú halt vel sætt þessa, 111, Sturl. iii. 153, Fs. 65, Gullþ. 20; hann kvaðsk vilja hafa svardaga af þeim ok festu, at halda, Nj. 164; h. eið, Sturl. iii. 153; h. frið, to keep peace, Greg. 7; ef þú vilt nokkura hluti eigi h. þá er ek hefi á lagt við þik, Eg. 738: to observe faith, law, rite, etc., halda átrúnað, Fms. i. 34, x. 277; h. Guðs lög ok landsins, vii. 305; h. lands lög, viii. 155; h. ein lög, 625. 52; hafa ok halda þau lög, Fms. i. 34; h. Kristilega trú, K. Á. 74; h. mál (orð) e-s, Greg. 17; h. alla hluti með athugasamlegu minni, Sks. 439.

3. to keep, tend; halda geitr, Hkv. 2. 20 (exactly as in Gothic).

III. to uphold, maintain, support; þykkir mér þér sé nú ísjár-vert, hvárt þú munt fá haldit þik eðr eigi, Nj. 155; munu vér þó ekki einhlitir at h. oss eptir þessi verk, Háv. 50; at hón mætti með valdi h. sik ok menn sína, Fas. i. 375; þat væri nokkurr várkunn, at þú héldir frænda þinn eðr fóstbróður, en þetta er alls engi (at) halda útlaga konungs, Ó. H. 145; enda ætla ek lítinn viljann til at h. vini þína, Fms. vii. 244; því at Eysteinn konungr kenndi Inga konungi, at hann héldi þá menn, 248; ef þú heldr hann ( upholdest him) til þess at ganga á vini mína, Eg. 339; viljum vér allir fylgja þér ok þik til konungs halda, Fms. i. 34; Stephanus skyldi h. hann til laga ok réttinda, Sks. 653; h. e-n til ríkis, Fb. i. 236; vinsæld föður hans hélt hann mest til alþýðu vináttu, Fms. vii. 175; þeir sem upp h. ( sustain) þenna líkama, Anecd. 4.

β. phrases, halda e-m kost, borð, to keep at board, entertain, Fms. ix. 220, x. 105, 146, Nj. 6; or, halda e-n at klæðum ok drykk, Ó. H. 69; h. stríð, bellum gerere (not class.), Fms. x. 51; h. úfrið, Fas. ii. 539.

2. halda sik, to comfort oneself, Sks. 281, Hom. 29; kunna sik með hófi at h., Sturl. iii. 108; h. sik ríkmannliga, to fare sumptuously, Ld. 234; hann hélt betr húskarla sína en aðrir, Fms. vii. 242; h. mjök til skarts, to dress fine, Ld. 196; þar var Hrefna ok hélt allmjök til skarts, id.; hann var hægr hvers-dagliga, ok hélt mjök til gleði, Sturl. iii. 123; hélt hann hér mjök til vinsælda ok virðinga, he enjoyed much popularity and fame, Ld. 298.

β. ellipt. (sik understood), at h. til jafns við e-n, to bear up against one, to be a match for one, Ld. 40; ef þér hefir eigi til þess hug eðr afl at h. til jafns við e-n húskarl Þorsteins, Eg. 714; h. til fullnaðar, to stand on one’s full rights; ef þær taka eigi fullrétti, eðr h. eigi til fullnaðar, Grág. ii. 109; h. fullara, to hold one above other men, Ó. H. (in a verse); lét konungr þá h. mjök til ( make great preparations) at syngja messu hátíðliga, Hkr. i. 287.

3. to hold forth, put forward; at þeim inyiidi þungbýlt vera í nánd honum, ef þeir héldi nokkurn annan fyrir betra mann en hann, Ld. 26; síðan hélt konungr Erling fyrir tryggvan mann, Fms. ix. 399.

β. to hold, deem, be of opinion; the old writers seem not to use the word exactly in this sense, but near to it come such phrases as, hón hélt engan hans jafningja innan hirðar hvárki í orðum né öðrum hlutum, i. e. she held him to be above all men, Ld. 60; halda menn hann fyrir konung, Fb. i. 216; still closer, halda menn at Oddný sé nú betr gipt, Bjarn. 12 (but only preserved in a paper MS.): this sense is very freq. in mod. usage, to hold, mean, eg held það; eg held ekki, I think not; (hence hald, opinion.)

γ. phrases, halda mikit upp á e-n, to hold one in much esteem, love, Stj. 33; halda af e-m, id., Fas. i. 458, ii. 63, 200, iii. 520, esp. freq. in mod. usage, (upp-á-hald, af-hald, esteem.)

4. to hold on, keep up; halda varnir, to keep up a defence, Sks. 583; halda vörð, to keep watch, Eg. 120, Grág. i. 32, 264; halda njósn, Eg. 72, 74, Fms. xi. 46; halda tal af e-m, to speak, communicate with one, ii. 88.

5. to hold, be valid, be in force, a law term; á sú sekt öll at halda, Grág. i. 89; á þat at h. allt er þeir urðu á sáttir, 86; enda á þat at h. með þeim síðan, ii. 336.

IV. to hold, compel, bind (with the notion of obligation or duty); heldr mik þá ekki til utan-ferðar, Nj. 112; þó heldr þik várkunn til at leita á, i. e. thou art excused, thou hast some excuse in trying, 21; var auðsætt hvat til hélt um sættir, Bjarn. 70; þik heldr eigi hér svá mart, at þú megir eigi vel bægja héraðs-vist þinni, Eb. 252; þar mælir þú þar, er þik heldr várkunn til at mæla, Nj. 227; ek mun vera vinr hans, ok alla þá, er at mínum orðum láta, halda til vináttu við hann, i. e. I will be his friend, and all those who lend ear to my words I will hold to friendship with him, Eg. 18.

2. halda sik frá e-u, to keep oneself from, to refrain from a thing, Sks. 276 B; h. sik frá munaðlífi, Post. 656 A. ii. 16, Hom. 53, 135; h. sik aptr af e-u, to abstain from, Hkr. i. 512.

V. absol. to be the cause of, be conducive to a thing; heldr þar margt til þess, there are many reasons for this, Nj. 192; vildim vér vita hvat til heldr, Fms. vii. 106; en hann vissi eigi hvat til hafði haldit, er hann kom eigi, xi. 11; margir hlutir héldu til þess, Eg. 38; þat hélt til þess, at …, Al. 94; hélt til þess ( conduced to it) góðgirnd hans, stórmennska ok vitsmunir, Fs. 29; hefir þat mjök til haldit, er ek hefi svá lengi dvalizt, at ek ætlaða, Ld. 32; hann lét bæði til h. vingan ok mágsemd, Fs. 24; heldr þat mest til at þá var komit útfall sjávar, Ld. 56; hélt þat mest til þess, at hann gafsk bezt í öllum mannraunum, 60; þat eitt hélt til, at þeir fóru eigi málum á hendr Þórði, at þeir höfðu eigi styrk til, 138.

VI. to hold, comprise; sólar-öld heldr tuttugu ok átta ár, Rb. 510; h. skor (of weight), Grág. i. 500.

☞ In some instances the use of dat. and acc. wavers, e. g. halda húsum, to keep up the houses, Grág. ii. 278, 335; h. hliði, to keep the gate in repair, 265; but halda hlið (acc.), 332: to keep, observe, h. lögum, griðum, boðorðum, Glúm. 333, Grág. i. 357, ii. 166, 623. 28; hélt hann þessu sumu, Fms. x. 416 (Ágrip); halda ílla orðum, vii. (in a verse); þeir er því þingi áttu at h., Glúm. 386; h. sáttum, St. 17; h. eiðum, Bkv. 18; Gizuri þótti biskup h. ríkt ( protect strongly) brennu-mönnum, Sturl. i. 201 C; Guð er sínum skepnum heldr (keeps, protects) ok geymir, Mar.; þá hélt engi kirkju mönnum, … kept no man safe, Fms. ix. 508; h. njósn (acc.) um e-t, Eg. 74; h. til njósn, 72; njósnir, Fms. xi. 46. In most of these instances the acc. is the correct case, and the dat. is due either to careless transcribers or incorrect speaking: in some instances an enclitic um has been taken for a dative inflexion, thus e. g. sáttum haldi in Stor. l. c. is to be restored to sátt um haldi; eiðum haldit in Bkv. l. c. to eið (for eiða) um haldit; in others the prep. um has caused the confusion, as ‘halda njósn um at’ has been changed into halda njósnum at. But in the main the distinction between the use of dat. and acc. is fixed even at the present time: the acc. seems to represent the more primitive usage of this verb, the dat. the secondary.

C. REFLEX.:

I. to hold oneself, to stay; héldusk þeir þá ekki fyrir norðan Stað, Fms. i. 63; mátti hann eigi þar haldask, Landn. 246; h. á baki, to keep oneself on horseback, keep one’s seat, Grág. ii. 95; munu þeir skamma stund hér við haldask, Nj. 247: to be kept, remain, þá skal hann h. með Helju, Edda 39: to resist, megu vér ekki við h. fyrir ofreflis-mönnum þessum, Nj. 254; hélzk þá ekki við honum, Eg. 289; mann er svá hefir haldisk við höfuð-syndum, Hom. 157.

β. to hold out, last, continue; ok hélzk ferillinn, Eg. 579; hélzk undr þetta allt til dags, Nj. 272 (twice); hélzk konungdómr í kyni hans, Rb. 394; lengi síðan hélzk bruna-öld með Svíum, Yngl. S.; lengi hélzk þat í ætt þeirri, at …, Eg. 770; hélzk vinátta með þeim, Nj. 66; þat hefir enn haldizk í ætt hans, Fms. iv. 8; ok hefir þat haldizk ( it has continued to be so) síðan er ek hefi hann séð, Ld. 174; honum haldisk (imperat.) sigr ok langt líf, Ver. 57; betr þætti mér, at hún héldisk þér, that it (the luck) would hold out for thee, Fb. ii. 74; ef hann helzk í útrú sinni, if he perseveres in his untruth, 623. 26.

γ. to be kept safe and sound; menn allir héldusk ( all bands were saved) ok svá fé, Ld. 8, Fs. 143; þar héldusk menn allir ok mestr hluti fjár, Eg. 405; hafði fé vel haldizk, has been well kept, done well, Ld. 34.

δ. to be valid, stand; eigu þau handsöl hennar at haldask, Grág. i. 334; engi má haldask dómr hans, Edda 15; skyldu þau (the truce) haldask um þingit, Nj. 348.

2. impers., mér helzk, e-m helzk vel, ílla, á e-u, to have a good hold, have luck with a thing; mér helzk lítt á sauða-mönnum, Grett. 110 A.

3. recipr., haldask á, to hold or pull one against another, wrestle, (hence á-höld); var sagt Magnúsi, at þeir héldisk á úti, that they were fighting outside, Sturl. ii. 44.

II. part. pass. haldinn, [Dan. holden], so ‘holden,’ in such and such a state; vel haldinn, in good condition, faring well, well to do, Eg. 20, 234; hugðusk þar ok haldnir ( safe) mundu vera, Ver. 34; þungliga h., very sick, Eg. 565, Hkr. ii. 199; vel haldinn, doing well; tak heldr annat fé, svá mikit, at þú þykisk vel haldinn af, i. e. fully satisfied, having got full redress, Boll. 350; Sveinn sagði, at hann vill hafa tvá hluti fjárins, Hrani sagðisk ekki af því haldinn ( satisfied) vera, Fms. iv. 31: in the phrase, heilu ok höldnu, safe and sound, Bs. i. 191, Fms. xi. 376, Hkr. i. 319; með höldnu hljóði, preserving the sound, Skálda 175.

2. ok mun þykkja sér misboðit ef þú ert haldinn (kept, protected), Finnb. 344.

β. kept, observed, Fms. xi. 99.

γ. held in custody, in prison, Bs. i. 419, Sturl. i. 151.

III. gerund., haldandi, holding good, valid; sá dómr er eigi haldandi, is not valid, K. Á. 304; af öllu afli er friðr haldandi, Hom. 5.

2. part. act., með upp haldandi höndum, with uplifted hands, Bs. i. 684.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > HALDA
15 HÁLFR

a.

1) half; hálfr mánaðr, half a month, fortnight; til hálfs by a half; hálfr annar, þriði, fjórði, &c., one, two, three and a half; hálft annat hundrað, one hundred and a half; hálfr þriði tøgr manna, twenty-five men;

2) neut. ‘hálfu’, by half, with a comparative in an intensive sense, much, far; hálfu verri, far worse; hálfu meira, far more; hálfu siðr, far less.

* * *

adj., hálf (hlf), hálft, freq. spelt halbr, halb er öld hvar, Hm. 52; [Goth. halbs; A. S. healf; Engl. half; Hel. halba; Germ. halb; Dan. halv; Swed. half]:—half; hálfr mánuðr, half a month, a fortnight, Nj. 4; þar átti hann kyn hálft, Eg. 288; hálf stika, half a yard, Grág. i. 498; hálf Jól, the half of Yule, Fs. 151, passim: adverb. phrases, til hálfs, by a half, Eg. 258, 304; aukinn hálfu, increased by half, doubled, Grág. i. 157, Gþl. 24.

2. with the notion of brief, scant, little; sjá hálf hýnótt, that little night, Skm. 42; hálf stund, a little while; eg skal ekki vera hálfa stund að því, i. e. I shall have done presently, in a moment; cp. hálb er öld hvar, only half, Hm. 52; með hálfum hleif, with half a loaf, a little loaf of bread, 51: an Icel. says to his guest, má eg bjóða þér í hálfum bolla, í hálfu staupi, hálfan munnbita, and the like.

II. in counting Icel. say, hálfr annarr, half another, i. e. one and a half; h. þriði, half a third, i. e. two and a half; h. fjórði, three and a half; h. fimti, four and a half, etc.; thus, hálfan annan dag, one day and a half; hálft annað ár, hálfan annan mánuð, h. aðra nótt; hálf önnur stika, a yard and a half, Grág. i. 498; hálfa fimtu mörk, four marks and a half, 391; hálft annat hundrað, one hundred and a half, Sturl. i. 186; hálfr þriði tögr manna, two decades and a half, i. e. twenty-five, men, Ísl. ii. 387; hálfan fimta tög skipa, Hkr. iii. 374: similar are the compd adjectives hálf-þrítugr, aged twenty-five; hálf-fertugr, aged thirty-five; hálf-fimtugr, hálf-sextugr, -sjötugr, -áttræðr, -níræðr, -tíræðr, i. e. aged forty-five, fifty-five, sixty-five, seventy-five, eighty-five, ninety-five, and lastly, hálf-tólfræðr, one hundred and fifteen, Eg. 84, Fms. i. 148, Greg. 60, Stj. 639, Bs. i. 54, 101, Hkr. (pref.), Mar. 32, Íb. 18, Grett. 162, Fs. 160: also of measure, hálf-fertugr föðmum, Landn. (App.) 324, Fms. vii. 217; hálf-þrítugt tungl, a moon twenty-five days’ old, Rb. 26: contracted, hálf-fjórðu mörk, three marks and a half, Am. 63; hálf-fimtu mörk, four marks and a half, Jm. 36: as to this use, cp. the Germ. andert-halb, dritt-halb, viert-halb, etc., Gr. τρίτον ἡμιτάλαντον ( two talents and a half), Lat. sestertius.

III. neut. hálfu with a comparative, in an intensive sense, far; hálfu verri, worse by half, far worse; hálfu meira, far more, Fms. vi. 201; hálfu heilli! Fb. i. 180; hálfu síðr, far less, Þórð. 41 new Ed., Fb. ii. 357; fremr hálfu, much farther ago, Hðm. 2; h. lengra, Bs. ii. 48; h. betri, better by half; h. hógligra, far snugger, Am. 66; hálfu sæmri, Fb. ii. 334.

β. with neg. suff.; hálft-ki, not half; at hálft-ki má óstyrkð ór bera, Greg. 54.

IV. a pr. name, rare, whence Hálfs-rekkr, m. pl. the champions of king Half, Fas.: Hálf-dan, m. Half-Dane, a pr. name, cp. Healf-Danes in Beowulf, Fms.

B. The COMPDS are very numerous in adjectives, nouns, and participles, but fewer in verbs; we can record only a few, e. g. hálf-afglapi, a, m. half an idiot, Band. 4 new Ed. hálf-aukinn, part. increased by half, H. E. ii. 222. hálf-áttræðr, see above. hálf-bergrisi, a, m. half a giant, Eg. 23. hálf-berserkr, m. half a berserker, Sd. 129. hálf-björt, n. adj. half bright, dawning. hálf-blandinn, part. half blended, Stj. 85. hálf-blindr, adj. half blind. hálf-bolli, a, m. half a bowl (a measure), N. G. L. ii. 166. hálf-breiðr, adj. of half breadth, Jm. 2. hálf-brosandi, part. half smiling. hálf-bróðir, m. a half brother (on one side). hálf-brunninn, part. half burnt. hálf-bræðrungr, m. a half cousin, K. Á. 140. hálf-búinn, part. half done. hálf-dauðr, adj. half dead, Sturl. ii. 54, Magn. 530, Hkr. iii. 366. hálf-daufr, adj. half deaf. hálf-deigr, adj. damp. hálf-dimt, n. adj. half dark, in twilight. hálf-drættingr, m. a fisher-boy, who gets half the fish he catches, but not a full ‘hlutr.’ hálf-ermaðr, part. half sleeved, Sturl. iii. 306. hálf-etinn, part. half eaten, Al. 95. hálf-eyrir, m. half an ounce, Fms. x. 211. hálf-fallinn, part. half fallen, K. Á. 96; h. út sjór, of the tide. hálf-farinn, part. half gone. hálf-fertrugr, hálf-fimti, hálf-fimtugr, hálf-fjórði, see above (II). hálf-fífl, n. and hálf-fífla, u, f. half an idiot, Fms. vi. 218, Bs. i. 286. hálf-fjórðungr, m. half a fourth part, Bs. ii. 170. hálf-frosinn, part. half frozen. hálf-fúinn, part. half rotten. hálf-genginn, part. halving. hálf-gildi, n. half the value, Gþl. 392. hálf-gildr, adj. of half the value, N. G. L. hálf-gjalda, galt, to pay half, N. G. L. i. 174. hálf-grátandi, part. half weeping. hálf-gróinn, part. half healed. hálf-görr, part. half done, only half done, left half undone, Fms. ii. 62; litlu betr en hálfgört, Greg. 24. hálfgörðar-bóndi, a, m. a man who has to furnish half a levy, D. N. hálf-hélufall, n. a slight fall of rime, Gísl. 154. hálf-hlaðinn, part. half laden, Jb. 411. hálf-hneppt, n. adj. a kind of metre, Edda 139. hálf-hræddr, adj. half afraid. hálf-kirkja, u, f. a ‘half-kirk,’ = mod. annexía, an annex-church, district church, or chapel of ease, Vm. 126, H. E. i. 430, ii. 138, Am. 28, Pm. 41, Dipl. v. 19; distinction is made between al-kirkja, hálf-kirkja, and bæn-hús, a chapel. hálf-kjökrandi, part. half choked with tears. hálf-klæddr, part. half dressed. hálf-konungr, m. a half king, inferior king, Fms. i. 83. hálf-kveðinn, part. half uttered; skilja hálfkveðit orð, or hálfkveðna vísu = Lat. verbum sat, MS. 4. 7. hálf-launat, n. part. rewarded by half, Fms. ii. 62, Grág. i. 304. hálf-leypa, u, f. a half laupr (a measure), B. K. passim, hálf-leystr, part. half loosened, Greg. 55. hálf-lifandi, part. half alive, half dead, Mar. hálf-litr, adj. of a cloak, of two colours, one colour on each side, Fms. ii. 70, Fas. iii. 561, Sturl. ii. 32, iii. 112, Fær. 227, Bs. i. 434. hálf-ljóst, n. adj.; pá er hálfljóst var, in twilight, Sturl. iii. 193. hálf-lokaðr, part. half locked. hálf-mætti, n. ‘half might,’ opp. to omnipotence, Skálda 161. hálf-mörk, f. half a mark, Vm. 80, 126. hálf-nauðigr, adj. half reluctant, Fms. xi. 392. hálf-neitt, n. adj. ‘half-naught,’ trifling, Fas. i. 60. hálf-níð, n. half a lampoon, Fms. iii. 21. hálf-níræðr, see above (II). hálf-nýtr, adj. of half use, Rb. 86. hálf-opinn, adj. half open. hálf-prestr, m. a ‘half-priest,’ a chaplain to a hálfkirkja, Sturl. ii. 178. hálf-pund, n. half a pound, Gþl. 343. hálf-raddarstafr, m. a semivowel, Skálda 176, 178. hálf-reingr, a, m. a half scamp, Bs. i. 517. hálf-rétti, n. a law term (cp. fullrétti, p. 177), a slight, a personal affront or injury of the second degree, liable only to a half fine; e. g. hálfréttis-orð is a calumny in words that may be taken in both senses, good and bad; whereas fullréttis-orð is downright, unmistakable abuse, Grág. ii. 144; hence the phrases, mæla, göra hálfrétti við e-n, i. 156, 157, ii. 153. hálfréttis-eiðr, m. an oath of compurgation to be taken in a case of h., N. G. L. i. 352. hálfréttis-maðr, m. a man that has suffered hálfrétti, Gþl. 105, 200. hálfréttis-mál, n. a suit of a case of h., N. G. L. i. 314. hálf-róinn, part. having rowed half the way, half-way, Fms. viii. 312. hálf-róteldi, n., prob. corrupt, Fms. xi. 129. hálf-rými, n. a naut. term, half a cabin, one side of a ship’s cabin, Fms. viii. 138, ix. 33, x. 157, Hkr. i. 302. hálfrýmis-félagar, m. pl. messmates in the same h., Edda 108. hálfrýmis-kista, u, f. a chest or bench belonging to a h., Fms. viii. 85. hálf-rökit (-rökvit, -rökvat), n. adj. half twilight, in the evening, Grett. 137, 140 A; hálf-rökvat is the mod. form, which occurs in Grett. 79 new Ed., Jb. 176, Al. 54; vide rökvit. hálf-sagðr, part. half told; in the saying, jafnan er hálfsögð saga ef einn segir = audiatur et altera pars, Grett. 121. hálf-sextugr, see hálfr II. hálf-sjauræðr, adj. = hálfsjötugr, Stj. 48. hálf-sjötugr, see hálfr II. hálf-skiptr, part. = hálflitr, Fms. ii. 170, Sturl. iii. 112. hálf-sleginn, part. half mown, of a field. hálf-slitinn, part. half worn. hálf-sofandi, part. half asleep. hálf-sótt, n. part. half passed; hálfsótt haf, a half-crossed sea. hálf-systkin, n. pl. half brother and sister, cp. hálfbróðir. hálf-systur, f. pl. half sisters. hálf-tíræðr, see hálfr II. hálf-troll, n. half a giant, Eg. 1, Nj. 164 (a nickname). hálf-tunna, u, f. half a tun, Vm. 44. hálf-unninn, part. half done, Fas. ii. 339. hálf-vaxinn, part. half grown. hálf-vegis, adv. by halves. hálf-virði, n. half worth, Jb. 403, Glúm. 347, Sturl. ii. 132. hálf-visinn, part. and hálf-vista, adj. half withered, and medic. palsied on one side. hálf-viti, a, m. a half-witted man. hálf-votr, adj. half wet. hálf-vætt, f. half weight (a measure), Dipl. iv. 8, Fas. iii. 383. hálf-þrítugr, see hálfr II; spelt half-ðritogr, Js. 79. hálf-þurr, adj. half dry. hálf-þverrandi, part. half waning, Js. 732 (of the moon). hálf-þynna, u, f. a kind of small axe, Gþl. 103, 104, Lv. 35. hálf-ærinn, part. half sufficient, Fms. viii. 440. hálf-ærr, adj. half mad, Sks. 778.

II. in mod. usage hálf is freq. used = rather, e. g. hálf-kalt, adj. rather cold: hálf-feginn, adj., eg er hálffeginn, I am rather glad: e-m er hálf-íllt, hálf-bumult, hálf-óglatt, n. adj. one feels rather ill: hálf-hungraðr, hálf-svangr, hálf-soltinn, hálf-þyrstr, adj. rather hungry, rather thirsty, etc., and in endless compds.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > HÁLFR
16 STANDA

stand

* * *

(stend; stóð, stóðum; staðinn), v.

1) to stand, opp. to sitja or liggja (hann stóð við vegginn);

koma standandi niðr, to come down on one’s feet;

skal mik niðr setja standanda, in a standing position;

standa fast, to stand fast;

standa höllum fœti, to stand slanting;

2) to stand, stick (G. skaut svá fast niðr skildinum, at hann stóð fastr í jörðunni);

sveininum stóð fiskbein í hálsi, the bone stuck in his throat;

3) to stand, remain;

borð stóðu, stood, were not removed;

4) to stand, be situated (bœr einn stóð skamt frá þeim);

5) to stand still, rest, pause (stóð þá kyrrt nökkura hríð);

verðr hér fyrst at standa sagan, the story must stop here for the present;

6) to last (hafði lengi staðit bardaginn);

7) to befit, become (konungr kvað þat eigi standa, at menn lægi svá);

ekki stendr þér slíkt, it does not befit thee;

8) to stand in a certain way, project, trend (fjögur horn ok stóðu fagrt, hit þriðja stóð í lopt upp);

stendr inn straumrinn, the tide (current) stands in;

blóðbogi stóð ór hvárutveggja eyranu, a stream of blood gushed out of both his ears;

kallar hann betr standa veðrit at fara landhallt, that the wind stands better for making land;

stóð vindr af landi, the wind blew from the land;

standa grunnt, to be shallow (vinátta okkur stendr grunnt);

9) to touch;

standa grunn, to stick on the ground (örkin stóð grunn);

10) to catch, overtake (hann drap menn Eiríks konungs, hvar sem hann stóð þá);

standa e-n at e-u, to catch one doing a thing (ef maðr verðr at því staðinn, at hann meiðir smala manna);

11) to stand, endure, bear (standa e-t or e-u);

12) to press, urge, trouble (elli stóð Hárek);

hvat stendr þik, what ails thee?

13) to weigh so much (gullhringr, er stóð mörk);

14) to stand by one, side with one, with dat.;

mikils er vert, hversu fast N. stendr þér um alla ráðagerð, how close N. stands by thee in all counsel;

15) with preps.:

standa af e-u, to proceed from, be caused by (opt stendr illt af kvenna hjali);

vil ok ek eigi, at af mér standi brigð okkarrar vináttu, nor do I wish to be the cause of a breach in our friendship;

standa af e-u við e-n, to give up, cede to one;

impers., segir hann honum, hvernig af stóð um ferð hans, how the matter stood as to his journey;

standa at e-m, to attack (var við sjálft, at þeir mundu standa at prestinum);

to stand by one, on one’s side (ek veit eigi víst, hvaðan G. inn ríki stendr at);

standa á e-u, to stand on, insist on (statt ei á því, er þér er bannat);

impers., stendr á illu einu með þeim, they are on very bad terms;

standa á e-m, to hang over one (sú skóggangssök, er á þér stendr); to refer to (þat heilræði stóð upp á þenna sama sendiboða);

standa eptir, to remain, be left;

standa fyrir e-u, to stand in the way of (þeir kváðu geip hennar ekki skyldu standa fyrir þingreið þeira);

standa e-m fyrir þrifum, to stand in the way of one’s thriving;

to stand before one, protect one (vér skulum Egil af lífi taka, en hlífa engum, er fyrir honum vill standa);

standa hjá e-m, to stand by one, assist one;

standa í e-u, to be engaged in, busied with (standa í bardögum, einvígum, málum, kvánbœnum);

impers., stendr í deilu með þeim, there is a quarrel between them;

standa með blóma, to be in a flourishing condition;

standa móti (á móti, í móti) e-u, to stand against;

standa saman, to stand together, be gathered, amassed (þar stóð auðr mikill saman);

standa til e-s, to tend towards;

standa til umbótar, to stand for mending, need it;

sem bœn yður stendr til, as your prayer tends to;

eptir þeim efnum, sem honum þœtti til standa, according to the merits of the case;

eptir því sem lög stóðu til, as the law was (taka þeir allir við bótum, sem lög stóðu til);

impers., stendr til e-s, it is to be expected, feared (til langra meina mun standa, ef);

standa e-m til e-s, to assist, help one (B. segir, hversu Ó. hafði honum til staðit);

standa undan, to be lacking (mikit stendr undan við hann í vinfenginu);

standa vel undir e-t, to support well, back it up well (munu margir vel undir þat standa);

standa undir e-m, to be in one’s possession, keeping (féit stendr undir honum);

standa upp, to stand up from a seat (þá stóð S. upp ok mælti hátt); to rise from bed (standa upp ok klæðast); to be left standing (fimm einir menn stóðu upp á skipinu);

standa uppi, to be left standing (K. hinn auðgi flýði ok allt lið hans, þat er uppi stóð; hús þau, er uppi stóðu);

to be laid up ashore, of a ship (stigu þeir á skip þat, er þar hafði uppi staðit um vetrinn);

of a corpse, to lie on the bier (lík Kjartans stóð uppi í viku í Hjarðarholti);

of a bow, to be kept bent (boginn má eigi einart uppi standa);

standa við e-u, to withstand (víkingar svá harðfengir, at ekki stendr við);

impers., stendr við e-t, it is on the verge of (þeir áttu svá harða leika, at við meiðingar stóð);

standa yfir e-u, to be present at (heldr vildi hann þenna kjósa en standa yfir drápi Þorgils frænda síns); to extend (þar er þeira ríki stendr yfir);

standa yfir, to stand over, last (hversu lengi skal fjárbón sjá yfir standa?);

í þessum griðum ok svardögum, sem yfir standa, which now stand, are in force;

16) refl., standast.

* * *

pres. stend, stendr, stöndum, standit, standa; pret. stóð, stótt, stóttú (mod. stóðst, stóðstú), stóð, pl. stóðum; subj. stæði; imperat. statt, stattú (cp. stand-þú); part. staðinn; pret. infin. stóðu = stelisse, Fms. vi. (in a verse); a medial form, pres. stöndumk (= stat mihi), Fm. 1. Kormak; pret. stóðumk (= stabant mihi), Hm. 106: with neg. suff. stóð-k-at, Fas. iii. 22 (in a verse). [Common to all Indo-Germ. languages.]

A. To stand; þó at hann gangi eðr standi áðr, Grág. ii. 95; hann stóð við vegginn, … stóð á víxl fótunum, Sturl. ii. 158; standa höllum fæti, Nj. 97; koma standandi niðr, to come down standing (after a leap), 85, Grág. ii. 110; skal mik niðr setja standanda, in a standing position, Ld. 54; munkr er eigi mátti standa á bænum ok reikaði, Greg. 62; standa á götu e-s, Nj. 109; standa fast, to stand fast, 92; standa frammi, to stand, be on one’s feet, Fms. vii. 85; s. fyrir dómstóli keisarans, 656 C. 19; s. fyrir manni, to stand before a man, so as to screen him, Grág. ii. 12. 115, Eg. 357: s. hjá, to stand by, metaph. to assist, Fas. ii. 501: standa nær e-m, to stand near one, metaph. to back, Nj. 76; nær standa vinir Gunnars, 88.

2. to stay; Egill stóð meðan ok beið þeirra, Eg. 483; statt ( stop) ok trú mér, 623. 17.

3. to stand, stick; stóðu spjót þeirra ofan frá þeim, Nj. 253; at hann standi fastr í fönninni, 84; skildinum, svá at fastr stóð í vellinum, 262; öxin stóð á hamri, i. e. went through to the back, and stuck there, 165; sveininum stóð fiskbein í hálsi, the bone stuck in his throat, Blas. 40; ef nökkurum stendr bein í hálsi, 655 ix. B. 2: absol., það stendr í e-m, it sticks in one’s throat.

4. to stand, remain; borð stóðu, stood, were not removed, Fms. vii. 144; skála þann sem enn stendr í dag, Þórð. 58 new Ed.; svá lengi sem heimrinn stendr, Rb. 64; skyli bú yðr standa ú-rænt, Nj. 208.

5. to stand, be seated, placed;í þeim dal stendr kirkja, Greg. 57; kirkja sú er stendr í Reykja-holti, D. I. i. 476; bær einn stóð skamt frá þeim, Eg. 230; ór þeim sal er und þolli stendr … ask veit ek standa, … stóð fyrir norðan salr, sal veit hón standa, Vsp.; Lissibón stendr á Spáni, Fms. vii. 80; Narbón stendr vid Jórsala-haf, x. 85; öll þau fylki er í hans biskups-ríki stóðu, vii. 300; Illugastaði ok Hrafnagil er standa í Laxárdal, Dipl. v. 17; standa á bók, reikningi, skrá …, [Germ. es steht geschrieben], ii. 12, 13, Bs. i, passim. II. with prepp.; standa á e-u, to stand on, insist on, persevere in; statt eigi á því er þér er bannat, Mirm.; s. á illu ráði, id.; s. á hendi e-m, Nj. 88, Grág. i. 121 (see hönd); mest mundi á fyrir-mönnum standa, Nj. 106: to stand upon, s. á lögum, Js. 41; s. á rétti sínum, … standa á dómi e-s, to stand by, abide by:—s. gegn, á móti, to withstand, Hom. 7, Fms. ii. 36, 225, x. 401:—s. af e-u, to give up, Dan. afstaae, Fb. i. 523:—s. at, to help (at-stoð); hvaðan Guðmundr stendr at, … hvaðan sem hann stendr at, Nj. 214; þeim er þaðan standa at, 193:—s. eptir, to remain, N. G. L. i. 335, Fms. ii. 231, vi. 248, Grág. ii. 301, Eg. 202, Rb. 116, Hom. 12, Stj. 422 (eptir-stöðvar = arrears):—s. fyrir, to stand before, to stand in the way of a thing, Ísl. ii. 262, Fms. vi. 61, Grág. i. 140; s. e-m fyrir þrifum, Fms. ii. 154; s. e-m fyrir gleði, vii. 162; s. e-m fyrir svefni, Gísl. (in a verse); s. e-m fyrir ljósi, to stand in the way of one’s light; láta e-t s. fyrir kaupi, Nj. 17; láta s. fyrir kviðburði, 87; ef afl hefir staðit fyrir kvið þeirra, Grág. i. 53; þat á eigi fyrir málum at s., 106; eiðr Vermundar stóð fyrir, Fbr. 22; járni á hann fyrir at standa, N. G. L. i. 342; s. fyrir með eineiði, 346:—s. í e-u, to be deeply engaged in; s. í bardögum, einvígum, málum, stórmælum, kvánbænum, etc., Eg. 486, Ld. 262, Nj. 53, 224, 227, Ísl. ii. 216; standa í ábirgð, Dipl. v. 24; s. í þjónustu, Mar.:—standa saman, to stand together, put together in one place; þar stóðu saman fé mikil, Eg. 318; stóð úmegð mörg saman, Ísl. ii. 198; þar stóð auðr mikill saman, Ld. 124: to consist, Hom. 2:—s. undir e-u, to be subject to; s. undir prófi, Dipl. i. 6; féit stendr undir honum, is in his keeping, Grág. i. 395: standa undir með e-m, to support, Sturl. i. 20; s. vel undir e-t, to support well, back, Nj. 215, Fms. vii. 125; jarl stóð vel undir hans mál, viii. 282; munu margir vel undir þat s., to back it up well, Ó. H. 52:—standa upp, to stand up from a seat, Nj. 3, Fms. i. 33, x. 401: to rise from bed, Nj. 69, Eg. 121; s. upp fyrir dag, 577; s. upp ok klæðask, Ld. 44; hann liggr sjúkr … þar er standi aldri upp, Nj. 80 (standa upp ór sótt); s. upp með e-m, to rise, join one, Sturl. ii. 203:—s. uppi, of a ship, to be laid up ashore (during the winter), Nj. 259, Ísl. ii. 273: of a corpse, to lie on the bier, Fms. ii. 257, Ám. 101: of a bow, to be kept bent, 623. 19: standa upp, to be standing, be left standing on one’s feet; færri standa upp enn fallnir eru, Fms. xi. 110; stóðu þá enn upp mjök margir á skeiðinni, many still stood up (not dead or wounded), 142; flýði allt lið er upp stóð, Eg. 33; fimm einir menn stóðu upp á skipinu, Orkn. 356 old Ed., (new Ed. 414 l. c. leaves out ‘upp’); meðan ek má upp standa ok vápnum valda, Ld. 170: standa uppi, id., Fms, viii. 139, Hkr. i. 210:—standa við e-u, to withstand, Grág. i. 1, 336 (við-staða); svá harðfengir at ekki stendr við, Nj. 271; svá mikit troll at ekki stendr við honum, Bárð. 177; þeir skutu svá hart, at ekki stóðu við hlífarnar, Fms. i. 173: to stand against, stop, hann stóð við litla stund (við-staða, a pause, halt):—standa yfir, svá lengi sem þingboð stæði yfir, lasted, Fms. ii. 216: hversu lengi skal fjárbón sjá yfir standa? Nj. 141; í þessum griðum ok svardögum sem yfir standa, which now stand, are in force, Fms. xi. 365; þar er þeirra ríki stendr yfir, extends, Eg. 344.

B. Metaph. usage, to stand still, rest, pause; verðr hér fyrst at standa sagan, the story must stop here, Fms. vi. 56: nú skal hér standa um athæfi Varbelgja, ix. 473; skulu sóknir standa, meðan leiðangr er úti, Gþl. 486; útlegðar-sakir skulu eigi standa um várþing, Grág. i. 103; skyldi málit standa um nóttina til rannsaks, Fms. ix. 414; skal þá standa leigan í hross-verðinu, Grág. i. 434; stóð þá kyrrt nokkura hrið, Fms. xi. 397; at svá búit stæði, Nj. 139; eigi mátti svá búit s., Fms. ii. 9; standa með blóma; stendr búit með miklum blóma, Band. 2.

2. to last; Guðs ríki stendr ei ok ei, Hom. 160; ok standa eina þrjá vetr, Sks. 323; þá sjau daga sem veizlan stóð, Stj.; en er þrjár nætr hafði veizlan staðit, Landn. 117; hafði lengi staðit bardaginn, Odd. 18; er deildir várar s. lengr, Eg. 738; stóð mikil deila milli þeirra langa hríð, Fms. x. 169; stóð þetta heimboð nokkut skeið, Nj. 81; meðan erfit stóð, Eb. ch. 54; stóð hennar hagr með þeim hætti, Bs. ii. 166:—to be valid, skal þetta testamentum s. ok haldask, Dipl. iv. 8; ok standa enn þau lög, Ver. 52; um tólf mánaðr stendr þeirra mál, Grág. i. 143; skal þat allt s. ok satt vera, 655 xxvii. 28; hans tala skal s. á fé sjálfs hans, K. Þ. K. 146; má þat eigi s. né fyrir satt halda, Stj. 31; hann mun láta s. boð þessi (stand by it), Nj. 77; þrjú kúgildi þau er standa með jörðunni, Dipl. iii. 8; ekki á Bjarkeyjar-réttr á því máli at standa, this case does not fall under the town jurisdiction, Fms. vii. 130; stendr þat mál ( it extends) um þrjá fjórðunga, Grág. i. 464.

3. to befit, become; konungr kvað þat ekki standa, at menn lægi svá, Fms. x. 157; berr þat eigi né stendr þvílíkum, Stj. 132; hví stalt þú guðum mínum, ekki stendr þér slíkt, 181.

4. phrases, nú stóð í stilli, see stilli; var þat boð með svá miklu kappi, at stóð í stönginni (cp. Dan. saa at det stod efter), Fms. xi. 424; standa í háska, Mar.

5. sem inn átti dagr Jóla standi á Dróttins degi, Rb. 128; en á þeim degi stóð Ólafs messu-aptann, Hom. 111.

II. of direction, to stand in a certain way, project, trend; fjögur horn ok stóðu fagrt, hit þriðja stóð í lopt upp, hit fjórða stóð ór enni, ok niðr fyrir augu honum, Ld. 120; geitar-horn stendr ór höfði henni, Fms. vii. 156; vápn stóðu á Birkibeini svá þykt at varla mátti hann falla, 325; gákk af bryggjunni eðr spjotið stendr á þér, 144; ella hefði spjótið staðit gegnum hann, Nj. 246; blóðbogi stóð ór hváru-tveggja eyranu, 210, Fms. vi. 419; boginn stóð inn um ræfrit, Eg. 239; kallar hann betr standa veðrit, at fara landhallt, the wind stands better for making land, Fms. x. 347; sunnan-vindr hvass ok stóð at virkinu, xi. 34; stóð gnæðingr með fjöllum, Bárð. 171; af íllsku ok úþef þeim er af stóð, Fms. iii. 128; stóð vindr af landi, Vigl. 79 new Ed.; stendr inn straumrinn, Bs. ii. 143: stóð stropinn um kyrtilinn, Clar.; standa grunnt, to be shallow; vinátta okkur stendr grunnt, Eg. 520; stóð hón alla vega jörð, touched the earth. Art.; stafir stórir ok stóðu grunn í ánni, Fb. ii. 19; örkin stóð grunn, stuck to the ground, Stj. 50, Gþl. 460, Grág. ii. 358; þrjár rætr standa; á þrjá vega undir aski Yggdrasils, Gm.; augu yður standa lengra fram, Sturl. iii. 129; finnr konungr at mikit stendr undan við hann í vinfenginu al hendi Sigvalda, Fms. xi. 106; heilræðit stóð á þenna sama sendiboða, referred to him, 433; hvaðan Guðmundr inn ríki stendr, on which side he stands, with whom he sides, Nj. 214.

2. to proceed from, be caused by; eigi standa þin orð af litlu fári, Fas. i. 195; stóð lítil stjórn af honum, Fms. xi. 223; þótti af honum minni ógn standa, Eg. 268; e-m stendr mein, úhapp, útili, íllt, gagn, hjálp … af e-m, 175; guðin rökðu til spádóma at af systkinum þessum mundi þeim mikil mein ok úhapp standa, Edda 18, Nj. 65, Barl. 39; eigi mun svá mikit íllt af þér standa, Nj. 368; opt stendr íllt af kvenna hjali. Gísl. 15: yðr munn vandræði af standa, Nj. 175.

3. standa til, to tend towards; nú stóð áðr til svá mikils váða, at …, Fms. vii. 144; þá stendr þó til meira geigs, xi. 275; standa til umbótar, to stand for mending, need it, Fb. ii. 234; flest frumsmíð stendr til bóta, needs mending; standa til mikils kostnaðar, D. N. ii. 18; sem bæn yður stendr til, tends to, Nj. 192; hvárt honum standi hugr til nökkurrar konu, Ísl. ii. 285; engi ván eða verðleikr stendr til at fáisk, Al. 91; sem bæn yður stendr til, Nj. 192; eptir þeim efnum sem honum þætti til standa, according to the merits of the case, Fms. vii. 60; eptir þvi sem lög stódu til, as the law stood, Nj. 146, Ld. 28; frekari álög en forn lög stæði til, Fms. xi. 224; latari enn líkendi stæði til, 256; fremr enn ritningar stóðu til, tended towards, i. e. warranted, Mar.; líta á mál hans eptir þeim efnum sem honum þætti til standa, as the merits were, Fms. vii. 60; eptir því sem lög stóðu til, Nj. 146, Ld. 28; standa til váða ok auðnar, Fms. x. 271.

III. to catch, overtake; hann drap menn Eiríks konungs hvar sem hann stóð þá, Hkr. i. 91; var hverr drepinn þar er staðinn varð, 107; lét hann ræna hvar sem hann stóð þá, Fms. vii. 181; hörmuðu bæði at þau máttu eigi fá staðit hann, Hom. 120; ef hann er með vátta inni staðinn, Grág. ii. 18; ef maðr tekr fé manns ok vinnr þjófskap at, enda standi hinn hann (acc.) at þvi er fé þat á, svá at handnumit verðr, ok …, 136; hinum er þýfð var í höndum staðin, id.; nú stendr maðr fé sitt þjófstolit í hendi öðrum manni, Gþl. 537.

2. to stand, i. e. to endure or bear; hverr sem fyrir-smár dómarann, ok vill eigi dóm standa, N. G. L. i. 452: to discharge, skal dæma landit þeim manni er varðveizlu stendr, to the man who stands as guardian, Grág. ii. 251; sá er vitna þarf skal standa þeim kost allan, Jb. 358.

3. to press, urge, trouble; ef ofviðri stendr mann, N. G. L. i. 349; Alfhildi stóð sótt, Hkr. ii. 199, Stj. 425; mun þik nú hræðsla standa, Fas. iii. 429; elli stóð Hárek, Ísl. ii. 482; hver fjölskylda sem þik stendr, Fms, xi. 429; segja máttu hvat þik stendr, what urges thee. Mar.; ok vænti af þér mests trausts, því heldr sem mik stendr meirr, Fms. iii. 70; standa mik svá stórar þröngslir, at …, Stj. 495; hvat stendr þik, what ails thee? Grett. 75 new Ed.; hvat stendr þik, Bergr, sagði biskup, Bs. i. 807; því at eins at þeim (þá?) standi ofviðri, N. G. L. i. 371.

4. to be of weight, value; skal hann eigi standa tómr meirr enn átta merkr, Gþl. 524; gullhringr stendr sex aura, mörk, Fms. ii. 246, xi. 204; strútrinn stóð tíu merkr, 77; vættir þær er hver þeirra standi hálfa níundu mörk, Gþl. 523.

C. Reflex. to stand right, be able to stand; steðjaði hann upp yfir törguna ok stóðsk þó, Nj. 144; þar mundir þú eigi hafa staðizk fylgjur þeirra Þorvarðs, Lv. 104; hann druknaði, því hann stóðsk ekki fjölkyngi Ragnars, Bárð. 181.

2. standask e-t, standask áhlaup, Sks. 411; höggum standask fáir, Sks. 411 B; fáir stóðusk honum, þótt fræknir væri, Grett. 87 A; gull stendsk elding, Grág. i. 501; þetta éi var með svá miklum býsnum, at ekki máttu sumir menn betr enn fá staðizk, Fms, xi. 136; var við sjálft at ek mætta eigi standask, x. 331; stóðsk hann eigi ok dó, 623. 33; hví lét Guð þeira freista, þar er hann sá at þau máttu eigi standask, Eluc. 28; at þér standisk jafnvel ef þér sjáit frændr yðra svívirða, Fms. v. 270.

3. to stand, bear, tolerate; hann skekr at honum sverðit, þetta fá þeir eigi staðizk ok hlaupa, Ísl. ii. 364; Kári stóðsk þetta eigi, Nj. 270; Björn stóðsk eigi ámælis-orð Sigmundar, Valla L. 218; standask frýju-orð, Fær. 196.

4. standask við e-m, to stand, be able to withstand; Heiðrekr vá með Tyrfingi ok stóðsk ekki við honum, Fas. i. 526; engi hlutr var svá sterkr at standask mætti fyrir honum. Edda.

5. to be valid; skulut mál hans standask um þá sök, Grág. i. 64; á þeirra dómr at standask, 80; eigu jammikit þeira orð at standask, sem annarra lögréttu-manna, 10; ef þú kemr til konungsins, ok megi þín orð nokkut standask, Fms. xi. 193; hennar orð stóðusk svá mikit, at …, Fas. i. 208; um þat vilda ek at mín at kvæði stæðisk, at …, Eb. 98.

6. of direction, to proceed from; standask af e-m, af henni mun standask allt it ílla, Nj. 49; svá stenzk af um ferð mína, the matter stands so as to my journey; Ólafr sagði jarli hversu af stóðsk um ferð hans, Ld. 112 (hversu af stóð, 340); ekki sagði Kjartan föður sínum hversu af stóðsk um ferð þessa, 208; Gautr segir honum geiniliga allt hversu af stóðsk inn ferðir hans, Fms. iii. 57; svá stendsk af um ferðir mínar, at ek má hér ekki dvelja lengr, vi. 350; eigi veit ek hvernig af stenzk (stennz) um för þína, hvárt þú ferr nökkut í konungs leyfi, Ó. H. 143.

7. a middle form; yfir ok undir stóðumk jötna vegir, the ‘giant-ways’ ( rocks) stood above and below, Hm.; stöndumk hjörr til hjarta, the sword touches me to the heart, Fm. 1.

II. recipr. to stand opposite one another in the same line: to meet, of ends; þat stóðsk á, nesit þvert ok fylking þeirra, Ísl. ii. 326; stóðsk þat á, at Jólin þraut ok lokit var sögunni. Fms. vi. 356; vígin Áskels ok Steingríms skyldi á standask, Rd. 281; stóðsk þat á endum ok ostkistan, Nj. 76; stóðsk þat á endum ok þat er Gunnarr; átti at gjalda, 111; létu þeir þat á endum standask, 120; standask á mót; sandmelr sá er á stendzk ok Seftjörn, Gísl. 23; bær hans stóðsk á ok konungs atsetr, Fas. ii. 63: bíða þess at á stæðisk misganga straumanna ok austan-veðr, Orkn. 266: stendzk heldr í móti með þeim hjónum, they were rather at sixes and sevens, did not agree well, Bjarn. 21: hendingar standask sem næst, to stand as close to one another as possible, Edda (Ht.); tungl þau er næst standask, nearest to one another, Rb. 34, 1812. 56.

III. staðinn = staddr, steadfast, placed, abiding; hvar sem maðr er staðinn, N. G. L. i. 163; vildi hann nú til staðins vita ( knew for certain) hver svör jarl vildi gefa, Vígl. 18.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > STANDA
17 दा

dā
1) cl. 3. dádāti (pl. - dati RV. etc.;

Ā. datte Pañcat. I, 4, 19/20 12, 7 Subh. ;
1. sg. dadmi MBh. XII Hariv. R. if. ;
Impv. dádātu pl. - dahu;
2. sg. daddhí RV. I f. IV, VI, VIII, X ;
dehí Pāṇ. 6-4, 119 ;
RV. III f. VIII, X AV. V, XVIII f. etc.
2. pl. dádāta RV. VII, 57, 6,
- tana X, 36, 10, dattá 51, 8 VS. AV. etc.. ;
2. du. - ttám RV. I, 34, 6 AV. etc.. ;
Pot. dadyā́ AV. etc.;
impf. ádadāt;
pl. ádadur RV. VI, X AV. V, 18, 1 ;
2. du. ádattam RV. etc.;
2. pl. - ttanai, 139, 7, ádadāta X, 64, 12 ;
Subj. dádat II, V, VII f. X, - das VII f. ;
- dan AV. VI, 24, 1 ;
p. m. nom. sg. dádat pl. - tas RV. etc.;
p. Ā. dádāna, V, 33, 9 ;
- ná, I. 148, 2; V, 2, 3 ;
sg. dadati, II, 35, 10 MBh. III, 13422 ;
pl. - danti XII f. ;
Impv. - da, IX MārkP. ;
- data Siṇhâs. ;
Pot. - det Parāṡ. VI, 19 ;
impf. ádadat AV. XII, 4, 23 MBh. R. ;
A1. sg. dádate RV. I, 24, 7 AV. X, 8, 36 ;
pl. - dante, 35 VS. VIII, 31 ;
Impv. sg. - datām RV. III, 53, 17 ;
- dasva MBh. Hariv. etc.;
impf. pl. ádadanta RV. VII, 33, II AV. XIV ;
p. dádamāna RV. I, 41, 9; IV, 26, 6 ;
aor. ádāt Pāṇ. 2-4, 77, dat, ádur, dúr etc.;
Subj. 2. du. dāsathas RV. VIII, 40, 1 <cf. Naigh. II, 30 >;
Pot. 1. pl. deshma VS. II, 32 ;
pf. dadaú, - dúr, - dáthur, - datur, - dó RV. etc.;
Pass. - dé, IV, 34 and 37 AV. X, 2, 16 ;
dadade, - dāte, - dire Pāṇ. 6-4, 126 Kāṡ. ;
p. gen. dadúshas RV. I, VIII,
- shām VI ; nom. -dvā́n X, 132, 3 ;
- dāvan AV. V, 11, 1 ;
acc. -divā́ṉsam, IX, 5, 10 <cf. Vop. XXVI, 133 >;
fut. p. dāsyát AV. VI, 71, 3 ;
Ā. - syate, - syante, 1. sg. - sye MBh. Hariv. R. MārkP. ;
Prec. deyāt Pāṇ. 6-4, 67 ;
inf. dāváne RV. ;
dā́tos VII, 4, 6 ;
- tave, VII-IX AV. III, 20, 5 ;
dā́tavaí Pāṇ. VI, 1, 200 Siddh. RV. IV, 21, 9 ;
- tum, V, AV. etc..:
ind. p. dattvā́ya Pāṇ. 7-1, 47 Kāṡ. RV. X, 85, 33 ;
- ttva AV. etc.;
-dā́ya Pāṇ. 6-4, 69 RV. etc..:
Pass. dīyate Pāṇ. 6-4, 62 ;
p. - yámāna AV. IX ;
aor. adāyi Pāṇ. 7-3, 33 Kāṡ. ;
Prec. dāsīshṭa, dāyis- VI, 4, 62) cl. 1. dā́ti RV. iv-VII ;
Impv. - tu, 15, 11 ;
cf. Pāṇ. 6-1, 8 Vārtt. 3 Pat.; II, 4, 76 Kāṡ.)
to give, bestow, grant, yield, impart, present, offer to (dat., in later language alsoﾠ gen. orﾠ loc.) RV. etc.;
to give (a daughter, kanyām) in marriage Mn. V, IX Yājñ. MBh. etc.. ;
to hand over Mn. VIII, 186 and 234 ;
(with haste) Kathās. ;
to give back, 222 f. MBh. III Pañcat. VP. Kathās. LXXIV ;
to pay ( daṇḍam, « a fine» Mn. VIII f. ;
ṛiṇam, « a debt», VIII Yājñ. II, 45);
to give up, cede ( āsanam, « one's seat») Mn. IV, 54 ;
( panthānam orﾠ mārgam, « to give up the road, allow to pass») VIII, 275 and R. V, 94, 8 ;
to sell (with instr. of the price), Nal. XIV, 21 VarBṛS. XLII, 11 ;
to sacrifice ( ātmānam, « one's self» Kathās. XXII, 227 ;
āt- khedāya, « to give one's self up to grief», V, 57);
to offer (an oblation etc.) Mn. Yājñ. R. etc.;
to communicate, teach, utter (blessings, āṡishas Ṡak. MārkP.),
give (answer, prati-vacas, - canam, praty-uttaram Nal. Ṡak. etc.),
speak ( satyaṉvacas, the truth, Yājñ. II, 200 ;
vacam, to address a speech to <dat.> Ṡak. VI, 5);
to permit, allow (with inf.) MBh. I Ṡak. VI, 22 ;
to permit sexual intercourse ṠBr. XIV, 9, 4, 7 ;
to place, put, apply (in med.) Mn. Yājñ. MBh. etc.. ;
to add Pañcat. II, 6, 5 Sūryas. VarBṛS. Laghuj. ;
with varam, « to grant a boon» ṠBr. XI KātyṠr. MBh. etc.. ;
ṡoham, to cause grief, XIII R. II ;
avakāṡam, to give room orﾠ space, allow to enter Yājñ. II, 276 Mṛicch. Ragh. etc.. ;
prāṇān orﾠ jīvitam, to spare any one's life MBh. Kathās. XVIII, 275 ;
talam orﾠ - lān, to slap with the palms of the hands MBh. III, IX Hariv. 15741 ;
- la-prahāram, to strike with the palm Pañcat. IV,. 2, 0/1 ;
tālam, to beat time with the hands MBh. I Bhaṭṭ. ;
saṉjñām, to make a sign Mṛicch. ;
saṉketakam, to make an appointment Pañcat. II, 4, 3/4 ;
samayam, to propose an agreement Kathās. XVIII, 139 ;
upamām, to compare with <gen.> Cāṇ. ;
paṭaham, to proclaim with the drum Kathās. LXXIII, 357 ;
ṡabdam, to make a noise, call out Vet. IV, 2/3 ;
ṡāpam, to utter a curse MBh. R. etc.;
gāīh. id. Bhartṛ. ;
anuyātram, to accompany Kathās. XVIII, 197 ;
āliṅganane, parirambhaṇam, to embrace, 209 Gīt. III, 8 ;
jhampam, to jump Hit. ;
ṡrāddham, to perform a Srāddha MBh. XIV R. II ;
vratakam, to accomplish a vow Hariv. ;
yuddham, niy-, saṉgrāmam, to give battle, fight with MBh. Hariv. R. ;
ājñām ādeṡam, to give an order, command, BrahmaP. Vet. ;
saṉdeṡam, to give information Kathās. XVII, 161 ;
prayogam, to give a dramatic representation Mālav. I, 12/13 ;
vṛitim, to fence in Mn. VIII, 240 Kull. ;
darṡanam, to show one's self Prab. III, ;
0/1 dṛishṭim dṛiṡam akshi caksus, to fix the eyes on (loc.)
Ṡak. I, 6 Kathās. Dhūrtas. Ṡṛiṇgārat. Sāh. ;
karṇam, to give ear, listen Ṡak. Kathās. ;
manas, to direct the mind to (loc.) MBh. XII, 2526 ;
kars kapolam, to rest the cheek on the hand Kāraṇḍ. XVIII, 73 ;
nigaḍāni to put on orﾠ apply fetters Mṛicch. VII, 6/7 pāvakam, to set on fire;
agnīn to consume by fire Mn. V, 168 ;
ṡāram, to move a chess-man Daṡ. VII, 137 ;
argalam, to draw a bolt, bar Kathās. Rājat. VI, 96 ;
jānu, to kneel upon (gen.) MBh. III f. ;
padam, to tread upon <loc.> Bhartṛ. Hit. II, 12, 25 SṠaṃkar. I, 38 ;
to direct the steps Amar. 74 ;
visham, to poison Pañcar. I, 14, 80 (with acc.);
garam id. VP. IV, 3, 16 (with gen.);
Ā. to carry, hold, keep, preserve RV. AV. VS. ;
to show SV. I, 2, 1, 4, 7 (aor. adadishṭa;
aded- fr. diṡ RV.):
Caus. dāpayati ( Pāṇ. VII, 3, 36 aor. adīdapat, 4, 1 and 58 Kāṡ.)
to cause to give orﾠ be given, cause to bestow orﾠ present orﾠ give up, oblige to pay, make restore
VS. IX, 24 AV. III, 20, 8 Mn. etc.. ;
to demand from (abl.) Mn. VIII, 47 ;
to cause to utter orﾠ speak Hariv. 15782 Yājñ. II, 6/7 ;
ghoshaṇām, to cause to be made known Kathās. LXIV, 86 ;
to cause to place orﾠ advance, XII, 160 ;
to cause to perform, V, 112 to cause to be put on (loc.) MBh. I, 5724:
Desid. dítsati ( Pāṇ. 7-4, 54 and 58 p. dídāsat RV. X, 151, 2 ;
dítsat, II, VII-IX AV. V, 7, 6 MBh. ;
Pot. - tseyam RV. VIII MBh. ;
pf. 2. sg. didāsitha AitBr. VIII, 21 ṠāṇkhṠr. XVI, 16 ;
cf. ṠBr. XIII, 7, 1, 15)
to wish to give, be ready to bestow RV. etc.;
to wish to give in marriage MBh. etc.:
Intens. dedīyate Pāṇ. 6-4, 66 Kāṡ. ;
+ cf. δίδωμι;
Lat. do; etc.
dā́
2) m. a giver RV. V, 41, 1 (dat. dé); VI, 16, 26 (nom. dā́s);

ifc., giving, granting, seeﾠ an-aṡva-, a-bhiksha-, aṡva-, ātma-, etc. -dā́;
án-āṡīr-
3) For do, to cut q.v.
4) cl. 4. P. dyáti (cf. ā- 4. dā), to bind, only in dīshva VS. XXXVIII, 3 ;
5) For de q.v.
6) f. (de), protection, defence L. ;
7) For dai q.v.
8) f. ( das) cleansing, purifying L.

Sanskrit-English dictionary > दा
18 FARA

go

* * *

(fer; fór, fórum; farinn), v.

1) to move, pass along, go;

gekk hann hvargi sem hann fór, he walked wherever he went;

fara heim (heiman), to go home (from home);

fara á fund e-s to visit one;

fjöld ek fór, I travelled much;

hann sagði, hversu orð fóru með þeim, what words passed between them;

absol., to go begging (ómagar, er þar eigu at fara í því þingi);

2) with ‘ferð, leið’ or the like added in acc., gen., or dat.;

fara leiðar sinnar, to go one’s way, proceed on one’s journey (= fara ferðar sinnar or ferða sinna, fara ferð sina, fara för sina, förum sínum);

fara þessa ferð, to make this journey;

fara fullum dagleiðum, to travel a full days journeys;

fara stefnuför, to go a-summoning;

fara bónorðsför, to go a-wooing;

fara sigrför, to go on the path of victory, to triumph;

fara góða för, to make a lucky journey;

fig., fara ósigr, to be defeated;

fara mikinn skaða, to suffer great damage;

fara hneykju, skömm, to incur disgrace;

fara erendleysu, to fail in one’s errand;

with the road in acc. (fara fjöll ok dala);

3) fara búðum, bygðum, vistum, to move, change one’s abode;

fara eldi ok arni, to move one’s hearth and fire;

4) fara einn saman, to go alone;

fara eigi ein saman, to go with child (= fara með barni);

5) with infin.;

fara sofa, to go to sleep (allir menn vóru sofa farnir);

fara vega, to go to fight;

fara leita, to go seeking (var leita farit);

6) with an a., etc.;

fara villr, to go astray;

fara haltr, to walk lame;

fara vanstiltr, to go out of one’s mind;

fara duldr e-s, to be unaware of;

fara andvígr e-m, to give battle;

fara leyniliga (leynt), to be kept secret;

eigi má þetta svá fara, this cannot go on in that way;

fjarri ferr þat, far from it, by no means;

fór þat fjarri, at ek vilda, I was far from desiring it;

7) to turn out, end;

fór þat sem líkligt var, it turned out as was likely (viz. ended ill);

svá fór, at, the end was, that;

ef svá ferr sem ek get til, if it turns out as I guess;

á sómu leið fór um aðra sendimenn, it went the same way with the other messengers;

8) to fare well, ill;

biðja e-n vel fara, to bid one farewell;

9) to suit, fit, esp. of clothes, hair (ekki þykkir mér kyrtill þinn fara betr en stakkr minn; hárit fór vel);

impers., fór illa á hestinum, it sat ill on the horse;

10) impers., e-m ferr vel, illa, one behaves or acts well, ill;

honum hafa öll málin verst farit, he has behaved worst in the whole matter;

e-m ferr vinveittliga, one behaves in a friendly way;

11) fara e-t höndum, to touch with the hands, esp. of a healing touch, = fara höndum um e-t (bið hann fara höndum meinit);

fara land herskildi, brandi, to visit a land with ‘warshield’, with fire, to ravage or devastate it (gekk síðan á land upp með liði sínu ok fór alit herskildi);

12) to overtake (Án hrísmagi var þeirra skjótastr ok gat farit sveininn);

tunglit ferr sólina, the moon overtakes the sun;

áðr hana Fenrir fari, before F. overtakes her;

13) to ill-treat, treat cruelly;

menn sá ek þá, er mjök höfðu hungri farit hörund, that had chastened their flesh with much fasting;

14) to put an end to, destroy;

fara sér (sjálfr), to kill oneself;

fara lífi (fjörvi) e-s, to deprive one of life;

þú hefir sigr vegit ok Fáfni (dat.) um farit, killed F.;

15) to forfeit (fara löndum ok lausafé);

16) refl., farast;

17) with preps. and advs.:

fara af klæðum, to take off one’s clothes;

fara at e-m, to make an attack upon, to assault (eigi mundi í annat sinn vænna at fara at jarlinum);

fara at e-u, to mind, pay heed to;

ekki fer ek at, þótt þú hafir svelt þik til fjár (it does not matter to me, I do not care, though);

to deal with a thing, proceed in a certain way;

svá skal at sókn fara, thus is the pleading to be proceeded with;

fara at lögum, úlögum, to proceed lawfully, unlawfully;

fara mjúkliga at, to proceed gently;

hér skulu við fara at með ráðum, act with, deliberation;

impers. with dat., to do, behave;

illa hefir mér at farit, I have done my business badly; to go in pusuit (search) of (víkingar nökkurir þeir sem fóru at féföngum);

fara at fuglaveiðum, to go a-fowling;

fara at fé, to tend sheep;

fara á e-n, to come upon one;

sigu saman augu, þá er dauðinn fór á, when death seized him;

fara á hæl or hæli, to step back, retreat;

fara eptir e-m, to follow one;

fara eptir e-u, to go for, go to fetch (Snorri goði fór eptir líkinu; fara eptir vatni); to accommodate oneself to, conform to (engi vildi eptir öðrum fara);

þau orð er eptir fara, the following words;

fara fram, to go on, take place;

ef eigi ferr gjald fram, if no payment takes place;

veizlan ferr vel fram, the feast went on well;

spyrr, hvat þar fœri fram, he asked, what was going on there;

fara fram ráðum e-s, to follow one’s advice;

allt mun þat sínu fram fara, it will take its own course;

kváðu þat engu gegna ok fóru sínu fram, took their own way;

segir honum, hversu þeir fóru fram, how they acted;

fara e-t fram, to do., perform a thing;

spyrr hann, hvat nú sé fram faranda, what is to be done;

fara fyrir e-t, to pass for, be taken for (fari sá fyrir níðing, er);

fara hjá sér, to be beside oneself;

fara í e-t, to go into (fara í tunnu);

fara í sæng, rekkju, to go to bed;

fara í sess sinn, sæti sitt, to take one’s seat;

fara í klæði, to put on clothes, dress;

fara í vápn, brynju, to put on armour;

fara í lag, to go right or straight again (þá fóru brýnn hans í lag);

fara í vöxt, to increase;

fara í þurð, to wane;

fara í hernað, víking, to go a-freebooting;

nú ferr í úvænt efni, now matters look hopeless;

to happen, occur (alit þat, er í hafði farit um nóttina);

fara með e-t, to wield handle, manage;

fór Hroptr með Gungni, H. wielded (the spear) Gungnir;

fara með goðorð, to hold a goðorð;

fara með sök, to manage a lawsuit;

to practice, deal in;

fara með rán, to deal in robbery;

fara með spott ok háð, to go scoffing and mocking;

fara með galdra ok fjölkyngi, to practice sorcery;

to deal with, treat, handle (þú munt bezt ok hógligast með hann fara);

fara af hljóði með e-t, to keep matters secret;

fara með e-m, to go with one, follow one (ek skal með yðr fara með allan minn styrk);

fara með e-u, to do (so and so) with a thing, to deal with, manage;

hvernig þeir skyldu fara með vápnum sínum, what they were to do with their weapons;

sá maðr, er með arfinum ferr, who manages the inheritance;

fara með málum sínum, to manage one’s case;

fara vel með sínum háttum, to bear oneself well;

undarliga fara munkar þessir með sér, these monks behave strangely;

fara með barni, to go with child;

impers., ferr með þeim heldr fáliga, they are on indifferent terms;

fara ór landi, to leave the country;

fara ór klæðum, fötum, to take off one’s clothes, undress;

fara saman, to go together; to shake, shudder;

fór en forna fold öll saman, shivered all through;

to concur, agree (hversu má þat saman f);

fara til svefns, to go to sleep (= fara at sofa);

fara um e-t, to travel over (fara um fjall);

fara höndum um e-n, to stroke or touch one with the hands (hann fór höndum um þá, er sjúkir vóru);

fara mörgum orðum um e-t, to dilate upon a subject;

fara myrkt um e-t, to keep a matter dark;

fara undan, to excuse oneself (from doing a thing), to decline, refuse (hvat berr til, at þú ferr undan at gera mér veizluna);

borð fara upp, the tables are removed;

fara út, to go from Norway to Iceland; to come to a close, run out (fóru svá út þessir fimm vetr);

fara útan, to go abroad (from Iceland);

fara við e-n, to treat one, deal with one in a certain way;

margs á, ek minnast, hve við mik fóruð, I have many things to remember of your dealings with me;

fara yfir e-t, to go through;

nú er yfir farit um landnám, now an account of the settlements has been given;

skjótt yfir at fara, to be brief.

* * *

pret. fóra, 2nd pers. fórt, mod. fórst, pl. fóru; pres. ferr, 2nd pers. ferr, in mod. pronunciation ferð; pret. subj. færa; imperat. far and farðu (= far þú); sup. farit; part. farinn; with the suffixed neg. fór-a, Am. 45; farið-a ( depart not), Hkr. i. 115 MS. (in a verse). [In the Icel. scarcely any other verb is in so freq. use as fara, as it denotes any motion; not so in other Teut. idioms; in Ulf. faran is only used once, viz. Luke x. 7; Goth. farjan means to sail, and this seems to be the original sense of fara (vide far); A. S. faran; the Germ. fahren and Engl. fare are used in a limited sense; in the Engl. Bible this word never occurs (Cruden); Swed. fara; Dan. fare.]

A. NEUT. to go, fare, travel, in the widest sense; gékk hann hvargi sem hann fór, he walked wherever he went, Hkr. i. 100; né ek flý þó ek ferr, I fly not though I fare, Edda (in a verse); létt er lauss at fara (a proverb), Sl. 37: the saying, verðr hverr með sjálfum sér lengst at fara, Gísl. 25; cp. ‘dass von sich selbst der Mensch nicht scheiden kann’ (Göthe’s Tasso), or the Lat. ‘patriae quis exul se quoque fugit?’ usually in the sense to go, to depart, heill þú farir, heill þú aptr komir, Vþm. 4; but also to come, far þú hingat til mín, come here, Nj. 2.

2. to travel, go forth or through, pass, or the like; þú skalt fara í Kirkjubæ, Nj. 74; fara ór landi, to fare forth from one’s country, Fms. v. 24; kjóll ferr austan, Vsp. 51; Surtr ferr sunnan, 52; snjór var mikill, ok íllt at fara, and ill to pass, Fms. ix. 491; fóru þeir út eptir ánni, Eg. 81; siðan fór Egill fram með skóginum, 531; þeim sem hann vildi at færi … Njáll hét at fara, Nj. 49; fara munu vér, Eg. 579; Egill fór til þess er hann kom til Álfs. 577, Fms. xi. 122; fara þeir nú af melinum á sléttuna. Eg. 747; fara heiman, to fare forth from one’s home, K. Þ. K. 6; alls mik fara tíðir, Vþm. 1; fjölð ek fór, far I fared, i. e. travelled far, 3: the phrase, fara utan, to fare outwards, go abroad (from Iceland), passim; fara vestr um haf, to fare westward over the sea, i. e. to the British Isles, Hkr. i. 101; fara á fund e-s, to visit one, Ld. 62; fara at heimboði, to go to a feast, id.; fara fæti, to fare a-foot, go walking, Hkr.; absol. fara, to travel, beg, hence föru-maðr, a vagrant, beggar; in olden times the poor went their rounds from house to house within a certain district, cp. Grág. i. 85; ómagar er þar eigu at fara í því þingi eðr um þau þing, id.; ómagar skolu fara, 119; omegð þá er þar ferr, 296: in mod. usage, fara um and um-ferð, begging, going round.

β. with prep.: fara at e-m, to make an inroad upon one, Nj. 93, 94, 102 (cp. at-för); fara á e-n, to mount, e. g. fara á bak, to mount on horseback; metaph., dauðinn fór á, death seized him, Fms. xi. 150; f. saman, to go together, Edda 121, Grág. ii. 256; f. saman also means to shudder. Germ. zusammenfahren, Hým. 24: metaph. to concur, agree, hversu má þat saman f., Nj. 192; þeim þótti þat mjök saman f., Fms. iv. 382; fara á hæl, or á hæli, to go a-heel, i. e. step back. retreat, xi. 278, Eg. 296; fara undan, metaph. to excuse oneself, refuse (v. undan), Nj. 23, Fms. x. 227; fara fyrir, to proceed; fara eptir, to follow.

3. with ferð, leið or the like added, in acc. or gen. to go one’s way; fara leiðar sinnar, to proceed on one’s journey, Eg. 81, 477, Fms. i. 10, Grág. ii. 119; fara ferðar sinnar, or ferða sinna, id.. Eg. 180, Fms. iv. 125; fara derð sina, id.. Eg. 568; fara förum sínum, or för sinní, id., K. Þ. K. 80, 90; fara dagfari ok náttfari, to travel day and night, Fms. i. 203; fara fullum dagleiðum, to go full days-journeys, Grág. i. 91; or in a more special sense, fara þessa ferð, to make this journey, Fas. ii. 117; f. stefnu-för, to go a-summoning; f. bónorðs-för, to go a-courting, Nj. 148; f. sigr-för, to go on the way of victory, to triumph, Eg. 21; fara sendi-för, to go on a message, 540.

β. in a metaph. sense; fara hneykju-för, to be shamefully beaten, Hrafn. 19 (MS.); fara ósigr, to be defeated, Eg. 287; fara mikinn skaða, to ‘fare’ (i. e. suffer) great damage, Karl. 43; fara því verrum förum, fara skömm, hneykju, erendleysu, úsæmð, to get the worst of it, Fms. viii. 125.

4. with the road in acc.; hann fór Vánar-skarð, Landn. 226; f. sjó-veg, land-veg, K. Þ. K. 24; fór mörg lönd ok stórar merkr, Fas. ii. 540; fara sömu leið, Fms. i. 70; f. sama veg, Luke x. 31; f. fjöll ok dala, Barl. 104; fara út-leið, þjóð-leið, Fms. iv. 260; also, fara um veg, fara um fjall, to cross a fell, Hm. 3; fara liði, to march, Fms. i. 110.

II. in a more indefinite sense, to go; fara búðum, bygðum, vistum, to move, change one’s abode, Ld. 56, Hkr. ii. 177, Nj. 151, Vigl. 30; fara búferla, to more one’s household, Grág. ii. 409; fara vöflunarförum, to go a-begging, i. 163, 294, ii. 482.

2. the phrases, fara eldi ok arni, a law term, to move one’s hearth and fire. Grág. ii. 253; fara eldi um land, a heathen rite for taking possession of land, defined in Landn. 276. cp. Eb. 8, Landn. 189, 284.

3. fara einn-saman, to be alone. Grág. ii. 9; the phrase, f. eigi einn-saman, to be not alone, i. e. with child, Fms. iii. 109; or, fór hón með svein þann, Bs. i. 437; cp. ganga með barni.

4. adding an adj., to denote gait, pace, or the like; fara snúðigt, to stride haughtily, Nj. 100; fara mikinn, to rush on, 143; fara flatt, to fall flat, tumble, Bárð. 177; fara hægt, to walk slowly.

β. fara til svefns, to go to sleep, Nj. 35; f. í sæti sitt, to go to one’s seat, 129; f. í sess, Vþm. 9; f. á bekk, 19; fara á sæng, to go to bed, N. G. L. i. 30; fara í rúmið, id. (mod.); fara í mannjöfnuð, Ísl. ii. 214; fara í lag, to be put straight, Eg. 306; fara í vöxt, to wax, increase, Fms. ix. 430, Al. 141; fara í þurð, to wane, Ld. 122, l. 1 (MS.); fara í úefni, to go to the wrong side, Sturl. iii. 210; fara at skakka, to be odd ( not even). Sturl. ii. 258; fara at sölum, to be put out for sale, Grág. ii. 204.

5. fara at fuglum, to go a-fowling, Orkn. (in a verse); fara at fugla-veiðum, id., Bb. 3. 36; fara í hernað, í víking, to go a-freebooting, Fms. i. 33, Landn. 31; fara at fé, to watch sheep, Ld. 240; fara at fé-föngum, to go a-fetching booty, Fms. vii. 78.

β. with infin., denoting one’s ‘doing’ or ‘being;’ fara sofa, to go to sleep, Eg. 377; fara vega, to go to fight, Vsp. 54, Gm. 23; fara at róa, Vígl. 22; fara leita, to go seeking, Fms. x. 240; fara að búa, to set up a household, Bb. 2. 6; fara að hátta, to go to bed.

γ. akin to this is the mod. use of fara with an infin. following in the sense to begin, as in the East Angl. counties of Engl. it ‘fares’ to …, i. e. it begins, is likely to be or to do so and so; það fer að birta, það er farit að dimma, it ‘fares’ to grow dark; það fer að hvessa, it ‘fares’ to blow; fer að rigna, it ‘fares’ to rain. etc.:—no instance of this usage is recorded in old Icel., but the Engl. usage shews that it must be old.

δ. with an adj. etc.; fara villr, to go astray, Sks. 565; fara haltr, to go lame, Fms. x. 420; fara vanstiltr, to go out of one’s mind, 264; fara hjá sér, to be beside oneself, Eb. 270; fara apr, to feel chilly, Fms. vi. 237 (in a verse); fara duldr e-s, to be unaware of, Skálda 187 (in a verse); fara andvígr e-m, to give battle, Stor. 8; fara leyniliga, to go secretly, be kept hidden, Nj. 49.

6. to pass; fór sú skipan til Íslands, Fms. x. 23; fara þessi mál til þings, Nj. 100; hversu orð fóru með þeim, how words passed between them, 90; fóru þau orð um, the runner went abroad, Fms. i. 12; ferr orð er um munn líðr (a saying), iv. 279; þá fór ferligt úorðan, a bad report went abroad, Hom. 115.

7. fara fram, to go on, take place; ferr þetta fram, Ld. 258; ef eigi ferr gjald fram, if no payment takes place, K. Þ. K. 64; ferr svá fram, and so things went on without a break, Nj. 11, Eg. 711; veizlan ferr vel fram, the feast went on well, Nj. 11, 51; spyrr hvat þar færi fram, he asked what there was going on. Band. 17; fór allt á sömu leið sem fyrr, it went on all the same as before, Fms. iv. 112; fara fram ráðum e-s, to follow one’s advice, Nj. 5, 66, Fms. vii. 318; allt mun þat sínu fram f., it will take its own course, Nj. 259; nú er því ferr fram um hríð, it went on so for a while, Fms. xi. 108; a law term, to be produced, gögn fara fram til varnar, Grág. i. 65; dómar fara út, the court is set (vide dómr), Grág., Nj., passim.

8. borð fara upp brott, the tables are removed (vide borð), Eg. 247, 551; eigi má þetta svá f., this cannot go on in that way, Nj. 87; fjarri ferr þat, far from it, by no means, 134; fór þat fjarri at ek vilda, Ld. 12; fór þat ok svá til, and so if came to pass, Fms. x. 212.

9. to turn out, end; hversu ætlar þú fara hesta-atið, Nj. 90; fór þat sem likligt var, it turned out as was likely (i. e. ended ill). Eg. 46; svá fór, at …, the end was, that …, Grett. 81 new Ed.; ef svá ferr sem ek get til, if it turns out as I guess, Dropl. 30, Vígl. 21; ef svá ferr sem mín orð horfa til, Fms. v. 24; ef svá ferr sem mik varir, if it comes to pass as it seems to me, vi. 350; svá fór um sjóferð þá, Bjarni 202; á sömu leið fór um aðra sendi-menn, Eg. 537; to depart, die, þar fór nýtr maðr, Fs. 39; fara danða-yrði, to pass the death-weird, to die, Ýt. 8.

10. to fare well, ill, in addressing; fari þér vel, fare ye well, Nj. 7; biðja e-n vel fara, to bid one farewell, Eg. 22, Ld. 62; far heill ok sæll, Fms. vii. 197: in a bad sense, far þú nú þar, ill betide thee! Hbl. 60; far (impers.) manna armastr, Eg. 553; Jökull bað hann fara bræla armastan, Finnb. 306; fari þér í svá gramendr allir, Dropl. 23.

11. fara í fat, í brynju (acc.), etc., to dress, undress; but fara ór fötum (dat.), to undress, Fms. x. 16, xi. 132, vii. 202, Nj. 143, Gh. 16, etc.

III. metaph.,

1. to suit, fit, esp. of clothes, hair, or the like; ekki þykkir mér kyrtill þinn fara betr en stakkr minn, Fas. ii. 343; hárið fór vel, Nj. 30; jarpr á hár ok fór vel hárit, Fms. ii. 7; gult hár sem silki ok fór fagrliga, vi. 438, Fs. 88; klæði sem bezt farandi, Eb. 256; var sú konan bezt f., the most graceful, lady-like, Ísl. ii. 438; fór ílla á hestinum, it sat ill on the horse, Bs. i. 712.

2. impers. it goes so and so with one, i. e. one behaves so and so: e-m ferr vel, ílla, etc., one behaves well, ill, etc.; honum hafa öll málin verst farit, he has behaved worst in the whole matter, Nj. 210; bezta ferr þér, Fms. vii. 33; vel mun þér fara, Nj. 55; at honum fari vel, 64; þer hefir vel farit til mín, Finnb. 238; e-m ferr vinveittliga, one behaves in a friendly way, Nj. 217; ferr þér þá bezt jafnan ok höfðinglegast er mest liggr við, 228; mun honum nokkurn veg vel f., Hrafn. 10; údrengiliga hefir þér farit til vár, Ld. 48; ferr þér illa, Nj. 57; hversu Gunnari fór, how ( well) G. behaved, 119.

3. fara at e-u, to deal with a thing (i. e. proceed) so and so; svá skal at sókn fara, thus is the pleading to be proceeded with, Grág. i. 323; svá skal at því f. at beiða …, 7; fara at lögum, or úlögum at e-u, to proceed lawfully or unlawfully, 126; hversu at skyldi f., how they were to proceed, Nj. 114; fara mjúklega at, to proceed gently, Fms. vii. 18; hér skulu vér f. at með ráðum, to act with deliberation, Eg. 582; Flosi fór at öngu óðara ( took matters calmly), en hann væri heima, Nj. 220.

β. impers. with dat., to do, behave; ílla hefir mér at farit, I have done my business badly, Hrafn. 8; veit Guð hversu hverjum manni mun at f., Fms. x. 212: in mod. phrases, to become, ironically, þér ferr það, or þér ferst það, it becomes thee, i. e. ‘tis too bad of thee.

γ. hví ferr konungrinn nú svá (viz. at), Fms. i. 35; er slíkt úsæmiliga farit, so shamefully done, Nj. 82; hér ferr vænt at, here things go merrily, 232; karlmannliga er farit, manfully done, 144.

δ. to mind, care about; ekki ferr ek at, þótt þú hafir svelt þik til fjár, it does not matter to me, I do not care, though …, Nj. 18; ekki munu vit at því fara ( never mind that), segir Helgi, 133.

ε. fara eptir, to be in proportion; hér eptir fór vöxtr ok afl, his strength and stature were in proportion, Clar.

4. fara með e-t, to wield, handle, manage; fór Hroptr með Gungni, H. wielded Gungni ( the spear), Kormak; f. með Gríðar-völ, to wield the staff G., Þd. 9: as a law term, to wield, possess; fara með goðorð, to keep a goðorð, esp. during the session of parliament, Dropl. 8, Grág. and Nj. passim; fara með sök, to manage a lawsuit, Grág., Nj.; or, fara við sök, id., Nj. 86.

β. metaph. to practise, deal in; fara með rán, to deal in robbing, Nj. 73; fara með spott ok háð, to go sporting and mocking, 66; f. með fals ok dár, Pass. 16. 5; fara með galdra ok fjölkyngi, K. Þ. K. 76; f. með hindr-vitni, Grett. 111; cp. the phrase, farðu ekki með það, don’t talk such nonsense.

γ. to deal with, treat, handle; þú munt bezt ok hógligast með hann fara, thou wilt deal with him most kindly and most gently, Nj. 219; fara af hljóði með e-t, to keep matters secret, id.; Ingimundr fór vel með sögum (better than sögur, acc.), Ing. dealt well with stories, was a good historian. Sturl. i. 9.

δ. with dat.; fara með e-u, to do so and so with a thing, manage it; hversu þeir skyldi fara með vápnum sínum, how they were to do with their weapons, Fms. ix. 509; sá maðr er með arfinum ferr, who manages the arfr, Grág. i. 217; ef þeir fara annan veg með því fé, 216; fara með málum sínum, to manage one’s case, 46; meðan hann ferr svá með sem mælt er, 93; Gunnarr fór með öllu ( acted in all) sem honum var ráð til kennt, Nj. 100; ef svá er með farit, Ld. 152; f. vel með sínum háttum, to bear oneself well, behave well, Eg. 65; Hrafn fór með sér vel, H. bore himself well, Fms. vi. 109; undarliga fara munkar þessir með sér, they behave strangely, 188; við förum kynlega með okkrum málum, Nj. 130; vant þyki mér með slíku at fara, difficult matters to have to do with, 75; f. málum á hendr e-m, to bring an action against one, Ld. 138; fara sókn ( to proceed) sem at þingadómi, Grág. i. 463; fara svá öllu máli um sem …, 40, ii. 348; fara með hlátri ok gapi, to go laughing and scoffing, Nj. 220; cp. β above.

IV. fara um, yfir e-t, to pass over slightly; nú er yfir farit um landnám, shortly told, touched upon, Landn. 320; skjótt yfir at f., to be brief, 656 A. 12; fara myrkt um e-t, to mystify a thing, Ld. 322; fara mörgum orðum um e-t, to dilate upon a subject, Fbr. 124, Nj. 248, Fms. ix. 264.

β. in the phrase, fara höndum um e-t, to go with the hands about a thing, to touch it, Germ. befühlen, esp. medic. of a healing touch; jafnan fengu menn heilsubót af handlögum hans, af því er hann fór höndum um þá er sjúkir vóru, Játv. 24; ok pá fór hann höndum um hann, Bs. i. 644; þá lét Arnoddr fara aðra höndina um hann, ok fann at hann var berfættr ok í línklæðum. Dropl. 30; cp. fóru hendr hvítar hennar um þessar görvar, Fas. i. 248 (in a verse): note the curious mod. phrase, það fer að fara um mig, I began to feel uneasy, as from a cold touch or the like.

γ. impers. with dat.; eigi ferr þér nær Gunnari, en Merði mundi við þik, thou camest not nearer to G. than Mord would to thee, i. e. thou art just as far from being a match for G. as Mord is to thee, Nj. 37; þá ferr honum sem öðrum, it came to pass with him as with others, 172; þá mun mér first um fara, I shall fall much short of that, Fms. vi. 362; því betr er þeim ferr öllum verr at, the worse they fare the better I am pleased, Nj. 217.

V. reflex., esp. of a journey, to fare well; fórsk þeim vel, they fared well, Eg. 392, Fms. xi. 22; honum fersk vel vegrinn, he proceeded well on his journey, ii. 81; hafði allt farizt vel at, all had fared well, they had had a prosperous journey, Íb. 10; fórsk þeim þá seint um daginn, they proceeded slowly, Eg. 544; mönnum fórsk eigi vel um fenit, Fms. vii. 149; hversu þeim hafði farizk, Nj. 90; at þeim færisk vel, Ísl. ii. 343, 208, v. l.: the phrase, hamri fórsk í hægri hönd, he grasped the hammer in his right hand, Bragi; farask lönd undir, to subdue lands, Hkr. i. 134, v. l. (in a verse).

2. recipr., farask hjá, to go beside one another, miss one another, pass without meeting, Nj. 9; farask á mis, id., farask í móti, to march against one another, of two hosts; þat bar svá til at hvárigir vissu til annarra ok fórusk þó í móti, Fms. viii. 63, x. 46, Fas. ii. 515.

VI. part.,

1. act., koma farandi, to come of a sudden or by chance; þá kómu hjarðsveinar þar at farandi, some shepherds just came, Eg. 380; Moses kom farandi til fólksins, Sks. 574; koma inn farandi, 369, Fbr. 25.

2. pass. farinn, in the phrase, á förnum vegi, on ‘wayfaring,’ i. e. in travelling, passing by; finna e-n á förnum vegi, Nj. 258, K. Þ. K. 6; kveðja fjárins á förnum vegi, Grág. i. 403; also, fara um farinn veg, to pass on one’s journey; of the sun. sól var skamt farin, the sun was little advanced, i. e. early in the morning, Fms. xi. 267, viii. 146; þá var dagr alljós ok sól farin, broad day and sun high in the sky, Eg. 219; also impers., sól (dat.) var skamt farit, Úlf. 4. 10: the phrase, aldri farinn, stricken in years, Sturl. i. 212; vel farinn í andliti, well-favoured, Ld. 274; vel at orði farinn, well spoken, eloquent, Fms. xi. 193; mod., vel orði, máli farinn, and so Ld. 122; gone, þar eru baugar farnir, Grág. ii. 172; þó fætrnir sé farnir, Fas. iii. 308.

β. impers. in the phrase, e-m er þannig farit, one is so and so; veðri var þannig farit, at …, the winter was such, that …, Fms. xi. 34; veðri var svá farit at myrkt var um at litask, i. e. the weather was gloomy, Grett. 111; hversu landinu er farit, what is the condition of the country, Sks. 181; henni er þannig farit, at hón er mikil ey, löng …, ( the island) is so shapen, that it is large and long, Hkr. ii. 188; er eigi einn veg farit úgæfu okkari, our ill-luck is not of one piece, Nj. 183: metaph. of state, disposition, character, er hánum vel farit, he is a well-favoured man, 15; undarliga er yðr farit, ye are strange men, 154; honum var svá farit, at hann var vesal-menni, Boll. 352: adding the prepp. at, til, þeim var úlíkt farit at í mörgu, they were at variance in many respects, Hkr. iii. 97; nú er annan veg til farit, now matters are altered, Nj. 226; nú er svá til farit, at ek vil …, now the case is, that I wish …, Eg. 714; hér er þannig til farit, … at leiðin, 582; þar var þannig til farit, Fms. xi. 34. ☞ Hence comes the mod. form varið (v instead of f), which also occurs in MSS. of the 15th century—veðri var svá varit, Sd. 181; ér honum vel varið, Lv. 80, Ld. 266, v. l.; svá er til varið, Sks. 223, 224,—all of them paper MSS. The phrase, e-m er nær farit, one is pressed; svá var honum nær farit af öllu samt, vökum ok föstu, he was nearly overcome from want of sleep and fasting.

B. TRANS.

I. with acc.:

1. to visit; fara land herskildi, brandi, etc., to visit a land with ‘war-shield,’ fire, etc., i. e. devastate it; gékk siðan á land upp með liði sínu, ok fór allt herskildi, Fms. i. 131; land þetta mundi herskildi farit, ok leggjask undir útlenda höfðingja, iv. 357; (hann) lét Halland farit brandi, vii. 4 (in a verse); hann fór lvist eldi, 41 (in a verse); hann hefir farit öll eylönd brandi, 46 (in a verse); fara hungri hörund, to emaciate the body, of an ascetic, Sl. 71.

2. to overtake, with acc.; hann gat ekki farit hann, he could not overtake ( catch) him, 623. 17; tunglit ferr sólina, the moon overtakes the sun, Rb. 116; áðr hana Fenrir fari, before Fenrir overtakes her, Vþm. 46, 47; knegut oss fálur fara, ye witches cannot take us, Hkv. Hjörv. 13; hann gat farit fjóra menn af liði Steinólfs, ok drap þá alla, … hann gat farit þá hjá Steinólfsdal, Gullþ. 29; hann reið eptir þeim, ok gat farit þá út hjá Svelgsá, milli ok Hóla, Eb. 180; Án hrísmagi var þeirra skjótastr ok getr farit sveininn, Ld. 242; viku þeir þá enn undan sem skjótast svá at Danir gátu eigi farit þá, Fms. (Knytl. S.) xi. 377 (MS., in the Ed. wrongly altered to náð þeim); hérinn hljóp undan, ok gátu hundarnir ekki farit hann (Ed. fráit wrongly), Fas. iii. 374; ok renna allir eptir þeim manni er víg vakti, … ok verðr hann farinn, Gþl. 146: cp. the phrase, vera farinn, to dwell, live, to be found here and there; þótt hann sé firr um farinn, Hm. 33.

II. with dat. to destroy, make to perish; f. sér, to make away with oneself; kona hans fór sér í dísar-sal, she killed herself, Fas. i. 527; hón varð stygg ok vildi fara sér, Landn. (Hb.) 55; ef þér gangit fyrir hamra ofan ok farit yðr sjálfir, Fms. viii. 53; hví ætla menn at hann mundi vilja f. sér sjálfr, iii. 59; fara lífi, fjörvi, öndu, id.; skal hann heldr eta, en fara öndu sinni, than starve oneself to death, K. Þ. K. 130; ok verðr þá þínu fjörvi um farit, Lv. 57, Ýt. 20, Fas. i. 426 (in a verse), cp. Hkv. Hjörv. 13; mínu fjörvi at fara, Fm. 5; þú hefir sigr vegit, ok Fáfni (dat.) um farit, 23; farit hafði hann allri ætt Geirmímis, Hkv. 1. 14; ok létu hans fjörvi farit, Sól. 22; hann hafði farit mörgum manni, O. H. L. 11.

β. to forfeit; fara sýknu sinni, Grág. i. 98; fara löndum ok lausafé, ii. 167.

2. reflex. to perish (but esp. freq. in the sense to be drowned, perish in the sea); farask af sulti, to die of hunger, Fms. ii. 226; fellr fjöldi manns í díkit ok farask þar, v. 281; fórusk sex hundruð Vinda skipa, xi. 369; alls fórusk níu menn, Ísl. ii. 385; mun heimr farask, Eluc. 43; þá er himin ok jörð hefir farisk, Edda 12; farask af hita, mæði, Fms. ix. 47; fórsk þar byrðingrinn, 307; hvar þess er menn farask, Grág. i. 219; heldr enn at fólk Guðs farisk af mínum völdum, Sks. 732: of cattle, ef fé hins hefir troðisk eðr farisk á þá lund sem nú var tínt, Grág. ii. 286.

β. metaph., fersk nú vinátta ykkur, your friendship is done with, Band. 12.

γ. the phrase, farask fyrir, to come to naught, Nj. 131; at síðr mun fyrir farask nokkut stórræði, Ísl. ii. 340; en fyrir fórusk málagjöldin af konungi, the payment never took place, Fms. v. 278; lét ek þetta verk fyrir farask, vii. 158; þá mun þat fyrir farask, Fs. 20; en fyrir fórsk þat þó þau misseri, Sd. 150: in mod. usage (N. T.), to perish.

δ. in act. rarely, and perhaps only a misspelling: frá því er féit fór (fórsk better), K. Þ. K. 132; fóru (better fórusk, were drowned) margir Íslenzkir menn, Bs. i. 436.

3. part. farinn, as adj. gone, undone; nú eru vér farnir, nema …, Lv. 83; hans tafl var mjök svá farit, his game was almost lost, Fas. i. 523; þá er farnir vóru forstöðumenn Tróju, when the defenders of Troy were dead and gone, Ver. 36; tungl farit, a ‘dead moon,’ i. e. new moon, Rb. 34; farinn af sulti ok mæði, Fms. viii. 53; farinn at e-u, ruined in a thing, having lost it; farnir at hamingju, luckless, iv. 73; f. at vistum, xi. 33; f. at lausa-fé;. iii. 117: in some cases uncertain whether the participle does not belong to A.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > FARA
19 ὑπόκειμαι

ὑπόκειμαι, used as [voice] Pass. of ὑποτίθημι, [tense] fut. ὑποκείσομαι Pi.O.1.85, etc., but [tense] aor. ὑπετέθην:—

A lie under, ὑπὸ δὲ ξύλα κεῖται Il.21.364
; θεμέλιοι ὑ. Th.1.93
; τὸν μηρὸν ὑποκείμενον ἔχειν Arist.IA 712b32
, cf. PA 686a13, 689b18: c. dat., τοιαύτης τῆς κρηπῖδος ὑποκειμένης ταῖς πολιτείαις Pl.Plt. 301e
: τὰ ὑποκείμενα, opp. τὰ ὑπερκείμενα, Sor.1.8.

2 of places, lie close to, ὑποκειμένης τῆς Εὐβοίας ὑπὸ τὴν Ἀττικήν Isoc. 4.108
; ὑ. τὸ πεδίον τῷ ἱερῷ Aeschin.3.118
; λόφος ὑποκείμενος τοῖς Σιννάκοις Plu.Crass.29
; τὸ τὴν οἰκουμένην ὑποκεῖσθαι πρὸς τοῦτον τὸν τόπον Arist.Mete. 364a7
, cf.Pr. 941b39; <τὰ> πρὸς βορρᾶν καὶ ἄρκτον ὑποκείμενα μέρη τῶν ὀρέων Gp.2.5.1
; τὰ ὑποκείμενα ἐδάφη the adjacent soil, D.S.3.50; ἡ-κειμένη χώρα the adjacent country, ibid. (but, the adjacent low lands, Id.2.37, Plu.Sert.17); ὄρος ὑπόκειται Plb.5.59.4
codd. ( ἐπίκ- Schweigh.); ὁ ὑποκείμενος ποταμός Id.3.74.2
; ὑποκεῖσθαι πρὸς τὴν ο?ὑπόκειμαιXψιν to be presented to the sight, Demetr.Lac.Herc.1013.17.

3 to be given below in the text, κατὰ τὴν.. συγγραφήν, ἧς τὸ ἀντίγραφον ὑπόκειται PCair.Zen.355.122
(iii B. C.); γράψον.. τοὺς χαρακτῆρας ὡς ὑπόκειται as below, PMag.Par.1.408; λέγε τὸν λόγον τὸν ὑποκείμενον ib.230; ὡς ὑπόκειται as below, Sammelb.5231.11 (i A. D.), etc.; also, as set forth, PKlein.Form.78 (v/vi A. D.).

II in various metaph. senses,

1 to be established, set before one (by oneself or another) as an aim or principle, ἐμοὶ μὲν οὗτος ἄεθλος ὑποκείσεται shall be my appointed task, Pi. l. c.; δυοῖν ὑποκειμένοιν ὀνομάτοιν two phrases being prescribed, having legal sanction, D.23.36; ὑπόκειται πρῶτον μὲν διωμοσία, δεύτερον δὲ λόγος the prescribed course is.., ib.71; μένειν ἐπὶ τῶν ὑποκειμένων to abide by one's resolves, Plb.1.19.6, 2.51.1; μένειν ἐπὶ τῆς ὑ. γνώμης Id.1.40.5
; ἐμοὶ ὑπόκειται ὅτι .. for me it is a fixed principle that.., Hdt.2.123, cf. Arist.Oec. 1343b9; νομίζω συμφέρειν.. τοῦθ' ὑποκεῖσθαι D.14.3
; τῶν πραγμάτων ἐν οἷς τὰ ὑποκείμενα διαφέρει τῷ εἴδει things of which the principles differ in kind, Arist.Pol. 1275a35; τὰς ὑποκειμένας μοίρας τξ the conventional 3600, Ptol.Alm.5.1.

2 to be assumed as a hypothesis (cf. ὑπόθεσις 111
), Pl.Cra. 436d, al.; ὑπέκειτο μὴ οἷόν τε εἶναι .. Id.Erx. 404b; τούτων ὑποκειμένων Id.Prt. 359a
, R. 478e; τὴν ἐκ τῶν -κειμένων ἀρίστην [πολιτείαν] the best (possible) in the circumstances, opp. to τὴν κρατίστην ἁπλῶς and to τὴν ἐξ ὑποθέσεως, Arist. Pol. 1288b26;
ὑποκείσθω τι
let it be taken for granted, Id.EN 1103b32
, cf. 1129a11, al., Gal.15.175; ὑποκείσθω ὅτι .. let it be taken for granted that.., Arist.Pol. 1323b40; ὑ. εἶναι τὴν ἡδονὴν κίνησιν Id.Rh. 1369b33
: so with a nom., ὑ. ἡ ἀρετὴ εἶναι .. Id.EN 1104b27, cf. Rh. 1357a11: c. part., τοιόνδε ζῷον ὑ. ὄν Id.GA 778b17
: without any Verb, ἡ τοῦ δέρματος φύσις ὑ. γεώδης (sc. εἶναι or οὖσα) ib. 782a29, etc.: cf. ὑποτίθημι IV. 1.

3 to be suggested, τρόπῳ τῷ ἐξ ἐμεῦ -κειμένῳ Hdt.3.40
.

4 to be in prospect, ἐλπὶς ὑπόκειται σφαλεῖσι κἂν αὐτοὺς διασῴζεσθαι Th.3.84
; αἱ ὑποκείμεναι προσδοκίαι καὶ αἱ ἐλπίδες D.19.24
; παρ' ὑμῖν ὀργὴ μεγάλη καὶ τιμωρία ὑπόκειται τοῖς τὰ ψευδῆ μαρτυροῦσι is reserved for them, Id.34.19, cf. Lycurg.130; δυοῖν κινδύνοιν -κειμένοιν ibid.; ὁρᾶν τὸν θάνατον ὑποκείμενον PPetr.3p.73
(iii B. C.); φόβου ὑποκειμένου ὅτι οἴσει τι βέβαιον παρὰ σοῦ PSI4.380.3
(iii B. C.); τοῦτο καὶ τοῖς μηθὲν ἀσεβὲς ἐπιτελεσαμένοις κατὰ τοὺς τοῦ πολέμου νόμους ὑπόκειται παθεῖν Plb.2.58.10
.

5 to be subject to, submit to, τῷ ἄρχοντι Pl.Grg. 510c
; βασιλεῖ Philostr. VA3.20
; πατράσιν POxy. 237 vii 16
(ii A. D.); ἐξετάσεσιν PFlor.33.14
(iv A. D.); βασάνοις POxy.58.25
(iii A. D.): abs., pay court to one, ὑποκείσονται δεόμενοι καὶ τιμῶντες Pl.R. 494c
; τῷ λόγῳ to be captivated by the story, Philostr.VA6.14;
θρῆνοι -κείμενοι
subdued, Id.VS2.4.2
.

6 to be subject to, liable to a penalty, Supp.Epigr.6.424, cf. 415,421, al. ([place name] Iconium), PLond.1.77.53 (vi A. D.): also c. acc., ὑποκείσεται τῷ φίσκῳ δηνάρια πεντακόσια Rev.Phil.36.61
([place name] Iconium).

7 to be pledged or mortgaged, c. gen., for a certain sum, Is.6.33, D.49.11,35; ναῦς ὑποκειμένη ἡμῖν Id.56.4
; τὰ ὑποκείμενα the articles pledged, Syngr. ap.D.35.12; the mortgaged property, SIG1044.28 (Halic., iv/iii B. C.); ἐνέχυρα-κείμενα IG12(7).58
([place name] Amorgos); ὑποκείμενοι, of slaves pledged for a sum of money, D.27.9.

b of payments, to have been granted or allocated, ἀποφαίνουσιν ὑποκεῖσθαι ἐν τῇ γραφῇ τῶν εἰς τὰ ἱερὰ (sc. ὑποκειμένων) δίδοσθαι κτλ. UPZ21.4
(ii B. C.), cf. 23.21 (ii B. C.), BGU 1197.4, 1200.28 (both i B. C.): Subst. ὑποκείμενα, τά, = φιλάνθρωπα, salary ( ear-marked proceeds of taxes), τὰ ἐπιβάλλοντά μοι ἐκ τοῦ ἱεροῦ ὑ. PLond.2.357.9
, cf. 5 (i A. D.); ὑ. αἰτεῖ ἀπὸ τῶν κωμῶν BGU23.12
(ii/iii A. D.), cf. OGI665.19,26 (Egypt, i A. D.): c. dat., as part of name of specific taxes,
ὑ. βασιλικῇ γραμματείᾳ
ear-marked for the benefit of.., PPar.17.22
(ii A. D.); ὑ. τοπογραμματείᾳ PSI1.101.18
(ii A. D.), cf. POxy.1436.23 (ii A. D.), etc.: also in sg., ὑποκείμενον ἐπιστρατηγία BGU 199.14
(ii A. D.), cf. PFlor.375.22 (ii A. D.), etc.: also c. gen., ὑ. ἐννομίου PRyl.213.72
, al. (ii A. D.); τοπαρχίας ib.73, etc.

8 in Philosophy, to underlie, as the foundation in which something else inheres, to be implied or presupposed by something else, ἑκάστῳ τῶν ὀνομάτων.. ὑ. τις ἴδιος οὐσία Pl.Prt. 349b
, cf. Cra. 422d, R. 581c, Ti.Locr.97e: τὸ ὑποκείμενον has three main applications: (1) to the matter which underlies the form, opp. εἶδος, ἐντελέχεια, Arist.Metaph. 983a30; (2) to the substance (matter + form) which underlies the accidents, opp. πάθη, συμβεβηκότα, Id.Cat. 1a20,27, Metaph. 1037b16, 983b16; (3) to the logical subject to which attributes are ascribed, opp. τὸ κατηγορούμενον, Id.Cat. 1b10,21, Ph. 189a31: applications (1 ) and (2 ) are distinguished in Id.Metaph. 1038b5, 1029a1-5, 1042a26-31: τὸ ὑ. is occasionally used of what underlies or is presupposed in some other way, e. g. of the positive termini presupposed by change, Id.Ph. 225a3-7.

b exist, τὸ ἐκτὸς ὑποκείμενον the external reality, Stoic.2.48, cf. Epicur.Ep.1pp.12,24 U.; φῶς εἶναι τὸ χρῶμα τοῖς ὑ. ἐπιπῖπτον Aristarch.
Sam. ap. Placit.1.15.5; τὸ κρῖνον τί τε φαίνεται μόνον καὶ τί σὺν τῷ φαίνεσθαι ἔτι καὶ κατ' ἀλήθειαν ὑπόκειται S.E.M.7.143
, cf. 83,90,91, 10.240; = ὑπάρχω, τὰ ὑποκείμενα πράγματα the existing state of affairs, Plb.11.28.2, cf. 11.29.1, 15.8.11,13, 3.31.6, Eun.VSp.474 B.; Τίτος ἐξ ὑποκειμένων ἐνίκα, χρώμενος ὁπλις μοῖς καὶ τάξεσιν αἷς παρέλαβε Plu.Comp.Phil.Flam.2
; τῆς αὐτῆς δυνάμεως ὑποκειμένης Id.2.336b
; ἐχομένου τοῦ προσιόντος λόγου ὡς πρὸς τὸν ὑποκείμενον A.D.Synt.122.17
.

c ὁ ὑ. ἐνιαυτός the year in question, D.S.11.75; οἱ ὑ. καιροί the time in question, Id.16.40, Plb.2.63.6, cf. Plu.Comp.Sol.Publ.4; τοῦ ὑ. μηνός the current month, PTeb.14.14 (ii B. C.), al.; ἐκ τοῦ ὑ. φόρου in return for a reduction from the said rent, PCair.Zen.649.18 (iii B. C.); πρὸς τὸ ὑ. νόει according to the context, Gp.6.11.7.

9 in logical arrangement, to be subject or subordinate, τῇ.. ἰατρικῇ.. ἡ ὀψοποιικὴ.. ὑ. Pl. Grg. 465b
; ὁ τὴν καθόλου ἐπιστήμην ἔχων οἶδέ πως πάντα τὰ ὑποκείμενα Arist.Metaph. 982a23
, cf. APo. 91a11; ἑκάστη [τέχνη] περὶ τὸ αὐτῇ ὑ. ἐστι διδασκαλική Id.Rh. 1355b28
.

b ἡ ὑ. ὕλη the subject-matter of a science or treatise, Id.EN 1094b12, 1098a28, Phld.Po.Herc.1676.3 (pl.); τὸ ὑ. the part affected by a disease, Plb.1.81.6.

III trans., = ὑποτέθειμαι, I have appended, ὧν τὸ καθ' ἓν ὑπόκειμαι PTeb. 140
(i B. C.); cf. παράκειμαι ([place name] Addenda).

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὑπόκειμαι
20 GÖRA

ð, also spelt görva, giörva, geyra, giora, gera: prop. gøra, not gra (the ø was sounded nearly as y or ey), so that the g is to be sounded as an aspirate, however the word is spelt; and the insertion of i or j (giöra, gjöra), which is usual in mod. writing, and often occurs in old, is phonetic, not radical, and göra and gjöra represent the same sound. The word in the oldest form had a characteristic v, and is spelt so on the Runic stones in the frequent Runic phrase, gaurva kubl, Baut., and Danske Runemind. passim; but also now and then in old Icel. MSS., e. g. the Kb. of Sæm. (cited from Bugge’s Edit.), gorva, Am. 75, Skv. 1. 34, 3. 20, Hm. 123, Og. 29; gerva, Am. 64, Bkv. 3; giorva, Rm. 9; giorfa, 28; gorvir, Hkv. Hjörv. 41; gørvom, Hým. 6; gorviz, Am. 35; gerviz, Merl. 2. 89:—this characteristic v has since been dropped, and it is usually spelt without it in MSS., gora, Hým. 1, Og. 23, Ls. 65; gera, Am. 85; gorir, Hm. 114: the pret. always drops the v, gorþi, Hym. 21; gorðo or gorþo, fecerunt, Hm. 142, Am. 9; gorðumz, Hðm. 28; gerþi, Am. 74; gerþit, 26:—with i inserted, Rm. 9, 22; giordu, 11; in the Mork. freq. giavra. The ö is still sounded in the east of Icel., whereas gera is the common form in speech, gjöra in writing:—the old pres. indic. used by the poets and in the laws is monosyllabic görr, with suffixed negative, görr-a, Hkr. i. (in a verse); mod. bisyllabic görir, which form is also the usual one in the Sagas:—the old part. pass. was görr or gerr, geyrr, Fms. ix. 498, x. 75, where the v was kept before a vowel, and is often spelt with f, gorvan, gorvir, and gorfan, gorfir: dat. so-goro or so-guru adverbially = sic facto: the mod. part. gjörðr, gerðr, görðr, as a regular part. of the 2nd weak conjugation, which form occurs in MSS. of the 15th century, e. g. Bs. i. 877, l. 21. [This is a Scandin. word; Dan. gjöre; Swed. göra; Old Engl. and Scot. gar, which is no doubt of Scandin. origin, the Saxon word being do, the Germ. thun, neither of which is used in the Scandin.; the word however is not unknown to the Teut., though used in a different sense; A. S. gervan and gearvjan = parare; O. H. G. karwan; Germ. gerben, garben, but esp. the adj. and adv. gar, vide above s. v. gör-.] To make, to do; the Icel. includes both these senses.

A. To make:

I. to build, work, make, etc.; göra himin ok jörð, 623. 36, Hom. 100; göra hús, to build a house, Fms. xi. 4, Rb. 384; göra kirkju, Bjarn. 39; göra skip, N. G. L. i. 198; göra langskip, Eg. 44; göra stólpa, Al. 116; göra tól (= smíða), Vsp. 7; göra (fingr)-gull, Bs. i. 877; göra haug, to build a cairn, Eg. 399; göra lokhvílu, Dropl. 27; göra dys, Ld. 152; göra kistu ( coffin), Eg. 127; göra naust, N. G. L. i. 198; göra jarðhús, Dropl. 34; göra veggi, Eg. 724: also, göra bók, to write a book, Íb. 1, Rb. 384; göra kviðling, to make a song, Nj. 50; göra bréf, to draw up a deed ( letter), Fms. ix. 22; göra nýmæli, to frame a law, Íb. 17.

2. adding prep.; göra upp, to repair, rebuild, restore, Fb. ii. 370; göra upp Jórsala-borg, Ver. 43; göra upp skála, Ld. 298; göra upp leiði, to build up a grave.

II. to make, prepare, get ready; göra veizlu, drykkju, brúðkaup, erfi, and poët. öl, öldr, to make a feast, brew bridal ale, Fs. 23, Fms. xi. 156, Dropl. 6, Am. 86; göra seið, blót, to perform a sacrifice, Ld. 152; göra bú, to set up a house, Grág. i. 185, Ld. 68; göra eld, to make a fire, Fs. 100, K. Þ. K. 88; göra rekkju, to make one’s bed, Eg. 236; göra upp hvílur, Sturl. ii. 124; göra graut, to make porridge, Eg. 196, N. G. L. i. 349; göra drykk, to make a drink, Fms. i. 8; göra kol, or göra til kola, to make charcoal, Ölk. 35.

III. in somewhat metaph. phrases; göra ferð, to make a journey, Fms. x. 281; görði heiman för sína, he made a journey from home, Eg. 23; göra sinn veg, to make one’s way, travel, Mar.; göra uppreisn, to make an uprising, to rebel, Rb. 384, Fms. ix. 416; göra úfrið, to make war, 656 C. 15; göra sátt, göra frið, to make peace, Hom. 153, Bs. i. 24; göra féskipti, Nj. 118; göra tilskipan, to make an arrangement, Eg. 67; göra ráð sitt, to make up one’s mind, Nj. 267, Fms. ix. 21; göra hluti, to cast lots, Fms. x. 348.

2. to make, give, pay, yield; göra tíund, to pay tithes, Hom. 180; hann skal göra Guði tíunda hlut verðsins, id.; göra ölmusu, to give alms, 64; göra ávöxt, to yield fruit, Greg. 48; gefa né göra ávöxt, Stj. 43; göra konungi skatt eða skyld, Fms. xi. 225.

3. to contract; göra vináttu, félagskap, to contract friendship, Nj. 103, Eg. 29; göra skuld, to contract a debt, Grág. i. 126: göra ráð með e-m, to take counsel with, advise one, Eg. 12; göra ráð fyrir, to suppose, Nj. 103, Fms. ix. 10; göra mun e-s, to make a difference, i. 255, Eb. 106.

4. to make, make up, Lat. efficere; sex tigir penninga göra eyri, sixty pence make an ounce, Grág. i. 500, Rb. 458.

5. to grant, render; göra kost, to make a choice, to grant, Nj. 130, Dropl. 6, Fms. xi. 72, (usually ellipt., kostr being understood); vil ek at þér gerit kostinn, Nj. 3; ok megit þér fyrir því göra ( grant) honum kostinn, 49, 51; göra e-m lög, to grant the law to one, 237; göra guðsifjar, to make ‘gossip’ with one, to be one’s godfather, Fms. ii. 130.

6. special usages; göra spott, háð, gabb, … at e-u, to make sport, gibes, etc. at or over a thing, Fms. x. 124; göra iðran, to do penance, Greg. 22; göra þakkir, to give thanks, Hom. 55; göra róm at máli e-s, to cheer another’s speech, shout hear, hear! var görr at máli hans mikill rómr ok góðr, his speech was much cheered, Nj. 250,—a parliamentary term; the Teutons cheered, the Romans applauded (with the hands), cp. Tacit. Germ.

7. with prepp.; gera til, to make ready or dress meat; láta af ( to kill) ok göra til ( and dress), K. Þ. K. 80, Ísl. ii. 83, 331, Fs. 146, 149, Bjarn. 31, Finnb. 228; göra til nyt, to churn milk, K. Þ. K. 78; göra til sverð, to wash and clean the sword, Dropl. 19; máttu þeir eigi sjá, hversu Þorvaldr var til gerr, how Th. got a dressing, Nj. 19.

β. göra at e-u, to mend, make good, put right (at-görð), ek skal at því gera, Fms. xi. 153, Eg. 566, Nj. 130: to heal, Bárð. 171, Eg. 579, Grág. i. 220; göra at hesti, K. Þ. K. 54, Nj. 74: göra við e-u, vide B. II.

8. adding acc. of an adj., part., or the like; göra mun þat margan höfuðlausan, Nj. 203; göra mikit um sik, to make a great noise, great havoc, Fb. i. 545, Grett. 133, Fms. x. 329; göra e-n sáttan, to reconcile one, Grág. i. 336; göra sér e-n kæran, to make one dear to oneself, Hkr. i. 209; göra sik líkan e-m, to make oneself like to another, imitate one, Nj. 258; göra sik góðan, to make oneself good or useful, 74, 78; göra sik reiðan, to take offence, 216; göra sér dælt, to make oneself at home, take liberties, Ld. 134, Nj. 216; göra langmælt, to make a long speech, Sks. 316; göra skjót-kjörit, to make a quick choice, Fms. ii. 79; göra hólpinn, to ‘make holpen,’ to help, x. 314; göra lögtekit, to make a law, issue a law, xi. 213, Bs. i. 37; hann gerði hann hálshöggvinn, he had him beheaded, Fms. ix. 488, v. l.; ok görðu þá handtekna alla at minsta kosti, Sturl. i. 40; várir vöskustu ok beztu menn era görfir handteknir, 41.

β. göra sér mikit um e-t, to make much of, admire, Eg. 5, Fms. x. 254, 364; göra e-t at ágætum, to make famous, extol a thing, vii. 147; göra at orðum, to notice as remarkable, Fas. i. 123; göra at álitum, to take into consideration, Nj. 3; göra sér úgetið at e-u, to be displeased with, Ld. 134; göra vart við sik, to make one’s presence noticed, Eg. 79; göra sér mikit, lítið fyrir, to make great, small efforts, Finnb. 234; göra sér í hug, to brood over; hann gerði sér í hug at drepa jarl, Fs. 112; göra sér í hugar lund, to fancy, think: göra af sér, to exert oneself, ef þú gerir eigi meira af þér um aðra leika, Edda 32; hvárt hann var með Eiríki jarli, eðr görði hann annat af sér, or what else he was making of himself, Fms. xi. 157.

9. phrases, gera fáleika á sik, to feign, make oneself look sad, Nj. 14; esp. adding upp, gera sér upp veyki, to feign sickness, (upp-gerð, dissimulation); göra sér til, to make a fuss, (hence, til-gerð, foppishness.)

B. To do:

I. to do, act; allt þat er hann gerir síðan ( whatever he does), þat á eigandi at ábyrgjask, Gþl. 190; þér munut fátt mæla eðr gera, áðr yðr munu vandræði af standa, i. e. whatsoever you say or do will bring you into trouble, Nj. 91; göra e-t með harðfengi ok kappi, 98; ger svá vel, ‘do so well,’ be so kind! 111; gerit nú svá, góði herra (please, dear lord!), þiggit mitt heilræði, Fms. vii. 157: and in mod. usage, gerið þér svo vel, gerðu svo vel, = Engl. please, do! sagði, at hann hafði með trúleik gört, done faithfully, Eg. 65; göra gott, to do good; göra íllt, to do evil, (góð-görð, íll-görð); ok þat var vel gört, well done, 64; geyrða ek hotvetna íllt, I did evil in all things, Niðrst. 109; hefir hann marga hluti gört stór-vel til mín, he has done many things well towards me, I have received many great benefits at his hands, Eg. 60: with dat., svá mikit gott sem jarl hefir mér gert, Nj. 133; þér vilda ek sízt íllt göra, I would least do harm to thee, 84: göra fúlmennsku, to do a mean act, 185; göra vel við e-n, to do well to one, Fs. 22; göra stygð við e-n, to offend one, Fms. x. 98; göra sæmiliga til e-s, to do well to one, Ld. 62, Nj. 71; göra sóma e-s, to do honour to one, Fms. vii. 155; göra e-m gagn, to give help to one, Nj. 262; göra e-m sæmd, skomm, to do ( shew) honour, dishonour, to one, 5, Fms. x. 43; göra háðung, xi. 152; göra styrk, to strengthen one, ix. 343; göra e-m skapraun, to tease one; göra ósóma, Vápn. 19; göra skaða ( scathe), Eg. 426; göra óvina-fagnað, to give joy to one’s enemies, i. e. to do just what they want one to do, Nj. 112; göra til skaps e-m, to conform to one’s wishes, 80; gerum vér sem faðir vár vill, let us do as our father wishes, 198; vel má ek gera þat til skaps föður míns at brenna inni með honum, id.; göra at skapi e-s, id., 3; var þat mjök gert móti mínu skapi, Fms. viii. 300; gera til saka við e-n, to offend, sin against one, Nj. 80; gera á hluta e-s, to wrong one, Vígl. 25; göra ílla fyrir sér, to behave badly, Fms. vii. 103.

II. adding prep.; göra til e-s, to deserve a thing (cp. til-görð, desert, behaviour); hvat hafðir þú til gört, what hast thou done to deserve it? Nj. 130; framarr en ek hefi til gört, more than I have deserved, Fms. viii. 300; ok hafit þér Danir heldr til annars gört, ye Danes have rather deserved the reverse, xi. 192, Hom. 159:—göra eptir, to do after, imitate, Nj. 90:—göra við e-u (cp. við-görð, amendment), to provide for, amend, ok mun úhægt vera at göra við forlögum þeirra, Ld. 190; er úhægt at göra við ( to resist) atkvæðum, Fs. 22; ok mun ekki mega við því gera, Nj. 198:—göra af við e-n (cp. af-görð, evil doing), to transgress against one, ek hefi engan hlut af gört við þik, Fms. vii. 104, viii. 241; ok iðrask nú þess er hann hefir af gert, 300; göra af við Guð, to sin against God, Hom. 44.

2. special usages; göra … at, to do so and so; spurði, hvat hann vildi þá láta at gera, he asked what he would have done, Nj. 100; hann gerði þat eina at, er hann átti, he did only what be ought, 220; þeir Flosi sátu um at rengja, ok gátu ekki at gert, F. tried, and could do nothing, 115, 242; þér munut ekki fá at gert, fyrr en …, 139; Flosi ok hans menn fengu ekki at gert, 199; mikit hefir þú nú at gert, much hast thou now done ( it is a serious matter), 85; er nú ok mikit at gert um manndráp siðan, 256; hann vildi taka vöru at láni, ok göra mikit at, and do great things, Ld. 70; Svartr hafði höggit skóg ok gert mikit at, Nj. 53; slíkt gerir at er sölin etr, so it happens with those who eat seaweed, i. e. that (viz. thirst) comes of eating seaweed, Eg. 605.

β. göra af e-u, to do so and so with a thing; hvat hafið ér gert af Gunnari, Njarð. 376; ráð þú draumana, vera má at vér gerim af nokkut, may be that we may make something out of it, Ld. 126; gör af drauminum slíkt er þér þykkir líkligast, do with the dream ( read it) as seems to thee likeliest, Ísl. ii. 196: göra við e-n, to do with one; þá var um rætt, hvað við þá skyldi göra, what was to be done with them? Eg. 232; ærnar eru sakir til við Egil, hvat sem eg læt göra við hann, 426; eigi veit ek hvat þeir hafa síðan við gört, 574: göra fyrir e-t, to provide; Jón var vel fjáreigandi, ok at öllu vel fyrir gört, a wealthy and well-to-do man, Sturl. iii. 195; þótt Björn sé vel vígr maðr, þá er þar fyrir gört, því at …, but that is made up, because …: fyrir göra (q. v.), to forfeit.

C. METAPH. AND SPECIAL USAGES:

I. to do, help, avail; nú skulum vér ganga allir á vald jarlsins, því at oss gerir eigi annat, nothing else will do for us, Nj. 267; þat mun ekki gera, that wont do, 84; en ek kann ekki ráð til at leggja ef þetta gerir ekki, Fms. ii. 326; konungr vill þat eigi, þvi at mér gerir þat eigi ( it will not do for me) at þér gangit hér upp, x. 357; þat gerir mér ekki, at þér gangit á Orminn, … en hitt má vera at mér komi at gagni, ii. 227; þóttisk þá vita, at honum mundi ekki gera ( it would do nothing) at biðja fyrir honum, Fb. i. 565; engum gerði við hann at keppa, 571; ekki gerði þeim um at brjótask, Bárð. 10 new Ed.; sagða ek yðr eigi, at ekki mundi gera at leita hans, Sks. 625; hvat gerir mér nú at spyrja, Stj. 518; ekki gerir at dylja, no use hiding it, Fbr. 101 new Ed.; ætla þat at fáir þori, enda geri engum, Band. 7; bæði var leitað til annarra ok heima, ok gerði ekki, but did no good, 4; hét hann þeim afarkostum, ok gerði þat ekki, but it did no good, Fms. ii. 143.

II. to send, despatch, cp. the Engl. to ‘do’ a message; hann gerði þegar menn frá sér, Eg. 270; hann hafði gört menn sex á skóginn fyrir þá, 568; þá gerði Karl lið móti þeim, Fms. i. 108; jarl gerði Eirík at leita Ribbunga, ix. 314; hann gerði fram fyrir sik Álf á njósn, 488; hann gerði menn fyrir sér at segja konunginum kvámu sína, x. 10; hleypi-skúta var gör norðr til Þrándheims, vii. 206; jafnan gerði jarl til Ribbunga ok drap menn af þeim, ix. 312; vilja Ósvífrs-synir þegar gera til þeirra Kotkels, despatch them to slay K., Ld. 144; skulu vér nú göra í mót honum, ok láta hann engri njósn koma, 242:—göra eptir e-m, to send after one, Nero bað göra eptir postulunum ok leiða þangat, 656 C. 26; nú verðr eigi eptir gört at miðjum vetri, Grág. i. 421; frændr Bjarnar létu göra eptir (Germ. abholen) líki hans, Bjarn. 69; síðan gerðu þeir til klaustrs þess er jómfrúin var í, Fms. x. 102:—gera e-m orð, njósn, to do a message to one; hann gerði orð jörlum sínum, Eg. 270; ætluðu þeir at göra Önundi njósn um ferðir Egils, 386, 582; vóru þangat orð gör, word was sent thither, Hkr. ii. 228.

III. with infin. as an auxiliary verb, only in poetry and old prose (laws); ef hón gerði koma, if she did come, Völ. 5; gerðit vatn vægja, Am. 25; gramr gørr-at sér hlífa, he does not spare himself, Hkr. i. (in a verse); gerðut vægjask, id., Fs. (in a verse); hann gerðisk at höggva, Jb. 41; görðir at segja, Bkv. 15; görðisk at deyja, Gkv. 1. 1: in prose, eigi gerir hugr minn hlægja við honum, Fas. i. 122; góðir menn göra skýra sitt mál með sannsögli, 677. 12; Aristodemus görði eigi enn at trúa, Post.: esp. in the laws, ef þeir göra eigi ganga í rúm sín, Grág. i. 8; ef goðinn gerr eigi segja, 32; ef hann gerr eigi í ganga, 33; ef þeir göra eigi hluta meðr sér, 63; ef dómendr göra eigi dæma, 67; ef dómendr göra eigi við at taka, id.; ef goðinn gerr eigi ( does not) nefna féráns-dóm, 94; nú göra þeir menn eigi úmaga færa, 86; ef þeir göra eigi nefna kvöðina af búanum, Kb. ii. 163; ef þeir göra eigi segja, hvárt …, Sb. ii. 52; nú gerr sá eigi til fara, Kb. ii. 96; göra eigi koma, 150; ef hann gerr eigi kjósa, § 113.

IV. a law term, göra um, or gera only, to judge or arbitrate in a case; fékksk þat af, at tólf menn skyldu göra um málit, Nj. 111; villt þú göra um málit, 21; bjóða mun ek at göra um, ok lúka upp þegar görðinni, 77; mun sá mála-hluti várr beztr, at góðir menn geri um, 88; málin vóru lagið í gerð, skyldu gera um tólf menn, var þá gert um málin á þingi, var þat gert, at … (follows the verdict), 88; vil ek at þú sættisk skjótt ok látir góða menn gera um …, at hann geri um ok enir beztu menn af hvárra liði lögliga til nefndir, 188; Njáll kvaðsk eigi gera mundu nema á þingi, 105; þeir kváðusk þat halda mundu, er hann gerði, id.; skaltú gera sjálfr, 58; fyrr en gert var áðr um hitt málit, 120; ek vil bjóðask til at göra milli ykkar Þórðar um mál yðar, Bjarn. 55; Þorsteinn kvað þat þó mundi mál manna, at þeir hefði góða nefnd um sættir þótt hann görði, 56; nú er þegar slegit í sætt málinu með því móti, at Áskell skal göra um þeirra í milli, Rd. 248; er nú leitað um sættir milli þeirra, ok kom svá at þeir skulu göra um málin Þorgeirr goði frá Ljósa-vatni ok Arnórr ór Reykjahlíð, sú var görð þeirra at …, 288; svá kemr at Ljótr vill at Skapti görði af hans hendi, en Guðmundr vill sjálfr göra fyrir sína hönd, skyldi Skapti gerð upp segja, Valla L. 225; eigi hæfir þat, leitum heldr um sættir ok geri Þorgeirr um mál þessi, Lv. 12; var jafnt gört sár Þórðar ok sár Þórodds, Eb. 246; þær urðu mála-lyktir at Þórðr skyldi göra um …, 24; ok vóru þá görvar miklar fésektir, 128; var leitað um sættir, ok varð þat at sætt, at þeir Snorri ok Steindórr skyldi göra um, 212; þit erut gerfir héraðs-sekir sem íllræðis-menn, Fs. 58: göra görð, Sturl. i. 63, 105: adding the fine, to fix the amount, þat er gerð mín, at ek geri verð húss ok matar, I fix the amount of the value of the house and (stolen) stores, Nj. 80; gerði Njáll hundrað silfrs, N. put it at a hundred silver pieces, 58; margir mæltu, at mikit vaeri gert, that the amount was high, id.; slíkt fégjald sem gert var, 120; vilit ér nokkut héraðs-sektir göra eða utanferðir, 189; hann dæmdi þegar, ok görði hundrað silfrs, 6l; síðan bauð Bjarni Þorkatli sætt ok sjálfdæmi, görði Bjarni hundrað silfrs, Vápn. 31; ek göri á hönd Þóri hundrað silfrs, Lv. 55; ek göri á hönd þér hundrað silfrs, id.; vilit þér, at ek göra millum ykkar? síðan görði konungr konuna til handa Þórði ok öll fé hennar, Bjarn. 17; Rafn kvað hann mikit fé annat af sér hafa gört, at eigi þætti honum þat betra, Fs. 30; Gellir görði átta hundrað silfrs, Lv. 97; fyrir þat gerði Börkr hinn digri af honum eyjarnar, B. took the isles from him as a fine, Landn. 123: adding the case as object, Gunnarr gerði gerðina, G. gave judgment in the case, Nj. 80; fyrr en gert var áðr um hitt málit, till the other case was decided, 120; þá sætt er hann görði Haraldi jarli, that settlement which he made for earl Harold, Fms. viii. 300: Flosi var görr utan ok allir brennu-menn, F. was put out ( banished) and all the burners, Nj. 251: metaph., nema þau vili annat mál á gera, unless they choose to settle it otherwise, Grág. i. 336.

2. in the phrase, göra sekð, to make a case of outlawry, Grág. i. 118; eigi um görir sekð manns ella, else the outlawry takes no effect; en hann um görir eigi ella sekðina, else he cannot condemn him, 119.

3. to perform; eptir-gerðar þeirrar sem hverr nennti framast at gera eptir sinn náung, Fms. viii. 103; en þat grunaði konung, at hann mundi ætla at göra eptir sumar sættir, i. e. that he had some back door to escape by, Orkn. 58 (cp. Ó. H.); allt þat er þér gerit nú fyrir þeirra sálum, id.

V. special usages, to make allowance for; gera fóðr til fjár, to make an arbitrary allowance for, Ísl. ii. 138; hence, to suppose, en ef ek skal göra til fyrir fram ( suggest) hvat er hón (the code) segir mér, þá segi ek svá, at …, Fms. ix. 331; gera sér í hug, Fs. 112; göra sér í hugar-lund, to fancy; göra e-m getsakir, to impute to one; gera orð á e-u, to report a thing; þat er ekki orð á því geranda, ‘tis not worth talking about; eigi þarf orð at göra hjá því (‘tis not to be denied), sjálfan stólkonunginn blindaði hann, Mork. 14 (cp. Fms. vi. 168, l. c.); gera sér létt, to take a thing lightly, Am. 70; göra sér far um, to take pains; göra sér í hug, hugar-lund, to suppose.

D. IMPERS. it makes one so and so, one becomes; hann görði fölvan í andliti, he turned pale, Glúm. 342; leysti ísinn ok görði varmt vatnið, the water became warm, 623. 34; veðr görði hvast, a gale arose, Eg. 128; hríð mikla gerði at þeim, they were overtaken by a storm, 267; þá gerði ok á hríð (acc.) veðrs, 281; féll veðrit ok gerði logn (acc.), and became calm, 372; görði þá stórt á firðinum, the sea rose high, 600; til þess er veðr lægði ok ljóst gerði, and till it cleared up, 129; um nóttina gerði á æði-veðr ok útsynning, 195; görir á fyrir þeim hafvillur, they lost their course (of sailors), Finnb. 242; mér gerir svefnhöfugt, I grow sleepy, Nj. 264; þá görði vetr mikinn þar eptir hinn næsta, Rd. 248.

E. REFLEX, to become, grow, arise, and the like; þá görðisk hlátr, then arose laughter, Nj. 15; görðisk bardagi, it came to a fight, 62, 108; sá atburðr görðisk, it came to pass, Fms. x. 279; þau tíðendi er þar höfðu görzt, Ld. 152; gerðisk með þeim félagskapr, they entered into fellowship, Eg. 29; gerðisk svá fallit kaup, Dipl. ii. 10; Sigurðr konungr gerðisk ( grew up to be) ofstopa-maðr …, görðisk mikill maðr ok sterkr, Fms. vii. 238; hann görðisk brátt ríkr maðr ok stjórnsamr, xi. 223; Unnr görðisk þá mjök elli-móð, U. became worn with age, Ld. 12; sár þat er at ben görðisk, a law term, a wound which amounted to a bleeding wound, Nj. passim:—to be made, to become, görask konungr, to become king, Eg. 12; ok görðisk skáld hans, and became his skáld, 13; görðisk konungs hirðmaðr, 27; görask hans eigin-kona, to become his wedded wife, Fms. i. 3; at hann skyldi görask hálf-konungr yfir Dana-veldi, 83; vill Hrútr görask mágr þinn, Nj. 3; hann gerðisk síðan óvarari, he became less cautious, Fms. x. 414.

2. with the prep. svá, to happen, come to pass so and so; svá görðisk, at …, it so happened, that …, Nj. 167; görðisk svá til, at …, Fms. x. 391; þá görðisk svá til um síðir, at…, at last it came to pass. that …, 392; enda vissi hann eigi, at þingför mundi af görask, in case he knew not that it would entail a journey to parliament, Grág. i. 46: with at added, to increase, þá görðisk þat mjök at um jarl ( it grew even worse with the earl) at hann var úsiðugr um kvenna-far, görðisk þat svá mikit, at …, it grew to such a pitch, that …, Hkr. i. 245; hence the mod. phrase, e-ð á-görist, it increases, gains, advances, esp. of illness, bad habits, and the like, never in a good sense.

3. impers. with dat., honum gerðisk ekki mjök vært, he felt restless, Ld. 152; næsta gerisk mér kynlegt, I feel uneasy, Finnb. 236.

4. to behave, bear oneself; Páll görðisk hraustliga í nafni Jesu, Post. 656 C. 13.

5. to set about doing, be about; fám vetrum síðan görðisk hann vestr til Íslands, Fms. x. 415; maðr kom at honum ok spurði, hvat hann gerðisk, what he was about, Ó. H. 244; görðisk jarl til Ribbunga, Fms. ix. 312, v. l.; tveir menn görðusk ferðar sinnar, two men set out for a journey, x. 279; görðusk menn ok eigi til þess at sitja yfir hlut hans, Eg. 512; at þessir menn hafa görzk til svá mikils stórræðis, Fms. xi. 261; eigi treystusk menn at görask til við hann, Bárð. 160.

6. (mod.) to be; in such phrases as, eins og menn nú gerast, such as people now are; eins og flestir menn gerast.

F. PART. PASS. görr, geyrr (Fms. ix. 498, x. 75), gjörr, gerr, as adj., compar. görvari, superl. görvastr; [A. S. gearu; gare, Chaucer, Percy’s Ballads; O. H. G. garwe; Germ. gar]:—skilled, accomplished; vaskligr, at sér görr, Ld. 134; vel at sér görr, Ísl. ii. 326, Gísl. 14; gerr at sér um allt, Nj. 51; hraustir ok vel at sér görvir, Eg. 86; at engi maðr hafi gervari at sér verit en Sigurðr, Mork. 221; allra manna snjallastr í máli ok görvastr at sér, Hkr. iii. 360: the phrase, leggja görva hönd á e-t, to set a skilled hand to work, to be an adept, a master in a thing; svá hagr, at hann lagði allt á görva hönd, Fas. i. 391, (á allt görva hönd, iii. 195.)

2. ready made, at hand; in the saying, gott er til geyrs (i. e. görs, not geirs) at taka, ‘tis good to have a thing at hand, Hkm. 17; ganga til görs, to have it ready made for one, Ld. 96; gör gjöld, prompt punishment, Lex. Poët.:—with infin., gerr at bjóða, ready to offer, Gh. 17; gervir at eiskra, in wild spirits, Hom. 11; görvar at ríða, Vsp. 24: with gen. of the thing, gerr ílls hugar, prone to evil, Hým. 9; gerr galdrs, prone to sorcery, Þd. 3; skulut þess görvir, be ready for that! Am. 55.

II. [cp. görvi, Engl. gear], done, dressed; svá görvir, so ‘geared,’ so trussed, Am. 40.

III. adverb. phrases, so-gurt, at soguru, so done; verða menn þat þó so-gurt at hafa, i. e. there is no redress to be had, Hrafn. 9; hafi hann so-gurt, N. G. L. i. 35, Nj. 141; kvað eigi so-gort duga, 123, v. l.; at (með) so-guru, this done, quo facto, Skv. 1. 24, 40; freq. with a notion of being left undone, re infecta. Germ. unverrichteter sache, Eg. 155, Glúm. 332, Ó. H. 202; enda siti um so-gort, and now let it stand, Skálda 166; við so-gurt, id., 655 vii. 4; á so-gurt ofan, into the bargain, Bs. i. 178, Ölk. 36, Fas. i. 85.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > GÖRA

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

357 год — Эта статья о годе. См. также статью о числе 357. Годы 353 · 354 · 355 · 356 357 358 · 359 · 360 · 361 Десятилетия 330 е · 340 е 350 е … Википедия
357 год до н. э. — Годы 361 до н. э. · 360 до н. э. · 359 до н. э. · 358 до н. э. 357 до н. э. 356 до н. э. · 355 до н. э. · 354 до н. э. · 353 до н. э. Десятилетия 370 е… … Википедия
357 v. Chr. — Portal Geschichte | Portal Biografien | Aktuelle Ereignisse | Jahreskalender ◄ | 5. Jahrhundert v. Chr. | 4. Jahrhundert v. Chr. | 3. Jahrhundert v. Chr. | ► ◄ | 370er v. Chr. | 360er v. Chr. | 350er v. Chr. | 340er v. Chr. |… … Deutsch Wikipedia
357 a. C. — Años: 360 a. C. 359 a. C. 358 a. C. – 357 a. C. – 356 a. C. 355 a. C. 354 a. C. Décadas: Años 380 a. C. Años 370 a. C. Años 360 a. C. – Años 350 a. C. – Años 340 a. C. Años 330 a. C. Años 320 a. C. Siglos … Wikipedia Español
357 — Años: 354 355 356 – 357 – 358 359 360 Décadas: Años 320 Años 330 Años 340 – Años 350 – Años 360 Años 370 Años 380 Siglos: Siglo III – … Wikipedia Español
III Distrito Electoral Federal de Quintana Roo — El III Distrito Electoral Federal de Quintana Roo es uno de los 300 distritos electorales federales en que se divide México y uno de los 3 que constituyen el estado de Quintana Roo, es un distrito de reciente creación, constituido por el proceso… … Wikipedia Español
Conspiration du harem de Ramsès III — La conspiration du harem de Ramsès III associe dans une tentative de coup d État, à l extrême fin du règne du pharaon Ramsès III, un nombre important de membres de la famille royale et de hauts dignitaires de la cour, de l armée, du clergé et de… … Wikipédia en Français
Colt Mk. III Trooper Lawman — Colt Trooper mk. III, Lawman mk. III, Official Police mk. III (США) Colt Official Police mk. III Colt Lawman mk. III Colt Trooper mk. III Схема револьверов серии Colt mk. III УСМ: двойного действия Калибр: .38 Special и .357 Magnum Вес… … Энциклопедия стрелкового оружия
USA PATRIOT Act, Title III — The USA PATRIOT Act was passed by the United States Congress in 2001 as a response to the September 11, 2001 attacks. It has ten titles, each containing numerous sections. Title III: International Money Laundering Abatement and Financial Anti… … Wikipedia
No. 357 Squadron RAF — Active 1 February 1944 15 November 1945 Country United Kingdom … Wikipedia
USA PATRIOT Act, Title III, Subtitle B — The USA PATRIOT Act was passed by the United States Congress in 2001 as a response to the September 11, 2001 attacks. It has ten titles, with the third title ( Title III: International Money Laundering Abatement and Financial Anti Terrorism Act… … Wikipedia

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: со всех языков на английский

iii 357

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: со всех языков на английский

iii 357

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка: